Loading...
20140164 Project Manual 07092014Project Manual for MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS NEW YELM BRANCH 907 Yelm Avenue, Yelm, WA Issue: Permit / Bid Set Issue Date: 9 July 2014 Architect: MSGS Architects 510 Capitol Way S, Olympia, WA 98501 Contact: Tom Sanford AIA I LEED -ap Ph: 360-943-6774x-102 I Fax: 360- 352 -7005 Email: toms @msgsarch.com Structural: PCS Structural Solutions 1250 Pacific Ave, Suite 701, Tacoma, WA 98402 Contact: Jeff Klein, SE Ph. 253 - 383 -2797 1 Fax: 253 - 383 -1557 Email: jklein @pcs- structural.com Mechanical /Plumbing: Sunset Air 5210 Lacey Blvd SE, Lacey, WA 98503 Contact: Joe Bettridge, PE I LEEDap Ph: 360- 456 -4956 1 Fax: 360- 456 -4990 Email: jab @sunsetair.com Electrical: BCE Engineers 3601-2 01h Street East, Tacoma, WA 98424 Contact: Ben Hedin, PE Ph: 253 - 922 -0446 1 Fax: 253 - 922 -0896 Email: ben.hedin @bceengineers.com Prepared By: o 360 943 6774 f 360 352 7005 www.msgsarch.com architects 510 capitol way south olympia, washington 98501 Civil: SO Alliance 8730 Tallon Lane NE, Ste 200, Lacey, WA 98516 Contact: Jim Gibson, PE Ph: 360- 352 -1465 Email: jim @scjalliance.com Landscape: Glander & Associates 1821 - 4th Avenue E, Olympia, WA 98506 Contact: Jeff Glander, ASLA I LEEDap Ph: 360- 357 -6972 1 Fax: 360- 786 -8073 Email: jeff @glanderassociates.com Interiors: Gretchen Sturtevant Ph: 360- 791 -5140 Email: gsinteriordesign @comcast.net General Contractor: Andy Johnson & Company 2450 Mottman Road SW, Olympia, WA 98512 Contact: Don Johnson, President Ph: 360- 352 -3110 1 Fx: 360- 357 -5198 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTION REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION No. of Pages 00 01 10 Table of Contents ................................................................................. ............................... 4 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets ........ ............................... ............................See Drawing Cover Sheet PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid ............................................ ............................... Not included in Submittal General Contractor: Andy Johnson & Company Contact — Don Johnson /Dave Inglin, 360- 352 -3110 00 31 00 Available Project Information Stormwater Drainage Report ............................ ............................... Under Separate Cover Construction Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan ....................... Under Separate Cover 00 41 13 Bid Form - Stipulated Sum (Single -Prime Contract) ........... Provided by General Contractor CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 52 14 Agreement Form - AIA Stipulated Sum (Single -Prime Contract) AIA Document A101 -2007 ........................... ............................... Not Included in Submittal Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner & Contractor 00 72 14 General Conditions - AIA Stipulated Sum (Single -Prime Contract) AIA Document A201 -2007 ............................ ............................... Not Included in Submittal General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 00 73 13 Supplementary Conditions — AIA .................. ............................... Not Included in Submittal 00 91 13 Addenda and Modifications (insert here) ..... ............................... Not Included in Submittal SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary .............................................................................................. ............................... 2 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures ............................................................ ............................... 2 013000 Administrative Requirements ............................................................... ..............................4 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures .......................................................................... ............................... 4 01 40 00 Quality Requirements .......................................................................... ............................... 7 01 45 23 Special Inspection and Testing .. ..........................Refer to Schedule on Structural Drawings 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ....................................................... ............................... 8 01 60 00 Product Requirements ......................................................................... ............................... 4 01 60 13 Substitution Request Form .................................................................. ............................... 2 Issued for Permit, 7/3/2014 Table of Contents Page 1 of 4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Section Title No. of Pages 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements ................................................ ............................... 6 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal ................................. ............................... 4 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements ..................................................... ............................... 12 LEEDChecklist ...................................................................................... ............................... 1 LEED Submittal Forms ................................... ............................... Not Included in Submittal FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Specifications for concrete are on the Structural Drawings. 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing ............................................................................... ............................... 2 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry ....................................................................................... ............................... 5 04 20 19 Veneer Masonry .................................................................................. ............................... 6 DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications ............................................................................... ............................... 5 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Specifications for rough carpentry and wood structural components including sheathing are on the Structural Drawings. 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry .......................................................... ............................... 3 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry ................................................................................... ............................... 4 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework ........................................................... ............................... 10 06 61 16 Solid Surfacing ...................................................................................... ............................... 3 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071100 Dampproofing ....................................................................................... ..............................2 07 17 00 Bentonite Waterproofing .................................................................... ............................... 8 07 19 00 Water Repellents ................................................................................. ............................... 2 072113 Board Insulation ................................................................................... ............................... 4 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation ................................................................................ ............................... 2 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders ................................................................................... ............................... 2 07 27 00 Weather and Air Barriers ..................................................................... ............................... 4 07 42 00 Preformed Metal Roofing .................................................................... ............................... 6 074213 Metal Soffit Panels ............................................................................... ............................... 3 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding ( HardiPanel) ........................................................ ............................... 3 07 53 05 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing System - Mechanically Attached ...... ............................... 8 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ............................................................ ............................... 6 07 84 00 Firestopping ......................................................................................... ............................... 5 07 90 00 Joint Protection .................................................................................... ............................... 4 Issued for Permit, 7/3/2014 Table of Contents Page 2 of 4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Section Title DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS No. of Pages 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ................................................................................ ............................... 5 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames .................................................................... ............................... 2 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ................................................. ............................... 6 08 53 13 Fiberglass Windows (Pella Imprevia) ................................................... ............................... 3 08 62 00 Unit Skylights ....................................................................................... ............................... 3 08 63 00 Metal- Framed Skylights ....................................................................... ............................... 6 08 71 00 Door Hardware and Groups ................................................................. ............................... 8 08 80 00 Glazing .................................................................................................. ............................... 3 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies ................................................................... ............................... 4 09 30 00 Tiling ............................ ............................... .........................verify with Interior Designer - 3 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ...................................................................... ............................... 5 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring ........ ............................... .........................verify with Interior Designer - 4 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting ................... ............................... .........................verify with Interior Designer Walk -Off Carpeting .......... ............................... .........................verify with Interior Designer 09 90 00 Painting and Coating ............................................................................ ............................... 7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces ......................................................................... ............................... 3 10 14 00 Signage ................................................................................................. ............................... 3 10 21 16 Pre - Fabricated Shower Stall ................................................................. ............................... 2 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories ................................................................................. ............................... 4 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties ................................................................... ............................... 3 10 56 13 Metal Shelving ..................................................................................... ............................... 2 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 17 00 Teller and Service Equipment ..................... .............................by Bank Equipment Supplier 11 18 00 Security Equipment ..................................... .............................by Bank Equipment Supplier 11 40 00 Kitchen Equipment (See Section 0120 00 - Allowances) .................... ............................... 4 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 00 Window Shades ................................................................................... ............................... 8 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats ............................................................................. ............................... 2 FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 20 TO 21 - NOT USED DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING .................................................................... ............................... Refer to Drawings Issued for Permit, 7/3/2014 Table of Contents Page 3 of 4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Section Title No. of Pages DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) ........................ Refer to Drawings DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL .................................................................. ............................... Refer to Drawings SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31— EARTHWORK ................................................................ ............................... Refer to Drawings DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS .......................................... ............................... Refer to Drawings 32 1913 Site Furnishings (Bike Rack) ................................................................. ............................... 2 DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES ...................................................................... ............................... Refer to Drawings END OF SECTION Issued for Permit, 7/3/2014 Table of Contents Page 4 of 4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0110 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract description. B. Work by Owner. C. Owner supplied products. D. Contractor's use of site and premises. E. Future work. F. Work sequence. G. Owner occupancy. H. Specification Conventions. 1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Work of the Project includes construction of bank building, and related parking and site improvements. 1. Permit documents for the Work of this Project will be submitted to jurisdiction prior to issuance of bid documents. 2. Future Work is not planned for this site, other than potential tenant improvements of leased space. B. Perform Work of Contract under stipulated sum contract with Owner in accordance with Conditions of Contract. C. Work of this Contract is identified in the following and on Drawings: 1. Construction of one -story branch bank building, with vehicle drive - through teller lanes and ATM banking; concrete slab -on- grade, wood stud and wood structure, metal panel roofing and single -ply roofing systems, finishes, and all related utility, mechanical, and electrical Work indicated. 2. Construction of on site parking, paving, landscaping, and irrigation. 3. Design and construction incorporates Work and procedures to obtain USGBC LEED certification. The LEED goal is GOLD certified. 1.3 WORK BY OWNER OR BY OTHERS A. Banking equipment provided by DIEBOLD, including the following: 1. Existing drive up drawer, window, and equipment is to remain. Modifications may be required, and coordination with new work. 2. Existing drive up pneumatics to remain. 3. Teller cash pedestals. 4. Cash safe and night depository. 5. ATM and surround. B. Security equipment provided by DIEBOLD, including the following: 1. Alarm system. 2. Remote access control system. 3. Video surveillance system. C. Furniture indicated as NIC, includes the following: Summary 011000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Workstation chairs. 2. Conference table and chairs. 3. Lobby seating and side table(s). 1.4 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. Not applicable. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow: All necessary construction activities. B. Access to Site: Main access from Yelm Avenue C. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings D. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: Per City ordinances. E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Coordinate with Owner's Operations and Utility Companies. 1.6 FUTURE WORK A. Sanitary sewers are planned for the future. Owner has agreement with proposed public utility to connect at time service becomes available. At that time, the existing sanitary septic system will be disconnected and abandoned. A future point of connection will be established near output from building per the Civil Drawings. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. Contractor shall propose work sequence to complete within Contract time. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner will occupy the site and will operate normal business throughout construction. B. Minimize conflicts with Owner operations. C. Coordinate facilities to allow Owner operations on site, based in a temporary structure, and without impact on utility needs. D. Phased occupancy may be accommodated. E. The Owner will occupy the new building upon issuance of certificate for occupancy by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.9 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS A. These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words "shall be" are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION Summary 011000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0120 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Schedule of values. C. Applications for payment. D. Change procedures. E. Defect assessment. F. Unit prices. G. Alternates. 1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; delivery to site; and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances but Included in Contract Sum /Price: Product handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and final connection. C. Architect /Engineer Responsibilities: 1. Consultation with Owner for product selection and transmit decision to Contractor. 2. Prepare Change Order according to General Conditions of the Contract. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. On notification of selection by Architect /Engineer, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, and product data. Arrange for delivery. 3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. F. Allowances Schedule: 1. Refer to Section 11 31 00 — Residential Appliances 2. The following items included in Allowance: a. Refrigerator /freezer unit with ice maker. b. Cooktop unit, two - burner, electric. C. Microwave oven for overhead installation, with exhaust fan and light. d. Dishwasher, built -in. 3. Total Allowance for all items: $3,000.00 1.4 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Not applicable. Price and Payment Procedures 012000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit printed schedule. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed for Construction. C. Format: Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. D. Include in each line item, amount of Allowances specified in this section. E. Include amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.6 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit copies of each application on Contractor's electronic media driven form. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. D. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. E. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures. F. Submit waivers. G. Substantiating Data: When Architect /Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment: 1. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 2. Affidavits attesting to off -site stored products. 3. Construction progress schedules, revised and current. 1.7 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. As indicated in Owner - Contractor Agreement and General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 -2007. B. Change Order Forms: Form acceptable by Owner, Architect /Engineer and Contractor 1.8 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect /Engineer or Owner's Construction Administrator, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Contractor will negotiate appropriate remedy or adjustment in payment. C. The defective Work may remain, but unit sum /price will be adjusted to new sum /price upon consensus of Architect /Engineer, Owner, and Contractor. D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect /Engineer and approval by Owner, and unit sum /price will be adjusted to new sum /price. E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum /price reduction. F. Authority of Architect /Engineer to assess defects and identify payment adjustments is final. Price and Payment Procedures 012000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 G. Non- Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 1.9 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner - Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work. C. Schedule of Alternates: NONE PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION Price and Payment Procedures 012000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0130 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination and project conditions. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Site mobilization meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Pre - installation meetings. G. Cutting and patching. H. Special procedures. 1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean -up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Employ Land Surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Architect /Engineer. B. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify Architect /Engineer of discrepancies discovered. C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. D. Verify set -backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. F. Submit copy of site drawing and certificate signed by Land Surveyor certifying elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents. G. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses. Administrative Requirements 013000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 H. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. I. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. J. Promptly report to Architect /Engineer loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. K. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect /Engineer. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect /Engineer, and Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner - Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates, where applicable. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect /Engineer. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copy each to Architect /Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Architect /Engineer will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect /Engineer, Civil Engineer, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Construction facilities and controls. 3. Temporary utilities. 4. Survey and site layout. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures, including waste and recycling collection. 6. Schedules. 7. Application for payment procedures. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Requirements for start -up of equipment. 11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. Administrative Requirements 013000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copy each to Architect /Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Refer to 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements for meetings pertaining to LEED certification. B. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at bi- monthly i me rva Is. C. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. D. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect /Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. E. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. F. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copy each to Architect /Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.7 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre - installation meetings at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section. C. Notify Architect /Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copy each to Architect /Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. Administrative Requirements 013000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill -timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non - conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Architect /Engineer for decision or remedy. 3.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product sections, or as approved by the Architect /Engineer; match existing with new products for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. D. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. F. Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize damage and to permit restoring products and finishes to original or specified condition. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect /Engineer for review. H. Where change of plane of Y inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing smooth transition; to Architect /Engineer for review. I. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. END OF SECTION Administrative Requirements 013000-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Product data. E. Shop drawings. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturer's instructions. K. Manufacturer's field reports. L. Refer to Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements for LEED certification submittals and documentation. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Architect /Engineer- accepted form. B. Submittals may be transmitted via email in PDF- format, including transmittal form. C. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal. E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and email in PDF format to Architect /Engineer at email address identified in preconstruction conference. Submittals sent by mail or hand - delivered shall be addressed to the A/E at MSGS Architects, 510 Capitol Way South, Olympia. Coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. I. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect /Engineer review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. Submittal Procedures 013300-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within ten days. B. Submit preliminary outline Schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed for coordination with Owner's requirements. After review, submit detailed schedules within 15 days modified to accommodate revisions recommended by Architect /Engineer. C. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. D. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. E. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. F. Submit computer generated chart with separate line for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. G. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. H. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. I. Include schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and critical dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect /Engineer. J. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule will be item of discussion at each construction meeting. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data: Submit to Architect /Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus two copies Architect /Engineer will retain. C. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. Submittal Procedures 013300-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect /Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. When required by individual specification sections, provide shop drawings signed and sealed by professional engineer responsible for designing components shown on shop drawings. 1. Include signed and sealed calculations to support design. 2. Submit drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and approval by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Submit number of opaque reproductions Contractor requires, plus two copies Architect /Engineer will retain. E. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.7 SAMPLES A. Samples: Submit to Architect /Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. B. Samples For Selection as Specified in Product Sections: 1. Submit to Architect /Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for Architect /Engineer selection, as indicated. C. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. D. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. E. Submit number of samples specified in individual specification sections; Architect /Engineer will retain one sample. F. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections. G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification section. Submittal Procedures 013300-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 H. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.8 DESIGN DATA A. Submit for Architect /Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.9 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect /Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.10 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation /application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect /Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect /Engineer. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect /Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect /Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report within 5 days of observation to Architect /Engineer for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION Submittal Procedures 013300-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality control and control of installation. B. Tolerances. C. References. D. Labeling. E. Testing and inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Examination. H. Preparation. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.3 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.4 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. Quality Requirements 014000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect /Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents. 1.5 LABELING A. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, and systems required to be labeled by applicable code. B. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification, approved agency identification, and the following information, as applicable, on each label. 1. Model number. 2. Serial number. 3. Performance characteristics. 1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection. B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Authority having jurisdiction. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Washington 2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off -site testing as required by Architect /Engineer or Owner. D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect /Engineer, Contractor, and authority having jurisdiction, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non - compliance with Contract Documents. 1. Submit final report indicating correction of Work previously reported as non- compliant. E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect /Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Re- testing or re- inspection required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect /Engineer. Payment for re- testing or re- inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum /Price. H. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. Quality Requirements 014000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect /Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect /Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect /Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit copies of report to Architect /Engineer, Contractor, and authority having jurisdiction. When requested by Architect /Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. J. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start -up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect /Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article. Quality Requirements 014000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. END OF SECTION Quality Requirements 014000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes. 3. Temporary heating. 4. Temporary cooling. 5. Temporary ventilation. 6. Telephone service. 7. Facsimile service. 8. Temporary water service. 9. Temporary sanitary facilities. B. Construction Facilities: 1. Field offices and sheds. 2. Vehicular access. 3. Parking. 4. Progress cleaning and waste removal. 5. Project identification. 6. Traffic regulation. 7. Fire prevention facilities. C. Temporary Controls: 1. Barriers. 2. Enclosures and fencing. 3. Security. 4. Water control. 5. Dust control. 6. Erosion and sediment control. 7. Noise control. 8. Pest control. 9. Pollution control. 10. Rodent control. D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls. E. Refer to Section 01 81 16 Sustainable Project Requirements for LEED certification. 1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source as needed for construction operation. B. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 2 watt /sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt /sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt /sq ft HID lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.4 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used. B. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Enclosures article in this section. C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in product sections. 1.5 TEMPORARY COOLING A. Not Applicable. 1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.7 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.8 FACSIMILE OR INTERNET SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile or internet service and dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Existing water may be used for construction. Exercise conservation practices to minimize water use. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of project mobilization. B. At end of construction, return existing facilities used for construction operations to same or better condition as original condition. 1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings. C. Locate offices and sheds as indicated in contractor - proposed staging plan. D. Construction: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations with steps and landings at entrance doors. E. Environmental Control: 1. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions. 2. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents; lighting for maintenance and inspection of products. F. Storage Areas And Sheds: Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. G. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away from buildings. H. Maintenance and Cleaning: 1. Perform periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. I. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. 1.12 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. Access drives from Harrison Avenue shall be used to serve site. Allow customer parking in areas designated and coordinated with the Owner. B. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 feet wide driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets, where applicable. 1.13 PARKING A. Arrange for off -site parking with adjacent property management. B. When site space is not adequate, make arrangements for additional off -site parking for construction personnel. Comply with requirements of City of Yelm, and where applicable, parking area property owner(s). C. Tracked vehicles are not allowed on paved areas. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. E. Permanent Pavements And Parking Facilities: 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, use of bases for permanent roads and parking areas as indicated on Civil Drawings. 2. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. F. Maintenance: 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition. 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Refer to Section 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal. B. Refer to Section 01 81 16 Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site. 1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Identification Sign: 1. One painted sign of construction, design, content, and location as approved by Owner and Architect. 2. Content: a. Project title, logo and name of Owner. b. Names and titles of authorities. C. Names and titles of Architect /Engineer and Consultants. d. Name of Prime Contractor and major Subcontractors. B. Project Informational Signs: 1. Painted informational signs; size lettering for legibility at 100 feet distance. 2. Provide directional signs to direct traffic into site. Relocate as Work progress requires. 3. Provide municipal traffic agency directional traffic signs to and within site. 4. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law, unless approved by Owner. C. Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage. D. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore area. 1.16 TRAFFIC REGULATION A. Signs, Signals, And Devices: 1. Post Mounted and Wall Mounted Traffic Control and Informational Signs: As approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Traffic Control Signals: As approved by local jurisdictions. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3. Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by authority having jurisdiction. 4. Flagperson Equipment: As required by authority having jurisdiction. B. Flag Persons: Provide trained and equipped flag persons to regulate traffic when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes. C. Flares And Lights: Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. D. Haul Routes: 1. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and site access. 2. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 3. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with public traffic. E. Traffic Signs And Signals: 1. Provide signs at approaches to site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. 2. Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control, and areas affected by Contractor's operations. 3. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control. F. Removal: 1. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. 2. Repair damage caused by installation. 3. Remove post settings. 1.17 FIRE PREVENTION FACILITIES A. Establish fire watch for cutting and welding and other hazardous operations capable of starting fires. Maintain fire watch before, during, and after hazardous operations until threat of fire does not exist. B. Portable Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10; 10 pound capacity, 4A -60B: C UL rating. 1. Provide minimum one fire extinguisher in every construction trailer and storage shed. 1.18 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades required by authorities having jurisdiction for public rights -of -way. C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.19 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A. Construction: Contractor's option for storage and protection of materials and Work. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Fencing at construction site for access control, storage, and /or security shall be submitted by Contractor. Equip fencing with vehicular gate(s) and locks. 1.20 SECURITY A. Protect Work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. B. Initiate program at project mobilization. C. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance and occupancy precludes need for Contractor security. 1.21 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.22 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.23 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion control as indicated by the Civil Documents. B. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. C. Minimize surface area of bare soil exposed at one time. D. Provide temporary measures including berms, dikes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water flow. E. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. F. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. 1.24 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise from and noise produced by construction operations. 1.25 RODENT AND PEST CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work, and rodents from accessing or invading premises. B. Pay particular attention to prevention of rodent and pest entry into empty conduit prior to pulling cables and wire. 1.26 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.27 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated on Drawings. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000 -7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Refer to Section 01 81 16 — Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Re -use of existing products. D. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. E. Product option requirements. F. Substitution limitations and procedures. G. Procedures for Owner - supplied products. H. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. Product Requirements 016000 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico. 2. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 3. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and /or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. D. Refer to Section 01 81 16 — Sustainable Project Requirements for the following: 1. Regionally- Sourced Products 2. Products with Recycled Content 3. Sustainably Harvested Wood 4. Urea - Formaldehyde Prohibition 5. Flooring Systems 6. Adhesives and Joint Sealants 7. Aerosol Adhesives 8. Paints and Coatings 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. D. Products Specified by Naming a System Standard Manufacturer with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any other manufacturer listed under Other Acceptable Manufacturers, or for a manufacturer not named. 1. Refer to Section 014000 for system standard specifications requirements. 2.04 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this Section. Product Requirements 016000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 1. Request for Substitution Form: Specified in Section 0160 13. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 OWNER- SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. See Section 011000 - Summary for identification of Owner - supplied products. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in progress schedule. 2. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. a. After review, submit to Architect with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non - conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 4. Handle, store, install and finish products. Product Requirements 016000 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 5. Provide installation inspections required by jurisdictional authorities. 6. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving /storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Product Requirements 016000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM New Yelm Branch Olympia Federal Savings MSGS Project No. 13 -133 To: MSGS ARCHITECTS, 510 Capitol Way South, Olympia, WA 98501 Project: We hereby submit for consideration, the following product in lieu of the specified item for the above project: Section: Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: Attach complete dimensional information and technical data, including laboratory tests and samples, if applicable. Detailed comparison of the significant qualities (size, weight, durability, performance and similar characteristics, and including visual effect where applicable) for the proposed substitution in comparison with the original requirements. List completely installation changes and changes to Drawings and Specifications required by proposal. Fill in blanks below: A. Does substitution require change in Drawing dimensions? If yes, clearly indicate changes: B. Will Undersigned pay for resulting building design changes including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? C. What effect does substitution have on other trades and other contracts? D. What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements? E. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item: Substitution Request Form 016013-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 F. Manufacturer's guarantees of proposed and specified items are: Same Different (Explain on attachment) G. Name and address of 3 similar projects on which product was used, date of installation, and Architect's name and phone number: J K Contract completion date is: Same Different (Explain on attachment) What are the differences in maintenance procedures? PROVIDE COLOR SAMPLES OF FINISH PRODUCT. Approval will be by Addendum to the contract ONLY. Undersigned attests function and quality are equivalent orsuperiorto specified item and waives his rights to additional payment and time which may subsequently be necessitated by failure of the substitution to perform adequately, and for the required work to make corrections thereof. Certification of Equal Performance and Assumption of Liability for Equal Performance. Submitted by: Signature: Firm: Address: Phone: Date: FOR USE BY ARCHITECT: Accepted Not accepted Accepted as noted Received too late END, SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Substitution Request Form 016013-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Starting of systems. D. Demonstration and instructions. E. Protecting installed construction. F. Project record documents. G. Operation and maintenance data. H. Manual for materials and finishes. I. Manual for equipment and systems. J. Spare parts and maintenance products. K. Product warranties and product bonds. L. Maintenance service. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect /Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Architect /Engineer required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. D. Refer to 018116 —Sustainable Design Requirements. 1.3 FINALCLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean debris from drainage systems. C. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. D. Clean pervious paved areas appropriate to surface type and requirements. E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site. 1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start -up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect /Engineer seven days prior to start -up of each item. C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 F. Execute start -up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start -up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate Project equipment by qualified manufacturer's representative or Contractor's personnel who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start -up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble- shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at designated location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. F. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections. 1.6 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Contractor and A/E will perform testing for adjustment and balancing of installed systems prior to punch list. 1.7 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Submit documents to Architect /Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data bound in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect /Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. C. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: Shop drawings and product data. Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 b. Air and water balance reports. C. Certificates. d. Originals of warranties and bonds. In addition to project requirements, provide all data required by City of Olympia for street frontage improvements in format as required by City of Olympia. Provide Architect /Engineer and Owner with copy of transmittal(s) and letters of acceptance. 1.10 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit two sets of final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. B. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for re- ordering custom manufactured products. C. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. D. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. E. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. F. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.11 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Submit two sets of final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. D. Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. E. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. F. Operating Procedures: Include start -up, break -in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. G. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. I. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Include Contractor's coordination drawings as installed. K. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. L. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 M. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. 1.12 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.13 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. D. Co- execute submittals when required. E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. G. Time Of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 1.14 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components during one -year project warranty period. B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and /or lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component. D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION Execution and Closeout Requirements 017000 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 0174 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. 2. Refer to Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements. 3. Section Includes: a. Construction waste management plan. b. Construction waste recycling. C. Construction waste adaptive reuse. 1.02 REFERENCES 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM E1609 - Standard Guide for Development and Implementation of a Pollution Prevention Program. 2. US Green Building Council: a. USGBC LEED NC - Green Building Rating System for New Construction & Major Renovations, LEED 2009. b. USGBC LEED NC Letter Template - MR Credit 2: Construction Waste Management. 1.03 PLAN REQUIREMENTS 1. Develop and implement construction waste management plan in accordance with ASTM E1609 or and as approved by Architect /Engineer for compliance with the following: a. USGBC LEED Retail NC Credit MR 2; Divert 75 percent from landfill. 2. Intent: a. Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from landfill disposal. b. Redirect recyclable material back to manufacturing process. C. Generate cost savings or increase minimal additional cost to Project for waste disposal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 2. Construction Plan: Submit construction waste management plan describing methods and procedures for implementation and monitoring compliance including the following: a. Transportation company hauling construction waste to waste processing facilities. b. Recycling and adaptive reuse processing facilities and waste type each facility will accept. C. Construction waste materials anticipated for recycling and adaptive reuse. d. On site sorting and site storage methods. 3. Submit documentation with each application for payment substantiating construction waste management plan was maintained and goals are being achieved. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017419-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 a. Trash: Quantity by weight deposited in landfills. Include associated fees, transportation costs, container rentals, and taxes for total cost of disposal. b. Salvaged Material: Quantity by weight with destination for each type of material salvaged for resale, recycling, or adaptive reuse. Include associated fees, transportation costs, container rentals, and taxes for total cost of disposal. Also include reimbursements due to salvage resale. C. Total Cost: Indicate total cost or savings for implementation of construction waste management plan. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. 2. Project Record Documents: Submit completed USGBC LEED NC Letter Template indicating diverted waste quantity, total waste quantity and percentage of waste diverted from landfills. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 1. Construction Waste Landfill Diversion: Minimum 75 percent by weight of construction waste materials for duration of Project through resale, recycling, or adaptive reuse. 2. Implement construction waste management plan at start of construction. 3. Review construction waste management plan at pre- construction meeting and progress meetings specified in Section 0130 00. 4. Distribute approved construction waste management plan to subcontractors and others affected by Plan Requirements. 5. Oversee plan implementation, instruct construction personnel for plan compliance, and document plan results. 6. Purchase Products to prevent waste by: a. Ensuring correct quantity of each material is delivered to site. b. Choosing products with minimal or no packaging. C. Requiring suppliers to use returnable pallets or containers. d. Requiring suppliers to take or buy -back rejected or unused items. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING 1. Use source separation method or co- mingling method suitable to sorting and processing method of selected recycling center. Dispose non - recyclable trash separately into landfill. 2. Source Separation Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and sorted into separate bins or containers, identified by waste type, prior to transportation to recycling center. 3. Co- Mingling Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and placed in unsorted bins or container for sorting at recycling center. 4. Materials suggested for recycling include: a. Packing materials including paper, cardboard, foam plastic, and sheeting. b. Recyclable plastics. C. Organic plant debris. d. Earth materials. e. Native stone and granular fill. f. Asphalt and concrete paving. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017419 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 g. Wood with and without embedded nails and staples. h. Glass, clear and colored types. i. Metals. j. Gypsum products. k. Acoustical ceiling tile. I. Carpet. M. Equipment oil. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION WASTE ADAPTIVE RE -USE 1. Arrange with processing facility for salvage of construction material and processing for reuse. Do not reuse construction materials on site except as accepted by Architect /Engineer. 2. Materials suggested for adaptive reuse include: a. Concrete and crushed concrete. b. Lumber suitable for re- sawing or refinishing. C. Casework and millwork. d. Doors and door frames. e. Windows. f. Window glass and insulating glass units. g. Hardware. h. Acoustical ceiling tile. i. Equipment and appliances. j. Fluorescent light fixtures and lamps. 3. List of recycling centers and waste recyclers: a. Washington State Department of Ecology, Recycling, (360) 397 -6118 ext. 4352. b. City of Lakewood, Washington, recycling: C. City of Olympia, Washington, recycling: 360- 753 -8368 d. Industrial Materials Exchange (IMEX), Hazardous Waste Management Program, King County, Washington. e. Habitat for Humanity, (360) 956 -3456. f. Olympia Salvage. g. Pierce County Solid Waste h. The "Recycling Plus Program Manual" published by the Washington State Clean Washington Center can be used to develop a job site reduction program. The manual includes a job -site recycling worksheet and form, tips on waste reduction, and other technical assistance. The manual also includes sample language for waste reduction requirements for subcontractors' agreements, as well as sample provisions for a full - service recycling agreement. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE COLLECTION 1. Collect construction waste materials in marked bins or containers and arrange for transportation to recycling centers or adaptive salvage and reuse processing facilities. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017419 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Maintain recycling and adaptive reuse storage and collection area in orderly arrangement with materials separated to eliminate co- mingling of materials required to be delivered separately to waste processing facility. 3. Store construction waste materials to prevent environmental pollution, fire hazards, hazards to persons and property, and contamination of stored materials. 4. Cover construction waste materials subject to disintegration, evaporation, settling, or runoff to prevent polluting air, water, and soil. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL 1. Deliver construction waste to waste processing facilities. Obtain receipt for deliveries. 2. Dispose construction waste not capable of being recycled or adaptively reused by delivery to landfill, incinerator, or other legal disposal facility. Obtain receipt for deliveries. END OF SECTION Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017419 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 018113 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sustainable design Project goals. 2. Sustainable design product requirements. B. Related Work or Sections: 1. Temporary Indoor Air Quality Controls: Construction indoor air quality management plan and HVAC air filters, building flush -out, and indoor air quality testing. 2. Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Recycling and adaptively reusing construction waste. 3. Commissioning: General commissioning requirements. 4. Commissioning of HVAC: Mechanical systems commissioning requirements. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers ( ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air - Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 2. ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers. 2. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 3. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection -Meter Techniques. 4. ASTM E903 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres. 5. ASTM E1918 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low - Sloped Surfaces in the Field. 6. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low - Sloped Opaque Surfaces. C. California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1. CCR Title 24 - California Building Code. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. California Department of Health Services (CA /DHS): 1. CA /DHS /EHLB /R -174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. E. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI): 1. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program. 2. CRI Green Label Testing Program. F. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): 1. FSC Guidelines. G. Green Seal (GS): 1. GC -03 - Anti - Corrosive Paints. 2. GS -11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements. 3. GS -36 - Aerosol Adhesives. H. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute: 1. GREENGUARD Children and Schools Certification Program. International Standards Organization (ISO): 1. ISO 14021 - Environmental Labels and Declarations - Self- Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling). Scientific Certification Systems (SCS): 1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality Performance. K. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors ( SMACNA): 1. SMACNA IAQ - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction. L. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD): 1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings. 2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. M. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1. ENERGY STAR Voluntary Labeling Program. 2. EPA IAQ Testing - Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air. 3. EPA Construction General Permit. N. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC): 1. LEED 2009 for Retail - New Construction and Major Renovations Rating System. 2. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction. 1.3 PROJECT GOALS A. Comply with the following general sustainable Project goals. Refer to specific Specification Sections for more detailed requirements. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Notify Owner and Architect /Engineer when conflicts arise between Work performance and sustainable Project goals. B. Sustainable Project Goals: Refer to LEED Rating System checklist attached to this Section. C. In general, the project goals are as follows: 1. Use resources efficiently: a. Reuse existing buildings and materials. b. Furnish materials that use resources efficiently. C. Use construction practices that achieve efficient use of resources and materials. d. Recycle or reuse Project Site waste. e. Furnish recycled content materials. f. Furnish materials that can be recycled. 2. Avoid scarce, irreplaceable, or endangered resources: a. Furnish materials from abundant, well- managed resources. b. Furnish materials that are replaceable, renewable, or can be replenished. C. Furnish materials that minimize damage to natural habitats. 3. Use durable materials: a. Furnish materials with longest usable life. b. Furnish materials that can be reused. C. Furnish materials with least maintenance requirements. 4. Create spaces that are healthy for occupants: a. Furnish low- toxicity products and materials. b. Furnish materials without toxic maintenance requirements. C. Furnish mechanical equipment that provides fresh air and does not trap water or pollutants. 5. Use energy efficiently: a. Furnish materials with low embodied energy. b. Furnish materials that save energy during building operations. 6. Use water efficiently: a. Use construction practices that use water efficiently. b. Furnish water conserving appliances and equipment. C. Landscape Project Site for water conservation. d. Capture and utilize rainwater. 7. Furnish materials that generate least amount of pollution. 8. Protect and restore natural habitats on Site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures contains requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Submit data for filter media and filter efficiency. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Certify paving material solar reflectance index. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 a. Indicate solar reflectance index and percent of total Site hardscape surfaces for each paving material. 2. Certify roofing material solar reflectance index. a. Indicate roof slope, solar reflectance index, and percent of total roof surface for each roofing material. 3. Certify plumbing fixture water consumption rates. a. Indicate manufacturer and model number of each fixture and fitting and water consumption rates. 4. Certify source and origin for salvaged and reused products. Include description and location of each salvaged and reused product in completed construction. 5. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products permanently installed as part of Project. a. Indicate postconsumer recycled content percent by weight as defined by LEED Rating System. b. Indicate preconsumer recycled content percent by weight as defined by LEED Rating System. c. Indicate recycled content materials according to ISO 14021. 6. Certify source for regional materials for products permanently installed as part of Project. a. Indicate manufacturing or fabrication location and distance to Site in miles (km). b. Indicate percent by weight of each product qualifying as regional material. 7. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council certified well- managed forest. a. Indicate certifying agency and agency accreditation by Forest Stewardship Council. b. Include chain -of- custody documentation tracking wood product from forest to installed product. C. Include description and location of each certified wood -based product in completed construction. 8. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer. a. Include data sheet indicating volatile organic compound content, in g /L, for each product. 9. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating. a. Include data sheet indicating volatile organic compound, in g /L, and chemical component content for each product. 10. Certify volatile organic compound content for each carpet. a. Include independent test results indicating that each carpet complies with CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program. b. Include independent test results indicating each carpet cushion complies with CRI Green Label Testing Program. 11. Certify each composite wood and agrifiber product contains no added urea - formaldehyde resins. a. Include data sheet indicating urea - formaldehyde resin content for each product. D. Construction Photographs: Submit photographs of measures protecting materials from moisture for the following: Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Absorptive materials, including but not limited to masonry units, lumber, finished architectural woodwork, flush wood doors, gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tiles, and insulation. Ducts and other HVAC equipment. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation, for the following products installed as part of permanent construction: a. Salvaged, refurbished, and reused products. b. Products with recycled material content. C. Regional products. d. Rapidly renewable products. e. Certified wood products. Construction Plans: 1. Construction Waste Management Plan: Provide according to Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Plan: Indicate absorptive material and HVAC system protection; source control; pathway interruption; housekeeping; and construction sequencing. 3. Materials Reuse Management Plan: Indicate list of salvaged, refurbished, or reused materials and products to be incorporated into the Work. Include source for each material and product and intended locations within completed construction. Calculate value of reused materials as a percentage of total Project material and product cost. Submit monthly report of actual reused materials and products purchased for the Work. Adjust plan as required to ensure compliance with specified results. 4. Recycled Materials Management Plan: Indicate list of proposed materials and products with recycled content to be incorporated into the Work. Include total and weighted recycled content cost data for each proposed material and product. Calculate value of recycled content as a percentage of total Project material and product cost. Submit monthly report of actual recycled materials and products purchased for the Work. Adjust remaining proposed materials and products to ensure compliance with specified results. Regional Materials Management Plan: Indicate list of proposed regional materials and products to be incorporated into the Work. Include total and weighted regional material cost data for each proposed material and product. Calculate value of regional materials as a percentage of total Project material and product cost. a. Submit monthly report of actual regional materials and products purchased for the Work. Adjust remaining proposed materials and products to ensure compliance with specified results. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work according to LEED Reference Guide to permit application and certification to achieve GOLD rating under LEED Rating System. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Owner and Architect /Engineer identified Project sustainable Project goals that are believed to be attainable. 2. Furnish products with materials and properties for entire Project to meet or exceed specified sustainable Project goals. 3. Perform Work using means and methods for entire Project to meet or exceed specified sustainable Project goals. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Monitor and manage compliance with this Section under direct supervision of LEED Accredited Professional. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements includes requirements for pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. 1. Review submittal and documentation requirements for LEED Rating System certificate. 2. Review construction procedures and temporary facilities required for LEED Rating System compliance. 3. Review LEED credits requiring Contractor - furnished data and documentation and Contractor responsibilities for completing LEED online forms. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROHIBITED MATERIALS A. Do not use materials containing asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB), or other hazardous materials. B. Do not use HCFC -based refrigerants or halon extinguishing agents. C. Do not use materials containing butyl for interior locations. 2.2 HVAC FILTERS A. Temporary Return Air Filters: ASHRAE 52.2 minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8. 2.3 PAVING MATERIALS A. Paving Surfaces: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29, calculated according to ASTM E1980. 1. Reflectance: Measured according to ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or ASTM C1549. 2. Emittance: Measured according to ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.4 ROOFING MATERIALS A. Roof Surface: Minimum SRI of 78 for 75 percent of roof area, calculated according to ASTM E1980. 1. Reflectance: Measured according to ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or ASTM C1549. 2. Emittance: Measured according to ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371. Kv B. Roof Surface: ENERGY STAR compliant with the following performance: 1. Emissivity: Minimum 0.9 for 75 percent of roof area according to ASTM E408. 2.5 REUSED MATERIALS (MR Credit 3) - Not Applicable 2.6 RECYCLED CONTENT MATERIALS (MR Credit 4) A. Furnish the following materials with maximum available recycled content to achieve minimum [10] [20] percent overall recycled content for Project's building products as defined by LEED Reference Guide. 1. Concrete with pozzolan admixtures. Refer to Structural Specifications. 2. Steel railings. Refer to Section 05 5000. 3. Aluminum framed storefronts and entrance. Refer to Section 08 4113. 4. Gypsum board. Refer to Section 09 2116. 5. Acoustical ceiling tile. Refer to Section 09 5123. 6. Walk of mat. Refer to Section 12 4813. 2.7 REGIONAL MATERIALS (MR Credit 5) A. Furnish the following materials extracted, harvested or recovered, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project Site to achieve minimum 20 percent overall regional materials as defined by LEED Reference Guide. 1. Concrete. Refer to Section 9 3000 2. Stone masonry units. Refer to Section . 042019 3. Gypsum board. Refer to Section 09 2116 4. Weather barrier, sheet. Refer to Section 072700 2.8 CERTIFIED WOOD MATERIALS (MR Credit 7) A. Wood -Based Materials: Furnish the following materials certified according to FSC Guidelines for minimum 50 percent of wood -based materials as defined by LEED Reference Guide. 1. Structural wood decking. 2. Wood cabinets /casework. 2.9 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS - ADHESIVES AND SELANTS (IEQ Credit 4.1) A. Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to SCAQMD Rule 1168. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to GS -36. 2.10 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS -PAINTS AND COATINGS (IEQ Credit 4.2) A. Architectural Paints and Coatings: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to GS -11. B. Anti - Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to GC -03. C. Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Primers, and Shellacs: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to SCAQMD Rule 1113. 2.11 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS -FLOORING SYSTEMS (IEQ Credit 4.3) A. Carpets: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program. B. Hard Surface Flooring: FloorScore certified for VOC content according to SCS EC10.2. C. Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains. D. Tile Setting Adhesives and Grout: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.12 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS -COMPOSITE WOOD AND AGRI FIBER (IEQ Credit 4.4) A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Manufactured and fabricated to contain no added urea - formaldehyde resins. 2.13 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS -FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS (IEQ Credit 4.5) A. Not Applicable. 2.14 LOW- EMITTING MATERIALS -CEILING AND WALL SYSTEMS (IEQ Credit 4.6) A. Ceiling and Wall Systems: Maximum volatile organic compound content according to product and testing requirements of CA /DHS /EHLB /R -174 for the following: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Insulation. 3. Acoustical ceiling systems. 4. Wall coverings. 2.15 EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES A. Equipment and Appliances: ENERGY STAR compliant for appliances. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-8 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUSTAINABLE SITES A. Perform storm water management and erosion control Work according to EPA Construction General Permit or local erosion and sedimentation control standards, whichever is more stringent. B. Limit site disturbance to areas indicated on Drawings. 3.2 ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE A. Perform commissioning Work of HVAC for: 1. Fundamental building systems, or 2. Entire building (confirm). B. Perform Work to meet or exceed minimum energy efficiency and performance according to ASHRAE 90.1, CCR Title 24, or local energy code, whichever is more stringent. C. Perform Work without use of CFC -based refrigerants in HVAC building systems. D. Perform ventilation Work according to ASHRAE 62.1. 3.3 MATERIALS AND RESOURCES A. Recycle or salvage minimum of 75 percent by weight of non - hazardous construction, demolition, and land- clearing waste. 3.4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY A. Accept absorptive materials on -Site in manufacturer's sealed, protective packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Store absorptive materials in enclosed, environmentally conditioned space to prevent moisture absorption. C. Do not store or install absorptive materials within building until building is enclosed and materials are protected from exposure to elements. D. Protect installed absorptive materials from damage with temporary exterior enclosure to prevent moisture absorption. E. Perform ventilation Work according to ASHRAE 62.1. F. Develop and implement Construction IAQ management plan including the following: 1. Comply with minimum requirements of SMACNA IAQ. 2. Protect stored and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage. Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-9 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 a. Store materials on elevated platforms under cover and in dry location. b. When materials are not stored in enclosed location, cover tops and sides of material with secured waterproof sheeting. 3. Protect HVAC equipment during construction. a. Shut down return side of HVAC system whenever possible during heavy construction or demolition. b. When HVAC system is operated during heavy construction, furnish disposable temporary filters. 4. Replace filtration media immediately before occupancy. 5. Conduct minimum two -week building flush -out with new filtration media at 100 percent outside air after construction ends and before occupancy. 6. Perform building flush -out before occupancy by supplying total outdoor air volume of 14,000 cu ft /sq ft (36,830 L /sq m) of floor area while maintaining indoor environment at minimum 60 degrees F (15.5 degrees C) and maximum 60 percent relative humidity. * * * * ** [OR] * * * * ** 7. Perform building flush -out before occupancy by supplying total outdoor air volume of 3,500 cf /sf (9,210 L /sq m) of floor area. Continue building flush -out after occupancy by supplying outdoor air at minimum rate of 0.30 cfm /sf (0.0013 L /s /sq m) of floor area or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater, until total outdoor air volume of 14,000 cf /sf (36,830 L /sq m) of floor area is delivered to interior spaces. During each day of flush - out, begin ventilation minimum t hours before occupancy and continue for duration of occupancy. * * * * ** [OR] * * * * ** Conduct baseline indoor air quality testing procedure consistent with EPA IAQ Testing. Credit Title Phase Retail NC Sustainable Sites (SS) P1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Construction Required P2 Environmental Site Assessment Design NA C1 Site Selection Design C2 Development Density and Community Connectivity Design C3 Brownfield Redevelopment Design C4.1 Alternative Transportation - Public Transportation Access Design C4.2 Alternative Transportation - Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms Design C4.3 Alternative Transportation- Low - Emitting and Fuel- Efficient Vehicles Design C4.4 Alternative Transportation- Parking Capacity Design C5.1 Site Development- Protect or Restore Habitat Design C5.2 Site Development- Maximize Open Space Design NA C6.1 Stormwater Design - Quantity Control Design Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-10 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Credit Title Phase Retail NC C6.2 Stormwater Design - Quality Control Design 1Nr\ C7.1 Heat Island Effect - Nonroof Construction NA C7.2 Heat Island Effect -Roof Design C8 Light Pollution Reduction Design C9 Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines Design NA C9 Site Master Plan Design NA C10 Joint Use of Facilities Design NA Water Efficiency (WE) P1 Water Use Reduction Construction Required C1 Water Efficient Landscaping Design C2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies Design C3 Water Use Reduction Design C4 Process Water use Reduction Design NA Energy and Atmosphere (EA) P1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems Construction Required P2 Minimum Energy Performance Design Required P3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Design Required C1 Optimize Energy Performance Design C2 On -Site Renewable Energy Design C3 Enhanced Commissioning Construction NA C4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management Design NA C5 Measurement and Verification Construction NA C5.1 Measurement and Verification -Base Building Construction NA C5.2 Measurement and Verification - Tenant Submetering Construction NA C6 Green Power Construction Materials and Resources (MR) P1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables Design Required C1 Building Reuse - Maintain Existing Walls, Floors, and Roof Design NA C1.1 Building Reuse - Maintain Existing Walls, Floors, and Roof Design C1.2 Building Reuse - Maintain Interior Nonstructural Elements Design C2 Construction Waste Management Construction C3 Materials Reuse Construction N, C4 Recycled Content Construction C5 Regional Materials Construction C6 Rapidly Renewable Materials Construction NA C6 Certified Wood Construction NA C7 Certified Wood Construction Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) P1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance Design Required P2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Design Required P3 Minimum Acoustical Performance Design NA C1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring Design C2 Increased Ventilation Design Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-11 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Credit Title Phase Retail NC C3 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan During Construction Construction NA C3.1 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan During Construction Construction C3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan Before Occupancy Construction C4.1 Low - Emitting Materials- Adhesives and Sealants Construction C4.2 Low - Emitting Materials- Paints and Coatings Construction C4.3 Low - Emitting Materials - Flooring Systems Construction C4.4 Low - Emitting Materials- Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products Construction C4.5 Low - Emitting Materials- Furniture and Furnishings Construction NA C4.6 Low - Emitting Materials - Ceiling and Wall Systems Construction NA C5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control Design C6 Controllability of Systems - Thermal Comfort Design NA C6.1 Controllability of Systems- Lighting Design C6.2 Controllability of Systems - Thermal Comfort Design C7 Thermal Comfort - Design Design NA C7.1 Thermal Comfort - Design Design C7.2 Thermal Comfort - Verification Design C8.1 Daylight and Views - Daylight Design C8.2 Daylight and Views -Views Design C9 Enhanced Acoustical Performance Design NA C10 Mold Prevention Construction NA Innovation in Design (ID) C1 Innovation in Design Design NA C2 LEED° Accredited Professional Construction NA C3 The School as a Teaching Tool Design NA Regional Priority (RP) C1 Regional Priority END OF SECTION Sustainable Design Requirements 018113-12 W N N ! O O — — — — — — — — — — — %0 — — — — — — - R O dd N 1 C C > a a 0 > n -Z u E y N v O o V d 0 u Q v O o E 0 on a) r _T -r- C w H O u > V O L O V ` R E � C C > C R a) N a! OJ N R R `C w d o a) aJ c a } d a > u u u u u 46 �+ E E E 7 J N on c Ln c a) a) — 0 0 3 U au) OU w OU •° ° O w w O E an T _N d O_ O_ d O_ d u C C C 22 0 D_ p i VI Vf Vl V) VI � u m o �a co .0 "° >, p w c c c c c 0 c a H =° O' d o t� w 0) 0 °' a�i 3 0 0 a� �aa� a >,0- 0 ppppp;; u v v v c E Q 0 0 Y L U U m R 0 0 0 0 0 U L v r-> d = c o v0 ° E v o R 0 t r a R a m a a u on a .E 'S u c c 3° c a� a`� i> 0 0 0 0 o W a ai 0 Q' ) c O U O O O -° o L L m m C C c C c W W i w 0 c V V J V H H p p c c c c c � w m w m m w m w m w m w m w m w m m w m w m w V u V u d d u V u V u V u V u V u u V u V u V N C) o, %0 O O O O O Ln O O N - - — — --- N N N N M N (14 M N L c c c O O O 110- a a aj t! a a N 4 T u + an 7 w v +L+ 00 a R a) w C c V _ W ±' d O O ac) V C o 0 Y 2 u a) .= E d N a) 00 '"' j O ca 001. aJ 3 00 °n U N C O 0 0 N 0 '-' V �-+ O N �-+ T ,F Q' pn L Ofl c6 O Z .0 a0i 00 0 E '^ 0 0 o a a' ° ° ao on cco u 0 0 ra io w o N( H o E 0 E d `° d ;6 0 R d C? p 0 -u gun a) N o o C c C o a` i z= u c° +� c al `C a) C w o c a) a o 0 a v �, v w w c a z ° E °- L c o c e H n n 2 p w w o a0 O io io c v o v c ° v v o o v -0 - >` u 0 v z v y u > °3 ° c c? a a, a� aj E c 4J c 4' E 3 C� Y 2 d o a>i v "' Q E D E N v u u a O v N Vi v 3 Epp E E ,� tj a� v> `w v E v in R w Q t p a0.+ `O +a, a0.+ Y O O LOn 4- R R C tM 2 j C j d C N iJ (V V VI p m Q VI Vf VI Vf 2 2 J W U- LL O O W W U W •ro N Q ,p a w m w m w m w m - w N m n W } Q W O 2 v N L w Q v Q w J u u u u u u u u u u u u u u W a a a u u u u u u z a0 N ,O N N N N T In N N M �• F N N N N � N IF I I r } } El } } N N N N u u u u N N N N `O o `O o CL a a a c c c c 0 0 0 0 N Q a v a v a v a v V V V u r iii O a v O a V, v u L O LA LA .C� n n 1 0 C c O a a . N C N m d a M N N O O O 0 Y o ° � v v aEi c �a w 0 o u v 6 0 � � Z u C O C � vE cl� W on O c c o Y Y c c u R uo N N 7 v :3 :3 0 v on on u on c c i0 O N m m V N N v .+ M w v w v w a u u u u M � N N } c .a n ate+ 0 v 8 c .a a ate+ 0 of m c .a a Q ate+ O Q v d f m U NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 01. Refer to specifications on Structural Drawings. B. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Product requirements for metal fabrications for placement by this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Forest and Paper Association: 1. AF &PA - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. C. The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA /EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 2. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Drawings. Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Sections 01 81 13 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices and attachment accessories and installation requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF &PA. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of components to formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At discretion of Contractor. B. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, "Standard" Grade Douglas Fir, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides. C. Plywood Forms: 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS 1; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with grade trademark of APA /EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 5/8 inch thick; APA /EWA "B -B Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade. 4. Plywood where "Smooth Finish" is required, as indicated on Drawings: APA /EWA "HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade, minimum of 3/4 inch thick. 5. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly - placed concrete without bow or deflection. 2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type or snap -off type, fixed or adjustable length to suit application, free of defects capable of leaving holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Spreaders: Standard, non - corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1 inch of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted. C. Form Anchors and Hangers: 1. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. 2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. 3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted. D. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. E. Corners: Fillet or chamfer, rigid plastic or wood strip type; size as indicated on the Drawings; maximum possible lengths. F. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. G. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. 2.3 COATINGS A. Coatings for Aluminum: Polyamide epoxy finish coat with paint manufacturer's recommended primer for aluminum substrate. Apply one coat primer and one coat finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Drawings. C. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect /Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Earth Forms: 1. Trench earth forms neatly, accurately, and at least 2 inches wider than footing widths indicated on Drawings. 2. Trim sides and bottom of earth forms. 3. Construct wood edge strips at top of each side of trench to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. 4. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. 5. Tamp earth forms firm and clean forms of debris and loose material before depositing concrete. B. Formwork - General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar - tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close- fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. D. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318. E. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. F. Obtain Architect /Engineer's approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Drawings. 3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not coat forms for concrete indicated to receive "scored finish ". Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Drawings. H. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Constructjoints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp. J. Embedded Items: 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, water stops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under other Specification sections. 4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations. K. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. L. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. M. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Staking through membrane is not be permitted. N. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed airjust before concrete is placed. 3.5 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean -out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de -icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.6 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Architect /Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Leave forms in place for minimum number of days as specified in ACI 347. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 or ACI 318. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. C. Notify Architect /Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but prior to placing concrete. D. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. END OF SECTION Concrete Forming and Accessories 031000 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 01. Refer to specifications on Structural Drawings. B. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Welded wire fabric. 3. Reinforcement accessories. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 01 81 13 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. D. Certificates: Submit AWS qualification certificate for welders employed on the Work. Concrete Reinforcing 032000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP -66. C. Perform Work in accordance with City of Olympia Public Work's standard. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate with placement of form'ork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and Plain Reinforcement: ASTM A615/A615M; 60 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished. B. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185; in flat sheets or coiled rolls; galvanized finish epoxy coated finish, and as indicated in City of Olympia Standard Specifications. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic- coated steel, Plastic tipped steel, or Stainless steel type; size and shape to meet Project conditions. D. Reinforcing Splicing Devices: Exothermic welding type; full tension and compression; sized to fit joined reinforcing. E. Reinforcing Splicing Devices: Mechanical type; full tension and compression; sized to fit joined reinforcing. F. Epoxy Coating Patching Material: Type as recommended by coating manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code. B. Form standard hooks for 180 degree bends, 90 degree bend, and stirrup and tie hooks, as indicated on Drawings. C. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code. D. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices. E. Form ties and stirrups from the following: 1. For bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. For bars No. 11 and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars deformed wire. Concrete Reinforcing 032000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 F. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4. G. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Make completed reinforcement available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly. B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 of one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars. E. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code as follows: Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inches Concrete No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches e exposed to Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch earth No. 5 bars and smaller 1 -1/2 inches weather Supported No. 14 bars and larger 1 -1/2 inches Slabs, Walls, and Joists No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches F. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. G. Splice reinforcing in accordance with splicing device manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members: Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch Concrete Reinforcing 032000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner's testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code. C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Reinforcement Inspection: 1. Placement Acceptance: Specified and ACI 318 material requirements and specified placement tolerances. 2. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Periodic Placement Inspection: Inspect for correct materials, fabrication, sizes, locations, spacing, concrete cover, and splicing. 4. Weldability Inspection: Inspect for reinforcement weldability when formed from steel other than ASTM A706/A706M. 5. Continuous Weld Inspection: Inspect reinforcement as required by ACI 318 and applicable code. 6. Periodic Weld Inspection: Other welded connections. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Refer to the Structural Drawings and Structural Notes. B. Reinforcement For Exterior Concrete Stairs, Building Foundations & Footings: As indicated on Structural Drawings and Specifications. END OF SECTION Concrete Reinforcing 032000-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 01. B. Section includes cast -in -place concrete for the following: 1. Concrete stairs, foundations and footings, equipment pads, and exterior walks. 2. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Formwork and accessories. 2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Structural Notes and Specifications on Structural Drawings. 4. Sidewalks, curbs and gutters: Refer to Civil specifications on Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 5. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 6. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 7. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 8. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 9. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 10. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 11. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 12. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 01 81 13 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. Submit required source and cost data if the following materials are used: 1. Recycled aggregates 2. Fly ash. C. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories, and admixtures. D. Design Data: 1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work. 2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures. 3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during manufacture. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather. D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at min. 50 degrees F for min. 7 days. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or 1 -11 B. Coarse and Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Use recycled coarse aggregate in foundation and slab on grade mixes; limit use to 50 percent by weight of total coarse aggregate in each mix. Comply with recycled content product requirements specified in Section 016000 to support compliance with applicable LEED Credit(s). C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 1. Limit use to 20 percent of cement content, by weight, unless otherwise specified. 2. Comply with recycled product requirements specified in Section 016000 to support compliance with applicable LEED Credit(s). D. Water: clean and potable. E. Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type 111 4.1.3; 100 percent virgin homopolymer polypropylene, multi - filament fibers containing no processed olefin materials; tensile strength not less than 80 ksi with multi - graded fiber lengths from 3/8 to 3/4 inch, blended to produce not less than 20 individual fiber designs 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. C. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Non - Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B; premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. B. Dowel Bar Epoxy Grout: 1. Manufacturers: a. Master Builders Model 'Paste LPL' b. HILTI Model'HY -150' C. Simpson Model'S.E.T.' C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2 -inch thick; tongue and groove profile. D. Underslab Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745 Class A; 15 -mil thick polyolefin, 0.009 perms maximum permeance; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint /seam tape recommended by manufacturer. Single -ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Stego Industries, Model Stego Wrap 15 -mil, yellow appearance. 2. Raven Industries, VaporBlock 15 mil, blue appearance. E. Hardener: Refer to Section 03 500 — Concrete Finishing. 2.4 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, re- wetable type. B. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard, felt, or cork, complying with ASTM D 1751, thickness as indicated on Drawings and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile C. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 9000. Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: Material and Property Measurement Compressive Strength (28 day) 3,000 psi Cement Type ASTM C150 Aggregate Type Normal weight Water- Cement Ratio (maximum) 0.35 by weight Air Content 5 percent plus or minus 1.0 percent by volume Slump 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch C. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Architect /Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride nor admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather. 4. Add air entrainment admixture to concrete mix for work exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals. 5. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, and slag content as required by applicable code. D. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. E. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete. D. Verify requirements for radiant tubing placement and related components for radiant heated slabs. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials. B. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates. C. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed. Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Notify testing laboratory and Architect /Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion, and contraction joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 -inch thick joint filler. E. Place joint filler in floor slab. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. F. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface. G. Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix. H. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints. I. Consolidate concrete. J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. L. Place slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. M. Saw cut joints within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness, and as indicated in radiant slab detail. 3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with light broom finish for exterior walks and exterior stairs. B. Refer to Section 03 3500 — Concrete Finishing. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Schedule on Structural Drawings. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner's testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318. C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. E. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures. Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 F. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31/C31M, cylinder specimens, standard cured or field cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of three cylinders for every 75 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day and for every 5,000 sf of surface area for slabs and walls. 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used. 5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure. G. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143/C143M. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173/C173M. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064/C1064M. 4. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete sample. H. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with applicable code. 3. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 4. Test two cylinders at 28 days. 5. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required. I. Water Soluble Chloride Ion Concentration Test Method: ASTM C1218; tested at 28 days. 1. Maximum Concentration: As permitted by applicable code. J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 3.7 PATCHING A. Allow Architect /Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect /Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect /Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch -up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect /Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION Cast -In -Place Concrete 033000-6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Refer to Section 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Section Includes: 1. Finishing exposed. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish; control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices. Protection of concrete surfaces to received polished finish. 2. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of Levelness Using the F- number System. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Submit data on sealer, curing compounds, compatibilities, and limitations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. Concrete Finishing 033500 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with concrete placement and curing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CURING, HARDENING AND SEALING AGENTS A. General: Provide curing, hardening and sealing agents, to be applied sequentially, from single manufacturer. Where products of different manufacturers are used including proprietary topping and surfacing materials, confirm compatibility with respective manufacturers. Mask areas to receive sealants before application of curing or sealing agents. 1. Reference to finish materials for subsequent application are intended to establish standard of use of curing and sealing "Types ". Refer to Finish Schedules for specific finish materials and areas of application. 2. Interior products shall meet low VOC requirements in Section 01 81 13. B. Type I Cure: ASTM C309 Type 1 -D, liquid membrane - forming, non - penetrating, fugitive dyed compound. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Filler for exposed polished concrete: as recommended by polishing applicator. B. Neutralizing Agent: Tri- sodium phosphate or baking soda C. Water: Potable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this section. 3.2 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete walk surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1. B. Wood float surfaces receiving ceramic tile with full bed setting system. C. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set ceramic tile. D. Steel trowel surfaces which are indicated to be exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. Concrete Finishing 033500 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Slab Finish: Fine broomed; for exterior equipment pads and concrete sidewalks. 1. Trowel to Class A tolerance, free of trowel marks, pockets or humps. 2. Striate uniformly at right angles to traffic, with fine - haired broom. 3. Type I, Cure. B. Stamped Concrete at Exterior Entry: Refer to 03 3600. END OF SECTION Concrete Finishing 033500 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 04 05 13 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions, Division 1, and Structural Notes and Drawings. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar and grout for concrete and stone masonry units. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. B. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. D. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. E. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. F. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. G. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. H. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. I. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. J. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. K. IMIAC- International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Include design mix, indicate Proportion or Property method used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit one ribbons of mortar color, illustrating color and color range. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. Date Submitted Date Approved Sub - Contractor /Supplier Color Selected 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. Mortar and Masonry Grout 040513-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.07 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 014000 - Quality Control. B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780. C. Test mortar mix for compressive strength. D. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019. E. Test mortar mix for compressive strength. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAP A. B. C. D. IUFACTURERS Admixture, Inc. Grace Master Builders Master Flow 928. Substitutions: Under provisions Substitution Request Form. of Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements and 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for grout. H. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch size; percent by volume. I. Grout Fine Aggregate: ASTM C144 natural sand. J. Water: Clean and potable. K. Bonding Agent: per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.03 MORTAR COLOR A. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color to be selected by Architect. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Water Repellent: Calcium or ammonium stearate compound, concentrated, in liquid or powder form. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property Method, f'm = 1,800psi, minimum in 28 days for concrete masonry unit. 2.06 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. Mortar and Masonry Grout 040513 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. If water is lost by evaporation, re- temper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or two - and - one -half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 2.07 GROUT MIXES A. Engineered Masonry: 2,500 psi strength at 28 days; 5 -8 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout and ACI 531.1. 2.08 GROUT MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformityof mix. C. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.09 ADHESIVE FOR CONCRETE DOWELING A. Threaded rods, bolts or reinforcing bars shown doweling into concrete shall be vinyl lester blended adhesive, HILTI HIT HY -150. B. Contractor to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation; drill bit size, embedment depth, hole cleaning and adhesive application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug clean out holes with block masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. END OF SECTION Mortar and Masonry Grout 040513 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. Refer to Structural Specifications and Notes on Drawings. B. Refer to Section 013526 — LEED Project Requirements. C. Section includes: Concrete masonry units; and reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 2000 — Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete 3. Section 04 2019 —Veneer Stone Masonry 4. Section 07 1700 — Bentonite Waterproofing 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 6. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 7. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete Masonry Compressive Strength (f'm): 2,000 psi, tested in accordance with ASTM C1388, Method B. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Section 013526 — LEED Project Requirements and Section 0135 29 — LEED FORMS C. Product Data: 1. Submit data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties, anchors and other accessories. Unit Masonry 042000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative concrete masonry units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. Samples may be kept and reviewed at job site. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. Date Submitted Date Approved Subcontractor 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.7 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F. C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate masonry work with precast concrete units and installation of window and door anchors. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. Unit Masonry 042000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Mutual Materials. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Hollow Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C129; normal weight. B. Concrete Masonry Unit Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4 x 8 x 16 inches. Furnish special units for wall caps, 90 degree corners, and bond beams. C. Precast Concrete Caps: Per Section 04 2019 — Veneer Stone Masonry 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; ladder type; steel; 0.188 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized. B. Reinforcing Steel: deformed or plain type, specified in Section 03 2000 ; No. 4 size, galvanized finish, where indicated on the Details. C. Mortar and Grout: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for grout. 4. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch size; percent by volume. 5. Grout Fine Aggregate: ASTM C144 natural sand. 6. Water: Clean and potable. 7. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color to be selected by Architect. 8. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property Method, f'm = 1800psi minimum in 28 days for concrete masonry unit . D. All exterior concrete units shall contain the recommended amount of the "Dry Block System Admix" for water repellency. E. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber, neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride material. Furnish with corner and tee accessories, heat or cement fused joints, conforming to ASTM D -2287 with a durometer hardness of 85 when tested in conformance with ASTM D2240. F. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyurethane, or rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding. G. Weeps: Cell vents of ultra violet resistant polypropylene co- polymer, jumbo size, DA1006 by Dur- o -Wal. H. Cleaning Solution: Non - acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 1. Sure Klean by Prosoco, Inc. 2. Fabrikleen by FabriKem Chemicals International. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: coordination and project conditions. Unit Masonry 042000 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. D. Verify built -in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until structure provides permanent support. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness. C. Coursing of Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 16 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Flush. D. Placing And Bonding: 1. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortarjoints are not permitted. 3. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 6. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 7. Cut mortar joints flush where cavity insulation vapor retarder adhesive is applied, or bitumen dampproofing is applied. E. Weeps and Vents: Furnish weeps and vents at 24 inches oc horizontally at bottom of walls. F. Reinforced Masonry: 1. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. 2. Place reinforcement bars as indicated on Drawings. 3. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 20 00. 4. Support and secure reinforcement from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Place grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures. G. Control Joints: 1. Install control joints at the following maximum spacings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: At changes in wall height. 2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 3. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints. Unit Masonry 042000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 4. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 00 for sealant performance. 5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. I. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement: 1. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 2. Plus or minus 1/2 inch when distance from centerline of steel to opposite face of masonry is 8 inches or less. 3. Plus or minus 1 inch when distance is between 8 and 24 inches. 4. Plus or minus 1 -1/4 inch when distance is greater than 24 inches. 5. Plus or minus 2 inches from location along face of wall 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage. C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter. D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar. E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry 042000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 04 20 19 VENEER STONE MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. Refer to Structural Specifications and Notes on Drawings. B. Refer to Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Section includes stone ledger veneer units and reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 2000 — Concrete Reinforcing 2. Section 04 0503 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 3. Section 04 2000 — Unit Masonry 4. Section 07 2700 — Weather and Air Barriers 5. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. 4. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 5. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 6. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 7. ASTM C27 - Standard Classification of Fireclay and High - Alumina Refractory Brick. 8. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 9. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 10. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). 11. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry Compressive Strength (f'm): 3,000 psi minimum; determined by unit strength method. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Detail transition conditions including anchorage, flashings, weeps, and other conditions where interfacing adjacent construction of different material. D. Product Data: 1. Submit data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties, anchors and other accessories. E. Samples: Submit four samples of veneer masonry units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. Samples may be kept and reviewed at job site. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. Individual shall be an experience stone mason, and can demonstrate examples of previous work. 1.7 MOCKUP A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Mockup requirements. B. Construct stone masonry wall mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet high, including stone masonry, mortar and accessories, and corner condition. C. Locate where directed by Architect /Engineer. D. Mockup may be part of the permanent work. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with work beyond sample mock -up. E. Unacceptable work will be removed and reconstructed at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.8 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F. C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate masonry work with precast concrete units and installation of window and door anchors. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Thick ledger, natural stacked stone veneer, anchored to structural wall system. Offset from structural wall shall be two - inches. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. STONE: 1. Natural Stone Ledger, random shapes and sizes. 2. Wall Width Range: 3 -1/2" to 4 -1/2" 3. Stone Size: 1" to 4" heights x 8" to 48" lengths 4. Type of Stone: Montana Ledgestone, natural face, rough rectangular B. Manufacturers: 1. Marenakos Rock Center, Issaquah, WA C. Sill Caps: 1. Precast concrete in shapes as Detailed. 2. Color: Buff; verify with Architect. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; ladder type; steel; 0.188 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized. B. Reinforcing Steel: deformed or plain type, specified in Section 03 20 00 ; No. 4 size, galvanized finish. C. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal; ASTM A153/A153M hot dip galvanized. D. Veneer Anchoring Systems: Galvanized steel free of mill scale and loose rust, complying with the following requirements: 1. Stone Ledger Veneer to Nailable Construction: Dur- o -Wal, Seismic D/A 213S; ASTM A366 and ASTM A153. E. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, fine and coarse. 5. Water: Clean and potable. 6. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color as selected by the Architect. 7. Calcium chloride is not permitted. F. Mortar Mixes: 1. Mortar For Non - Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Property specification. 2. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using Property specification. G. Mortar Mixing: 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures to achieve uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Re- temper only within two hours of mixing. H. Grout Mixes: 1. Grout for Non - Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8 -11 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. 2. Application: a. Coarse Grout: For grouting spaces with minimum 4 inches dimension in every direction. b. Fine Grout: For grouting other spaces. I. Grout Mixing: 1. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, modified to use ingredients complying with ASTM C476. 2. Add admixtures; mix uniformly. 3. J. Copper /Kraft Paper Flashings: 5 oz /sq ft rolled sheet copper bonded to two layers fiber reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper; acceptable products or equal as approved by Architect: 1. Cop -R -Kraft Duplex by Advanced Building Products. 2. Cop -A -Bond Duplex by AFCO Products Inc. 3. Cop -R -Tex Duplex by York Manufacturing. 4. Copper Kraft Duplex by Sandell Manufacturing Co. K. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 304, soft temper; 0.015 -inch thick; smooth finish. L. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 90 00. M. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber, neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride material. Furnish with corner and tee accessories, heat or cement fused joints, conforming to ASTM D -2287 with a durometer hardness of 85 when tested in conformance with ASTM D2240. N. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyurethane, or rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding. O. Cavity Drain Material: Open polyethylene mesh thickness required to fill cavity space, and shaped to ensure moisture drainage to cavity weeps, 10 -inch high x roll length. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 2. Advanced Building Products. 3. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. P. Weather Barrier: Per Section 072700 — Weather and Air Barriers Q. Thru Wall Flashing: DA 1544 by Dur -o -Wal and full drip edge; compressible fillers as recommended by flashing manufacturer. R. Weeps: Cell vents of ultra violet resistant polypropylene co- polymer, jumbo size, DA1006 by Dur- o -Wal. S. Cleaning Solution: Non - acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 1. Sure Klean by Prosoco, Inc. 2. Fabrikleen by FabriKem Chemicals International. T. Steel Lintels: size as indicated on Drawings, hot -dip galvanized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. D. Verify built -in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support. C. Wet clay and shale brick before laying when initial rate of absorption is greater than 30 grams when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Masonry courses to random dimension, overall wall level and plumb. Form bed and head joints of varying thickness, not more than 5/8- inches. C. Coursing of Stone Units: 1. Bond: Random ashlar 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave or recessed (verify with Architect). D. Placing And Bonding: 1. Lay stone ledger units on head and bed joints. 2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 3. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 4. Interlock intersections and external corners. 5. Do not shift or tap stone units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 6. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure similar rough cut edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 7. Cut mortar joints flush where cavity insulation vapor retarder adhesive is applied, or bitumen dampproofing is applied. 8. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movementjoint. 9. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs with compressible joint filler. Weeps and Vents: Furnish weeps and vents in outer wythe at 32 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. 1. Install cavity drain material continuously at bottom of each cavity above through wall flashing. G. Anchorage - Masonry Veneer: 1. Secure wall ties and strap anchors to stud framed backing and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches oc vertically and 16 inches oc horizontally. 2. Place wall ties at maximum 8 inches oc vertically within 8 inches of jamb of wall openings. 3. Place wall ties at maximum 8 inches on center horizontally within 8 inches of head and sill of wall openings. 4. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. H. Masonry Flashings: 1. Extend flashings horizontally through outer wythe at foundation walls, under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls and turn down on outside face to form drip. 2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortarjoint of masonry and seal to sheathing over framed backing. 3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. 4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions. Built -In Work: 1. As work progresses, install fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, and plates and other items to be built -in the work and furnished by other sections. 2. Install built -in items plumb and level. 3. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration. Cutting And Fitting: 1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 2. Obtain Architect /Engineer's approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. C. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage. C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter. D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar. E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress. END OF SECTION Veneer Stone Masonry 042019 -7 Marenakos Rock Center Page 1 of 1 042019 http:// marenakos .com/ledgegal /monledge.htm 6/24/2014 area S—i %nakos ROCK CFNIF3t Home FlaQStone Landscape I Veneex Rubble S ecial Tools /Accessories Dimensional Waterfeatures How To FAQ's Deliver About Led¢estone Columns River Rock Benches Decorafive Isokern /Fireplaces Steps /Risers Squares /Rees SiPnaye Links Contact MARENAKOS ROCK CENTER MONTANA SLATE LEPCESTONE �41 y AVAILABLE FORMS: B"-5° BED LED6E5TONE CHARACTERISTICS: NATURAL FACE, ROUGH RECTANGULAR RED, BROWNS & DARK GRAYTONES USES: MASONRY WALL & DRYSTACK Home Fla stone Landsca e Veneer Rubble S ecial Tools /Accessories Dimensional Watexfeatuxes How To FAQ's Delivex About Ledoestone Columns River Rock Benches Decorative Isokern Fire laces Ste s Risers S uares Recs Si a e Links Contact wA , _ - -• Ll P .fir ..: _. © 1996 -2014 MARENAKOS ROCK CENTER I n.�...1...1. MEMBERS OF... FOLLOW US ON WdvAPd�had -*r http:// marenakos .com/ledgegal /monledge.htm 6/24/2014 Full- Height Cavity Drainage Material 04 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 01 MI MI MI MI MI MI The Clear Choice For Dependability Typical Drainage Wall Using CavClear" What are O Products? CavClear ®Masonry Mat or CavClso a Insulation System installed Lull -height CavClear' products make up a complete airspace maintenance and drainage system for brick and stone construction. During the construction of a masonry wall, excess mortar can accumulate within the 1un " -3r6 "tolerance airspace. In order to properly fill head and bed joints, it is inevitable that mortar will be expressed into the interior space of the cavity. Mortar which bridges the airspace prevents proper drainage. Full- height protection ensures moisture management by ` evClear® Weep Vents preventing all mortar bridges and all mortar droppings. For more information, please call 888 - 436 -2620 or visit www.cavclear.com. Description: CavClear' Masonry Mat (see below) is bonded to /V. S. POW #5,%8.673 foam board insulation for easy installation. Available with g expanded or extruded polystyrene and polyi socya nu rate insulation. Applications: Install full- height in insulated cavity walls and stone construction where ties are located 16" O.C. Dimension: 16" x 96 ", 48" x 96 ". Insulation Thickness: 1 ", 1.5 ", 2 ", 2.5 ", 3 ". Dependant on insulation type specified. Masonry Mat Thickness: 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1 ", 1 -1/4 ", 1 -3/4 ". Allow 1/4" to 3/8" tolerance between Masonry Mat and brick. Installation: Install horizontally between ties. Tightly butt joints. Use a compatible joint sealant on all joints and penetrations. Packaging: Varies depending on overall product thickness. Contact your distributor or CavClear'. Description: A fluid- conducting, nonabsorbent polymer mesh made from 100% recycled plastic installed full- height in the airspace. Holds mortar in proximity to mortar joint preventing it from making contact with the backup or falling to flashings where it could obstruct weeps. Eliminates manual methods of cleaning the backside of masonry. Applications: Install full- height behind brick in insulated or non - insulated masonry cavity wall or veneer systems. Dimensions: 16" x 96 ", 8" x 96 ". Rolls up to 75' available upon request. Thickness: 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1 ", 1 -1/4 ", 1 -3/4 ". For brick veneers, select thickness to allow 1/4" to 3/8" tolerance between Masonry Mat and brick. Installation: Install throughout full- height of wall. Fits horizontally between ties. Secure loosely using pintels at top edge or use spot adhesive which is compatible with substrate. Do not use staples or nails. Packaging: Packaged in clear, plastic bags. Pieces per bundle are dependent on thickness. For 16" x 96" material: 1/2 ": 39 pcs = 416 sf; 3/4 ": 33 pcs = 352 sf; 1 ": 27 pcs = 288 sf; 1 -1/4 ": 24 pcs = 256 sf; 1 -3/4 ": 16 pcs = 170.7 sf. Storage: Store in clean, dry area off of the ground and protected from the sun. Description: A fluid- conducting, nonabsorbent polymer mesh made from 100% recycled plastic installed full- height behind stone. Applications: Install full- height behind stone to create a drainage area that would not otherwise be possible. Dimensions: 3/8 ": 16" x 96" and 48" x 100'. 1": 16" x 96" with rolls up to 75' available upon request. Thickness: 3/8" and 1 ". There should be no tolerance between CavClear' Stone Mat and stone. Installation: Install throughout full- height of wall. Fit horizontally between ties or cut to fit around ties as necessary. Use spot adhesive which is compatible with substrate if necessary. Do not use staples or nails. Packaging: Packaged in clear, plastic bags. 3/8 ": 16" x 96" = 63 pcs = 672 sf; 3/8 ": 48" x 100' rolls = 400 sf per roll; 1 ": 16" x 96" = 24 pcs = 256 sf per bundle. Storage: Store in clean, dry area off of the ground and protected from the sun. Description: CavClear' Weep Vents are used in the vertical joints of brick masonry units to provide moisture drainage and air flow. The "notch" feature facilitates rapid drainage. They are made of 100% recycled plastic and available in white, manilla, harvest gold, rose /salmon, red, gray and charcoal to blend with mortar color. Dimension: 2.5" x 3.5" x 3/8 ". Packaging: Boxes of 200. Custom sizes also available. Installation: Install in head joints at 24" spacing with notched side down. If powerwashing, install after washing has been completed. 888 - 436 -2620 www.cavclear.com PRODUCT SUBMITTAL ■■ wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww■ # 2401 RJ -711 Adjustable Veneer Anchor New design with 2 screw holes above the legs saves time while installing in insulation applications. Straight & Cut Wire` V % lip Insulation Stud -- b Self Tapper Screw U—] .-o Wallboard 2401 ASTM A82 / A82M - (Cold drawn steel wire) Tensile Strength - 80,000 psi Yield Point - 70,000 psi ACI / ASCE 530 - (Building code requirements for masonry structures) SHEET METAL - (Carbon Steel) ASTM A1008 / Al 008M Mill Galvanized / Zinc Coating: ASTM A641 I A641 M (0.10 Oz per sq ft) Hot Dip Galvanized after fabrication / Zinc Coating ASTM A153 / A153M -B2 (1.50 oz per sq ft) Stainless Steel ASTM 580 I ASTM 580M Type 304 (Type 316 available on special order) Steel Products (flats): Mill Galvanized & Hot Dip, 59.2% Post - Consumer 8.8% Post Industrial / Pre - Consumer Stainless Steel, 60% Post Consumer V O C Content - 0% WIRE Recycled Content: Mill Galvanized & Hot Dip, 87% Post - Consumer 13% Post Industrial / Pre - Consumer Stainless Steel, 60% Post Consumer V O C Content - 0% Corporate Office: 400 Rountree Rd Charlotte, NC 28217 TEL: (800) 849 -6722 FAX: (704) 525 -3761 Mailing Address: P.O. Box 240988 Charlotte, NC 28224 ` Stud # 2401 RJ711: ®,14 gauge ❑ 12 gauge Must be 3/4" more than insulation Insulation: ❑ 0" Ell " IX 1 -1J2° X2" ❑ 2 -112„ K3" ❑ 3 -1/2" ❑ 4" # 2402 Hook: ® 3116" Standard [11/4" Heavy Duty ❑ 3 -1/4" ❑ 4 -1/4" ❑ 5 -1/4" ❑ Other Straight & Cut seismic wire X 9ga ❑ 3/16" FINISH: ❑ Mill Galvanized K Hot Dip Galvanized ❑ Stainless Steel www.wirebond.com Memphis Plant: 2365 Harbor Ave. Memphis, TN 38113 TEL: (800) 441 -8359 FAX: (901) 775 -9449 Mailing Address: P.O. Box 13124 Memphis, TN 38113 OUR BRICK ANCHORS ARE USER FRIENDLY • NO MORE 10' SECTIONS OF NO.9 WIRE TO ALIGN IN BRICK JOINTS i Angle ClipsTM are installed on a wall using hex -head screws. T -Tie TM is laid in the brick joint and is connected to the Angle ClipTM T- TiesTM are installed every 16" on center and create a butt joint LOCK RITE T -TieTM Stud The T -Tier" is like no other available. No parts to keep track of on the jobsite. No more fighting the 10 foot number 9 pencil rod to stay in the brick joint - especially up several stories on scaffolding. Lock Rite° has made your job a lot easier anchoring brick veneer! Manufactured in the United States of America Lock Rite Metal Products, Inc. Division 4 - Masonry 7659 South 180th Street Kent, WA 98032 V S CUSTOMER SERVICE (206) 767 -4554 LOCK RITE BtB Brick ConnectorTM Brick Veneer O LOCK RITE� 2005 © COPYRIGHT • LOCK RITE AND LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKSO OF LOCK RITE MFG. CO.. INC. • ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ARTICLE No. LI LR6 -0117 tJ0 () D ............ ...... TRUCRIP Metal -to -food Fasteners The preferred fastener by the leading post frame builders and manufacturers. App ...... ons ................................................................................ ............................... A& Roof and wall panel to wood structure. -4k Stitch roof and wall panel. AML Panel over insulation to wood structure. �Prta€ft.at;t ie it res .............. . .......................................................................... I............... Ak Non - walking sharp gimlet point for fast material . M Vulcanized bonding of washer eliminates engagement. separation of EPDM from the metal backing, AL Double lead thread for fast panel pick-up '. High hat HWH for driving stability. ate- Dual sealing bonded washer prevents leaks. � E Climaseal� finish provides excellent corrosion resistance and lower tapping torque. .................................................................................................. I........I..................... ProdUct Specifications dead Styles Diameter .......................... #9 and #12 Hex Washer Head Thread Form..................... 9 -15 double lead 12 -14 Head Style__. ................... 11C HWH Washer Style.... .............. .. Galvanized (G -90) Drill Point ............................ Gimlet Finish ...... ......................... . ..... Climaseal Available with P' powder paint 31 Hex Washer Head with Bonded Washer T UG •. .METAL.To,W000 FASTENERS Product Report No. 02711 ........................................................................... ............................... Performance Data The values listed are ukimale averages achieved under bbaralory condAions and apply to Buildu manufaclured fasteners only. Appropriafe safety faeEors should be VOW la these values for design purposes- Part Dumber Description Head Drift Drift & Material Sox (thin. in. lbs ) 515 674 875 7200 style Potrtt Tap Attachment Q q Iicatins` pP. Washered 587 744 - - 993 1246 Capacity Range LL - _• 1271000 12720M 9 -15 x 1" 9.75 x 1 -112" HWH HWH Gimlet .012-.048 0-.256 7,000 • Wall panel to wood 1275000 9 -15 x 2 -112" HWH Gimlet Gimlet .012-.048 012 -.048 0 -350 1.000.1350 4,000 1,500 structure 1276000 9.15 x 3" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.500.2.250 1,508 'Panel over insulation to 1558000 14 -70 x 1.112' 5176" AF HWH Type 17 .012 -,048 .445 3,000 wood. 1277000 12 -14 x 314" HWH Gimlet .412-.048 4,000 Stitching of wall panel. > ~ 1262060 1264000 9 -15 x 1" 9 -15 x 1 -112" HWH HWH Gimlety` 012-D48 0.250 4,--- Roof and wall pane! to 1267000 9 -15 x 2" HWH Gimle! Gimlet 412 -.048 012-.048 0 -350 .500 -1.250 2,500 2,000 wood. Panel over insulation to 1268000 9 -15 x 2 -112" HWH Gimlet .012448 1.000.1.150 1,500 wood. 12696370 9 -15 x 3" HWH Gimlet .012 -.048 1.500 -2,250 1,000 1525053 14.10 x 1" 318" AF HWH Type 17 .012 -.048 0 -.445 2,500 1526053 14 -10 x 1.112" 5116• AF HWH Type 17 .072 -.048 0 -350 2,000 1270000 12.14 x 314" 'HWH Gimlet .012•.048 4,000 5litching of roof and wall 'With 9116" O.D. Bonded Washer. panel. i ........................................................................... ............................... Performance Data The values listed are ukimale averages achieved under bbaralory condAions and apply to Buildu manufaclured fasteners only. Appropriafe safety faeEors should be VOW la these values for design purposes- Fastener Steel Gauge Dia. 9 urwuashered Shear Torque 7-tp) 70b (axS tbs. (thin. in. lbs ) 515 674 875 7200 50 urlwashered 527 699 2000 92 Fastener Steel Gauge Dia. 9 urwuashered 26 24 465 623 22 815 1 20 1 18 1049 1549 9 Washefed 515 674 875 1100 7627 12 urlwashered 527 699 863 912 1185 12 Washered 587 744 915 993 1246 tistaliati€ n Gti3dehitev A standard screw gun with a depth sensitive nosepiece should be used to install ruGrip ". For optimal fastener performance, the screwgun should be a minimum of 6 amps and have an RPM range of 0 -2500. AOL Adjust the screwgun nosepiece to properly seat the fastener. ASE New magnetic sockets must be correctly set before use. Remove chip build -up as needed. j. Overdriving may result in torsional failure of the fastener or stripout of the substrate. AL The fastener must penetrate beyond the metal structure a minimum of 3 pitches of thread. Property Seated Washers ..� Urrd�dnven moaned O+ dduen 1349 West Bryn Mawr Avenue Trucrip °4 G and cmasear are trademarks of ITw 8uildex and 10inois Tad Works, Inc. Itasca, Illinois 60143 630.595 -3500 Fax: 630 - 595 -3549 2007 ITW BuAdex and Ems Toot Works, Inc. www.itwhuildex.com 0 Mortar Maze® Cell Vents Specification Bulletin No. 400 Mortar Maze® Weep Vents Mortar Maze® Weep Tubes Description: Mortar Maze@ Cell Vents ensure positive drainage in all cavity wall construction, while also restricting insects and other debris from entering the head joint. Made from durable polypropylene, Mortar Maze@ Cell Vents are available in a range of colors to match the surrounding mortar. Polypropylene tested in conformance with ASTM D2240, D790B, D638, and D 1238B. Size: Standard: 3/8" x 2 -1/2" x 3 -3/8" Jumbo: 3/8" x 3 -1/2" x 3 -1/2" Colors: Clear, Tan, Gray or Brown. Special colors may be available upon request. Mortar Maze® Weep Tubes Description: Mortar Maze@ Weep Tubes are now available with or without cotton wicks, or with both cotton wicks and stainless steel screens. Mortar Maze@ Weep Tubes are a cost effective drainage device made of durable clear plastic. Placed sixteen inches on center allows for proper moisture drainage. Tubes are 3/8" dia. x 4 ". Tubes without wicks are 500 per box. Tubes with wicks are 200 per box. Tubes with wicks and screens are 200 per box. P.O. Box 98, Springvale, ME 04083 Tel: 1- 800 - 252 -2306 or 1- 207 - 490 -2306 Fax: 207 - 490 -2998 E -mail: info @advancedflashing.com www.advancedflashing.com 111R� +B HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC. A MiTek - BERKSHIRE HATHAWAY COMPANY WMA MOIS' a HOHMAN Flashing and Reglets Textroflash TM Flashing DRAWINGS FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY TeXtroflashTm Flashing Thru -Wall/ Surface -Mount Flashing A 40 -mil thick, non - asphalt composite membrane with a proprietary clear adhesive. This adhesive is factory - laminated to polyethylene sheeting, yielding a flexible membrane that is suitable for application to masonry, concrete, steel, gypsum and wood. • Asphalt -free composition will not drool when exposed to UV or heat. • Corners easily formed on site. Laps easily, just press at overlap. • Resists tearing and slicing. • UV- resistant for up to 90 days. • Now made from 45% Recycled Material. Technical Data: • Tensile Strength - ASTM D412C 6,242 psi • Elongation - ASTM D412C 16% • Puncture Resistance - ASTM E154 331.8 Ibf. • Water Absorption - ASTM D1970 5.544% • Peel Strength of Adhesive bonds - ASTM D903 8.6 Ibf /in TextroflashTm Flashing: U.S. Pat. No. 7,823,355 & 7,882,673 DRIP PLATE Width (rolls are 75 ft. long) 12" 16" 18" 20" 24" 32" 36" Other Stainless Steel Drip Plate ❑ 1 '/2" ❑ 3" r Other NA Flex - Flash° Drip Edge ❑ 3" Termination Bar ❑ T1 Termination Bar O Stainless Steel (Type 304) Q Aluminum O Plastic ❑ T2 Termination Bar Q Stainless Steel (Type 304) Q Aluminum Mastic & Primer �✓ H &B 1 -Quart Mastic Tube H &B Mastic (5 gal. pail) H &B Self- Adhering Flashing Primer (5 gal. pail) HOHMANN & BARNARD, Inc. Branch /Subsidiary Locations: 30 Rasons Court I Hauppauge, NY 11788 ALABAMA - ILLINOIS - MARYLAND CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS NEW YORK - PENNSYLVANIA - TEXAS T: 800.645.0616 F: 631.234.0683 CANADA www.h -b.com © HOHMANN & BARNARD, INC. - 2012 CASCADE CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. w �MaspN �p�'• 10215 Park Avenue South Tacoma, WA 98444 Phone (253) 531 -7835 Facsimile (253) 548 -2170 www.cascadeconst.com Cold/Hot Weather Construction The cold weather construction provisions of ACI 530. VASCE 6/TMS 602, Article 1.8 C, or the following procedures shall be implemented when either the ambient temperature falls below 40 °F (4 °C) or the temperature of masonry units is below 40 °F (4 °C). Preparation. Temperatures of masonry units shall not be less than 20° ( -7 °C) when laid in the masonry. Masonry units containing frozen moisture, visible ice or snow on their surface shall not be laid. 2. Visible ice and snow shall be removed for m the top surface of existing foundations and masonry to receive new construction. These surfaces shall be heated to above freezing, using methods that do not result in damage. Construction. The following requirements shall apply to work in progress and shall be based on ambient temperature. Construction requirements for temperatures between 40 °F (4 °C) and 32 °F (0 °C). The following construction requirements shall be met when the ambient temperature is between 40 °F (4 °C) and 32 °F (0 °C). 1. Glass unit masonry shall not be laid. 2. Water and aggregates used in mortar and grout shall not be heated above 140 °F (60 0C). 3. Mortar sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 °F (4 °C) and 120 °F (49 °C) at the time of mixing. When water and aggregates for grout are below 32 °F (0 °C), they shall be heated. Construction requirements for temperatures between 32 °F (0 °C) and 25 °F ( -4 °C). The requirements of Section 2104.3.2.1 and the following construction requirements shall be met when the ambient temperature is between 32 °F (0 °C) and 25 °F ( -4 °C): 1. The Mortar temperature shall be maintained above freezing until used in masonry. 2. Aggregates and mixing water for grout shall be heated to produce grout temperature between 70 °F (21 °C) and 120 °F (49 °C) at the time of mixing. Grout temperature shall be maintained above 70 °F (2 VQ at the time of grout placement. Heat AAC masonry units to a minimum temperature of 40 °F (4 °C) before installing thin bed mortar. Construction requirements for temperatures between 25 °F ( -4 °C) and 20 °F ( -7 °C). The requirements of Section 2104.3.2.1 and 2104.3.2.2 and the following construction requirements shall be met when the ambient temperature is between 25 °F ( -4 °C) and 20 °F ( -7 °C): 1. Masonry surfaces under construction shall be heated to 40 °F (4 °C). 2. Wind breaks of enclosures shall be provided when the wind velocity exceeds 15 miles per hour (mph) (24km/h). 3. Prior to grouting, masonry shall be heated to a minimum of 40 °F (4 °C). Construction requirements for temperatures below 20 °F ( -7 0C). The requirements of Sections 2104.3.2.1, 2104.3.2.2 and 2104.3.2.3 and the following construction requirement shall be met when the ambient temperature is below 20 °F (- 7 °C): Enclosures and auxiliary heat shall be provided to maintain air temperature within the enclosure to above 32 °F (0 °C). Protection. The requirements of this section and Sections 2104.3.3.1 through 2104.3.3.5 apply after the masonry is placed and shall be based on anticipated minimum daily temperature for grouted masonry and anticipated mean daily temperature for ungrouted masonry. Glass unit masonry. The temperature of the glass unit masonry shall be maintained above 40 °F (4 °C) for 48 hours after construction. Protection requirements for temperatures between 40 °F (4 °C) and 25 °F (40C). When the temperature is between 40 °F (4 °C) and 25 °C ( -4 °C), newly constructed masonry shall be covered with a weather - resistive membrane for 24 hours after being completed. Protection requirements for temperatures between 25 °F (-4 °C) and 20 °F ( -7 0C). When the temperature is between 25 °F ( -4 °C) and 20 °F ( -7 °C), newly constructed masonry shall be completely covered with weather - resistant insulating blankets, or equal protection, for 24 hours after being completed. The time period shall be extended 48 hours for grouted masonry, unless the only cement in the grout is Type III portland cement. Protection requirement for temperatures below 20 °F ( -7 0C). When the temperature is below 20 °F ( -7 °C), newly constructed masonry shall be maintained at a temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) for at least 24 hours after being completed by using heated enclosures, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other acceptable methods. The time period shall be extended to 48 hours for grouted masonry, unless the only cement in the grout is Type III portland cement. Hot weather construction. The hot weather construction provisions of ACI 530.1 -ASCE 6/TMS 602, Article 1.8 D, or the following procedures shall be implemented when the temperature or the temperature and wind - velocity limits of this section are exceeded. Preparation. The following requirements shall be met prior to conducting masonry work. Temperature. When the ambient temperature exceeds 100 °F (38 °C), or exceeds 90 °F (32 °C) with a wind velocity greater than 8mph (3.5 m/s): 1. Necessary conditions and equipment shall be provided to produce mortar having a temperature below 120 °F (49 °C). 2. Sand piles shall be maintained in a damp, loose condition. Special conditions. When the ambient temperature exceeds 115 °F (46 °C), or exceeds 105 °F (40 °C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (3.5 m/s), the requirements of Section 2104.4.2.1 shall be implemented and cool mixing water shall be used for mortar and grout. The use of ice shall be permitted in the mixing water prior to use. Ice shall not be permitted in the mixing water when added to the other mortar or grout materials. Protection. When the mean daily temperature exceeds 100 °F (38 °C) or exceeds 90 °F (32 °C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (3.5 m/s), newly constructed masonry shall be fog sprayed until damp at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old. Wetting of brick. Brick (clay or shale) at the time of laying shall require wetting if the unit's initial rate of water absorption exceeds 30 grams per 30 square inches (19 355mm2) per minute or 0.035 ounce per square inch (1 g/645mm2 ) per minute, as determined by ASTM C 67. NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop fabricated metal items. 1. Ledge and shelf angles. 2. Bollards. 3. Stanchion for automatic door operator pushpad. (option, see Section 08 7100 — Door Hardware) 4. Structural supports for miscellaneous attachments. 5. Anchor bolts for sill plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for embedded anchors and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section in concrete. 2. Section 04 73 00 — Manufactured Stone Masonry: Execution requirements for embedded anchors and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section in masonry. 3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field applied paint finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A123/A1231M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A153/A1531M - ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 7. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 8. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High- Strength Low -Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. 9. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 10. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 11. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 12. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 -ksi Yield Strength. B. American Welding Society: Metal Fabrications 055000 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 3. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. C. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association: 1. NOMMA Guideline 1 - Joint Finishes. D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 3. SSPC SP 10 - Near -White Blast Cleaning. 4. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint. 5. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Sections 018113 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finish joints in accordance with NOMMA Guideline 1. 1.5 MOCKUP A. Not Required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage. C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Plate: ASTM A572/A572M; Grade 50. C. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40. Metal Fabrications 055000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 E. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33 Structural Quality with galvanized coating. F. Bolts: ASTM A307; Grade A or B. Finish: Mechanically galvanized. G. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. Finish: Mechanically galvanized. H. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized. I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. J. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. K. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type I Inorganic. 2.2 MATERIALS - STAINLESS STEEL A. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276 or ASTM A479/A479M; Type 302 or 304. B. Tubing: ASTM A269 or ASTM A554; Type 304 or 316. C. Pipe: ASTM A312/A312M, welded; Type 304. D. Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM A167; Type 302 or 304. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A354. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.6; type required for materials being welded. 2.3 LEDGE AND SHELF ANGLES A. Ledge and Shelf Angles, Channels and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of joists, masonry, counters; galvanized or prime paint, one coat, as indicated on Drawings. 2.4 PROTECTION PLATES AT EXPOSED BEAM ENDS A. Steel plate, profile to match end of beam, 3/16 -inch thick. B. Shop prime. Paint per Section 09 9000. 2.5 BOLLARDS A. Bollards: Steel pipe, crowned cap, 8 inches diameter, 3' -0" high from finish grade, galvanized. B. Shop prime. Paint per Section 09 9000. 2.6 STANCHION FOR AUTO DOOR OPERATOR PAD A. Fabricated stanchion: 1. Steel tube section, 6" x 6" square, steel plate cap welded and ground smooth. 2. Shop prime. Paint per Section 09 9000. B. Contractor Option: Prefabricated accessibility bollard per Section 087100. 2.7 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS A. Joist Hangers and Other Structural Supports: Steel sections, shape and size as indicated on Drawings and as required to support applied loads with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span; prime paint, one coat. Metal Fabrications 055000 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.8 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307; Grade A. B. Shape: Hooked or Straight as indicated on the Drawings. C. Furnish with nut and washer; unfinished. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.10 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STEEL A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one coat except where galvanizing is specified. D. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; minimum 1.2 oz /sq ft coating thickness; galvanize after fabrication. E. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot - Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A1531M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. 2.11 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal and aluminum where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. Metal Fabrications 055000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval of Architect /Engineer prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint or galvanizing repair paint to match shop finishes. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story or for every 12 ft in height whichever is greater, non - cumulative. C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. D. Maximum Out -of- Position: 1/4 inch. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION Metal Fabrications 055000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes roof perimeter nailers; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, hardware, wood trim and wall- mounted display boards; telephone and electrical panel back boards; and preservative treatment of wood. B. Refer to Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Project Requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat - Formed Wood Particleboard. B. American Wood- Preservers' Association: 1. AWPA C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. 2. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire - Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. The Redwood Inspection Service: 1. IRIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber. F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: 1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. U. S Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels. 3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. I. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. J. Western Wood Products Association: 1. WWPA G -5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061053 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Submit technical data on wood preservative and fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. D. Certification of place of material extraction, and location of manufacture within 500 miles of project site. Date Submitted Date Approved Supplie /Manufacturer 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by DOC PS 20. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by EWA - The Engineered Wood Association. 3. Lumber: DOC PS 20. 4. Wood Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each preservative treated and fire retardant treated material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLIB and WWPA G -5. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, Doug -Fir No. 1 species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat where indicated. C. Plywood: APA /EWA Rated Sheathing, Douglas -Fir AC Exterior Grade, fire - treated for electrical boards. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 APA /EWA Waferboard or Oriented Strand Board; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; unsanded faces. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061053 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA C2 using waterborne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage for lumber; C9 for plywood. B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Pressure treatment, AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood, Interior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated. D. Moisture Content After Treatment: [Redried] [Kiln dried (KDAT)]. 1. Lumber: Maximum 19 percent. 2. Structural Panels: Maximum 15 percent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive blocking, curbing and framing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of blocking, curbing and framing items. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Construct curb members of solid wood sections. D. Curb roof openings. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant. F. Space framing and furring 16 inches oc. G. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered. H. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Size back boards minimum of 12 inches beyond size of electrical and telephone panel. 3.4 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site -sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061053 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.5 SCHEDULES The schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to the Drawings for items not specifically scheduled. A. Roof Blocking: S /P /F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatment. Size and shapes as indicated on the Drawings. B. Wood embedded in or in contact with concrete and masonry which is in contact with earth: Pressure preservative treatment. C. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: 3/4 inch thick plywood, square edges, fire - treated to AWPA Specifications P -17, 8' -0" high to 12" beyond sides of equipment. Do not paint. D. Concealed Wood Backing /Blocking: S /P /F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content. Size and shape to suit conditions. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061053 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Finish carpentry items; wood chair rails, wall base, interior door frames, and miscellaneous wood trim. 2. Plastic laminate wall protection. 3. Related attachment accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Conform to General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1. 2. Conform to Section 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI - Quality Standards Illustrated. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA LID 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. C. Woodwork Institute: 1. WI - Manual of Millwork. D. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) for Certified Wood Products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories to minimum scale of 1 -1/2 inch to 1 ft. D. Product Data: 1. Submit data on laminated plastic materials and adhesives. 2. MSDS documentation indicating compliance with low VOC requirements for adhesives and coatings /finishes. E. Samples: 1. Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch long. 2. Submit two samples of laminates, mouldings, and shop finishes. F. Certification: Submit copy of fabricator's authorization to use AWI Grade Stamps. G. If applicable, submit documentation of FSC certified wood . 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium Grade. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Finish Carpentry 062000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Interior Hardwood Lumber: AWI Premium Grade; maximum moisture content of 6 -8 percent; and the following: 1. Species: Maple 2. Cut or Slicing: Quarter sawn 3. Fingerjointing not permitted B. Interior Softwood Lumber: Clear Cedar or Hem /Fir No. 1, plain sawn, 5 -10 percent range moisture content. C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LID 3, GP50 for horizontal surfaces, GP28 for vertical surfaces, CL20 for cabinet liner surfaces, BK20 for undecorated backing sheets, and matte surface texture as selected. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates: FS A -A -1936 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. Comply with VOC limits indicated in Division 1 for adhesives. B. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. D. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of DougFir /Larch or HemFir species. E. Aluminum Edge Trim: Extruded convex shape; smooth surface finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; clear anodized finish. F. Continuous Soffit Vents: Galvanized or aluminum soffit vents, profile as indicated on Drawings. G. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. H. Wood Plugs: Match hardwood lumber species for countersunk fasteners. I. Wood Treatment: 1. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear. Finish Carpentry 062000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Moisture Content After Treatment: Redried. a. Lumber: As specified for components in this section. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI Premium standards. B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. C. Cap exposed high pressure decorative laminate finish edges with aluminum trim. D. Shop prepare and identify components for end match grain matching during site erection. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply high pressure decorative laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse face of high pressure decorative laminate finished surfaces. 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI - Section 1500 Factory Finishing; Premium Quality; Clear Transparent Type Lacquer. Product shall comply with low VOC limits. E. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. F. Seal internal surfaces and semi - concealed surfaces. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Inspect Work performed at fabricator's facility to verify conformance to Contract Documents. C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop inspections are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. Finish Carpentry 062000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Premium quality standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install components or trim with fasteners, or wall adhesive by gun application, to suit application. E. Preparation For Site Finishing: 1. Set exposed fasteners. Countersink fasteners and apply wood plugs. Sand work smooth. 2. Set exposed fasteners and apply wood filler at indentations. Sand work smooth. 3. Shop finish wood trim, and site touch up following installation. 4. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Offset from Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. The schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to the Drawings for items not specifically scheduled. B. Interior Wood (WD): 1. FSC certified wood, maple species. 2. Clear, matte finish. a. Wood Chair Rail: Profile as shown on the Drawings; countersink fasteners and apply wood plugs to match rail. b. Wood Base: 1x4 nominal; refer to Finish Schedule and Interior Elevations for locations. C. Interior Wood Door Frames: 1. FSC certified wood, hem /fir species. 2. Casings: FSC certified wood, maple species. 3. Clear, matte finish. D. Interior Wood Ceiling Finish: 1. FSC certified wood, clear grade cedar or hem /fir species. 2. Dimensions: 1 x 6 nominal. 3. Clear, matte finish. E. PL -1: Plastic laminate wall protection at Janitor sinks: 48" high wainscot w/ aluminum edge moulding; color as selected by Architect. Refer to Interior Elevations for locations. 1. Color as selected: END OF SECTION Finish Carpentry 062000-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Custom casework. a. Transparent finished casework. b. Opaque finished casework. C. Plastic laminate finished casework. 2. Counter tops. a. Wood counter tops. b. Plastic laminate finished counter tops. 3. Cabinet hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 4. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 5. Section 114000 — Food Service Equipment & Section 012000 — Price & Payment (allowances) 6. Plumbing utilities and fixtures. 7. Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. 2. ANSI A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. 3. ANSI A208.1 - Mat - Formed Wood Particleboard. B. APA -The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA /EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. C. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 4. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. E. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA /DHS /EHLB /R -174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. F. Forest Stewardship Council: 1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines. G. Green Seal: 1. GS -11 - 1st Edition, May 20, 1993 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements. 2. GS -36 - October 19, 2000 - Aerosol Adhesives. H. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association: 1. HPVA HP -1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA LID 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. K. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. L. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.3 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Submit data on high pressure decorative laminates. 3. Submit data for hardware accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Samples: 1. Submit two, 8 x 10 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish. 2. Submit two samples, illustrating counter top finish. E. Qualification Statements: 1. Submit fabricator and licensed professional experience qualifications. 1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design submittals. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements. 1. Materials Resources Certificates: a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products. b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site. C. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest. 2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates: a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer. b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each coating. C. Certify each composite wood and agrifiber product contains no added urea - formaldehyde resins. C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products. 1. Provide cost data for the following products: a. Products with recycled material content. b. Regional products. C. Certified wood products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI AWS, Section 10 and Section 11; Premium Grade. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 200/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (Class C). 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience with similar projects, and with Olympia Federal Savings. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Manufacturer: All wood products designated as "FSC Certified" in this specification shall be certified according to the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council (www.fscus.org) with vendor's Chain -of- Custody (COC) numbers available for each product. C. The following North American certification bodies are accredited by the FSC to certify forest products: 1. Scientific Certification Systems (www.scscertified.com) 2. SmartWood (www.smartwood.org) 1.8 MOCKUP — Not Required 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect units from moisture damage. C. Maintain storage space relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2. 1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Ambient conditions control facilities for product storage and installation. B. During and after installation of Work of this section, maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. 1. Maintain relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2. 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design compliance. B. Materials and Resources Characteristics: 1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content. a. Provide building materials with recycled content such that post- consumer recycled content plus one -half of pre- consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent of the cost of materials used for the Project. 2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of Project site Including: Not applicable. 3. Certified Wood Materials: Furnish wood materials certified in accordance with FSC Guidelines including: Wood, engineered wood products, and wood -based panel products. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 a. Provide a minimum of 50% (by cost) of wood -based materials. C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics: 1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2. Interior Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS -36. 3. Interior Flat and Non -Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS -11. 4. Interior Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Contain no added urea - formaldehyde resins. 5. High- Pressure Laminates: GREENGUARD IEQ certified. 2.2 CUSTOM CASEWORK A. Fabricator: Martin Furniture Manufacturing 9730 Lathrop Industrial Drive Southwest Olympia, WA 98512 (360) 709 -9147 B. Style and construction as provided on fabricator's previous similar project. If the following indicates a conflict, verify with Architect. C. Transparent Finished Custom Casework: AWI AWS Section 10; Premium Grade. 1. Exterior and Interior Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood lumber and veneered plywood. 2. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood lumber and veneer plywood or decorative overlay plywood, as indicated in approved shop drawings. 3. Door and Drawer Matching: Per fabricator's standard on previous similar project. D. Plastic Laminate Finished Custom Casework: Frameless construction; flush overlay style; AWI AWS Section 10; Premium Grade. 1. Exterior and Interior Exposed Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate over particleboard or medium density fiberboard. 2. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate over particleboard or medium density fiberboard. E. Casework Construction Details: 1. Drawer Side Joinery: Per manufacturer standard on previous similar project. 2. Drawer and Door Edge Profile: Per manufacturer standard on previous similar project. 3. Toe Base Finish: Rubber base to match wall base. Refer to Section 09 6500. 4. Grain Direction: Vertical. Verify horizontal for drawer fronts and skirts. F. Wood Counter Tops (View Booth 107): Solid banded with veneer overlay; AWI AWS Section 11; Custom Grade. 1. Core: Particleboard, medium density fiberboard or veneer core plywood per manufacturer standard on previous similar project. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Deck at Splash Joint Type: Horizontal butt or none if carpet tile splash. 3. Finish: Carpet tile adhered to countertop surface. G. Plastic Laminate Finished Counter Tops: Self -edged and hardwood -edged where indicated on Drawings; AWI AWS Section 11; Premium Grade. 1. Core: Certified particleboard, medium density fiberboard or veneer core plywood per fabricator's standard on previous similar project. a. Core at Sink Tops: Exterior or exterior glue type panels. 2. Splash Top Profile: Square with scribe, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Deck at Splash Joint Type: Horizontal butt. 4. Front Edge: Self -edge or solid wood as indicated on Drawings. 5. Splash Assembly: Fabricator option, shop - assembled or field - assembled. H. Solid Surface Fabricated Counter Tops: 1. Quartz by DuPont "ZodiaQ ", fabricate to 3/4 -inch thickness. 2. Edges: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Color: Space Black, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; Douglas fir species. 1. Cut: Plain sawn B. Hardwood Lumber: Maple species 1. Cut: Plain sawn or per fabricator's standard on previous similar project. C. Lumber Moisture Content Range: 5 -10 percent. D. Softwood Plywood: APA /EWA PS 1 and HPVA HP -1; particleboard, medium density fiberboard, veneer or lumber core; Douglas fir face species. E. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1; particleboard, medium density fiberboard, veneer or lumber core; maple face species. 1. Veneer Slicing: Rotary or per manufacturer standard on previous similar project. 2. Matching of Individual Leaves to Each Other: Per fabricator's standard on previous similar project 3. Matching Across Panel Face: per manufacturer standard on previous similar project. 4. Matching or Relationship of Panels to Each Other: Per fabricator's standard on previous similar project. F. Decorative Overlay Plywood: APA /EWA PS 1 and HPVA HP -1; particleboard or medium density fiberboard core; melamine or polyester decorative faces; PVC or polyester edge banding; color and pattern as selected. G. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Grade M2 or better; composed of wood chips or sawdust, medium density. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Fire Retardant Particleboard: ASTM E84; 25 maximum flame spread index and 450 maximum smoke developed index. H. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, composed of wood fibers, medium density. 1. Fire Retardant Fiberboard: ASTM E84; 25 maximum flame spread index and 450 maximum smoke developed index. Medium Density Overlay: APA /EWA PS 1; softwood plywood, exterior type, with paper face suitable for opaque finish. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, % inch thick, smooth two sides. K. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LID 3; color, pattern, and matte surface texture as selected. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS; 0.048 inches thick. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS; 0.028 inches thick. 3. Post - Formed Surfaces: HGP; 0.039 inches thick. 4. Fire Resistant Surfaces: HGF; 0.048 inches thick. 5. Cabinet Liner: CLS; 0.020 inches thick. 6. Backing Sheet: BKL; 0.020 inches thick. 2.4 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated, having flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 and showing no evidence of significant progressive combustion when test is continued for an additional 20 minute period; Interior Type. 1. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material. 2. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. B. Moisture Content after Treatment: Redried or Kiln dried (KDAT). 1. Lumber: As specified for interior lumber. 2. Plywood: Maximum 15 percent. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate casework to AWI AWS Section 10, Premium Grade. B. Fabricate counter tops to AWI AWS Section 11, Premium Grade. C. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. D. Fit exposed plywood edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only. E. Cap exposed high pressure decorative laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. F. Door and Drawer Fronts: % inch thick. G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting. Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 H. Apply high pressure decorative laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate plastic laminate joints minimum 18 inches from sink cut -outs. I. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate finished surfaces as required by AWI AWS for specified Grade. J. Fabricate cabinets and counter tops with cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. K. Shop glaze glass materials using Interior Dry method. 2.6 FINISHES A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 5; Premium Grade; Clear Transparent Type: Per fabricator's standard on previous similar project. E. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. F. Finish in accordance with Section 09 9000. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Veneer Edge Band: AWI AWS; standard wood veneer edge band matching face veneer. C. Glass: Type as specified in Section 08 8000. D. Accent Glazing: Lumicor resin panels, "Madagascar" E. Safety Glass: Clear, fully tempered or laminated, % -inch thick or as indicated. F. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM A153/A153M, hot dipped galvanized or ASTM B695, Class 55 mechanically galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667. G. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. H. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. Grommets: Plastic or metal material for cut -outs. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, similar to fabricator's standard hardware and accessories used in similar project for the following: Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -8 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Shelf Standards and Rests 2. Shelf Brackets 3. Drawer and Door Pulls 4. Cabinet Locks 5. Catches 6. Drawer Slides 7. Hinges PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation. B. Prime paint surfaces of casework items and assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install casework in accordance with AWI AWS Section 10 Premium Grade. B. Install casework in accordance with AWI AWS Section 11 Premium Grade. C. Set and secure casework and counter tops in place; rigid, plumb, and level. D. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. E. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 1. Site glaze glass materials using Interior Dry method. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Conform to AWI AWS Section 10 requirements for the following: 1. Smoothness. 2. Gaps. 3. Flushness. 4. Flatness. 5. Alignment Architectural Wood Casework 064100 -9 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION Architectural Wood Casework 064100-10 Lumicor. Natural ) Grasses & Reeds ) MADAGASCAR TM SCALE 131/2 " x 3' /z" 9x9cm Scale images based on approximate size of 48'. x 96" sheet. (1219 x 2438 mm) PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS SCALE 18" x 8" • 20 x 20 cm 3/64" .045" (1.1 mm) HorizontaWertical Fade 1/16" .060' (1.5 mm) 1/8" .118" (3 mm) 5/32" .160" (4 mm) 3/16" .196" (5 mm) 1/4' .236' (6 mm) • • 3/8" .354" (9 mm) • • 1/2" .472' (12 mm) • • 3/4" .708" (18 mm) • • ill --------------------------------------- .944' (24 mm) • • Standard: 48"x96" (1219 x 2438 mm) • • Oversize: 48" x 120" (1219 x 3048 mm) • • Oversize: 59 "x120" (1499x3048mm) • • Standard Finishes Gloss/Matte Decor Direction HorizontaWertical Fade No Price Group C *Not all decors are available in every gauge and may vary by resin. Gauge tolerance is ± 10 %. KEYJ LC = Lumiclear LF = Lumiform LS = Lumishield EX • = Option Available DESCRIPTION www.lumicor.com 11.888.LUMICOR W_ 1 n 0% H < 1 Standard Decor Direction A A Horizontal/Vertical > v SCALE 1 48" x 96" 122 x244 cm 25% 50% 75% = 100% OPAQUE OPACITY Based on approximate amount of light showing through the panel. The subtle colors of these beautiful grasses and reeds are elegant and vibrant and will bring the splendor of nature into your space. Use a lighter density for an airier appearance or heavier density for more privacy. All natural decors are produced using a hand applied technique. Layout and coverage will vary slightly from sheet to sheet due to the artisan nature of the manufacturing process. Some products use natural materials that can change color over time and will vary in size, shape, color and texture within a single sheet. Colors may vary with harvest season. AVAILABLE ADD -ONS ChemShield'" A barrier used to increase the chemical resistance of Lumiclear panels. Reflective Finishes'" A reflective surface that adds dimension and a sophisticated sparkle. Illume" Adding Illume to the back of a panel provides a soft light diffusion. Lumiguard " A high - performance resin with anti - microbial technology and enhanced chemical resistance applied to any Lumiclear panel. Marker Board" A high quality dry erase finish that can be added to any Lumicor panel. Opaque "" An opaque backing on Lumiclear or Lumiform creates a fully opaque panel. UV Cap " An additional layer of LIV protection on front and back. m Copyright Lumicor 2014—All Rights Reserved. Images are for reference only and may not exactly represent the final product. Madagascar- Product Spec. Sheet Material, color, density or scale may vary based on the artisan nature of the product. Updated April 21, 2014 Lumicor. Natural > Grasses & Reeds > MADAGASCAR TM www.lumicor.com 11.888.LUMICOR © Copyright Lumicor 2014 —All Rights Reserved. Images are for reference only and may not exactly represent the final product. Madagascar T" Product Spec. Sheet Material, color, density or scale may vary based on the artisan nature of the product. Updated April 21, 2014 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 06 6116 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast plastic fabrications as scheduled at end of section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework. 3. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA /DHS /EHLB /R -174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168- January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials, colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, methods of support, integration of electrical and data components, and anchorages. C. Product Data: Submit data on specified component products, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Samples: Submit two samples illustrating color, texture, and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation of opening required, rough -in sizes; furnish templates for cast -in or placed frames or anchors; tolerances for item placement, temporary bracing of components. Solid Surfacing Fabrications 066116 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design submittals. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements. 1. Indoor Air Quality Certificates: a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer. C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products. 1. Provide cost data for the following products: a. Products with recycled material content. b. Regional products. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit list of approved cleaning materials and procedures required; list of substances harmful to component materials. Include instructions for stain removal, and surface and gloss restoration. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.8 MOCKUP — None Required 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Section 0110 00 - Summary: Work sequence. B. Sequence Work to permit installation of adjacent affected construction, data, security and electrical rough -in. Solid Surfacing Fabrications 066116 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish ten year manufacturer product warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATIONS A. Refer to Section 06 4100 — Architectural Wood Casework 2.2 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS A. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics: 1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Quartz: Zodiaq as manufactured by DuPont. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by quartz manufacturer, cartridge dispensed. C. Color: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components to achieve shape and configuration as indicated on Drawings. B. Radius corners and edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify existing conditions and dimensions. C. Verifyjoint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Align work plumb and level. B. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. C. Seal to adjacent construction in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Solid Surfacing Fabrications 066116 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Indicated Dimension: 1/8 inch. C. Maximum Offset From Indicated Position: 1/8 inch. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean work under provisions of 017000. C. Clean and polish fabrication surfaces. END OF SECTION Solid Surfacing Fabrications 066116 -4 HOW TO CLEAN DUPONT— ZODIAQ® QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS Learning how to clean DuPont'" Zodiaq® quartz surface countertops takes no time at all — thanks to the stain - resistance of this remarkable material. Zodiaq® quartz surfacing is a tough, non - porous, chemically resistant, high- performance surface that elevates residential kitchen aesthetics with =,moo the natural beauty of quartz. Just Use Water and a Paper Towel With simple, care, Zodiaq® quartz surface will retain its radiant, lustrous appearance for many years. For routine cleaning, simply wipe down your countertop with a damp cloth or paper towel and, if necessary, a small amount of non - bleach, non - abrasive cleanser. Clean Up Spills Right Away— Before They Can Dry Even though Zodiaq® surfaces resists permanent staining when exposed to liquids (such as wine, vinegar, tea, lemon juice and soda) or fruits :. and vegetables, you'll want to wipe up food and liquid spills as soon as possible. For stubborn or dried spills, use a nonabrasive cleaning pad such as a white 3M Scotch- Brite°* scrub pad coupled with Formula 4090** Glass & Surface Cleaner ** or a comparable cleaning product. ESSENTIAL GEAR Cutting Boards and Trivets DuPontTM Zodiaq° quartz surfaces are heat- and scratch - resistant, but not heat- and scratch - proof. Use trivets or pads with hot pots, and always use a cutting board. Never chop or slice food directly on your countertops. If any of the substances mentioned below come into contact with Zodiaq° surfaces, rinse the exposed surface immediately and thoroughly with water. No Wax or Polish Necessary Because it is non - porous, Zodiaq® quartz surface does not require sealants or waxes. ZodiagO keeps its lustrous gloss and ultra - smooth surface without polishing or applying sealant. Do Not Use Bleach Avoid using cleaners that contain bleach. Always follow the cleaner manufacturer's use instructions and exercise proper care when handling and storing any cleaning products. Avoid High -pH Cleaners Casual exposure to alkaline solutions, such as diluted bleach, will not damage Zodiaq® quartz surfaces. Highly alkaline (high pH) cleaners, such as oven cleaners and concentrated bleach, are not recommended. Removing Cooking Grease When grease from cooking is an issue, use Greased Lightning'"" * * *, or a comparable degreasing product, to help loosen and remove the grease from the surface. Follow the cleaner manufacturer's instructions for use. Permanent Markers Keep permanent markers and inks away from your countertops. Should these agents come into contact with the surface, clean first as outlined above in Routine Care. If the stain persists, moisten a cloth with Goo Gone ® * * * *, or a comparable product, and rub it into the stain. Rinse thoroughly with warm water to remove any cleaner residue. Keep Solvents and Powerful Chemicals Off the Counter Avoid exposing Zodiaq° quartz surfaces to strong chemicals and solvents, especially paint removers or furniture strippers containing trichlorethane or methylene chloride. Keep nail polish remover, bleach, bluing, permanent markers or inks, and oil soaps away from your Zodiaq °quartz countertops. Heat Damage Prevention To maintain the beauty of Zodiaq °quartz surfaces, do not place hot skillets or roasting pans directly onto the surface. DuPont recommends the use of trivets and hot pads. Keep permanent markers and inks away from your countertops. Should these agents come into contact with the surface, clean first as outlined above in Routine Care. If the stain persists, moisten a cloth with Goo Gone® * * * *, or a comparable product, and rub it into the stain. Rinse thoroughly with warm water to remove any cleaner residue. Keep Solvents and Powerful Chemicals Off the Counter Avoid exposing Zodiaq° quartz surfaces to strong chemicals and solvents, especially paint removers or furniture strippers containing trichlorethane or methylene chloride. Keep nail polish remover, bleach, bluing, permanent markers or inks, and oil soaps away from your Zodiaq °quartz countertops. Heat Damage Prevention To maintain the beauty of Zodiaq° quartz surfaces, do not place hot skillets or roasting pans directly onto the surface. DuPont recommends the use of trivets and hot pads. Dealing with More Difficult Spills and Materials Materials that harden as they dry (such as gum, food, grease, nail polish or paint) are especially tenacious. Remove these by gently scraping away the excess with a plastic putty knife. Backed by a so -Year Limited Residential Warranty In the unlikely event that you do experience any problems due to a manufacturer's defect, you can rest assured that DuPont backs its Zodiaq° brand quartz surface with a ten -year limited residential warranty. 10 -Year Limited Warranty n..ven1- zonioy * Scotch -BriW is a registered trademark of the 3M Company. ** Formula 4091 Glass & Surface Cleaner is a registered trademark of the Clorox Company. * ** Greased Lightning'" is a registered trademark of the Chemtura Corporation. * * ** Goo Gone® is a registered trademark of Goo Gone®. © 2013 DuPont. All Rights reserved. The DuPont Oval Logo, DuPont- and Zodiaq® are registered trademarks or trademarks of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company or its affiliates. K27486 (11/13) 1U RD. i- Zodiaq® NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 1100 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cold applied asphalt bituminous dampproofing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing. B. National Roofing Contractors Association: 1. NRCA - The NRCA Waterproofing and Dampproofing Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Date Submitted Date Approved 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until membrane has cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. Manufacturers: 1. Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Karnak Corp. 3. W.R. Meadows 4. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Cold Asphaltic Materials: 1. Emulsified Asphalt: ASTM D1227, unreinforced Dampproofing 071100-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. C. Verify items penetrating surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Prime surfaces in accordance with NRCA - Waterproofing Manual. B. Prime surfaces at rate per sq ft. recommended by manufacturer. Permit primer to dry. C. Apply cold bitumen with mop or roller. D. Apply bitumen at temperature limited by equiviscous temperature (EVT) plus or minus 25 degrees F; do not exceed finish blowing temperature for four hours. E. Apply bitumen in two coats, continuous and uniform, as recommended by manufacturer. F. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation to top of footings. G. Seal items Projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. H. Immediately backfill against dampproofing to protect from damage. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Foundation Walls: Two coatings of asphalt dampproofing. B. Foundation Walls at Planters (above interior slab elevation): Refer to Section 07 17000 — Bentonite Waterproofing. END OF SECTION Dampproofing 071100 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 1700 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bentonite clay waterproofing system. 2. Accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal work, flashing, and trim associated with roofing and waterproofing membranes. 2. Section 07 9500 - Expansion Control: Expansion or control joint cover assemblies. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate details and locations of required flashings, joints, sealing at penetrations, reglets and waterproofing of holes, slots, and sleeves. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit special preparation of substrate, panel attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring attention. F. Field Quality - Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor - furnished tests and inspections. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging, including application instructions. C. Maintain bentonite products dry. D. Protection: Protect with waterproof cover. Store on blocking to prevent ground moisture contact. E. Maintain minimum ambient storage temperatures of 40 degrees F for bentonite gel products. Bentonite Waterproofing 071700-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition control facilities for product storage and installation. B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application. 1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements of surfaces scheduled for waterproofing prior to installation. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties. B. Furnish two -year installer's warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. C. Furnish five (5) year manufacturer's warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. D. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING A. Manufacturer List: 1. Quality Standard: Cetco; Arlington Heights, IL; 800 - 527 -9948 2. Carlisle 3. Trremco 4. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Refer to attached Product Data for "Swelltite" Composite Bentonite Waterproofing System. B. Waterproofing Membrane: Composite of sodium bentonite compound integrally bonded to a goemembrane liner. 1. Overall Thickness: 90 mil C. Accessories: 1. Drainage Mat: Aquadrain Composite 2. Joint Packing (Cant): Bentoseal or M -2000 3. Seam Tape: per manufacturer 4. Grade Flashing: GF -40SA 5. Termination Bar & Seal: CETSEAL Bentonite Waterproofing 071700-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and durable and are free of frozen matter, standing water, or foreign matter detrimental to application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that items penetrating surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. Masonry wall unit cells shall be filled, and all mortar joints completely filled and struck flush prior to membrane installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing. C. Remove concrete fins, projections, and form ties. D. Fill holes, cracks, honeycombs, and voids with non - shrink cementitious grout; trowel level with monolithic wall surface. E. Seal construction joints, grouted holes, and voids with joint packing, and joint and detail mastic at minimum 1/8 inch thick and extending 3 inches beyond joints and filled holes and voids. F. Seal all vertical inside corners with continuous 3/4 -inch fillet of joint and detail mastic. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Vertical Surfaces: 1. Apply single layer of bentonite membrane by removing clear release film from back of membrane; install over bentonite cant starting at base of foundation. 2. Refer to Instructions at end of this Section. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Temporary Sheeting: 1. Protect installed waterproofing from precipitation or ground water and extended UV exposure with temporary polyethylene sheeting. 2. When backfilling begins, remove sheeting. 3.5 ATTACHMENTS A. Swelltite Technical Data Sheet -4 pages END OF SECTION Bentonite Waterproofing 071700-3 BUILDING ENVELOPE TECHNICAL DATA SWELLTITE@ COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Swelltite is a highly effective Waterproofing composite of sodium bentonite compound integrally bonded to a geomembrane liner. This composition combines the active waterproofing benefits of sodium bentonite with the strength and puncture resistance of a thick geomembrane liner. Swelltite is a true advancement in waterproofing membrane technology. Unlike other membrane systems which require near - perfect installation, Swelltite's reactive bentonite compound can expand to seal installation imperfections or small punctures in the membrane. Swelltite is manufactured at a factory controlled thickness of 90 mils (0.090 ") assuring the specifier, contractor, and owner of consistent material application. This engineered composite consists of a white (heat reflective) 12 -mil geomembrane liner and 78 -mils of bentonite compound with a clear release film attached. Swelltite contains virtually zero VOC, can be installed in almost any weather condition to green concrete, and most importantly, has proven effective for more than 20 years. Swelltite works by forming a monolithic membrane upon hydration with water. When wetted, unconfined bentonite can swell up to 15 times its dry volume. When confined under pressure the swell is controlled, forming a dense, impervious waterproofing membrane. The swelling action of the bentonite compound can seal small concrete cracks caused by ground settlement, concrete shrinkage, or seismic action; problems over which there is normally no control. APPLICATIONS Swelltite is designed for below -grade vertical and horizontal structural foundation surfaces, as well as, above grade split - slab construction. Typical belowgrade applications include backfilled concrete walls, masonry block walls, earth - covered roofs, and tunnels. Typical above grade split -slab construction applications include plaza decks, parking decks, and balconies. Additionally, Swelltite can be used for interior split - slabapplications for mechanical rooms, kitchens, and laboratory facilities. Applications may include structures under continuous or intermittent hydrostatic pressure. INSTALLATION General. Install Swe I Itite in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines. Use accessory products as recommended. Install Swelltite with the bentonite compound directly against the surface to be waterproofed. For ease of handling, the sticky bentonite compound is covered with a siliconized release film that must be removed during installation. Schedule waterproofing material installation to permit prompt placement of backfill material or concrete. For applications not covered herein, contact CETCO for specific installation guidelines. Storage: Store Swelltite and accessory products in a dry location protected from construction operations and weather. Protect materials from moisture, excessive temperatures and prolonged exposure to direct sunlight during storage. When storing materials outside at a jobsite, provide weather -proof covering, top and all sides (allow for adequate ventilation). Do not double stack pallets in storage or during shipment. Preparatory Work. Structural concrete surfaces should be smooth and free of dirt, rock, debris, oil, grease, laitenance, or other foreign materials. Remove form fins and other protrusions to match substrate surface. Completely fill any Form -tie 2870 Forbs Avenue Hoffman Estates, IL 60192 847.851.1800 1800.527.9948 holes, honeycombing, voids, and cracks with non - shrink cementituous grout, M -2000 or Bentoseal. Concrete surfaces to receive M -2000 Liquid Flashing should be water cured a minimum of 7 days prior to application. Where possible, design horizontal concrete surfaces with proper slope to drain. FOUNDATION WALL INSTALLATION Before installing Swelltite membranetofoun- dation walls, prepare substrate, and detail all vertical inside corners, penetrations, and the footing/wall joint as follows: Vertical Inside Corners: Install a 3/4" (18 mm) thick, continuous fillet of Bentoseal® at all vertical inside corners. Penetrations: Apply a 3/4" (18 mm) thick fillet of Bentoseal around base of penetra- tions. Extend Bentoseal a minimum of 6" (150 mm) outward from penetration 90 -mils thick. After Swelltite membrane is installed, apply a counter flashing of Bentoseal at membrane edge around penetration. Footing/Wall Joint. Install at footing /wall joint a continuous 3/4" (18 mm) thick, 45° angle fillet of Bentoseal. White Geomembrane Liner Bentonite Siliconized Compound Release Film f :q www.CETCO.com SWELLTITE COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM Membrane Installation: REMOVE CLEAR RELEASE FILM from back of membrane be- fore installation. Starting at the base of the wall, install the membrane over the Bento- seal cant and onto the footing a minimum of 6" (150 mm) with bentonite compound directly against the wall (white liner side to- ward installer). Secure all membrane edges with washer -head mechanical fasteners maximum 24" (600 mm) on center or less as required to contour surface. Swelltite mem- brane may be installed either horizontally or vertically oriented. Overlap all membrane edges a inimum of 2" (50 mm). Stagger membrane roll ends a minimum of 12" (300 mm). Seal all membrane overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Continue membrane in- stallation to finished grade detail or as speci- fied. Cut membrane to closely fit around penetra- tions. Trowel a minimum 3/4" (18 mm) thick layer of Bentoseal around penetrations. Ex- tend Bentoseal onto penetration and com- pletely fill area between membrane edge and penetration. Seal all overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Terminate Swelltite membrane 12" (300 mm) below finshed grade elevation with washer -head fasteners maximum 12" (300 mm) on center. Install GF -40SA flashing to primed concrete substrate with bottom edge overlapping top edge of Swelltite membrane minimum 4" (100 mm). Overlap all roll ends a minumum 4" (100 mm) to form a continu- ous flashing. Height of flashing shall be per project details and specifications. Install a rigid termination bar along top edge of GF- 40SA; fastened maximum 12" (300 mm) on center. Complete grade termination detail with tooled bead of CETSEAL along the top edge, at all penetrations through the flashing and all exposed overlap seams. Backfill material should be placed and com- pacted to 85% Modified Proctor density im- mediately following the application of the membrane. If backfill cannot be applied immediately, protect membrane edges from percipitation with CETCO Seamtape. If back - fill contains sharp or irregular material, cover membrane with CETCO approved protec- tion material course to avoid damage during backfilling and compaction. Tie into underslab waterproofing as required by overlapping the underslab waterproofing a minimum of 6" (150 mm). When a drain tile is required, install it below the top of the footing. Masonry Block Walls: CETCO recom- mends that the masonry block cells be filled with cementituous grout or concrete. All mortarjoints should be completely filled and struck flush before membrane is installed to masonry walls. HORIZONTAL DECK INSTALLATION Before installing Swelltite membrane, pre- pare substrate and detail all drains, transi- tion corners and penetrations. Consult man- ufacturer if deck is precast concrete planks or for other conditions not stated herein. Drains: Trowel a minimum 90 -mil (2.3 mm) thick layer of M -2000 on the drain ring and continuing into the drains inward throat slope. Extend M -2000 a minimum of 6" (150 mm) around the drain. Allow m -2000 to cure a minimum of 12 hours prior to install- ing membrane. After Swelltite membrane is installed around drain, apply a 60 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 covering the membrane edge. Penetrations: Trowel a minimum 3/4" (18 mm) cant of M -2000 around the penetra- tion. Extend M -2000 outward from penetra- tion a minimum of 6" (150 mm) at 90 mils thick. After membrane has been installed overlapping M -2000 2" (50 mm), apply a 60- mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 at the membrane edge. Transition Corners: Apply a 3/4" (18 mm) thick M -2000 fillet to inside transition cor- ners. Then extend M -2000 at 90 -mil mini- mum thickness for 6" (150 mm) in both di- rections from the corner. Allow M -2000 to cure a minimum of 12 hours prior to install- ing membrane. After membrane has been installed to the corner, apply a 60 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 covering the membrane edge. Membrane Installation: REMOVE CLEAR RELEASE FILM from back of membrane before installation. Install membrane with bentonite compound directly against the deck (white liner side up) from the low point to the high point across the fall line to cre- ate a shingle -style installation. Overlap all membrane edges a minimum of 2" (50 mm). Stagger membrane roll ends a minimum 12" (300 mm). Seal all membrane overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Cut membrane to closely fit around pen- etrations overlapping previously installed M -2000. Trowel 90 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 over membrane edge. leis I10JR-1lW_1 SOI ., WAl:111199: lei 91 Apply A- 3000WB Adhesive by roller or sprayer at a rate of 250 -275 sq ft per gal- lon (25 sq m per 3.8 liters) and allow to cure (dry black) before applying membrane. After adhesive has cured, follow membrane instal- lation instructions for applicable applica- tion, foundation wall or deck, excluding the mechanical fasteners. Primed surfaces not covered with membrane during the same working day must be re- primed. SIZE AND PACKAGING Swelltite roll size is 40" wide by 37' 9" long (1.02 m x 11.5 m); 125 square feet (11.5 sq m) per roll. Each roll weighs approximately 81 lbs. (36.8 kg). LIMITATIONS Do not install Swelltite in standing water or during precipitation. If ground water contains strong acids, alkalies, or is of a conductiv- ity of 2,500 pmhos or greater, submit water samples to the manufacturer for compatibil- ity testing. Swelltite is not designed for unconfined above -grade waterproofing applications or subsurface applications that do not provide full confinement coverage. Do not install Swelltite on horizontal plaza deck applica- tions that utilize pavers placed on pedestals. Swelltite is not designed to waterproof ex- pansion joints. Expansion joints require a properly engineered expansion joint sealant product manufactured by other companies. CETSEAL GF -40SA Grade Flashir Compacted Backfill Aquadrain Drainage Composite Swelltite Waterproofin€ Membrane Drainage Pipe, Aquadrain 10OBD Cant of Bentc M -2000 For foundation walls, backfill should consist of compactible soils or crushed stone (3/4" or less). Compact soils to minimum 85% Modified Proctor density. Stone backfill larg- er than 3/4" (18 mm) will require the use of a protection course; consult CETCO for spe- cific guidelines. Avoid backfill with aggregate 1 -1/2" (38 mm) or larger. On horizontal decks, Swelltite requires prop- er containment from a topping ballast mate- rial. Swelltite requires a minimum 3" (75mm) thick structural concrete slab or a minimum paver assembly weight of 20 -lbs. (9 kg) per square foot (includes sand or grout leveling course). When compactible soil topping is used, it must be at least 18" thick and com- pacted to a minimum 85% Modified Proctor density. ACCESSORY PRODUCTS M -2000 Liquid Flashing°: M -2000 Liq- uid Flashing is a trowel -grade waterproofing mastic used as a detailing product around penetrations, drains and at corner transi- tions for horizontal deck and vertical wall installations. M -2000 is a single- component moisture curing elastomer that meets the re- quirements of ASTM C836 -84. BENTOSEAL®: trowel grade sodium ben - tonite compound used as a detailing mastic around penetrations and corner transitions for vertical wall Swelltite installations. A- 3000WB ADHESA E°: water -based latex adhesive applied to substrates to promote adhesion of Swelltite Membrane. Typical ap- plication rate 250 -275 sq ft /gallon. SEAMTAPE': tape used to seal membrane overlap seams. AQUADRAIN®: prefabricated drainage composite consisting of a heavy filter fabric adhered to a high- strength plastic drainage core. Aquadrain is available in 4'x 52' rolls. WATERSTOP-RX': expanding bentonite- based concrete joint strip waterstop de- signed to replace PVC dumbbell waterstops. Adhered into place with CETSEAL. GFl40SA: UV resistant flashing membrane for grade terminations and thru wall flashing. Backfilled concrete foundation wall detail Concrete Wall Waterstop -RX (min 3" coverage) f =:I www.CETCO.com SWELLTITE COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM GENERAL APPLICATION DETAILS Aquadrain Composite Swelltite Membra Topping: M-20001 Aquadrai Swelltite Membrar Watersto (min 3" cI ;rete ing Slab 'uctural ib Concrete Wz 3/4" Cant of Bentoseal Swelltite Membrane_ NOVEMBER 2010 Aquadrain Drainage Composite N�,, Concrete Pavers on Grout Leveling Bed Swelltite Membrane Concrete Wall GF -40SA 3/4" fillet of M -2000 Mastic a CETSEAL Metal Termination Bar fastened 12" on center Aquadrain Drainage _ Composite GF -40SA Grade Flashing IMPORTANT The information contained herein supersedes all previous printed versions, and is believed to be accurate and reliable. For the most up -to -date information, please visit www_CETCO.com. CETCO accepts no responsibility for the results obtained through application of this product. CETCO reserves the right to update information without notice_ © 2010 CETCO I PRINTED IN THE USA ON RECYCLED PAPER I FORM:STTD -11/10 Structural Slab CETSEAL Swelltite Membrane O www.CETCO.com 2870 Forbs Avenue Hoffman Estates, IL 60192 847.851.1800 1800.527.9948 BUILDING ENVELOPE TECHNICAL DATA SWELLTITE@ COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Swelltite is a highly effective Waterproofing composite of sodium bentonite compound integrally bonded to a geomembrane liner. This composition combines the active waterproofing benefits of sodium bentonite with the strength and puncture resistance of a thick geomembrane liner. Swelltite is a true advancement in waterproofing membrane technology. Unlike other membrane systems which require near - perfect installation, Swelltite's reactive bentonite compound can expand to seal installation imperfections or small punctures in the membrane. Swelltite is manufactured at a factory controlled thickness of 90 mils (0.090 ") assuring the specifier, contractor, and owner of consistent material application. This engineered composite consists of a white (heat reflective) 12 -mil geomembrane liner and 78 -mils of bentonite compound with a clear release film attached. Swelltite contains virtually zero VOC, can be installed in almost any weather condition to green concrete, and most importantly, has proven effective for more than 20 years. Swelltite works by forming a monolithic membrane upon hydration with water. When wetted, unconfined bentonite can swell up to 15 times its dry volume. When confined under pressure the swell is controlled, forming a dense, impervious waterproofing membrane. The swelling action of the bentonite compound can seal small concrete cracks caused by ground settlement, concrete shrinkage, or seismic action; problems over which there is normally no control. APPLICATIONS Swelltite is designed for below -grade vertical and horizontal structural foundation surfaces, as well as, above grade split - slab construction. Typical belowgrade applications include backfilled concrete walls, masonry block walls, earth - covered roofs, and tunnels. Typical above grade split -slab construction applications include plaza decks, parking decks, and balconies. Additionally, Swelltite can be used for interior split - slabapplications for mechanical rooms, kitchens, and laboratory facilities. Applications may include structures under continuous or intermittent hydrostatic pressure. INSTALLATION General. Install Swe I Itite in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines. Use accessory products as recommended. Install Swelltite with the bentonite compound directly against the surface to be waterproofed. For ease of handling, the sticky bentonite compound is covered with a siliconized release film that must be removed during installation. Schedule waterproofing material installation to permit prompt placement of backfill material or concrete. For applications not covered herein, contact CETCO for specific installation guidelines. Storage: Store Swelltite and accessory products in a dry location protected from construction operations and weather. Protect materials from moisture, excessive temperatures and prolonged exposure to direct sunlight during storage. When storing materials outside at a jobsite, provide weather -proof covering, top and all sides (allow for adequate ventilation). Do not double stack pallets in storage or during shipment. Preparatory Work. Structural concrete surfaces should be smooth and free of dirt, rock, debris, oil, grease, laitenance, or other foreign materials. Remove form fins and other protrusions to match substrate surface. Completely fill any Form -tie 2870 Forbs Avenue Hoffman Estates, IL 60192 847.851.1800 1800.527.9948 holes, honeycombing, voids, and cracks with non - shrink cementituous grout, M -2000 or Bentoseal. Concrete surfaces to receive M -2000 Liquid Flashing should be water cured a minimum of 7 days prior to application. Where possible, design horizontal concrete surfaces with proper slope to drain. FOUNDATION WALL INSTALLATION Before installing Swelltite membranetofoun- dation walls, prepare substrate, and detail all vertical inside corners, penetrations, and the footing/wall joint as follows: Vertical Inside Corners: Install a 3/4" (18 mm) thick, continuous fillet of Bentoseal® at all vertical inside corners. Penetrations: Apply a 3/4" (18 mm) thick fillet of Bentoseal around base of penetra- tions. Extend Bentoseal a minimum of 6" (150 mm) outward from penetration 90 -mils thick. After Swelltite membrane is installed, apply a counter flashing of Bentoseal at membrane edge around penetration. Footing/Wall Joint. Install at footing /wall joint a continuous 3/4" (18 mm) thick, 45° angle fillet of Bentoseal. White Geomembrane Liner Bentonite Siliconized Compound Release Film f :q www.CETCO.com SWELLTITE COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM Membrane Installation: REMOVE CLEAR RELEASE FILM from back of membrane be- fore installation. Starting at the base of the wall, install the membrane over the Bento- seal cant and onto the footing a minimum of 6" (150 mm) with bentonite compound directly against the wall (white liner side to- ward installer). Secure all membrane edges with washer -head mechanical fasteners maximum 24" (600 mm) on center or less as required to contour surface. Swelltite mem- brane may be installed either horizontally or vertically oriented. Overlap all membrane edges a inimum of 2" (50 mm). Stagger membrane roll ends a minimum of 12" (300 mm). Seal all membrane overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Continue membrane in- stallation to finished grade detail or as speci- fied. Cut membrane to closely fit around penetra- tions. Trowel a minimum 3/4" (18 mm) thick layer of Bentoseal around penetrations. Ex- tend Bentoseal onto penetration and com- pletely fill area between membrane edge and penetration. Seal all overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Terminate Swelltite membrane 12" (300 mm) below finshed grade elevation with washer -head fasteners maximum 12" (300 mm) on center. Install GF -40SA flashing to primed concrete substrate with bottom edge overlapping top edge of Swelltite membrane minimum 4" (100 mm). Overlap all roll ends a minumum 4" (100 mm) to form a continu- ous flashing. Height of flashing shall be per project details and specifications. Install a rigid termination bar along top edge of GF- 40SA; fastened maximum 12" (300 mm) on center. Complete grade termination detail with tooled bead of CETSEAL along the top edge, at all penetrations through the flashing and all exposed overlap seams. Backfill material should be placed and com- pacted to 85% Modified Proctor density im- mediately following the application of the membrane. If backfill cannot be applied immediately, protect membrane edges from percipitation with CETCO Seamtape. If back - fill contains sharp or irregular material, cover membrane with CETCO approved protec- tion material course to avoid damage during backfilling and compaction. Tie into underslab waterproofing as required by overlapping the underslab waterproofing a minimum of 6" (150 mm). When a drain tile is required, install it below the top of the footing. Masonry Block Walls: CETCO recom- mends that the masonry block cells be filled with cementituous grout or concrete. All mortarjoints should be completely filled and struck flush before membrane is installed to masonry walls. HORIZONTAL DECK INSTALLATION Before installing Swelltite membrane, pre- pare substrate and detail all drains, transi- tion corners and penetrations. Consult man- ufacturer if deck is precast concrete planks or for other conditions not stated herein. Drains: Trowel a minimum 90 -mil (2.3 mm) thick layer of M -2000 on the drain ring and continuing into the drains inward throat slope. Extend M -2000 a minimum of 6" (150 mm) around the drain. Allow m -2000 to cure a minimum of 12 hours prior to install- ing membrane. After Swelltite membrane is installed around drain, apply a 60 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 covering the membrane edge. Penetrations: Trowel a minimum 3/4" (18 mm) cant of M -2000 around the penetra- tion. Extend M -2000 outward from penetra- tion a minimum of 6" (150 mm) at 90 mils thick. After membrane has been installed overlapping M -2000 2" (50 mm), apply a 60- mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 at the membrane edge. Transition Corners: Apply a 3/4" (18 mm) thick M -2000 fillet to inside transition cor- ners. Then extend M -2000 at 90 -mil mini- mum thickness for 6" (150 mm) in both di- rections from the corner. Allow M -2000 to cure a minimum of 12 hours prior to install- ing membrane. After membrane has been installed to the corner, apply a 60 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 covering the membrane edge. Membrane Installation: REMOVE CLEAR RELEASE FILM from back of membrane before installation. Install membrane with bentonite compound directly against the deck (white liner side up) from the low point to the high point across the fall line to cre- ate a shingle -style installation. Overlap all membrane edges a minimum of 2" (50 mm). Stagger membrane roll ends a minimum 12" (300 mm). Seal all membrane overlap seams with CETCO Seamtape. Cut membrane to closely fit around pen- etrations overlapping previously installed M -2000. Trowel 90 -mil thick counter flashing of M -2000 over membrane edge. leis I10JR-1lW_1 SOI ., WAl:111199: lei 91 Apply A- 3000WB Adhesive by roller or sprayer at a rate of 250 -275 sq ft per gal- lon (25 sq m per 3.8 liters) and allow to cure (dry black) before applying membrane. After adhesive has cured, follow membrane instal- lation instructions for applicable applica- tion, foundation wall or deck, excluding the mechanical fasteners. Primed surfaces not covered with membrane during the same working day must be re- primed. SIZE AND PACKAGING Swelltite roll size is 40" wide by 37' 9" long (1.02 m x 11.5 m); 125 square feet (11.5 sq m) per roll. Each roll weighs approximately 81 lbs. (36.8 kg). LIMITATIONS Do not install Swelltite in standing water or during precipitation. If ground water contains strong acids, alkalies, or is of a conductiv- ity of 2,500 pmhos or greater, submit water samples to the manufacturer for compatibil- ity testing. Swelltite is not designed for unconfined above -grade waterproofing applications or subsurface applications that do not provide full confinement coverage. Do not install Swelltite on horizontal plaza deck applica- tions that utilize pavers placed on pedestals. Swelltite is not designed to waterproof ex- pansion joints. Expansion joints require a properly engineered expansion joint sealant product manufactured by other companies. CETSEAL GF -40SA Grade Flashir Compacted Backfill Aquadrain Drainage Composite Swelltite Waterproofin€ Membrane Drainage Pipe, Aquadrain 10OBD Cant of Bentc M -2000 For foundation walls, backfill should consist of compactible soils or crushed stone (3/4" or less). Compact soils to minimum 85% Modified Proctor density. Stone backfill larg- er than 3/4" (18 mm) will require the use of a protection course; consult CETCO for spe- cific guidelines. Avoid backfill with aggregate 1 -1/2" (38 mm) or larger. On horizontal decks, Swelltite requires prop- er containment from a topping ballast mate- rial. Swelltite requires a minimum 3" (75mm) thick structural concrete slab or a minimum paver assembly weight of 20 -lbs. (9 kg) per square foot (includes sand or grout leveling course). When compactible soil topping is used, it must be at least 18" thick and com- pacted to a minimum 85% Modified Proctor density. ACCESSORY PRODUCTS M -2000 Liquid Flashing°: M -2000 Liq- uid Flashing is a trowel -grade waterproofing mastic used as a detailing product around penetrations, drains and at corner transi- tions for horizontal deck and vertical wall installations. M -2000 is a single- component moisture curing elastomer that meets the re- quirements of ASTM C836 -84. BENTOSEAL®: trowel grade sodium ben - tonite compound used as a detailing mastic around penetrations and corner transitions for vertical wall Swelltite installations. A- 3000WB ADHESA E°: water -based latex adhesive applied to substrates to promote adhesion of Swelltite Membrane. Typical ap- plication rate 250 -275 sq ft /gallon. SEAMTAPE': tape used to seal membrane overlap seams. AQUADRAIN®: prefabricated drainage composite consisting of a heavy filter fabric adhered to a high- strength plastic drainage core. Aquadrain is available in 4'x 52' rolls. WATERSTOP-RX': expanding bentonite- based concrete joint strip waterstop de- signed to replace PVC dumbbell waterstops. Adhered into place with CETSEAL. GFl40SA: UV resistant flashing membrane for grade terminations and thru wall flashing. Backfilled concrete foundation wall detail Concrete Wall Waterstop -RX (min 3" coverage) f =:I www.CETCO.com SWELLTITE COMPOSITE BENTONITE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM GENERAL APPLICATION DETAILS Aquadrain Composite Swelltite Membra Topping: M-20001 Aquadrai Swelltite Membrar Watersto (min 3" cI ;rete ing Slab 'uctural ib Concrete Wz 3/4" Cant of Bentoseal Swelltite Membrane_ NOVEMBER 2010 Aquadrain Drainage Composite N�,, Concrete Pavers on Grout Leveling Bed Swelltite Membrane Concrete Wall GF -40SA 3/4" fillet of M -2000 Mastic a CETSEAL Metal Termination Bar fastened 12" on center Aquadrain Drainage _ Composite GF -40SA Grade Flashing IMPORTANT The information contained herein supersedes all previous printed versions, and is believed to be accurate and reliable. For the most up -to -date information, please visit www_CETCO.com. CETCO accepts no responsibility for the results obtained through application of this product. CETCO reserves the right to update information without notice_ © 2010 CETCO I PRINTED IN THE USA ON RECYCLED PAPER I FORM:STTD -11/10 Structural Slab CETSEAL Swelltite Membrane O www.CETCO.com 2870 Forbs Avenue Hoffman Estates, IL 60192 847.851.1800 1800.527.9948 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes water repellent coating applied to exterior stone surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 4216 - Stud - Supported Stone Cladding 2. Section 07 9000 - Joint Protection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1653 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films. 2. ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 3. ASTM G154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Applied Penetrant: Material to restrict moisture absorption in material being treated as recommended by manufacturer for specific substrate. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating, and chemical properties including percentage of solids. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and conditions requiring special attention, and cautionary procedures required during application. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect coating liquid from freezing. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. Water Repellents 071900-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. C. Do not apply coating when wind velocity exceeds manufacturer recommendations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for water repellents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER REPELLENTS A. Prosoco "Weatherseal Natural Stone Treatment WB ", water - based, breathable water repellent, or similar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verifyjoint sealants are installed and cured. C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of coating. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Delay Work until mortar is cured minimum of 60 days. B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. C. Remove oil or foreign substance with chemical solvent which will not affect coating. D. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellant according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply in two continuous, uniform coats. 3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. C. Protect surrounding landscaping, property and vehicles. D. When applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by methods as instructed by coating manufacturer. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Exterior Masonry: Two coat application, pigmented. B. Field Stone at Entry Area: One coat application, clear. END OF SECTION Water Repellents 071900-2 07 00 00 Thermal & Moisture Protection 0719 00 Water Repellents 0719 19 Silane Water Repellents �SdRHEkEAN! Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus extra - strength water -based water repellent OVERVIEW Sure Klean® Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus is a water -based water repellent for limestone, marble and travertine that delivers the some performance as solvent -based products, without the drawbacks of traditional water -based treatments. VOC- compliant, ready -to -use, and low odor, this modified siloxone water repellent was developed to provide long- lasting penetrating protection without altering the stone's natural appearance. Compared to conventional water -based water repellents for limestone, marble and travertine, Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus has greater water - repellency, longer service -life and is less likely to stain. SPECIFICATIONS For all PROSOCO product specifications visit www prosoco.com. ADVANTAGES • Provides water repellency to limestone, marble and travertine, as well as adjacent masonry. • One component — easy -to -use. • Treated surfaces "breathe" — does not trap moisture. • Suitable for interior and exterior surfaces. • Will not form a surface film or gloss. • Protects new or existing mortar and grout joints. • No solvent odor. • Eligible for an extended warranty. • (omplies with all known national, state and district AIM VO( regulations. Limitations • May damage glass or be difficult to remove. Always protect. • Not recommended for polished or glazed surfaces. • Not recommended for below -grade application. • Will not prevent water penetration through structural cracks, defects or open joints. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE VOC Compliance Sure Klean® Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus is compliant with the following national, state and district regulations: EX US Environmental Protection Agency FX California Air Resources Board SCM Districts EX South Coast Air Quality Management District ❑X Maricopa County, AI QNortheast Ozone Transport Commission Product Data Sheet • Page 1 of 4 • Item #40159 • SKWSNSTWBP - 031413 • ©2013 PROSO(0 • www.prosoco.com TYPICAL TECHNICAL DATA FORM clear liquid, low odor SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.04 pH 11.20 WT /GAL ACTIVE CONTENT 8.651bs 15% TOTAL SOLIDS 15% VOC CONTENT < 100 g/L FLASH POINT >2120 F ( >1000 0 FREEZE POINT 32° F (00 0 SHELF LIFE 2 years in tightly sealed, unopened container Product Data Sheet • Page 1 of 4 • Item #40159 • SKWSNSTWBP - 031413 • ©2013 PROSO(0 • www.prosoco.com �SdRf- IEkE�N�Weather Seal PRODUCT DATA SHEET Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus ROSOCO SINCE 1939 PREPARATION Protect people, vehicles, property, plants, windows, painted surfaces, anodized aluminum and all non masonry surfaces from product, splash, spray, residue, fumes and wind drift. Protect and /or divert pedestrian and auto traffic. Some metal finishes and glass may be damaged by exposure to Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus Test and protect. Avoid breathing mist. Avoid exposing building occupants to spray. When using inside, provide adequate cross ventilation. Make sure all caulks and sealants are in place and thoroughly cured prior to application. Surface should be clean and free of dirt, dust, oils and other contaminants. If necessary, clean with the appropriate Sure Kleon® surface preparation cleaner. Surface must be thoroughly dry before application. Product will not compensate for structural or material defects. Surface and Air Temperatures Surface and air temperatures should be between 50 -90 °F (10 -32 °C) during application. Relative humidity should be greater than 40 %. Excessive test. surface heating can be prevented by shading with awnings. Recommended for these substrates. Always (overage is in sq.ft. /m. per gallon. Substrate Type Use? Coverage Burnished yes Architectural Smooth yes 100 -175 sq.ft. (oncrete Block Split -faced yes 12 -16 sq.m. Ribbed yes Brick yes (oncrete* Tile Precast Panels yes yes 125-175 s snn. 12 -16 sq.m. Pavers yes Cast-in-place es Brick yes 100 -175 sq.ft. 9 -16 sq. m. Tile no N/A Fired (lay* Terra Cotta• yes 100 -175 sq.ft. 9 -16 Pavers no N/A Marble, Polished no N/A Travertine, Limestone Unpolished yes 100 -175 sq.ft. 9 -16 sq. m. Polished no N/A Granite Unpolished no N/A Sandstone Unpolished yes 125 -175 sq.ft. 12 -16 sq. m. Slate Unpolished no N/A *May not be suitable for some dark surfaces. Always test for desired results. *Recommended for unglazed terra cotta only. Not recommended for polished or glazed surfaces, or dark substrates. Always test to ensure desired results. Coverage estimates depend on surface texture and porosity. Protect surface to be treated from direct sunlight for several hours prior to beginning application. When possible, initiate treatment when surfaces are shaded. Keep surface temperature relatively cool to prevent too rapid evaporation of the product and to ensure proper penetration. Do not apply during rain, to wet surfaces or when there is a chance of rain. ALWAYS TEST a small area of each surface to confirm suitability and desired results before starting overall application. Test with the some equipment, recommended surface preparation and application procedures ,planned for general application. Equipment May be applied using brush, roller or low- pressure spray applicator ( <50 psi). When spray applying, use fan -type spray tips and adjust pressure to avoid atomization of the material. Sprayers should be fitted with stainless steel or brass fittings and gaskets suitable for handling alkaline solutions (rubber or viton). Avoid contact with metal hopper if using airless spray equipment. Brushes and rollers should be of nylon or other synthetic materials resistant to alkaline solutions. Storage and Handling Store in a cool, dry place with adequate ventilation. Always seal container after dispensing. Do not alter or mix with other chemicals. Published shelf life assumes upright storage of factory - sealed containers in a dry place. Maintain temperature of 45 -100 °F (7- 38 00. Do not double stack pallets. Dispose of unused product and container in accordance with local, state and federal regulations. Product Data Sheet • Page 2 of 4 • Item #40159 • SKWSNSTWBP - 031413 • ©2013 PROSO(0 • www.prosoco.com �SdRf- K�E�N�Weather Seal PRODUCT DATA SHEET Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus osoco SINCE 1939 APPLICATION Before use, read "Preparation" and "Safety Information." ALWAYS TEST a small area of each surface to confirm suitability and desired results before starting overall application. Test with the some equipment, recommended surface preparation and application procedures planned for general application. Dilution Do not dilute or alter. Stir or mix well before use Application Instructions Vertical Surface Application: Sprayer For best results, apply in a single saturating coat to a thoroughly dry surface. When spraying, saturate from the bottom up. Use enough to create a 4 -inch to 6 -inch rundown below the spray contact point. Vertical Surface Application: Brush or Roller Saturate the surface, minimizing overlap. Brush out or back roll heavy runs and drips that do not penetrate for uniform appearance. Horizontal Surface Application Apply a single, saturating coat so that the surface stays wet for a few minutes. Thoroughly broom out any pools or puddles that do not completely penetrate the surface. Do not let puddles remain on the surface. Porous Surface Application Let the first application penetrate the masonry surface. Re- saturate within 5 to 10 minutes. Immediately back roll or brush out runs and drips for uniform appearance. Less material will be required on the second application. Dense Surface Application Apply a single coat. Use enough to completely wet the surface without creating drips, puddles or rundown. Do not over apply. Test for application rate. Brush out or back roll all runs, drips and excess material as soon as possible after application for uniform appearance. Drying Time Protect the treated surface from rain and pedestrian traffic for 4 to 6 hours following application. Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus gains its water repellency properties in 24 hours. NOTE: Application to surfaces exposed to direct sunlight or high winds may cause rapid drying. Protect surface to be treated from direct sunlight for several hours prior to beginning application. When possible, initiate treatment when surfaces are shaded. Keep surface temperature relatively cool to prevent too rapid evaporation and to ensure proper penetration. Cleanup Before product dries, clean tools and equipment with fresh water. Immediately wash off over spray from glass, aluminum, polished or other surfaces with fresh water. Surface should be clean, thoroughly dry and absorbent before application. Clean soiled surfaces with the appropriate Sure Kleon® or Enviro Kleon® cleaner before application. Call Customer Care toll -free at 800-255- 4255 for recommendations. All caulks and sealants should be in place and thoroughly cured before application. ALWAYS TEST for best coverage rates and to confirm results before overall application. Test using the application instructions included herein. Let the test area dry thoroughly before inspection. Preferred method of application is low - pressure spray (<50 psi) equipment. Use a fan -type spray tip and adjust pressure to avoid atomization of the material. Be careful not to over apply on dense surfaces. Remove excess as soon as possible. Never go it alone. If you have problems or questions, contact your Iocal PROSOCO distributor or field representative. Or call PROSOCO technical Customer Care, toll -free at 800 - 255 -4255. Product Data Sheet • Page 3 of 4 • Item #40159 • SKWSNSTWBP - 031413 • ©2013 PROSOCO • www.prosoco.com �SdRf- K�E�N�Weather Seal PRODUCT DATA SHEET Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus osoco SINCE 1939 SAFETY INFORMATION Sure Kleon® Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus is a water carried product. Use with appropriate equipment, ventilation and job site controls. Read the full label and MSDS for precautionary instructions before use. FIRST AID Ingestion: Do not induce vomiting. Seek medico assistance. Eye Contact. Rinse eyes thoroughly for 15 minutes. Get medical attention. Skin Contact. Rinse thoroughly. Get medical attention if irritation persists. Inhalation: Remove to fresh air. Give artificia respiration if not breathing. Get immediate medical attention. 24 Hour Emergency Information: INFOTRAC at 800 - 535 -5053 WARRANTY The information and recommendations made are based on our own research and the research of others, and are believed to be accurate. However, no guarantee of their accuracy is made because we cannot cover every possible application of our products, nor anticipate every variation encountered in masonry surfaces, job conditions and methods used. The purchasers shall make their own tests to determine the suitability of such products for a particular purpose. PROSOCO, Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects. Where permitted by law, PROVO makes no other warranties with respect to this product, express or implied, including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose. The purchaser shall be responsible to make his own tests to determine the suitability of this product for his particular purpose. PROSOCO's liability shall be limited in of events to supplying sufficient product to re -treat the specific areas to which defective product has been applied. Acceptance and use of this product absolves PROSOCO from any other liability, from whatever source, including liability for incidental, consequential or resultant damages whether due to breach of warranty, negligence or strict liability. This warranty may not be modified or extended by representatives of PROSOCO, its distributors or dealers. CUSTOMER CARE Factory personnel are available for product, environment and job - safety assistance with no obligation. Call 800 - 255 -4255 and ask for Customer Care - technical support. Factory- trained representatives are established in principal cities throughout the continental United States. Call Customer Care at 800 - 255 -4255, or visit our web site at www.prosoco.com, for the name of the Sure Kleon® Weather Seal representative in your area. Product Data Sheet • Page 4 of 4 • Item #40159 • SKWSNSTWBP - 031413 • ©2013 PROSOCO • www.prosoco.com MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET 0 PROSOCO, Inc. 1 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER'S NAME PROSOCO, Inc. EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS: AND ADDRESS: 3741 Greenway Circle 8:00 AM — 5:00 PM CST Monday- Friday: 785/865 -4200 Lawrence, KS 66046 NON - BUSINESS HOURS (INFOTRAC): 800/535 -5053 PRODUCT TRADE NAME: Sure Klean® Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus II HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS CHEMICAL NAME COMMON NAME CAS NO. NFPA CODE ACGIH OSHA PEL /TWA TLV /TWA Proprietary Ingredient -- Proprietary -- 1 mg /m3` Polydimethylsiloxane with Proprietary -- N/A N/A aminoalkyl groups The ACGIH Threshold Limit Value (TLV) has not been established nor has OSHA established the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) for this product, therefore the limits described have been established as guidelines by the manufacturer. III TYPICAL PHYSICAL DATA BOILING POINT FREEZING POINT VAPOR PRESSURE VAPOR DENSITY ( °F) ( °F) (mm Hg) (Air = 1) Proprietary Ingredient 212 °F (100 °C) 32 °F (0 °C) 17 ( @20 °C) <1 Polydimethylsiloxane with aminoalkyl N/A N/A N/A N/A groups SPECIFIC P H SOLUBILITY APPEARANCE GRAVITY IN WATER AND ODOR Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus 1.04 11.20 Appreciable ( >99 %) Milky white liquid, mild odor IV FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA EMERGENCY OVERVIEW Sure Kleano Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus is a white, opaque, alkaline liquid with a mild odor. Prolonged contact may cause skin and eye irritation. Inhalation may cause irritation. Ingestion may cause gastric distress. FLASH POINT (METHOD): >212 °F FLAMMABLE LIMITS: LEL: not applicable UEL: not applicable EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: Material does not burn. Use extinguishing measures appropriate to the source of the fire FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: Fire fighters should wear full protective clothing including a self- contained breathing apparatus. Cool endangered containers with water. SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: None. UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS: None. V HEALTH HAZARD DATA PRIMARY ROUTES OF EXPOSURE: Skin, eyes, inhalation, ingestion. CARCINOGEN INFORMATION: Not listed (OSHA, IARC, NTP). MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BY OVEREXPOSURE: EFFECTS OF OVEREXPOSURE: EYE CONTACT: Contact with eyes may cause pain and irritation. SKIN CONTACT: Contact with skin may cause irritation. INHALATION: Inhalation of mists or vapors may cause irritation to upper respiratory tract and mucous membranes. INGESTION: Irritating to digestive tract; may cause gastric distress, stomach pains. EMERGENCY AND FIRST AID PROCEDURES: EYE CONTACT: Remove contact lenses. Immediately flush eyes for 15 minutes in clear running water while holding eyelids open; seek medical attention immediately. SKIN CONTACT: Wash contacted area with soap and water; DO NOT attempt to neutralize with chemical agents; if irritation persists, seek medical attention. INHALATION: Remove affected person to fresh air; if breathing difficulties persist seek medical attention. INGESTION: Drink large quantities of water or milk; DO NOT induce vomiting; seek medical attention immediately. VI REACTIVITY DATA STABILITY: Stable. CONDITIONS TO AVOID: Extreme temperatures, keep from freezing. INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIALS TO AVOID): strong oxidizers, strong acids HAZARDOUS COMBUSTION OR DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS: Smoke, fumes, oxides of carbon. Decomposition will not occur if handled and stored properly. In case of fire, oxides of carbon and lithium, hydrocarbons, fumes, and smoke may be produced. VII SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES SPILL, LEAK, WASTE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES: STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE MATERIAL IS RELEASED OF SPILLED: Material is alkaline and will irritate the eyes if product is allowed to directly contact the eyes. Wash small spills to sanitary sewer. Large spills — confine spill, soak up with approved absorbent, shovel product into approved container for disposal. WASTE DISPOSAL METHODS: Dispose of in accordance with Local, State, and Federal Regulations. Refer to "40 CFR Protection of Environment Parts 260 -299" for complete waste disposal regulations for alkaline materials. Consult your local, state, and Federal Environmental Protection Agency before disposing of any chemicals. 1T/ 11 9, xd lel0,:Z•11 r x011Is] L1 I I L1 1&1 1.1 ,fill I Is] L1 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: None required while threshold limits are kept below maximum allowable concentrations, if TWA exceeds limits, NIOSH approved respirator must be worn. Refer to 29 CFR 1910.134 for complete regulations. If mists are present, wear a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. VENTILATION: The use of local exhaust ventilation is recommended. Use corrosion - resistant ventilation equipment. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING: Coveralls, apron, or other equipment as needed to minimize skin contact. PROTECTIVE GLOVES: Neoprene or rubber gloves with cuffs as needed to prevent prolonged exposure. EYE PROTECTION: Safety glasses with side shields. Depending on application condition, chemical splash goggles or a face shield may be necessary to prevent eye contact. OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Provide eyewash and clean water for rinsing skin. IX SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS WORK PRACTICES: Proper work practices and planning should be utilized to avoid contact with workers, passersby, and non - masonry surfaces. Always follow published application rates. See the Product Data sheet and label for specific precautions to be taken during use. Smoking, eating and drinking should be prohibited during the use of this product. Wash hands before breaks and at the end of a shift. Sure Klean° Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus - Page 2 of 3 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN IN HANDLING AND STORAGE: Keep container closed when not in use; protect containers from abuse; protect from extreme temperatures. Keep from freezing. Keep this and other chemicals out of reach of children. OTHER PRECAUTIONS: Avoid generating mists during application. X REGULATORY INFORMATION SHIPPING: Non - regulated for shipment in all modes; domestic or international. NATIONAL MOTOR FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION: SARA 313 REPORTABLE: CHEMICAL NAME CAS UPPERBOUND CONCENTRATION % BY WEIGHT None CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65: Contains no chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive risk. XI OTHER MSDS Status: Date of Revision: February 27, 2013 For Product Manufactured After: February 27, 2013 Changes: N/A — New Product Item #: Sure Klean`' Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus Approved By: Regulatory Department DISCLAIMER: The information contained on the Material Safety Data Sheet has been compiled from data considered accurate. This data is believed to be reliable, but it must be pointed out that values for certain properties are known to vary from source to source. PROSOCO, Inc. expressly disclaims any warranty express or implied as well as any liability for any injury or loss arising from the use of this information or the materials described. This data is not to be construed as absolutely complete since additional data may be desirable when particular conditions or circumstances exist. It is the responsibility of the user to determine the best precautions necessary for the safe handling and use of this product for his unique application. This data relates only to the specific material designated and is not to be used in combination with any other material. Many federal and state regulations pertain directly or indirectly to the product's end use and disposal of containers and unused material. It is the purchaser's responsibility to be familiar with all applicable regulations. DATE OF PREPARATION: February 27, 2013 Sure Klean° Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment WB Plus - Page 3 of 3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 2113 BOARD INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation and underslab board insulation. B. Board insulation at exterior cavity walls. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. B. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. C. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. FS HH -1 -530 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Unfaced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanu rate. E. FS HH- 1- 1972/GEN - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria. C. Sample: Provide two samples 6" x 6" of rigid insulation material. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation, installation techniques. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. Date Submitted Date Approved Sub - Contractor /Supplier 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 013100 — Project Management and Coordination. PART 2 PRODUCTS Board Insulation 072113-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.01 MANUFACTURERS — FOUNDATION /UNDERSLAB INSULATION MATERIALS A. DOW Building Solutions - "Styrofoam SM" B. Owens Corning C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000 — Product Requirements and Substitution Request Form. 2.02 FOUNDATION /UNDERSLAB INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene D: ASTM C578 Type VI; cellular type, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance: R -5.0 per inch thickness Thickness: as indicated on Drawings Board Size: 24 x 96 inch Edges: Butt edge Compressive Strength: 25 psi B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for substrate type. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS — CAVITY WALL INSULATION MATERIALS A. R- MAX, "Thermasheath -3 ", rigid wall insulation; Dallas, TX; 800 - 762 -9462. B. Hunter Panels, Puyallup, WA; 800 - 248 -5995. C. Dow Building Solutions D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000 — Product Requirements and Substitution Request Form. 2.04 CAVITY WALL /EXTERIOR WALL INSULATION MATERIALS A. Closed -Cell Polyisocyanurate Foam Core: ASTM C1289 Type 1, Class 1, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance: Minimum R -5.9 per 1.0 inch thickness Thickness: Total thickness and minimum LTTR value as indicated on Drawings. Facer Sheets: Reinforced foil facer on each side. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch Edges: Butt edge Density, Overall Nominal: 2.0 pcf (ASTM D1622) Compressive Strength: 20 psi (ASTM D1621) Flamespread Core: 75 or less (ASTM E84) Smoke Developed Core: less than 450 (ASTM E84) Water Vapor Transmission: Less than 0.3 perm (ASTM E96) Water Absorption: less than 1% volume (ASTM C209) B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for substrate type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 013100 — Project Management and Coordination B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to Board Insulation 072113-2 WASHINGTON STATE PATROL EVERETT SCALE HOUSE REPLACEMENT State Project No. 2013 -283G receive insulation. C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities, materials or substances that may impede fastening. D. Verify cavity wall weather barrier has been examined and penetrations, including masonry ties have received application of weather barrier system flashing. 3.02 INSTALLATION —FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Adhere strip of polyethylene sheet over construction joints, if any, with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. 1. Tape seal joints. B. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length. C. Install boards on foundation wall perimeter, horizontally. 1. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding. 2. Stagger end joints. 3. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. D. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane. 3.03 INSTALLATION -UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.04 INSTALLATION — CAVITY WALLS /EXTERIOR WALLS A. Verify masonry ties are in place and spaced in coordination with board insulation joints. B. Adhere strip of polyethylene sheet over control joint with double beads of adhesive each side of joint between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint. C. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. D. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement /masonry ties. E. Place membrane surface against facing direction recommended by manufacturer, tape seal board joints and masonry tie locations. F. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and no protrusions. G. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane. H. Place self- adhesive flashing membrane at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frame. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK C. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 015000 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Control. D. Do not permit damage to insulation prior to covering. Board Insulation 072113-3 WASHINGTON STATE PATROL EVERETT SCALE HOUSE REPLACEMENT State Project No. 2013 -283G 3.05 SCHEDULES A. The schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to the Drawings for items not specifically scheduled. B. Foundation Insulation: Install extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive application, vertically at perimeter of concrete foundation wall, thickness as indicated on Drawings. C. Underslab Insulation: Install insulation board throughout slab area, thickness as indicated on Drawings. Tape joints per manufacturer's installation requirements. D. Cavity Wall Insulation: Install rigid insulation board at exterior walls as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Board Insulation 072113-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 2116 BLANKET INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Section Includes: 1. Sound batt insulation in stud wall construction. 2. Ceiling insulation /sound attenuation blankets. 3. For exterior wall and roof insulation refer to Structural Insulated Panel System. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. B. FS HH -1 -521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, (Mineral Fiber for Ambient Temperatures). 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of sound barrier within interior spaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 00 - Submittals. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. D. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 0130 00 - Coordination of Meetings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Knauf B. Owens /Corning Fiberglass C. Manville D. Certainteed E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.2 MATERIAL - SOUND INSULATION & INTERIOR WALL /CEILING INSULATION A. ASTM C665, preformed mineral fiber acoustical batt insulation, friction fit, conforming to the following: Blanket Insulation 072116 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 STC Rating: 38, with 5/8" GWB both sides of single wood stud wall Batt Size: 16 x 3 -1/2 inch and 24 x 3 -1/2 inch to fit stud spacing Facing: Unfaced 2.3 MATERIAL — THERMAL INSULATION A. ASTM C665, preformed glass fiber batt insulation; friction fit, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance: R -value as indicated on the Drawings for wall and roof locations. Batt Size: Sized to fit wall thickness and stud /joist spacing. Facing: Unfaced B. Wall Vapor Retarder: Certainteed "Membrain" sheet barrier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 0130 00 - Coordination of Meetings. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in metal stud wall spaces without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. END OF SECTION Blanket Insulation 072116 -2 sustainableto,wO insulation. Specification Sheet Certai nT4eed M Fiber Glass Building Insulation PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Use: Fiber glass building insulation is intended for use in either residential or commercial construction as thermal and acoustical insulation in ceilings, walls and floors. The product is available unfaced or kraft- faced and is designed for use in standard wood stud and steel frame assemblies. _ c CertainTeed Fiber Glass Product Name energy in the residential and commercial new construction, remodeling, and reinsulation markets. Building Insulation Manufacturer CertainTeed Corporation performance. It is compression packaged for ease of handling, and its broad availability of R- values, P.O. Box 860 Address Applicable Standards Composition and Materials: The product is composed of tan, uniformly textured, inorganic fibrous Valley Forge, PA 19482 -0105 Phone 610- 341 -7000 • 800 - 233 -8990 Fax 610- 341 -7571 Website www.certainteed.com /insulation Benefits: Installing Fiber Glass Building Insulation is an easy, cost effective method to help conserve energy in the residential and commercial new construction, remodeling, and reinsulation markets. In addition to its thermal properties, Fiber Glass Building Insulation provides excellent acoustical TECHNICAL DATA performance. It is compression packaged for ease of handling, and its broad availability of R- values, sizes and facings ensures the right product for the job. Applicable Standards Composition and Materials: The product is composed of tan, uniformly textured, inorganic fibrous • Model Building Codes glass and formed with a formaldehyde -free binding agent. — ICC Sizes: Available standard sizes are listed in the table at left. Contact CertainTeed for non - standard — California and Minnesota quality standards sizes. s Material Standards —ASTM C665 /Type I, unfaced Limitations: The National Electrical Code prohibits installation of any insulation over or within 3" — AST AST M C665 /Type II, Class C, Category 1, (76 mm) of recessed light fixtures, unless approved insulated ceiling (IC) lighting fixtures are used. faced Standard kraft facing is flammable and should not be left exposed. Kraft -faced insulation must be Fire Resistance installed behind and in substantial contact with the unexposed surface of the ceiling, floor or wall finish. Special care should be taken when working with an open flame. Where a flame spread rating Fire Hazard Classification of 25 is required, insulation must be unfaced or have a FSK (flame- resistant foil) facing. —ASTM E84 / Unfaced Insulation: Max. Flame Spread Index: 25; Max. Smoke Developed Because of potential skin irritation, unfaced building insulation should not be installed in an exposed Index: 50 installation where it will be subject to human contact. — Kraft faced insulation: Not rated for flame All building insulation should be kept dry. Wet fiber glass insulation will lose its effectiveness until it spread /smoke developed dries. Fiber glass will often dry naturally and regain its original R- value. However, under conditions Noncombustibility where the insulation will not dry thoroughly it should be removed and allowed to dry or be replaced. —ASTM E136 / Unfaced insulation: Passes the test INSTALLATION Physical /Chemical Properties For most areas, vapor retarders should be installed on the warm -in- winter side of the insulation .Thermal Performance (toward the interior). Check with local practice and building codes. CertainTeed insulation is not intended to be installed with the facing placed toward the exterior of the building. —ASTM C518 / R- values for insulation only, as stated in table on other side Installation in wood framing: • Water Vapor Sorption Studs — Faced insulation fits between wood studs with flanges stapled either to the faces or sides —ASTM C1104 / < 5% of the studs. Pull flanges taut while stapling every 8 " -12" (203 -305 mm) to prevent "fishmouths." . Water Vapor Permeance (of Facing) Unfaced rigid fit insulation is pressure fitted between studs. —ASTM E96, Desiccant Method / Unperforated Ceiling Joists — Faced insulation is placed between joists with vapor retarder facing down. Flanges facing: < 1.0 perm (57 ng /Pass• m2) can be stapled to bottom faces or sides of joists if insulation is installed before ceiling finish. Only Quality Assurance unfaced insulation is installed over existing insulation. Many of CertainTeed's insulation manufacturing Floor Joists — Faced insulation is installed with the vapor retarder facing up and in contact with the plants are registered to ISO 9001 -2000 standards. floor. All insulation must be supported between joists on an approved support such as wire. Cathedral Ceilings — Faced insulation with vapor retarder facing down is stapled between the rafters. A 1 " air space is recommended between insulation and roof sheathing. If unfaced insulation is used, a separate vapor retarder should be installed where required. Installation in steel framing: • Standard practice for installing fiber glass batts in steel studs is to friction fit batts into stud cavities. When batts completely fill stud cavities they are constrained by studs at their edges and by wall facings front and rear. For faced product, use tabless batts or leave stapling flanges folded. • When fiber glass batts are installed in steel ceiling or floor joists or rafters from below, they must be supported with wire or a ceiling finish material. • Ventilation and vapor retarder requirements are the same as with wood framing AVAILABILITY AND COST Limited availability in North America. For availability and cost, contact your local contractor, retailer or distributor, or call CertainTeed Sales Support Group at 800 - 233 -8990. WARRANTY Refer to CertainTeed's Lifetime Limited Insulation Warranty for Fiber Glass Building Insulation (30 -21- 1321). MAINTENANCE No maintenance required. TECHNICAL SERVICES Technical assistance can be obtained either from the local CertainTeed sales representative, or by calling CertainTeed Sales Support Group at 800 - 233 -8990. pGE w Win l and cnnerea arnooir a�ti�M1::::;:a�"�c.a.,. a I$U ulate n QQ RGY STAR as VIR—Air EENGUARD NAIMA Q ualityC tiled PARTNER OF THE YEAR ASK ABOUT OUR OTHER CERTAINTEED PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS: EXTERIOR: ROOFING • SIDING • WINDOWS • FENCE • RAILING • TRIM • DECKING • FOUNDATIONS • PIPE INTERIOR: INSULATION • GYPSUM • CEILINGS CertainTeed Corporation Professional: 800 - 233 -8990 P.O. Box 860 Consumer: 800-782-8777 CertainTeed Cl Valley Forge, PA 19482 www.certainteed.co.com/i /insulation Code No. 30 -45 -001, 0 1/10 CertainTeed Corporation, Printed in U.S.A AVAILABLE SIZES R -Value Thickness Width R RSI in. mm in. mm UNFACED 8 1.4 2.5 64 16&24 406&610 11 1.9 3.5 89 11.25,15,15V4,19,23, 23V4, 44, 48 & 84 286, 381, 387, 483, 584, 591,1118,1219 & 2134 13 2.3 3.5 89 15.25,16, 23.25 & 24 387, 406, 591 & 610 15 2.6 3.5 89 15.25 & 23.25 387 & 591 19 3.3 6.25 159 11, 11.25, 15,15.25, 16, 19, 23, 23.5, 24 & 48 279, 286, 381, 387, 406, 483, 584, 591, 610 & 1219 21 3.7 5.5 140 15, 15.25 & 23.25 381, 387 & 591 25 4.4 8 203 15,16,19, 23, 24, 32 &46.5 381, 406, 483, 584, 610, 813 &1181 30 5.3 10 254 16, 19& 24 406, 483 & 610 300' 5.3 8.25 210 15.25 & 23.5 387 & 591 38 6.7 12 305 16&24 406&610 380' 6.7 10.25 260 15.25 & 23.25 387 & 591 KRAFT FACED 11 1.9 3.5 89 11, 15,16, 23 & 24 279, 381, 406, 584 & 610 13 2.3 3.5 89 11, 15,16,19, 23 & 24 279, 381, 406, 483, 584 &610 15 2.6 3.5 89 15 & 23 381 & 584 19 3.3 6.25 159 11, 15,16,19, 23 & 24 279, 381, 406, 483, 584 &610 21 3.7 5.5 140 15&23 381 & 584 22 3.9 6.5 165 15, 19& 23 381, 483 & 584 25 4.4 8 203 15&23 381 & 584 26 4.6 8 203 16&24 406&610 30 5.3 10 254 11, 15,16,19,19.25 & 24 279, 381, 406, 483, 489 &610 300' 5.3 8.25 210 15&23 381 & 584 38 6.7 12 305 16&24 406&610 380' 6.7 10.25 260 15&23 381 & 584 pGE w Win l and cnnerea arnooir a�ti�M1::::;:a�"�c.a.,. a I$U ulate n QQ RGY STAR as VIR—Air EENGUARD NAIMA Q ualityC tiled PARTNER OF THE YEAR ASK ABOUT OUR OTHER CERTAINTEED PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS: EXTERIOR: ROOFING • SIDING • WINDOWS • FENCE • RAILING • TRIM • DECKING • FOUNDATIONS • PIPE INTERIOR: INSULATION • GYPSUM • CEILINGS CertainTeed Corporation Professional: 800 - 233 -8990 P.O. Box 860 Consumer: 800-782-8777 CertainTeed Cl Valley Forge, PA 19482 www.certainteed.co.com/i /insulation Code No. 30 -45 -001, 0 1/10 CertainTeed Corporation, Printed in U.S.A CertainTeed Specification Sheet MemBrain ; The SMART Vapor Retarder 1. PRODUCT NAME CertainTeed MemBrain'" Smart Vapor Retarder. Patent number US 6,808,772 B2. Other patents pending. 2. MANUFACTURER CertainTeed Corporation P.O. Box 860 Valley Forge, PA 19482 -0105 Phone: 610- 341 -7000 800 - 233 -8990 Fax: 610- 341 -7571 Fax-On-Demand: 800-947-0057 Website: www.certainteed.com 3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Use: CertainTeed MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder is a vapor retarder sheeting intended for use with unfaced, vapor permeable mass insulation (fiber glass and mineral wool) in wall and ceiling cavities. Benefits. MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder is a polyamide film that TABLE 1 changes its permeability with the ambient humidity condition. The prod- uct's permeance is 1 perm or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, dry cup method, and increases to greater than 10 perms using the wet cup method. This process allows closed building envelope systems to increase their drying potential with seasonal climatic changes. With a high resistance to water vapor in winter, MemBrain reacts to relative humidity by altering pore size, allowing water vapor to pass through it. When condi- tions change and relative humidity increases above 60 %, the pores in the material expand and its permeability increases. This transformation permits drying to occur, in either direction, through the process of vapor diffusion. Thus, its lowered resistance value sup- ports the drying process, therefore decreasing moisture accumulation within the construction and potential moisture damage. This product can be used in place of traditional vapor retarders with unfaced fiber glass insulation to pro- vide an insulation system that is ideal in some of the more severe climate condition areas in terms of both tem- perature and humidity. Composition and Materials: MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder is formed by blowing a 2 -mil thick film of polyamide (Nylon). Limitations: MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder is recommended for use in heating and mixed climates.The product is not suited for cooling climates with high PRODUCT SIZES Product Size Nominal Web Actual Web Coverage Box Length Roll Wgt. (lbs.) Rolls per Weight per (nom. ft.) Width (in.) Width (in.) (square ft.) (in.) with box and core Pallet* Pallet (lbs.) 8 96 100 800 28.3 11.1 45 545 9 108 112 900 31.5 12.5 45 608 10 120 124 1000 34.5 13.7 40 593 12 144 148 1200 41.0 17.0 30 555 PRODUCT SIZES — METRIC Product Size Nominal Web Actual Web Coverage Box Length Roll Wgt. (kg) Rolls per Weight per (nom. m) Width (mm) Width (mm) (square m) (mm) with box and core Pallet* Pallet (kg) 2.44 2438 2540 74.3 718 5.0 45 247 2.74 2743 2845 83.6 800 5.7 45 276 3.05 3048 3150 92.9 876 6.2 40 269 3.66 3658 3759 111.5 1041 7.71 30 252 *48" (1219 mm) maximum pallet height. outdoor humidities. MemBrain is not suitable in buildings with exceptionally high, constant indoor humidity levels, such as swimming pools and spas. This product should also not be used with specialty -conditioned spaces with rela- tive humidities intentionally greater than 50 %. Use of MemBrain is not rec- ommended where residential humidifica- tion systems are set at relative humidi- ties greater than 50 %. MemBrain's per- formance in rooms with short peaks of high humidity, such as bathrooms and kitchens, will not be affected because of the buffering action of interior finishes. Do not use low permeance interior finishes such as vinyl wallpaper or vapor retarding paints with MemBrain. The drying benefits of MemBrain will diminish with the use of low perme- ance finishes. MemBrain has not been tested for use with wet spray insulation systems and is not recommended at this time. MemBrain should not be used as a vapor barrier between con- crete sub floors and flooring materi- als, or as a ground cover in base- ments and crawl spaces. This prod- uct is not recommended for applica- tions having direct or indirect (reflected) ultraviolet light exposure due to solar or electrical sources. Special care should be taken when working with an open flame. Check local practice and /or building codes for use of vapor retarders. To avoid danger of suffocation, keep this and all plastic film away from babies and small children. Sizes. This product is manufactured in nominal widths to cover interior walls that are 8, 9, 10 and 12 feet high. The material is folded and rolled to create rolls containing 100 linear 6ir inn �iytq® �pER ANyO m ISOa a y 9001:2000 5 �y �i ix cssssbiosa �+ NAIMA feet of product. Available standard sizes are listed in Table 1. 4. TECHNICAL DATA Applicable Standards. • Model Building Codes: — BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI and ]CC • Material Standards: — ASTM C 665 Section 7.4, Water -Vapor Permeance — ASTM E 96 Fire Resistance: • Fire Hazard Classification: — ASTM E 84 Surface burning characteristics Max. Flame Spread Index: 20 Max. Smoke Developed Index: 55 Physical /Chemical Properties. • Water Vapor Permeance: —:5 1.0 perm (57ng/Pa•s•M2) (ASTM E 96, Desiccant method) — > 10 perms (1,144ng/Pa•s•m2) (ASTM E 96, Water method) • Fungi Resistance: — No growth (ASTM C 1338) • Corrosivity: — No unusual aspect of corrosion such as pitting, cracking and adhesive cure inhibition (ASTM C 665) Quality Assurance: CertainTeed was the first fiber glass insulation manu- facturer to have its manufacturing plants, R &D center and corporate headquarters registered to ISO 9001- 2000 standards. 5. INSTALLATION For most areas, vapor retarders should be installed on the warm -in- winter side of the insulation (toward 11MIM CertainTeed 1, Since 1904 A Saint - Gobain Company rfirr r, _SAINT GOBAIN INSULATION the interior). For some warm and humid areas, the vapor retarder should be installed facing the exteri- or. MemBrain is not intended to be used as an exterior vapor retarder. Check local practice and /or building codes. Installation in wood framing: Same as polyethylene sheeting. Please see MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder Installation Instructions For Wood Framing (30 -28 -083) and MemBrain Smart Vapor Retarder Installation Instructions For Steel Framing (30 -28 -089). 6. AVAILABILITY AND COST Manufactured and sold throughout the United States. For availability and cost, contact your local contrac- tor, retailer or distributor, or call CertainTeed Sales Support Group in Valley Forge, PA at 800 - 233 -8990. 7. WARRANTY This product is covered by a limited one -year warranty against manufac- turer's defects. 8. MAINTENANCE Not required. 9. TECHNICAL SERVICES Technical assistance can be obtained from either the local CertainTeed sales representative, or by calling CertainTeed Sales Support Group in Valley Forge, PA at 800 - 233 -8990. 10. FILING SYSTEMS Additional product information is available upon request. BUILDINGGREEN 2003 TOP- 10 GUENSPEO PRODUCT Code: 30 -28- 080 /MemBrain' SMART Vapor Retarder © 2004 CertainTeed Corporation 12/04 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 2600 VAPOR RETARDERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet and sealant materials for controlling vapor diffusion. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2700 — Weather and Air Barriers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. B. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA /DHS /EHLB /R -174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. C. Green Seal: 1. GS -36[- October 19, 2000] - Aerosol Adhesives. D. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute: 1. SWRI - Sealant Specification. E. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168- January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Retarder Permeance at Exterior Wall: Maximum 1 perm (Class 2) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, using the dry cup method. B. Vapor Retarder Permeance at Crawl Space: Less than 0.1 perm (Class 1) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation and installation requirements, techniques. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VAPOR RETARDERS - SHEET A. Exterior Wall Vapor Retarder: Certainteed "Membrain ". B. Under Slab Vapor Retarder: Refer to Section 03 3000 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. Vapor Retarders 072600 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design compliance. B. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics: 1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape and Sealant: As recommended by sheet manufacturer. B. Attachments: As recommended by sheet manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose or foreign matter capable of impairing adhesion. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Clean and repair existing construction to provide positive and continuous seal for vapor retarders. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarders according to manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Vapor Retarder For Stud Framed Walls: Secure sheet retarder to stud faces with adhesive. Lap edges over stud faces, lap ends onto adjacent construction; calk ends with sealant to ensure complete seal. C. Vapor Retarder For Wall /Roof Junction: Lap sheet retarder from wall retarder onto roof vapor retarder continuously. Seal edges and ends with sealant or adhesive. Calk with sealant to ensure complete seal. Position laps over firm bearing. D. Vapor Retarder Seal for Openings: Install sheet retarder between window and door frames and adjacent vapor retarder and seal with sealant or adhesive as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Calk with sealant to ensure complete seal. Position laps over firm bearing. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges or where compatibility with adjacent materials may be in doubt. END OF SECTION Vapor Retarders 072600 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 2700 WEATHER AND AIR BARRIERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes air leakage criteria for primary air seal building enclosure materials and assemblies; materials and installation methods supplementing air seal materials and assemblies; and air seal materials to connect and seal openings, joints, and junctions between other air seal materials and assemblies. B. Refer to Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 2. Section 07 2600 3. Section 07 4646 4. Section 07 5305 5. Section 07 9000 1.2 REFERENCES Unit Masonry Vapor Retarders Fiber Cement Siding Elastomeric Membrane Roofing System. Joint Protection: Sealant materials and installation techniques. A. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 4. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. C. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute: 1. SWRI - Sealant Specification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Air Barrier: Continuous network of materials and joints providing air tightness, with adequate strength and stiffness to not deflect excessively under air pressure differences, to which it will be subjected in service. It can be comprised of single material or combination of materials to achieve performance requirements. Weather and Air Barriers 072700-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Perform design work in accordance with ASCE 7. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. To seal gaps between building enclosure components for exterior wall surfaces and openings. 2. To provide a building air barrier by taping the horizontal and vertical seams of the weather and air barrier. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint conditions. C. Design Data: Submit design calculations. D. Product Data: Submit data on material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation, installation requirements and techniques, product storage and handling criteria. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation. 1.8 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Section 011000 - Summary: Work sequence. B. Sequence Work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with related materials and seals. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work of this section with sections referencing this section. Weather and Air Barriers 072700 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BARRIERS A. Manufacturers: 1. VaproShield, LLC; Gig Harbor, WA; 866 - 731 -7663. 2. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Sheet Seal: VaproShield's "WrapShield with Integrated Tape ": Water- resistive, vapor permeable membrane and air barrier; spun bonded polyester fabric, with UV stable coating. 1. Color: Orange 2. Size: 59"x 164 feet rolls 3. Fastening: Concealed Integrated tape, clear 4. Warranty: 20 years 5. Properties: a. Air permeance per ASTM 2178 0.009 L /s /mz (pass) b. Air leakage per ASTM E283 0.00017 L /s /M2(pass) C. Air retarder per ASTM E1677 Type 1 air barrier (pass) d. Tensile Strength per ASTM D828 MD -44.8 Ibf /inch (pass) CD- 25.1 Ibf /inch (pass) e. Water Resistance per AATCC 127 No leakage noted (pass) f. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96 (method B) 308.9 g /m2 in 24 hours 50 perms (pass) g. Wall Assembly Fire Test — NFPA 285 Pass with diverse assemblies h. Flame Spread Index 10 — Class A (pass) i. Smoke Development Index 35 — Class A (pass) B. Penetration Flashing (window /door interface): 1. "VaproLiqui- Flash" as manufactured by VaproShield LLC, Gig Harbor, WA; 866 - 731 -7663. a. Meets IITS -0230C and ASTM C920. b. VOC meets limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District. C. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer's for appropriate to application. D. Substrate Cleaner: Non - corrosive, type recommended by sealant manufacturer, and compatible with adjacent materials. E. Mastic Adhesive: Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, thick mastic of uniform consistency. F. Adhesive: Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, permanently non - curing. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Concealed, clear, integrated tape is part of sheet seat. B. Fasteners: Weather and Air Barriers 072700 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive and sealants. B. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair smooth surface application. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Sheet Barrier: 1. Secure flexible sheet seal over gypsum board sheathing materials in a horizontal, shingle fashion with 6" horizontal overlaps, sealed with integrated tape joint 2. Stagger weather resistive barrier laps so they do not occur in the same location. Vertical laps shall be a minimum of 12 ". 3. At inside and outside corners, the weather resistive barrier is to be continuous beyond the corners for a minimum of 24 inches with no splices. C. Air Seal for Wall /Roof Junction: Lap sheet seal onto roof air barrier material. Position lap seal over firm bearing. D. Seal between window and door frames and adjacent wall seal materials. Caulk to ensure complete seal. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install air barrier to maintain continuity across different substrates [and interface with existing construction]. 3.3 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section. END OF SECTION Weather and Air Barriers 072700 -4 VAPRO%HIELD® Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls THE VAPROSHIELD SYSTEMS APPROACH VaproShield promotes a systems approach to building envelope design, incorporating Breathable Membranes, Rain Screen Design Components and 3D Window and Flashing Elements, resulting in High Performance Building Envelope Solutions. Complete System Rain Screen of Breathable Design Membranes Components II VRAPSHI ELD® WITH INTEGRATED TAPE WRAPSHIELD® UNSURPASSED IN PERFORMANCE Wer- rapShield: 3D Window High Performance iddlelay g vapor permeable, Flashing Building Envelope and air retardant Elements Solutions inner WrapShield: carrier rlayer WrapShielL combines the best properties of a vater resistive, vapor permeable membrane and an air barrier in one innovative, affordable product. With a rating of 50 perms, WrapShield provides one of the highest levels of vapor permeability in a commercial quality air barrier membrane. Air Barrier • Creating an air barrier with a mechanically attached membrane is easier than ever before. Sealing horizontal seams with our integrated tape limits tape failures, reduces cost of tape and minimizes labor for installation. Horizontal seams stay dry as the upper layer of membrane is designed to attach to the lower membrane, creating the desired shingle effect. Cold and wet weather do not negatively impact the installation. Drying Capacity • With its high permeability rating of 50, wet sheathing dries quickly (see test chart) and moisture vapor can escape, ensuring good indoor air quality while reducing incidence of mold, mildew, wood rot, lumber distortion and metal corrosion. Horizontal Integrated Tape and Cost Effectiveness • Reduce installation time and material expenses with our integrated Exterior Sheathing WrapShield (orange): outer carder layer d � , j�QC 0 w� Moisture and Cold Air Cladding .leased Interior Vapors and Trapped Moisture WrapShield Water Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Membrane construction Vertical VaproBal WrapShield (oi Clear Integrated Tap on both the upper ar lower courees Clear Integrated Tape 6" Horizontal lai minimum, vertical Is Clear Integrated Tape tape at the horizontal seams. WrapShield Water Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Membrane is now ENHANCED with Integrated Tape, easily creating the shingled • Increase accuracy of required 6" shingled overlap, ensuring air and effect for optimum air and water tight horizontal joinery. water tight joinery, by lining upper membrane to lower membrane with pre- marked lap template. Clear integrated adhesive tape on both the upper and lower courses • Installs quickly and easily, mechanically attaching with VaproCaps to plywood, OSB and gypsum sheathing. Durability • Tear, rip and puncture resistant during and after construction, reducing repairs and labor costs. • Sustains 6 months of UV and climate exposure. Environmental Sustainability • Contributes to LEED points in Indoor Environmental Quality and Energy & Atmosphere. • Is 100% recyclable. Clear integrated adhesive tape Clear Integrated Tape ensures 6" horizontal laps and can be sealed in all weather conditions. VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 1/2014 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO SHIELD ® Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls WRAPSHIELD® with Integrated Tape TESTING WRAPSHIELD® WITH INTEGRATED TAPE Drying Rates Comparisons Actual test reports available from VaproShield LLC Comparative Drying Rate Analysis OSB specimen- Comparative Drying Rate Analysis Over Plywood* WallShield 300 WrapShield 280 Tyvek commercial 260 Jumbo Tex 60 min paper 240 (2 layers) 220 Typar 200 Dow Weathennate Plus 180 Grace Ice & Water Shield 160 140 'capy of teats a—a bh 120 specimens) 100 samples o 80 5 In rs) 60 E 40 t7 20 in 9n in an sn an 7n nn on Drying Hours WRAPSHIELD® with Integrated Tape TESTING Acceptance Criteria for Weather Resistive Barriers [CC-ES AC 38 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 0 80 w 60 V 40 0 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Drying Hours WrapShield Water Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Membrane is now ENHANCED with Integrated Tape ter+ \11'. o I ASTM E96* MD - 44.8 Ibf /inch Tensile Strength ASTM D882 (7.8 N /mm) CD - 25.1 Ibf /inch (Method B) 50 Perms PASS AATCC 127 -113TFewarkage noted Water Resistance (55cm hydrostatic on underside of (control and weathered head of water for control or weathered specimens) with diverse samples 5 In rs) lies ** Easily create the necessary shingled effect Will. Tape seals horizontal seams in all weather conditions Eliminates water concerns at horizontal joints Water Vapor ASTM E96* 308.9 g /m2 24hrs 2860 ng /Pa /s /m2 For a complete set of installation instructions and Transmission (Method B) 50 Perms details go to www.VaproShield.com Tested in accordance with ICC -ES AC 38 criteria to meet IBC and IRC Wall Assembly Fire Test NFPA 285 with diverse requirements for Weather Resistive Barriers. 9 lies ** *ASTM E 96 - Method B (wet cup method) typically gives a more Flamespread Index ASTM E -84 10 — Class A realistic result for permeance for highly permeable products than does PASS the Method A (dry cup /desiccant method). Smoke Development * *Contact the VaproShield Technical Team to learn more about NFPA Index ASTM E -8 compliance and testing. VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com I © VaproShield 1/2014 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO%HIELD® Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls OVERVIEW VaproLiqui -Flash is a liquid applied Waterproof Flashing material for window and door interfaces. It is designed for use with VaproShield Sheet Membranes in Air Barrier and Weather Resistive Barrier applications. VaproLiqui -Flash is a unique material formulated to bond without primers to VaproShield membranes and most common wall substrates forming a monolithic, waterproof surface while remaining permeable to water vapor. It allows underlying moisture to escape to the exterior, reducing the potential for mold and decay that is often associated with non - permeable flashings. BENEFITS • Allows same day installation of windows and doors • Bonds directly to damp or dry surfaces and cures under a variety of weather conditions • Skins -over in 30 minutes and dries in 4 hours at 70 °F (21 °C) and 50% relative humidity • Suitable for all climates and weather conditions • Produces an opaque membrane when installed at the recommended 12 -15 wet mils simplifying inspection and quality control • May be exposed to weather for up to 6 months without compromising performance • Single component formulation • No shrinkage. No staining. No yellowing. • Breathable — allows damp surface to dry • Will not support mold growth • Non - corrosive and adds self - sealing properties to fastener penetrations COMPOSITION • Solvent free. Isocyanate free. Complies with all VOC regulations. STPE provides superior long term adhesion, crack bridging and weathering characteristics. Meets IITS -0230C and ASTM -C -920. COMPATIBILITY • Appropriate for vertical or horizontal above -grade applications to concrete, masonry, natural stone, structural sheathing, architectural metal panels, painted metals, glass, PVC, FRP, EPDM, all VaproShield Weather Resistive Barrier and Air Barrier membranes, and most other building materials. VAPROLIQUI -FLASH Apply using a professional caulking gun. Use a dryjoint knife, trowel or spatula to spread. I Using VaproLiqui -Flash simplifies the process of producing watertight details in new or existing construction. VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 6/2012 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO%HIELD° Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls ADHESION VAPRO LIQUI -FLASH • Adheres to most common building materials without priming to produce a durable, weather -tight seal, which is not subject to tearing or displacement when subjected to wind loads during construction. INSTALLATION VAPROLIQUI -FLASH TESTING • Surface and ambient temperatures must be above 35° and below 100 °F (2° to 38 °C) for application. • Cured service temperatures: -50° to 350 °F ( -45° to 175 °C) • Gun -able 20 oz. (567 g) sausages • Easily spreads and trowels into place • See VaproLiqui -Flash Installation Instructions for Best Practice Installation Sequence VOC COMPLIANCE VaproLiqui -Flash is compliant with the following national, state and district VOC regulations: • US Environmental Protection Agency • California Air Resources Board SCM Districts • South Coast Air Quality Management District • Maricopa County, AZ • Northeast Ozone Transport Commission 00 • • VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 6/2012 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO LIQUI- FLASH black, gun -grade sealant SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.45 - 1.60 Not Applicable WT /GAL 12.5 lbs. /gal TOTAL SOLIDS 99% VOC CONTENT 30 g/L maximum FLASH POINT No data FREEZE POINT No data SHELF LIFE 1 year in unopened, factory- sealed container PROPERTIES CURED Hardness, Shore A 40 -45 'A Tensile Strength 180 psi Elongation at Break 400% Water Vapor 14 perms @ 12 mils Transmission Peel Strength Accelerated Weathering Passes Surface Burning Flame Spread: 0 ASTM E 84 Smoke Developed: 15 NFPA and ICC Class A Building Material Staining Passes Corrosive Properties Non - corrosive UNCURED PROPERTIES or�� Cure Rate 3/16 inch thickness /24 hours 35° and below 100 °F (2° to 38 °C) for application. • Cured service temperatures: -50° to 350 °F ( -45° to 175 °C) • Gun -able 20 oz. (567 g) sausages • Easily spreads and trowels into place • See VaproLiqui -Flash Installation Instructions for Best Practice Installation Sequence VOC COMPLIANCE VaproLiqui -Flash is compliant with the following national, state and district VOC regulations: • US Environmental Protection Agency • California Air Resources Board SCM Districts • South Coast Air Quality Management District • Maricopa County, AZ • Northeast Ozone Transport Commission 00 • • VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 6/2012 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO%HIELD® Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls THE VAPROSHIELD SYSTEMS APPROACH VaproShield promotes a systems approach to building envelope design, incorporating Breathable Membranes, Rain Screen Design Components and 3D Window and Flashing Elements, resulting in High Performance Building Envelope Solutions. Complete System Rain Screen 3D Window High Performance of Breathable Design Flashing Building Envelope Membranes Components Elements �olutions VaproBatten VaproBatten is a UV stable, breathable vinyl batten system for rain screen applications. Its unique and innovative design is a direct replacement for pressure treated plywood furring or treated lumber battens reducing trapped moisture damage costs: mold, mildew, rot and /or corrosion. Drying Capacity • Unique formed air cavity allows unobstructed air flow, increasing drying speed in the drainage plane. Durability and Cost Effectiveness • Ships in 5' lengths for easy ground shipping and installation. • Will not rot, eliminating repair costs and preventing moisture related damage within the drainage plane. • Eliminates the need for stainless steel fasteners. • Bull -nose edges prevent membrane tearing or ripping upon application. • Fasteners are installed directly through VaproBatten into the structural elements regardless of weather conditions. Environmental Sustainability • Is 100% recyclable supporting green building design. RAIN SCREEN DESIGN COMPONENTS • 1 FF Moisture and Air Flow Channels Bull -nosed edge prevents building paper Moisture diversion channel Available in two sizes: 'b" (black) and 3/4" (grey) VaproBatten Design VaproBatten 1/2i' (black) or 3/4" (grey) deep WaIlShield (green) or WrapShield (orange) Solid Cladding Open joint maximum height ' /z" 30° to 45° VaproBatten is UV Stable for use with RevealShield and Open Joint Applications VaproBatten installed over WaIlShield or WrapShield using conventional construction. Cladding fastener must penetrate structural element or steel studs WrapShield External sheathing - Unique air and moisture channel. Commercial or J residential cladding VaproVent Strip allows i for maximum drainage and spacing for siding. Rain Screen Design with WrapShield and VaproBatten System VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 10/2012 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca VAPRO%HIELD® Breathable Membrane Systems for Roofs & Walls VAPROVENTr- STRIPS are available in two types: VAPROVENT L STRIPS a n d VAPROVENT HOOK STRIPS. VAPRO VENT" L STRIP VaproVent L Strips are attached to the top and bottom of VaproBattens. VaproVent Strips prevent insect invasion and provide maximum ventilation. 2'1 VAPROVENTT" HOOK STRIP VaproVent Hook Strips are used with VaproBattens as a starter strip for vinyl and beveled siding applications, in place of the VaproVent L Strip at the bottom of the assembly. Vertical VaproBal or WrapShield (oi Clear Integrated Tap on both the upper ar lower courses Clear Integrated Tape 6" Horizontal lal minimum 12" vertical lal Clear Integrated Tape VaproBatten RAIN SCREEN DESIGN COMPONENTS WRAPSHIELD® Cladding VaproVent Hook Strip Close -up: WrapShield using Rain Screen Design Components: VaproBatten and VaproVent Hook Strip ding WrapShield Water Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Membrane is enhanced with Integrated Tape, easily creating the shingled effect for optimum air and water tight horizontal joinery. VaproShield LLC 1 915 26th Ave. N.W. Suite C5 I Gig Harbor, WA 98335 1 Toll Free: 1.866.731.7663 1 www.VaproShield.com 1 © VaproShield 10/2012 VaproShield Canada 1 101 -1001 West Broadway Suite 545 1 Vancouver, B.C. V6H 4E4, Canada I Toll Free: 1.866.871.8263 1 www.VaproShield.ca NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 42 00 PREFORMED METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed metal roofing systems and related flashings and accessory components. B. Roof underlayment. C. Ice and water shield. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. ASTM A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. C. ASTM A792: Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process. D. ASTM C1371: Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers. E. ASTM C1549: Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. F. ASTM D523: Specular Gloss. G. ASTM E1680: Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems H. ASTM E1592: Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. I. ASTM E1646: Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. J. ASTM E1918: Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low Sloped Surfaces in the Field. K. ASTM E1980: Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low Sloped Opaque Surfaces. L. ASTM E2140: Weather Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Water Pressure Head. M. CRRC -1 Method #1: Measuring Solar Reflectance of a Flat, Opaque, and Heterogeneous Surface Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. N. FM Approvals Standard 4471: Class 1 Panel Roofs. O. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. P. UL 580: Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies Q. US Environmental Protection Agency: Energy Star Reflective Roof Products R. US Green Building Council (USGBQ Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and locations of joints, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. Indicate locations of field- and factory - applied sealant. C. Samples: Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Submit one sample, 8 -12 inches long by full panel width, showing proposed metal thickness and seam profile. 2. Submit color samples of metal per Architect's selection. D. Manufacturer Qualifications. 1. Installer Qualifications: Submit list of completed projects, with names and contact information for architects and contractors. E. Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with project requirements. F. LEED Submittals: 1. LEED Credit SS 7.2 — Heat Island Effect — Roof: Product data indicating Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of roof panels, and EnergyStar Ratings. 2. LEED Credit MR 4 — Recycled Content: Product data indicating percentage by weight of post- consumer and post - industrial recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. G. Warranty Documentation. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience and /or approved by manufacturer in writing priorto bid. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 — Material and Equipment. B. Keep panels and accessory items dry. C. Protect against damage and discoloration. D. Handle panels with non - marring slings. E. Support panels to prevent permanent deformation. F. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage. G. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. H. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and keep sheets separate for air - drying. I. Painted panels shall be shipped with protective plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating between panels. Remove strippable film coating prior to installation. Do not allow strippable film coating to remain on panels in extreme heat, cold, or direct sunlight or other UV source. J. Do not allow panels to contact treated lumber. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide ten year warranty under provisions of Section 01 78 33 — Warranties and Bonds B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 25 -year performance warranty, stating the following: 1. Architectural fluorocarbon finish: a. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter delta -E units as determined by ASTM D2244 -02. b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214 -98 method D659. C. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminate. 2. Metal substrate will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate. Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two years following Project Substantial Completion date. Furnish written warranty, signed by installer. D. Weathertight Performance Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weather tight within 10 -year warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. AEP SPAN Steel Building Products USA, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements and Substitution Request Form. 2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Wind Uplift: Class 90 per UL 580. 1. Panel system shall be ASTM E1592 tested under the supervision of an ANSI or ISO /IEC accredited laboratory and the laboratory shall issue the test report. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand wind loads with deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. B. FM Rating: Class 1 -120 according to FM Approvals Standard 4471. C. Air Infiltration: Tested in accordance with ASTM E1680. 1. 0.022 cfm per linear foot of joint at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf. D. Water Infiltration Under Static Pressure: Tested with sidelap sealant per ASTM E1646. 1. No leakage through panel joints at 15.00 psf. E. Water Penetration: No leakage through panel sideseams and endlaps after six hours when tested according to ASTM E2140 at a static water pressure head of 6.00 inches. F. Thermal Movements: Accommodate thermal movement without buckling, joint opening, overstressing components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects, through the following temperature changes: 1. 120 degrees F, ambient. 2. 180 degrees F, material surface. G. Sustainability Characteristics: 1. Recycled Content: 50 percent post- consumer recycled content, calculated according to LEED Credit MR 4. 2. Energy Performance: Provide Energy Star qualified product for slope indicated in Drawings. 3. Provide panels manufactured at Tacoma, WA 98421. 2.03 EXTERIOR SHEET MATERIALS — AEP SPAN "SPAN -LOK HP" Roofing Panels A. Base Metal: or SpanSeam (verify for optimal coordination with 1. Material: Steel solar panel fasteners) 2. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A792 (Zincalume) 3. Minimum Yield Strength: 40,000 psi. 4. Thickness: 22 gauge. 5. Protective Coating: Factory applied hot -melt foam sealant. B. Configuration: 12 -inch panel width, with striations. 1. Panel Length: Panels to be one sheet full length per color, without intermediate seams, Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 extending from ridge or hip to eave or rake. 2. Panel Seam Height: 2 inches. C. Finish: 1. DuraTech° mx metallic finish, consisting of baked -on primer 0.15 -0.2 mil and a baked - on Polyvinylidine Fluoride finish coat 0.70 -0.80 mil with a specular gloss of 20 to 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D523 at 60 degrees. 2. Color: "Cool Metallic Champagne" D. Seam Sealant: Factory apply high -grade butyl mastic sealant within the confines of panel's female leg, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg. 2.04 FRAMING AND SUBSTRATES A. Secondary Framing: See Structural. B. Sheathing: See Structural. C. Roofing Underlayment: Roofing Felt: Asphalt- impregnated organic felt, ASTM D226 Type I. D. Ice and Water Barrier (self- adhesive type): 1. Sheet barrier of rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, 40 mil minimum total thickness. 2. Strippable treated release paper 3. Manufacturers: a. Grace Ice and Water Shield b. Henry, Blueskin RF200 Self- Adhesive Ice and Water Barrier 2.05 FASTENER and CLIPS A. Clips: Provide clip designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract. Clip shall incorporate a self- centering feature to allow 1 inch of movement in both directions along panel length. Clip type shall be selected to meet positive and negative pressures as specified. 1. Sealant: Factory - installed sealant to provide continuity of seal at clip locations. B. Bearing Plate: Designed with tabs to attached clip base to bearing plate on the ground, prior to installation. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for performance indicated. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Trims and Flashings: Material, metal thickness, and finish to match panels. Profiles indicated in Drawings. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other items essential to completeness of standing seam roof installation. B. Panel Penetration Flashings: As recommended by panel manufacturer; designed to provide sufficient movement to prevent creation of points of fixity at penetrations. C. Sealant for Field Application: High grade non - curing butyl or curing urethane sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: 1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. Contact AEP Span if panel lengths required 77 feet or longer. Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Panels shall be factory correctively - leveled. B. Panels: 1. Provide panels in full length from ridge to eave when possible. 2. Where single length panels are not practical, provide mated swaged panels for positive joint end laps, shingled to accommodate water run -off (fabricated with overlap in direction of water flow). 3. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at terminations. Panel configurations which create voids and requiring supplemental closure devices shall not be considered acceptable. 4. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, except at eaves, end laps, ridges, valleys, hips and gables. C. Seams: 1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam. 2. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengagement during design wind uplift conditions as calculated according to local building codes. 3. Provide pre - installed sealant within confines of panel's female leg to aid in resistance of leaks and provide panel -to -panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction movement. 4. Seams shall be continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during installation. Seaming tools shall be sourced from manufacturer's recommended vendor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION C. Verify substrate framing under provisions of Section 01 3100 — Project Management & Coordination. D. Verify conditions with installer present. C. Correct defects prior to starting work. D. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panel system. E. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress. F. Field measure prior to fabrication. Notify Architect if field measurements differ from drawing dimensions. G. Substrate Tolerances: Deviations from flat plane shall not exceed the following: 1. 1/4 inch in 20 feet. 2. 1/2 inch across building elevation. 3. 1/8 inch in 5 feet. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Substrate and Underlayment: Install according to approved shop drawings and metal panel manufacturer's recommendations 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Panels and Trim: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection for weather tight installation. 1. Install according to approved shop drawings. 2. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria. Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3. Form seams with manufacturer - approved motorized seaming tool; completely engage panel, clip, and factory - applied sealant in seam. 4. Comply with methods and recommendations of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for flashing configurations required. 5. Discrepancies betweenjob site conditions and shop drawings shall be broughtto the attention of the Architect for resolution. 6. Cutting and Fitting: a. Cut panels neat, square, and true with shearing action cutters. Torch or power saw cutting is prohibited. b. Openings 6 inches and larger: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original load capacity. C. Openings less than 6 inches: Field cutting is acceptable. 7. Dissimilar Metals or Materials: Where panel or trim may come in contact with dissimilar metals or treated lumber, fabricate transition to facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action. Galvanic action can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely. At points of contact with dissimilar metal or treated lumber, coat panel and trim with protective paint or separate materials with a weatherproof underlayment. C. Direct contact or run -off from CCA, ACQ, CA, or other treated lumber (outdoor wood) or fire retardant impregnated or treated wood shakes or siding can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely. Avoid contact with these materials. B. Accessories: Install trims, flashings, and roofing specialties according to Drawings and manufacturer's recommended details. C. Sealant Installation: Apply according to approved shop drawings and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations. 1. Provide airtight and waterproof installation. D. Installation Tolerances: 1. Flatness: 1/4 inch in 20 feet 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 0170 00 — Contract Closeout. B. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. C. Repairs: 1. Touch up paint is not required for panels with scratches that do not expose metal. 2. Panels or flashings with finish damage exposing metal or with substrate damage shall be replaced. D. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work as required to ensure that roofing will be without damage at Final Completion. END OF SECTION Preformed Metal Siding & Roofing 074200 -6 Span - LokTMhp, Curved Span -LokTM & SpanSeam Span - LokTMhp, Curved Span -LokTM & SpanSeam Performance -rated architectural standing seam metal roof systems. or S sola 074200 C AEP N 16" panel available with subtle striations 24 0 16" and 12" Coverage 10 I Span -Lok hp 90° Seam �� Span -Lok hp 1 0.1865 0.1132 Shown with 2 pencil ribs 0.0665 AZ50 I Cool DuraTech® 5000 Curved Span -Lok 90° Seam 4 16" Coverage Curved Span -Lok &SpanSeam 2„ 22 SpanSeam 50 65 180° Seam 0.2395 Shown with subtle striations 0.1515 24 0.0232 50 65 1.35 1 0.1865 0.1132 1 0.1165 0.0665 AZ50 I Cool DuraTech® 5000 16" 22 0.0294 50 65 1.71 0.2395 0.1485 0.1515 0.0935 AZ50 (polyvinylidene fluoride) or 24 0.0232 50 65 1.49 0.2290 0.1449 0.1491 0.0884 AZ50 DuraTech mx 12 (metallic polyvinylide 22 0.0294 50 65 1.86 0.2959 0.1937 0.1937 0.1242 AZ50 NOTES: The moments of inertia, 1' and I-, presented for determining deflection are: (21Eldive + IcrosJ /3 standard features • Custom manufactured sheet lengths from 5' -0" to 45' -0" • Can be installed on pitches as low as'/4 ":12" ■ Span -Lok hp is Factory Mutual class 1 -75 (5' span) and class 1 -120 (2'/2' span) approved. ■ Has been tested for air infiltration per ASTM E1680, and water infiltration per ASTM E1646 and ASTM E2140. ■ Wind uplift tested in accordance with UL580 and ASTM E1592. ■ Available in 24ga, and 22ga in standard finishes — refer to AEP Span Color Charts for full range of color options and paint systems. nSeam (verify for optimal coordination with anel fasteners) optional features ■ 16" Span -Lok factory notching available for turn under at the eave. Notch provides a clean detail and reduction in labor. ■ Choose from subtle striations, two pencil ribs or a clean flat -pan between ribs depending on aesthetic requirements. ■ 16" Span -Lok available machine curved (factory or field) for radiused applications. ■ Available field formed by AEP Span in continuous long lengths. ■ Short cut sheets from 5' -0" to 1' -0 ". Additional fees and lead times may apply. ■ Steel conforming to Buy America available. Inquire for more information. Span- Lok`hp, Curved Span -Lok" & SpanSeam k SAN 12" Width Span -Lok hp Allowable Inward Loads (lbslft2) per Span (ft. -in.) Gage Span Cond. 2 -0 2 -6 3 -0 3 -6 4 -0 4 -6 5 -0 LOADING TABLE LEGEND f - Load limited by allowable stress f 486 327 1 233 174 135 1 107 88 L f 629 421 301 224 174 139 112 SS L /180 L���L L�� - - - - - - SS L /180 - - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - - f 303 200 142 104 80 63 52 f 405 266 188 140 107 85 70 24 DS L /180 - - - - - - - 24 DS L/180 - - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - - f 368 244 174 129 99 79 65 f 490 326 232 172 133 106 86 TS L /180 - - - - - - - TS - L /60 - f 667 442 313 233 179 142 116 873 578 409 304 235 186 151 SS L /180 - - - - - - - SS JL/60 - - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - - - - - - - - f 435 285 200 148 114 90 74 579 379 267 197 152 120 97 22 DS I L /180 - - - - 22 DS L /180 - - - - - - - L /60 I - - - - - - - L /60 - - - - - - - f 530 350 247 183 141 112 91 f 705 465 329 245 189 149 122 TS L /180 - - - - - - TS L /180 - L /60 L /60 - Allowable Outward Loads (lbs/ft2) per Span ft-in-) Allowable Outward Loads (lbstft2) per Span ft-in-) MMMM 24 189.9 177.0 163.2 148.5 132.8 116.2 98.7 80.3 61.0 24 1 226.9 1 208.5 1 1901 . 171.7 1532 134.8 116.3 97.8 79.3 22 249.1 2192 1917 . 166.7 144.1 124.1 106.6 91.5 78.9 22 1 226.9 1 208.5 1 1901 . 171.7 1532 134.8 116.3 97.8 79.3 LOADING TABLE LEGEND f - Load limited by allowable stress L - Span (Inches) U180 and L /60 - Load limited by a deflection of 1/180 and L /60 of the span w - Distributed load w SS- Single span L w 'j� L �; L �1 Inward Loads DS- Double span w TS- Triple span L���L L�� Outward w 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Loads L Oil Canning: All flat metal surfaces can display waviness commonly referred to as "oil canning ". "Oil canning" is an inherent characteristic of steel products, not a defect, and therefore is not a cause for panel rejection. NOTES: ■ Top values based on allowable bending and shear stress. Bottom values based on allowable deflection of U180 and U60. ■ "' denotes that the allowable load is limited by the allowable stress. ■ Steel conforms to ASTM A792 (Zincalume) structural steel. ■ Values are based on the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual" (2007 Edition). ■ Contact AEP Span Representative regarding allowable loads for Curved Span -lok. ■ Allowable outward loads are dependent upon fastener -to- substrate capacities. Maximum allowable outward loads are shown. Specifications subject to change without notice. ©2010 -2014 ASC Profiles LLC All rights reserved. April 2014 Printed in USA (PS206) Rev Web Zincalume® Plus (unpainted) SRI: 32 • 24ga, 22ga & 20 ga Dark Bronze SRI: 36 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Colonial Red SRI: 35 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Forest Green SRI: 29 • 24ga & 22ga Matte Black SRI: 30 • 24ga & 22ga IlIql Zinc Grey SRI: 39 • 24ga & 22ga SRI: 57 • 24ga & 22ga Irl Cool Marine Green SRI: 45 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Terra -Cotta SRI: 41 • 24ga & 22ga ( Hemlock Green SRI: 30 • 24ga & 22ga IF Cool Parchment SRI: 57 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Weathered Copper SRI: 38 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Old Town Gray SRI: 41 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Regal Blue SRI: 30 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Jade Green SRI: 31 • 24ga & 22ga 07 4243 Cool Regal White SRI: 85 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Tahoe Blue SRI: 30 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Red SRI: 49 • 24ga & 22ga Cool Leaf Green SRI: 29 • 24ga & 22ga Note: Color swatches are for reference only and are limited by printing process and viewing conditions. Actual color samples are available upon request Contact AEP SPAN representative for actual color samples prior to purchase. SRI = Solar Reflective Index (ASTM E -1980, based on medium wind speed) 2:12 sloped roo I= M AN Cool ZACtique® II Cool Metallic Silver Cool Metallic Champagne Cool Metallic Copper SRI: 36 • 24ga & 22ga SRI: 59 • 24ga & 22ga SRI: 53 • 24ga & 22ga SRI: 58 • 24ga & 22ga METALLIC COATINGS NOTE: . Minor differences in both color and appearance are normal and to be expected with metallic coatings, as it is virtually impossible to match one metallic coating to another. Due to the coil application process, striations and longitudinal patterning may also show C on these products. To minimize the possible visual effects of the normal minor differences in paint and its application, an entire job V should be painted at one time. Additionally, fabricated panels, flat sheets, and flashings should be orientated in the same direction x�n rtc�uvca for installation. MEMBER DURATECH 5000 AND DURATECH mx TESTS ASTM TEST PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION: DuraTech 5000 is a premium fluo- ropolymer (PVDF) coating system. DuraTech mx is a PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND DURABILITY premium fluoropolymer (PVDF) pearlescent coating system. When applied and cured on properly prepared Specular Gloss D -523 8 -25% at 60 substrates, DuraTech coatings exhibit exceptional color stability, chalk resistance, durability, abrasion resistance, Pencil Hardness D -3363 HB minimum chemical resistance and flexibility. Flexibility T-Bend D -4145 No evidence of cracking. No loss of adhesion ** COMPOSITION & APPLICATION: DuraTech 5000 and DuraTech mx coatings shall contain a mini - Cross Hatch Adhesion D -3359 No adhesion loss mum of 70% fluoropolymer resin. These coating sys- Reverse Impact D -2794 No cracking or loss of adhesion tems, including primer, are to be applied by coil coaters experienced in handling 70% Kynar 500@ or Hylar Abrasion, Falling Sand D -968 65 liters 5000@ PVDF resin -based coatings. Flame Test E -84 Class A coating ZINCALUMEO SUBSTRATE: The Zincalume@ and ATMOSPHERIC • POLLUTANT RESISTANCE Galvalume® coatings are AZ50 and is comprised of a 45% zinc, and 55% aluminum alloy by weight. Acid Pollutants D -1308 SulfuricAcid No bleaching PRETREATMENT: All substrates are pre- treated in Muriatic Acid No color change, no blistering accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. The Sodium Hydroxide No color change, no blistering pretreatment is to provide a suitable surface for applica- Acid Rain Test Kesternich 15 cycles minimum tion of the recommended primer. Alkali Resistance Kesternich No effect COLORS: DuraTech 5000 and DuraTech mx are Salt Spray Resistance B- 117 Passes 1,000 hours, coated steel ** available in a wide selection of pre - formulated standard colors, which is shown on chart. Custom colors can Cyclic Salt Fog B -5894 2,000 hours passes adhesion also be formulated. Humidity Resistance @ 100° B -2247 Passes 2,000 hours, coated steel ** GLOSS: DuraTech 5000 coatings are supplied with WEATHERING a gloss of 8 -15% at 60° per ASTM D -523. DuraTech mx ( metallics) have a gloss rating of 15 -25% at 60° per South Florida Exposure D -2244 <5 NBS units change ASTM D -523. UVB D -822 Passes 3,000 hours FILM THICKNESS: The nominal dry film thickness Chalk Resistance D -659 Rating of 8 minimum for DuraTech coatings is a nominal 1.0 mil. The primer is applied with a 0.15 -0.30 mil and top coat is applied at * All tests performed to the latest ASTM revision. The rest results set forth are representative of the results obtained by the a nominal 0.70 -0.80 mils. Backer system is a polyester paint manufacturer. Warranties of the product are exclusively set forth in the applicable contract documents. coating applied over a primer with total dry film thick- * Performances on G90, Zincalume, Galvalume. ness of 0.50 -0.65 mil thickness. Thick Film - A high -build DuraTech 5000 or Profile Coverage 24 ga 22 ga. 20 ga 18 ga DuraTech mx coating system is also available on Box Rib® /Reverse Box Rib 36" Stocked Stocked Barre only Not Stocked special order. It is normally applied at a total dry stocked film thickness of 1.5 -2.0 mils. For this system, high Design Span® hp /Batten 16 ", 17" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A build primer is applied at a nominal 0.8 -1.2 mils and topcoat is applied at a nominal 0.70 -0.80 mils. Design Span® hp /Batten 12" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A Design Span® hp /Batten 18" Stocked Not Stocked N/A N/A Clear Coat - A 0.5 mil clear coat also available on special order. Can be applied as a top coat on HR -36° 36" Stocked Stocked Bare only Not Stocked stocked a 3 or 4 coat system on special order. Klip Rib° 16" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A FINISH WARRANTIES Mini -V -Beam 32" Stocked Stocked Barre only Not Stocked Warranties for chalk, fade and film integrity are avail - stocked able in durations of up to 30 years for DuraTech Nu -Wave® Corrugated 32" (34'/3 Wall) Stocked Stocked Bare o l N/A 5000 colors and up to 25 years for DuraTech mx Prestige Series° 12" Stocked Stocked Not Stocked Not Stocked (metallics). All AEP Span panels are offered with a corrosion warranty on the Zincalume substrate. Select Seam® Narrow Batten 21 A" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A Terms can be affected by factors such as environ- ment. Inquire for details. Select Seam® Narrow Batten 16" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A Select Seam® Narrow Batten 12" Stocked Not Stocked N/A N/A OIL CANNING All flat metal surfaces can display waviness commonly Select Seam ®Wide Batten 22 %" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A referred to as "oil canning ". This is caused by steel mill tolerances, variations in the substrate and relative Select Seam ®Wide Batten 17' /a" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A reflectivity of the material. "Oil canning" is an inher- Select Seam" Wide Batten 13'/," Stocked Not Stocked N/A N/A ent characteristic of steel products, not a defect, and therefore is not a cause for panel rejection. Span -Lokk' hp 16", 12" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A Curved Span -Lok'" 16" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A COLORS BY REQUEST AEP Span continues to carry on the tradition of Span$eam'" 16" Stocked Stocked N/A N/A matching custom colors. Show us the color you want and AEP Span will supply it. Flat Sheet 46 Stocked Bare only Stocked stocked Not Stocked Flat Sheet 4833%" Stocked Not Stocked Not Stocked Not Stocked TECHNICAL SUPPORT Consult with a Technical Representative to specify Notes: appropriate materials and finishes for individual project N/A - not available in that gage Not all profiles are manufactured in all locations. conditions. Actual panel and color samples are avail - Stocked - stocked in the colors shown on chart able upon request. Not Stocked - minimum order size and longer lead times may apply NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL SOFFITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal soffit panels, smooth and perforated. B. Soffit trim and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASTM A446-Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) bythe Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements. C. ASTM A606 - Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled and Cold - Rolled, High- Strength, Low - Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance. D. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. E. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM G26 - Color Retention. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 00 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings - Submit shop drawings, specifications and installation instructions for all soffit materials as follows: 1. Detail fabrication, erection and anchorage details. 2. Conditions at openings. 3. Anchorage and accessories. 4. Special erection instructions or details. 5. Dimensions, gauge and shape of materials. C. Samples: Submit two samples of soffit material finish, sized to illustrate finish color, sheen and texture. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience and approved by manufacturer in writing prior to bid. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 0160 00 — Material and Equipment. B. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. C. Stack pre- finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. D. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. Metal Soffits 074213 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide specified manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 0170 00— Contract Closeout. B. Warranty: 20 -year, non - prorated finish warranty. Includes coverage for degradation of panel finish including color fading caused by exposure to weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. AEP Span B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements and Substitution Request Form. 2.02 METAL SOFFITS A. Prestige (R -2) — 12, Perforated 1. Type: Flat pan, 12 -inch, no reveal. 2. Perforations: Series of 1/16 -inch diameter holes on 5/32 -inch staggered centers in a uniform pattern along the entire length of the panel. Verify 13.8% openness. 3. Material: Steel w/ zincalume (ASTM A792) 4. Thickness: 24 gauge 5. Exposure: 12- inches 6. Finish: DuraTech 5000 fluoropolymer (PVDF) coating system. 7. Color: Single color as selected byArchitectfrom manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. Accessories: All accessories used shall be accessories designed by the soffit manufacturer for use with the soffit panels and having same finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate framing under provisions of Section 01 31 00 — Project Management and Coordination. B. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panel system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Before starting work, verifygoverning dimensions at building; examine, clean and repair, if necessary, any adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for its proper installation. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation manual, latest edition. C. Special details shown on the drawing shall be included as part of installation. D. Dissimilar materials: Metal Soffits 074213 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Care must be exercised in placing aluminum in contact with metals or materials not compatible with aluminum. 2. Dissimilar materials shall be painted or otherwise protected when they are not in contact with aluminum or when drainage from them passes over aluminum. E. Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminum work. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/8 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 0170 00 — Contract Closeout. B. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. C. Clean and wash pre- finished surfaces with mild soap and water, rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION Metal Soffits 074213 -3 Prestige Series° Prestige Series is a concealed fastener metal wall system that reveals a clean distinctive design in any application. 6" Reveal - Flat Pan 12" Coverage 12" Coverage 2" Reveal - 2 Pencil Ribs 1 1%" 12" Coverage (Shown with optional ribs) 074213 J7O'#SPAN 12" No Reveal - Flat Pan 1" Reveal - Flat Pan 12" Coverage '® 24` 1.51 0.0824 0.0605 0.1048 0.0721 0.0954 0.1221 Prestige Options No Reveal Panel Revea'. - Full 12" Panel 22' 1.89 0.1064 0.0853 0.1338 20 2.27 0.1337 0.1203 0.1643 18 2.93 0.1770 0.1799 1 0.2130 1 0.1649 2" Reveal -10" Up, 2" Down 1" Reveal -11" Up, 1" Down NOTES: The moments of inertia, 1* and I-, presented for determining deflection are: (26..t1Ve + lG_s) /3 6" Reveal - 6" Up, 6" Down *22 & 24 gauge are standard. standard features ■ Custom manufactured sheet lengths from 5' -0" to 40' -0" *. ■ Offered in 4 different reveals: 0 ", 1 ", 2 ", and 6 ". ■ Available in 22ga in standard finishes — refer to AEP Span Color Charts for full range of color options and paint systems. ■ Tested in accordance to ASTM E1592, and ASTM E283 and E331. ■ High performance clip available to meet wind loads. ■ Available with 1 or 2 minor ribs. ■ Full 12" panel available with wave pattern. ■ 25' -0" max for 24ga panels. optional features • Short cut sheets from 5-0" to 2' -0 " *. Additional fees and lead times may apply. • Stucco embossed — Subject to 500 If minimum. Additional fees and lead times may apply. • Custom colors, thick film primer and /or clear coat paint finishes available. Subject to 3,000 square feet minimum order. ** • 18ga and 20ga available - subject to a minimum order size of 3,000 square feet and longer lead times. • Perforation options available for an additional charge. Minimum order size 500 sq feet. Select from standard perforation patterns with open areas of 7.8 %, 13.8 %, 23.4 %, 30.6 %, or 41.4 %. * 1' -0" for non - revealed panel. Inquire with AEP Span representative regarding premium Vintage® and DuraTech® Dimensional Prints availability. Prestige Series° L, S AN SS f 476 281 184 f - Load limited by allowable stress L - Span (Inches) L/180 - Load limited by a deflection of 1/180 of the span w - Distributed load 129 96 74 59 48 39 33 28 24 21 J4 L J- L J Inward Loads L1180 - - - - - - - - - - 26 21 17 24 DS f 506 311 209 149 111 86 68 56 46 39 33 28 25 L1180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - TS f 586 369 251 181 136 106 85 69 57 49 42 35 31 L /180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - f 651 389 256 181 134 104 82 67 55 46 39 34 30 SS L /180 - - - - - - - - - 43 34 27 22 22 DS f 652 404 273 195 146 113 90 73 61 51 44 37 33 L /180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - TS f 751 477 327 237 179 139 111 91 76 63 54 47 41 L /180 - - - - - - - - - f 697 424 282 200 150 116 91 74 62 52 44 38 33 SS L1180 - - - - - - - - - - 43 34 28 20 DS f 645 404 274 197 149 115 92 75 62 53 45 38 34 L1180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - TS f 737 473 327 238 180 140 113 93 77 65 56 48 42 L /180 - - - - - - - - f 973 605 410 293 220 171 136 111 92 77 67 57 50 SS L /180 - - - - - - - - - 72 56 45 37 18 DS f 839 531 364 263 198 155 123 101 83 70 60 53 45 L /180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - TS f 952 619 431 316 240 188 151 124 103 87 74 65 56 L /180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOADING TABLE LEGEND f - Load limited by allowable stress L - Span (Inches) L/180 - Load limited by a deflection of 1/180 of the span w - Distributed load w SS- Single span J4 L J w J4 L J- L J Inward Loads DS- Double span w TS- Triple span Outward w 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Loads J L -J Oil Canning: All flat metal surfaces can display waviness commonly referred to as "oil canning ". "Oil canning" is an inherent characteristic of steel products, not a defect, and therefore is not a cause for panel rejection. NOTES: ■ Allowable inward and outward load tables are for FULL 12" Panels with No Reveals. Contact info @aepspan.com for allowable inward and outward loads on other panel reveal options. ■ Top values based on allowable bending and shear stress. Bottom values based on allowable deflection of U180. ■ "' denotes that the allowable deflection is limited by the allowable stress. ■ Steel conforms to ASTM A792 (Zincalume®) with 50 ksi minimum yield for 24 and 22 gauge, 40 ksi minimum yield for 20 and 18 gauge. 18 gauge supplied as G -90 (ASTM A653). ■ Values are based on the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual" (2007 Edition). ■ Allowable outward loads are dependent upon fastener -to- substrate capacities. Maximum allowable outward loads are shown. Specifications subject to change without notice. 02007 -2013 ASC Profiles LLC. All rights nerved. April 2013 Printed in USA (PS134) NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER - CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiber cement siding panels: 1. Board and batten pattern application, and 2. Rainscreen application on metal furring channels. B. Related Work: 1. Section 07 27 00 — Weather and Air Barriers. 2. Section 09 90 00 — Painting and Coating. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard details that apply to the Project for rainscreen application, including but not limited to window /door head conditions, sill conditions, inside and outside corners, and wall /soffit conditions. 2. Provide detailed drawings of atypical non - standard applications of cementitious siding materials which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the manufacturer 3. Indicate layout of panels, joints, and furring channels on each elevation. C. Selection Samples: Provide sample of panel demonstrating texture of finish surface, thickness, and edge condition. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience with installation of similar products. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing. C. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: 30 -year, limited product warranty against manufacturing defects. B. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years. Fiber - Cement Siding 074646-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Quality Standard: James Hardie Building Products, Inc; Mission Viejo, CA; (866) 274 -3464. B. Substitutions: Per Section 0160 00 — Product Requirements 2.2 SIDING A. HardiePanel as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 1. Type: Smooth 2. Width: 4'x8' and 4'x10' panels 3. Thickness: 5/16- inches. 4. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing per Section 09 9000. B. Battens: Cedar, 1 x 4 smooth, pre - primed for field finishing per Section 09 9000. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Weather barrier system shall be as approved by siding manufacturer for a complete warranted system. B. Wall Weather Barrier: Section 07 27 00. C. Penetration Flashing: Section 07 27 00. D. Metal Flashings: Section 07 62 00. E. Furring Channels: Galvanized steel or aluminum alloy, profile as indicated on Drawings; to attach panel system to sheathing. Thickness as required to support loads with minimal deflection. 1. Furring at Rigid Insulation (horizontal): 2 -inch Z- channels. 2. Furring for attaching siding panels to Z- channels (vertical): 1 -inch hat channels. 3. Anchors: Stainless steel F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; stainless steel; fastener cap same color as selected by Architect. G. Asphalt- impregnated Building Felt for open joint locations of siding panels. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer. 1. Primer: PrimePlus by James Hardie. 2. Topcoats: Refer to Section 09 90 00 — Painting and Coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Notify Architect if damaged or wet wall sheathing is discovered and was not remedied following demolition work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Fiber - Cement Siding 074646 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION -ACCESSORIES A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Verify weather barrier system is properly installed per warranty requirements. C. Verify rigid insulation is properly installed. D. Coordinate "black" asphalt building felt installation with open joint locations of siding panels. E. Coordinate furring channel layout with panel and joint layout, and to allow drainage of water from rainscreen application. F. Furring Channels: 1. Install channel at 16" o.c., attach at each horizontal Z- channel. G. Flashings: 1. Install flashings to dry surfaces. 2. Install window and door head flashings in conjunction with the building wrap weather barrier system. 3.4 INSTALLATION — HARDIEPANEL SIDING A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for open joint application. B. Install panels in layout according to approved shop drawings. C. Maintain joint space between adjacent panels to %- inches D. Refer to Drawings for typical fastening pattern. E. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade and /or top of stone veneer. F. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required HardiePanel siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER -405. G. Locate splices at least 12 inches away from window and door openings. H. Outside Corners: Alternate end panel lap at corners with adjacent panel(s) I. Prime and paint panel edges prior to fastening to furring channels. J. Install cedar battens as indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FINISHING — Factory Primed A. Provide factory primed siding products. B. Refer also to Section 099000 — Painting and Coating. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of two coats of high quality 100 percent latex based exterior grade paint within 180 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Fiber - Cement Siding 074646 -3 Rainscreen QUICK REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 Why a rainscreen? 2 1 What is a rainscreen? 3 1 To which products and applications do the rainscreen requirements apply? 4 1 What furring can I use? 5 1 How do I attach furring to my building? 6 1 How do I attach HardiePanel° vertical siding to furring? 7 1 HardiePanel vertical siding warranty and rainscreen 8 1 Frequent questions from the field The guidance and instructions provided herein are only valid for and applicable to James Hardie"' products. James Hardie Building Products Inc. makes no warranty or representation with respect to use of the information contained herein for any use other than with James Hardie products, including but not limited to use with fiber cement siding products made by other manufacturers or siding products made of other materials. Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 Building Science experts have proven rainscreen assemblies maximize the service life of buildings through superior moisture management (drainage and drying). The 4 D's of Moisture Management Design provides a framework for how rainscreen improves drainage and drying. eaves and cladding ' D4 Durable .. ............................... D3 Drying by diffusion through Materials " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "' the wall and ventilation at for the the bottom of the cavity conditions .. ............................... . ............................... D2 Drainage of water from INSIDE behind cladding DUrSIDE� . 2006, NZ Department of Building and Housing, `External Moisture —A/7 Introduction to Weathertightness Design Principles' The following third party resources are provided for additional reference. Building Science Corporation: buildingscience. corn/documents /digests/bsd- 013 - rain - control -in- buildings buildingscience. corn/documents /digests/bsd030- rain - control - theory buildingscience. coMdocuments /reports /rr- 0907 - ventilated - wall - claddings- review - performance - modelin American Institute of Architects: aia.oro/aiaucmp /groups /ek members /documents /pdf/aiab098384.pdf aia.org/aiaucmolgroups /ek members /documentslpdflaiab099815.�df Jon Eakes Learning Curve: loneakes. com/ons- fixit- database / 2112- Rainscreen- Detailing- and - the - Canadian - Building -Code D1 Deflection by . ................................... The following third party resources are provided for additional reference. Building Science Corporation: buildingscience. corn/documents /digests/bsd- 013 - rain - control -in- buildings buildingscience. corn/documents /digests/bsd030- rain - control - theory buildingscience. coMdocuments /reports /rr- 0907 - ventilated - wall - claddings- review - performance - modelin American Institute of Architects: aia.oro/aiaucmp /groups /ek members /documents /pdf/aiab098384.pdf aia.org/aiaucmolgroups /ek members /documentslpdflaiab099815.�df Jon Eakes Learning Curve: loneakes. com/ons- fixit- database / 2112- Rainscreen- Detailing- and - the - Canadian - Building -Code Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 A rainscreen is an exterior cladding system featuring an air gap between the exterior cladding and the water - resistive barrier. The air gap is created by vertical furring attached to the wall, with the cladding fastened to framing or nailable substrate *, through the furring. James Hardie requires the drainage and ventilation cavity (air gap) to be 3/8 in. (10 mm) or greater. I HardiePaneP Vertical Siding OUTSIDE CORNER WOOD FURRING INSTALL BUG SCREEN (3/8 IN. THICK MIN.) - RAINSCREEN II 3/8 in. MIN. GAP (DO NOT CAULK)' 6 RAINSCREEN AIRSPACE FIGURE 1 II material such as framing, sheathing, or furring, composed of wood or wood- Z- FLASHING WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER �l (HardieWrap® weather II II barrier or equivalent) II OPTIONAL DECORATIVE BAND EXTERIOR SHEATHING HORIZONTAL BREAK AT FLOOR II BETWEEN FLOOR JOINTS. 114" MINIMUM - CLEARANCE IS REQUIRED BETWEEN TRANSITION - RAINSCREEN _ ------- - - - - -- \ / � R PANEL HORIZONTALS IN DIRECT TO APPLICATIONS. S.A.F. MEMBRANE FIGURE 2 E HardiePanel O Vertical Siding II II HardiePanel° Siding WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER (HardieWrap® weather barrier or equivalent) EXTERIOR SHEATHING WOOD RAINSCREEN FURRING (3/8 in. THICK MIN.) INSTALL BUG SCREEN AS NECESSARY 3/8 in. MIN. GAP (DO NOT CAULK)' 6 NAILABLE SUBSTRATE. The IRC defines a Nailable Substrate as a product or material such as framing, sheathing, or furring, composed of wood or wood- Z- FLASHING based materials, or other materials and fasteners, providing equivalent fastener _ — — — — — — — — — — �l withdrawal resistance under transverse load. I II 'NOTE: 3/8 IN. MIN. GAP IS RECOMMENEDED TO OPTIONAL DECORATIVE BAND ACCOUNT FOR STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT L J BOARD W1 EXTENDED Z -FLASH BETWEEN FLOOR JOINTS. 114" MINIMUM CLEARANCE IS REQUIRED BETWEEN NOTE: EVERY OTHER FLOOR BREAK SHALL PANEL HORIZONTALS IN DIRECT TO APPLICATIONS. HAVE Z- FLASHING EXTENDING BACK TO THE WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 TO WHICH PRODUCTS AND APPLICATIONS DO THE RAINSCREEN REQUIREMENTS APPLY? All James Hardie panel cladding products, including HardiePanel° vertical siding, Reveal° panels, Cempanel vertical siding, and any other James Hardie fiber cement panel siding, require a rainscreen (3/8 inch air gap behind the cladding) when installed under any of the conditions listed below: 1 I Exterior walls without eave overhangs; or 2 1 Exterior walls that are 3 stories and taller; or 3 1 Exterior walls where fiber - cement panels are installed with express seam joints (see Figure 3). FIGURE 3 PRESSURE TREATED WOOD James Hardie recognizes regional variation of material available for furring, particularly when it comes to preservative treatment. In cases where preservative treatment is necessary, James Hardie recommends following industry expert warnings and guidance against direct contact between certain types of metal fasteners and wood treated with copper based preservatives to avoid the potential for corrosion of metal fasteners, flashings, and accessories. Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 FURRING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION Furring material may be steel (Z -girt, hat channel) or wood batten to create a minimum 3/8 in. air gap behind the fiber cement panel. STEEL FURRING: Material must be 20 gauge min (33 mil) to 16 gauge max (54 mil), with a dimension that satisfies the installation requirements. When installing steel Z- girts, be sure to nail close to the Z -girt spine when applying panel fasteners. This helps prevent deflection which can result in incomplete fastening and gaps between the panel and the furring. WOOD FURRING: If wood furring is not being used as a nailable substrate, there is no wood species or specific gravity requirement. Furring should be of sufficient width to assure adequate siding fastener connection; widths from 2 in. to 3.5 in. are recommended. Wall corner intersections may require wider furring to accommodate trim. If wood furring is being used as a nailable substrate, material must be Spruce- Pine -Fir or any wood species with a specific gravity of 0.42 or greater in accordance with the American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) and American Wood Council National Design Specification (NDS). Wood furring shall conform to building code for natural decay resistance or treated lumber (2012 IBC §718.2). Typical wood rainscreen furring includes treated 1/2 in., 3/8 in., 3/4 in. thick plywood, or treated nominal 1 x4 in. lumber (actual 3/4 in. thick). ALTERNATIVE FURRING: Other non -wood or non -steel furring may be considered for use in rainscreen applications. These furring types are considered non - structural and subject to use per manufacturer's instructions. You and your design professional are responsible for determining the suitability and performance of alternatve furring types. James Hardie makes no representation as to their performance or suitability. Guidance: htto. //www.Minstitute.org/ documents /RevisedSpecGuideJan2012 000.ydf 0 M Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 Furring attachment guidance can be found in James Hardie Building Products Technical Bulletin 19 (TB19), Table A.4: Design Guidance on Furring Attachment for James Hardie° Siding, which can be downloaded from: 0ameshardie.com /pdf /technical - bulletins /19 -0h- over - advanced - framing -or- continuous - insulation. pdf See pages 7 -8 for additional information regarding furring options, attachment instructions and fasteners. HardiePanel vertical siding Multi- family /Commercial Installation instructions are found at the following locations ('ameshardiecommercial.com): USA HZ5® Products 0ameshardiecommercial.com /pdf/ install /hardiepanel -hz5- commercial. pdf USA HZ101 Products 0ameshardiecommercial.com /pdf/ install /hardiepanel -hzl 0- commercial. pdf Canadian HZ5 Products 0ameshardiecommercial.com /pdf/ install /hardiepanel- hz5- canada- commercial. pdf See pages 7 -8 for additional information regarding furring options, attachment instructions and fasteners. WOOD FRAMING CONDITIONS — TABLE 1 Ll Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 Furring must be installed to resist code defined structural loads (such as wind load) NOTE: The siding attachment system design is the responsibility of a design professional. The advice provided in this guide for building a nailable base for attachment over foam sheathing, gypsum sheathing, OSB sheathing, or any combination thereof, must be approved by the professionals engaged for your project, e.g., a builder, architect or engineer. James Hardie disclaims any and all liability for the use or misuse of the information contained in this guide. Note: James Hardie recommends a siding mock -up prior to installation to review assembly details, and ensure the fastening practice and/or fastening tools are properly adjusted. Fasteners must be installed to avoid overdriving, but snug enough to remove gaps between connected parts. Adjust driving tools and installation practice accordingly. Furring Panel Attachment Wall Assembly Substrate Furring Options Attachment to Wall Over Fastener Requirements Guidance Reference Furring Reference Furring counts as part of nailable substrate; it is Plywood or Technical Bulletin 19 Wood furring attached directly attached to wood dimensional Table A 4 Use wood frame directly to wood sheathing & framing; it is lumber, minimum ESR 1844 fastener selected per framing" SPF or equivalent wood 3/8 in. thick JH Tech Support ESR 1844 species with specific gravity of 0.42 or greater Furring does not count Extend fastener se- Wood Furring as nailable substrate; it is Plywood or Technical Bulletin 19 lectetl per ESR 1844 attached through 1 attached to wood sheathing dimensional Table A 4 by the thickness of the in.or less non - nailable and framing through 1 lumber, minimum ESR 1844 furring and the total substrate" in. or less of non - nailable substrate such as gypsum 3/8 in. thick JH Tech Support thickness of non -nail- and /or rigid insulation able substrate. Furring counts as entire nailable substrate; it is structurally attached" Dimensional Wood Furring to wood sheathing and lumber with Technical Bulletin 19 Use wood frame allached through framing through greater thickness equal to Table A 4 fastener selected greater than 1 in. than 1 in. of non - nailable ESR 1844 fastener ESR 1844 per ESR 1844. Fully non - nailable sub- substrate such as gypsum embedment into JH Tech Support embed fastener into strate" and /or rigid insulation, it wood furring is SPF or equivalent wood species with specific gravity of 0.42 or greater Metal furring attached Furring counts as all of 16 to 20 ga steel Technical Bulletin 19 ESR 1844 Use metal fastener to wood framing" nailable substrate hat channel JH Tech Support selected per ESR 1844 Furring must be installed to resist code defined structural loads (such as wind load) NOTE: The siding attachment system design is the responsibility of a design professional. The advice provided in this guide for building a nailable base for attachment over foam sheathing, gypsum sheathing, OSB sheathing, or any combination thereof, must be approved by the professionals engaged for your project, e.g., a builder, architect or engineer. James Hardie disclaims any and all liability for the use or misuse of the information contained in this guide. Note: James Hardie recommends a siding mock -up prior to installation to review assembly details, and ensure the fastening practice and/or fastening tools are properly adjusted. Fasteners must be installed to avoid overdriving, but snug enough to remove gaps between connected parts. Adjust driving tools and installation practice accordingly. Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 STEEL FRAMING I CONDITIONS —TABLE 2 Furring must be installed to resist code defined structural loads (such as wind load) NOTE: The siding attachment system design is the responsibility of a design professional. The advice provided in this guide for building a nailable base for attachment over foam sheathing, gypsum sheathing, OSB sheathing, or any combination thereof, must be approved by the professionals engaged for your project, e.g., a builder, architect or engineer. James Hardie disclaims any and all liability for the use or misuse of the information contained in this guide. Note: James Hardie recommends a siding mock -up prior to installation to review assembly details, and ensure the fastening practice and/or fastening tools are properly adjusted. Fasteners must be installed to avoid overdriving, but snug enough to remove gaps between connected parts. Adjust driving tools and installation practice accordingly. IM V.111rIt" I] I IM III Use steel frame fastener selected per Wood furring attached Furring does not count Plywood or Technical Bulletin 19 ESR 1844. directly to steel as nailable substrate, it is dimensional Table A 4 ESR 1844 •3 full threads past framing" directly attached to steel lumber, minimum back of steel stud framing 3/8 in. thick JH Tech Support for screws • 1/4 in. past back of steel stud for pins Use steel frame Furring does not count as fastener selected per Wood furring attached nailable- substrate; it is at- Plywood or Technical Bulletin 19 ESR 1844. through 1 in.or to steel framing over dimensional Table A 4 ESR 1844 •3 full threads past less non - nailable 1 n. o sheathing 1 in. o r less lumber, minimum back of steel stud substrate" in and /or rigid insulation 3/8 in. thick JH Tech Support for screws • 1/4 in. past back of steel stud for pins Furring counts as entire nailable substrate; it is Wood furring attached attached" to steel framing Technical Bulletin 19 Use wood frame through greater than through greater than 1 in. 2x4 dimensional Table A 4 fastener selected 1 in. non - nailable of sheathing and /or rigid lumber ESR 1844 per ESR 1844. Fully substrate" insulation; it is SPF or JH Tech Support embed fastener into equivalent wood species furring with specific gravity of .42 or greater. Technical Bulletin 19 Steel furring to steel Furring counts as nailable 16 to 20 ga steel Table A4 Use steel frame framing" substrate; it is attached to Z -girt or hat ESR 1844 fastener per ESR steel framing channel JH Tech Support 1844 Furring must be installed to resist code defined structural loads (such as wind load) NOTE: The siding attachment system design is the responsibility of a design professional. The advice provided in this guide for building a nailable base for attachment over foam sheathing, gypsum sheathing, OSB sheathing, or any combination thereof, must be approved by the professionals engaged for your project, e.g., a builder, architect or engineer. James Hardie disclaims any and all liability for the use or misuse of the information contained in this guide. Note: James Hardie recommends a siding mock -up prior to installation to review assembly details, and ensure the fastening practice and/or fastening tools are properly adjusted. Fasteners must be installed to avoid overdriving, but snug enough to remove gaps between connected parts. Adjust driving tools and installation practice accordingly. Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 The rainscreen detail announcement date was September 1, 2013, followed by a 7 month grace period. The rainscreen mandate takes full effect March 311, 2014 for projects not started by that date. Rainscreen Detail 7 Month Rainscreen Detail ANNOUNCEMENT GRACE PERIOD MANDATED September 1, 2013 9/1/13 to 3/31/14 March 31, 2014 For projects starting construction between 9/1/13 and 3/31/14 where the HardiePanel product rainscreen requirement cannot be met due to: design / bid / construction tim- ing, planning constraints or other timing related factors, the product warranty coverage remains in place and all other conditions of the warranty for the product as published by James Hardie Building Products apply. The HardiePanel vertical siding limited warranty only covers material and manufacturing defects in the siding. Premature deterioration /performance issues arising from the non - inclusion of an air gap (rainscreen) behind the HardiePanel vertical siding shall be considered improper installation and are not warrantable. At the time a claim is made, if non - inclusion of an air gap (rainscreen) behind the HardiePanel vertical siding contrib- uted to premature deterioration /a performance issue in the siding, your warranty will be void for the panels affected. Technical Requests If you have questions or cannot find something, contact us using the information below: 888- J- HARDIE (1- 888 - 542 -7343) info@jameshardie.com For technical inquiries of a more complex nature, including informationlapplications and structural requirements that are not published in our available technical literature, please use this form. Providing the correct information for your project on the attached form will reduce the number of clarifying questions required to provide a suitable response to your inquiry for your project. Please note that James Hardie does not provide a plan review service. Click Here for Technical Service ReauestForm Why do I have to install James HardiePanel products over a rainscreen in Multi- family construction but not on a single family residence? ............... ............................... Can I use drainage mats to create the required (minimum 3/8 inch) air gap behind HardiePanel siding? .............. ............................... How do I handle transitions from rainscreen to non rainscreen? ................... ............................... You allow us to direct attach panel without an air gap on a 2 floor building with eave overhangs. Why not on a 3 floor building with eave overhangs? On a building with eave overhangs, What difference is there between a 2 floor building and a 3 floor building as it relates to the rainscreen (air gap) requirement? Is this change being driven by James Hardie experiencing product failures? Does James Hardie plan to revise the rainscreen recommendations in the future? Technical Services 866.442.7343 888.542.7343 Multi- family /Commercial structures tend to have larger expanses of flat wall (as much as 6 stories tall to the weather) with more complex details and wall intersections. For single family construction, James Hardie recommends installing a rainscreen (air gap) between HardiePanel vertical siding and the water- resistive barrier as a best practice. James Hardie recommends that you consult with your design professional if you have questions regarding the use of rainscreen on your single family project. Currently, James Hardie does not recommend the use of drainage mats. ................................................. ............................... The answer will depend on the desired transition aesthetic. Contact James Hardie Building Products technical line 866.442.7343 or 888.542.7343 to discuss your project's needs. On buildings 3- stories and taller, it is more difficult to keep water away from potential entry points. The risk of water going behind the siding at some point during the service life of the building necessitates the inclusion of a rainscreen cavity (air gap) between the HardiePanel vertical siding and the water- resistive barrier to better facilitate drainage and drying. James Hardie does not warrant damage to its products or wall components as a result of water intrusion. ..................................................... ............................... No. Building science experts have proven rainscreen assemblies maximize the service life of buildings. James Hardie is adopting the use of rainscreens in applications where we believe it will best ben e it our . custom me ..... e.r .. ........................ ............................... our s In order to deliver a sustainable, long term approach to building service life and constructability in the Multi- family /Commercial market, James Hardie Building Products will continue to work with the building science community to continuously improve our recommendations. What type of furring do you Refer to pages 4 -6 of this guide for furring specifications. recommend? Why does James Hardie require a The building code is merely the minimum standard that is legally rainscreen system when the local required to construct a building. James Hardie Building Products code does not? has always encouraged the adoption of good building practice based on sound science and testing. Building science experts have proven that rainscreen assemblies maximize the service life of buildings. m 2014 James Hardie Building Products, Inc. All Rights Reserved. TM, SM, and ® denote trademarks or registered trademarks of James Hardie Technology Limited. The is a registered trademark of James Hardie Technology Limited. COM1404 4/14 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 5303 SINGLE PLY - SHEET ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanically- attached, single -ply membrane roofing material. B. Rigid roof insulation. C. Flashing. D. Accessories: Fasteners, adhesives, primers, and sealants. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate. B. ASTM D4434 -85 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing. C. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. ASTM 1204 - Linear Dimensional Changes of Non -rigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature E. ASTM D751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics F. ASTMG26 - Operating Light- Exposure Apparatus (Xenon -Arc Type) G. ASTM D1149 Rubber Deterioration H. ASTM D2240 Rubber Property, Durometer Hardness I. Factory Mutual Engineering & Research Corporation (FM) - Roof Assembly Classifications. J. FS HH -1- 1972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermal (Polyisocyanurate). K. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. L. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 — Submittals Requirements. B. Submit LEED support data. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit scale drawings of entire roof plan. 2. Submit setting plan for roof insulation. 3. Insulation fasteners, joint and seam locations, and detail of conditions. 4. Penetration details of all roof elements. 5. Flashing and counter flashing details. D. Product Data: Provide characteristics on membrane materials and flashing materials. E. Samples: Submit two 8" x 12" inch in size illustrating membrane and walk -way mats. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 014000 - Quality Control. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 I. Provide name, address and telephone number of Manufacturer's area "technical representative" responsible for warranty review and technical assistance to the Owner. Technical representative "must" be located in the State of Washington or Oregon. J. MSDS, submit all Material Safety Data Sheet for all products to be use on the project. K. Warranty: Provide 15 -year manufacturer's warranty. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with ten (10) years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with ten (10) years documented experience and approved by system manufacturer. C. Technical Representative: Manufacturer "must "have an approved technical representative within the State of Washington or Oregon to respond to warranty issues and provide technical assistance to the Owner. D. Work of this section to conform to manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to City of Olympia rules and regulations for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. C. Factory Mutual (FM): Roof Assembly Classification, wind uplift requirement of 1 -60, in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin 1 -28. 1.07 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 30 00 —Administrative Requirements. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 0130 00 — Product Requirements. B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original wrapped containers or wrappings bearing all seals and approvals, dry, undamaged and labels intact. C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture per manufacturers printed on -site storage requirements. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather and ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 0130 00 — Administrative Requirements. B. Coordinate the work with the installation of associated metal flashings, as the work of this Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 section proceeds. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 017000 — Project Closeout B. Manufacturer's System Warranty: Upon successful completion of the work to manufacturer's satisfaction and receipt of final payment, Manufacturer's System Warranty shall be issued. Duration: 20 -years Date Submitted to Architect Date Transmitted to Owner C. Applicator /Roofing Contractor Warranty: Applicator shall supply Owner with a separate workmanship warranty. In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal is found to be within the Applicator warranty term, defective or otherwise not in accordance with Contract Documents, the Applicator shall repair that defect at no cost to Owner. Applicator's warranty obligation shall run directly to Owner, and a copy shall be sent to Manufacturer. Duration: Two -year (2) workmanship warranty commencing with the date of substantial completion of the Roofing system. Date Submitted to Architect Date Transmitted to Owner D. Owner Responsibility: Owner shall notify both Manufacturer and the Applicator of any leaks as they occur during the time period when both warranties are in effect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - MEMBRANE MATERIAL A. Components to be products of Sika- SARNAFIL, Inc., "SarnaFast" mechanically attached system specified for type, quality and construction. 2.02 MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS — Mechanically Attached A. Membrane: Sarnafil 5327 non -woven fiberglass reinforced, 60 mils thick, width and length determined byjob conditions. Provide with polyester reinforcement and lacquer coating to repel dirt. B. Membrane shall conform to: 1. ASTM D4434 Classification Type III. 2. NSF /ANSI Standard 347, "Sustainability Assessment for Single Ply Roofing Membranes ". Certification Level: Platinum. 3. The manufacture to guarantee that the membrane thickness meets or exceeds the specified thickness when tested according to ASTM D751. C. Color of Membrane: Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. EnergySmart White, initial solar reflectance of 0.83, emittance of 0.90, and solar reflective index (SRI) of 104 (ENERGY STAR listed). D. Typical physical properties: 2.04 RIGID ROOF INSULATION A. Quality Standard: Similar to Atlas "AC Foam IV" or "Sarnatherm XPS" B. Closed cell, polyisocyanurate core integrally laminated to heavy, black (non - asphaltic), fiber - reinforced felt facers, complying to ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 3 (25 psi) 1. Thermal performance: LTTR values from 5.0 to 26.8 C. Thicknesses are as shown on the Drawings. D. Insulation Fasteners: Plates, fasteners, and discs as recommended and engineered by Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -4 ASTM Minimum Sarnafil Typical Test Method ASTM Physical Parameters Requirement Properties Overall Thickness, mil D751 45 60 Reinforcing Material — Polyester Thickness Above Scrim, mil 16 30 Felt Weight, oz /yd2 — 9 Breaking Strength min. D751 — — Machine Direction, Ibf /in 200 305 Elongation at Break, min. D751 — — Machine Direction, % 15 28.5 Cross Direction, % 15 29.5 Seam Strength min., (% of original)* D751 75 Pass Retention of Properties After Heat Aging D3045 — Tensile Strength min., (% of original) D751 90 Pass Elongation min., (% of original) D751 90 Pass Tearing Resistance (M.D.) min., Ibf (N) D1004 45 (200) 47 (209) Low Temperature Bend -40 °F ( -40 °C) D2136 Pass Pass Accelerated Weathering Test (Florescent Light, UV exposure), Hours G154 5,000 10,000 Cracking (7x magnification) None None Discoloration (by observation) Negligible Negligible Crazing (7x magnification) None None Linear Dimensional Change (C.D.), % D1204 0.5 max. -0.10 Weight Change After D570 ± 3.0 max. 2.2 Immersion in Water, % Static Puncture Resistance, 33 Ibf (15 kg) D5602 Pass Pass Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 14.7 ft- Ibf (20 J) D5635 Pass Pass Recycled Content (10' & 5' sheet only) 9% Pre - Consumer / 1% Post - Consumer *Failure occurs through membrane rupture not seam failure. Physical Properties shown are prior to applying felt backing, if specified. 2.04 RIGID ROOF INSULATION A. Quality Standard: Similar to Atlas "AC Foam IV" or "Sarnatherm XPS" B. Closed cell, polyisocyanurate core integrally laminated to heavy, black (non - asphaltic), fiber - reinforced felt facers, complying to ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 3 (25 psi) 1. Thermal performance: LTTR values from 5.0 to 26.8 C. Thicknesses are as shown on the Drawings. D. Insulation Fasteners: Plates, fasteners, and discs as recommended and engineered by Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 roofing system manufacturer and per approved shop drawings. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Accessory Products: Products supplied by roofing system manufacturer that may be required for fully warranted system: 1. Primers, adhesives, and sealants 2. Walkway protection: Sarnatred V 3. Vapor barrier 4. Membrane fasteners. 5. Hot -air welding equipment for sealing membrane seams. 6. Seam cleaner. B. Accessory Products: Supplied by other than membrane manufacturer. 1. Wood Nailers: Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the entire roof and around such other roof projections and penetrations as specified on Project Drawings. Thickness of nailers must match the insulation thickness to achieve a smooth transition. Wood nailers shall be treated for fire and rot resistance (wolmanized or osmose treated) and be #2 quality or better lumber. Creosote or asphalt- treated wood is not acceptable. Wood nailers shall conform to Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49. All wood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19 percent by weight on a dry- weight basis. 2. Pipestands: Where applicable, provide pipe or conduit rests in a cradle on a self - lubricating roller attached to a base made of 12 gauge sheet metal of stainless steel. Roller shall be made of steel rod and heavy -duty SBR rubber. Similar to 24 -R and 48 -R series pipestands by MIRO Industries, Murray, UT; 1- 800 - 768 -6978. Install per roofing manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. C. Verify deck is supported and secure. D. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. F. Verify roof drains and scuppers have been installed properly. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof penetrations are properly secured and prepared to receive new roofing materials. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION —WOOD DECK A. The Applicator shall load materials on the rooftop in such a manner as to eliminate risk of deck overload due to concentrated weight. B. The roof deck shall be minimum 15/32 inch thick plywood. Deck shall be installed according to local code requirements and structural engineer. 3.03 VAPOR BARRIER /AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Sarnavap -10: Wood Deck (New Construction): Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Sarnavap -10 is loose -laid over suitable substrate. Overlap all edges 4 inches (100 mm) and seal with butyl tape. Extend Sarnavap -10 to perimeter and deck penetrations and seal to provide continuity of the building's air /vapor envelope. Sarnavap -10 must be sealed on the vertical surface at roof penetrations also. 3.04 WOOD NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install continuous wood nailers at the perimeter of the entire roof and around roof projections and penetrations as shown on the Drawings. B. Nailers shall be anchored to resist a minimum force of 300 pounds per lineal foot (4,500 Newtons per lineal meter) in anydirection. Individual nailer lengthsshall not be lessthan 3 feet (0.9 meter) long. Nailer fastener spacing shall be at 12 inches (0.3 m) on center or 16 inches (0.4 m) on center if necessary to match the structural framing. Fasteners shall be staggered 1/3 the nailer width and installed within 6 inches (0.15 m) of each end. Two fasteners shall be installed at ends of nailer lengths. Nailer attachment shall also meet the requirements of the current Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49. C. Thickness shall be as required to match substrate and insulation height to allow a smooth transition. D. Stainless steel, corrosion resistant, fasteners are required when mechanically attaching any Sika Corporation product to wood nailers and wood products treated with ACQ (Alkaline copper Quaternary). When ACQ treated wood is used on steel roof decks or with metal edge detailing, a separation layer must be placed between the metal and ACQ treated wood. 3.05 INSULATION APPLICATION — MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT A. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deckwith approved fasteners and plates at a rate according to the insulation manufacturer's and Sika Corporation's recommendations for fastening rates and patterns. The quantity and locations of the fasteners and plates shall also cause the insulation boards to rest even ly on the roof deck /substrate so that there are no significant and avoidable air spaces between the boards and the substrate. Each insulation board shall be installed tightly against the adjacent boards on all sides. B. Fasteners are to be installed consistently in accordance with fastener manufacturer's recommendations. Fasteners are to have minimum penetration into structural deck recommended by the fastener manufacturer and Sika Corporation. C. Use fastenertools with a depth locator and torque - limiting attachment as recommended or supplied by fastener manufacturer to ensure proper installation. D. Use fastenertools with a depth locator and torque - limiting attachment as recommended or supplied by fastener manufacturer to ensure proper installation. 3.06 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install membrane roofing in accordance with membrane manufacturer's written instructions. B. Manufacturer's field representative shall be present at commencement of Work. C. Sarnafil 5327 membrane shall be attached with Sarnafasteners and Sarndisc according to Sika Corporation's and wind uplift requirements per ASCE 7 or Factory Mutual. D. Membrane overlaps shall be shingled with the flow of water where possible. E. Sarnafil full -width rolls shall be fastened perpendicular to the direction of the wood deck Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 panel where possible. F. Tack welding of 5327 full or half -width rolls for purposes of temporary restraint during installation is not permitted and may result in voiding of Sika Corporation warranty. Consult Manufacturer's Technical Department for further information. 3.07 MECHANICAL & SEAM ATTACHMENT A. Mechanically attach membrane in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction for perimeter and corner conditions, and for interior roof areas. B. Lay out of membrane shall accommodate required spacing, hold -back and overlapping of fasteners and outer edges of membrane. C. Fasteners shall clamp the membrane tightly to the substrate. In corner areas where perimeter half -rolls intersect, add rows of fasteners over the top half -rolls and weld a everstrip for watertightness. D. Hot -air weld overlaps according to Sika Corporation's requirements. Seam test cuts shall be taken at least 3 times per day. E. Securement Around Penetrations: 1. Around all perimeters, at the base of walls, drains, curbs, vent pipes, or any other roof penetrations, fasteners shall be installed according to perimeter rate of attachment. Fasteners shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Fasteners shall be installed using the fastener manufacturer's recommended torque- sensitive fastening tools with depth locators. Fasteners shall clamp the Sarnafil membrane tightly to the substrate. 2. Sarnafil membrane flashings shall extend 2 -1/2 inches past Sarnadisc and be hot -air welded to Sarnafil deck membrane 3.08 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and roofing system manufacturer. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent- resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. B. Adhesives for membrane flashings: 1. Adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques. C. All flashings should extend a minimum of 8 inches above roofing level, exceptions to this might be pipe boots and /or sealant pockets, etc. D. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot -air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the Sarnafil membrane. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 E. Sarnafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sika Corporation recommended approved details. 3.09 METAL FLASHINGS AND MEMBRANE -CLAD BASE FLASHINGS A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: 1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49 (latest issue). 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest issue. B. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. C. Metal joints shall be watertight. D. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch E. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 014000, Quality Requirements. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. C. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation materials' manufacturers at start and at minimum once during installation of the Work. 3.10 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this section. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. END OF SECTION Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 075303 -8 Product Data Sheet 075303 Edition: 04/2013 Version no.: 0003 Sarnafil® S327 Roof Membrane _48 X60 _72 _80 _Feltback Overview: The S327 roof membrane is a heat - weldable membrane produced with an integral polyester reinforcement for high strength, for use in a Sika Sarnafil Mechanically- Attached System. Composition: The S327 roof membrane is a high - quality, thermoplastic PVC membrane with a polyester scrim reinforcement. The S327 roof membrane has a unique lacquer coating applied to the top of the membrane to reduce dirt pick up. The following S327 colors are available to order but are consid- ered a custom order with all of the requirements that come along with a custom order; Copper Brown, Evergreen, and Lead Gray. For a listing of our EnergySmart colors, refer to the S327 EnergySmart data sheet. Cus- tom colors (other than the ones mentioned above) are available subject to minimum volume requirements. Features and Benefits: • High Strength • Lacquer coated to reduce dirt pick up • Hot -air welded seams for long -term performance • Proven membrane performance Codes and Approvals: Sika Sarnafil's Mechanically- Attached Systems using S327 PVC mem- branes are classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, FM Global, Miami -Dade and Florida Building Code. Sika Sarnafil membranes also meet the material requirements of the International building code. For more information, please visit the "tech- nical downloads" section of our website. Packaging: The S327 roof membrane rolls are wrapped in a protective film and strapped to a wood pallet. The S327 roof membrane is produced in 6.5 ft. (2 meters). The membrane rolls weigh between 161 - 195 Ibs depending on thickness of membrane and feltbacking. Installation: S327 roof membrane is installed by a Sika Sarnafil Authorized Applicator. S327 is rolled out onto the insulation board or acceptable substrate, fas- tened to the roof deck and heat - welded together by trained operators using Sika Sarnafil's hot -air welding equipment. Availability: The S327 roof membrane is available directly from Sika Sarnafil Authorized Applicators. Contact your Sika Sarnafil Regional Office or visit our website for further information. Warranty: Upon successful completion of the installed roof by the Sika Sarnafil Autho- rized Applicator, Sika Sarnafil can provide a Warranty to the Building Owner via the Authorized Applicator. Maintenance: The S327 roof membrane requires no maintenance. As a prudent pre- ventative measure, Sika Sarnafil recommends that the Owner or that the Owner's designated representative inspect the installed roof system for damage, plugged drains, weathered sealants, etc. at least twice a year and after each storm. Sarnafil O Q a U) U •C s U N a O Q m C @ U Y m O Q Q 7 c t v H 0 d d 0 a �a .y a v F C7 C d �N E � � d Q 0 � O t c CCd `G G r y Qr L d (D ca a N U) O CL x a� Q D_ t � m E C 2 o .04 h O Z O L ^w O NY 0) C: N�� G O O (6 N Q O N C f� — Y E o o O N E° C O u) C o .'� @ L M C E om "c c�~ @�, cm's cin 0 E b! =, , aUi c V �� aci �vo x- c U co $ N cn m �Y � E E �> >,�C: o 0N '.o a) �c C -0 � o N V E C>> O U Q L @@ O O@ N -o 12 m 2 V cs U U FT W Fn aR000 O C O i Et c� U o— >a� c cn._ �o s0- Qt w @Y >Y 0) E c c� �OHLLCO W (nom FT JQ J >(n0 *L V = @ C 1 @ LO (n LO N 00 O .@ J N � p > N N U C Z N ° � m � 0 0 00 0 '� w _C @ Co N O Y w @ cn @ o to 0 C U) > 7 Lo O LO C f6 L N @ @ O 00 O @ �C /) � OHO U !6 Y Co N cn x d U cn Q (COO H LL N N � z Q Iz m F�-Y'� � y m� Q � m a �a o e a� Q m Q3 o e o 11 mac -• O E °� m o @a= -0 -Z, V OU Q N 'O Qammmyc.°�ao Q3 ca �� ° Z' -t3 m Y a z y o° N y o c o 0Z aam o Qa m Boa w m m o y m > > a ° E m e Q,- � �� U Ua ahm� `0�a�m LLI 9 ° a°iYC Q p'o m o' 0 : Ewa �'�y �O y O D 0 O U 0 0 .Q p • i o o "o a°i�a�my��o Q m N@ a Vi m= Q F �o �aca�•o3�'�m'm a o= aad?�oho C° o c Q m 2-- m Q 0.p U V '� w �"' U O y ° Cc) o m ma o `o y o $a za m.° ErQ E N Q p O Q E m a m E Q mUOm'yomy�a `m Eve Cc) m� �E. V Y� ��� � G h N U 6 o`o�n m.= n E m 3 E O @ Y cn 7 C E Ud O p Y E cn a @ U o ° � V Y CD N L L m N O o•o ; O T oX D � m _tE 0 CD 04 N 'd.0 o O o^ 7 N 01- ° C C O c 00 QU)O U° r U)Q °U _ 6 H LPL W L TO 2 cn U) m in U) in ° — N U) in m O O O N 0) O @@ 0) @ O O N O@ OO�0- 001:T0)co NM ZZZ°i L N O = � N LO O (n m in O U) m° in C) N_ C O C M U) (n En fn a��a�ZZZ°i ��� I-I��MO)M N°M� L TO 2 N ul m m O moo m mo C) N_ o O o N ul m U m 000 0 com a� (0M0)M NNE a��a�ZZZI N0- 0- L c o 0 = o � U) m U) U) U) O Wm U) w O0 OCO� r- 00 @ @ @O a O N ON ° a-m �NO)(N N(N —ZZZ Na- i x O @ E Ln O 2 _ E o M O N O N_ O\ o ° LOO C:) O U') LO LO CD C> Lo @° O C O N C OLnM o ((� @ U @ I v N I-- O a7 V M Lo Z Z Z O tl M M U O M V O O O M Ln Ln Ln Ln O Ln O Ln N f� (O (O I Lo LO LO I 10 V N U) O CL x a� Q D_ t � m E C 2 o .04 h O Z O L ^w O NY 0) C: N�� G O O (6 N Q O N C f� — Y E o o O N E° C O u) C o .'� @ L M C E om "c c�~ @�, cm's cin 0 E b! =, , aUi c V �� aci �vo x- c U co $ N cn m �Y � E E �> >,�C: o 0N '.o a) �c C -0 � o N V E C>> O U Q L @@ O O@ N -o 12 m 2 V cs U U FT W Fn aR000 O C O i Et c� U o— >a� c cn._ �o s0- Qt w @Y >Y 0) E c c� �OHLLCO W (nom FT JQ J >(n0 *L V = @ C 1 @ LO (n LO N 00 O .@ J N � p > N N U C Z N ° � m � 0 0 00 0 '� w _C @ Co N O Y w @ cn @ o to 0 C U) > 7 Lo O LO C f6 L N @ @ O 00 O @ �C /) � OHO U !6 Y Co N cn x d U cn Q (COO H LL N N � z Q Iz m F�-Y'� � y m� Q � m a �a o e a� Q m Q3 o e o 11 mac -• O E °� m o @a= -0 -Z, V OU Q N 'O Qammmyc.°�ao Q3 ca �� ° Z' -t3 m Y a z y o° N y o c o 0Z aam o Qa m Boa w m m o y m > > a ° E m e Q,- � �� U Ua ahm� `0�a�m LLI 9 ° a°iYC Q p'o m o' 0 : Ewa �'�y �O y O D 0 O U 0 0 .Q p • i o o "o a°i�a�my��o Q m N@ a Vi m= Q F �o �aca�•o3�'�m'm a o= aad?�oho C° o c Q m 2-- m Q 0.p U V '� w �"' U O y ° Cc) o m ma o `o y o $a za m.° ErQ E N Q p O Q E m a m E Q mUOm'yomy�a `m Eve Cc) m� �E. V Y� ��� � G h N U 6 o`o�n m.= n E m 3 E O @ Y cn 7 C E Ud O p Y E cn a @ U o ° � V Y CD N L L m N O o•o ; O T oX D � m _tE 0 CD 04 N 'd.0 o O o^ 7 N 01- ° C C O c 00 QU)O U° r U)Q °U _ 6 H LPL W 4!!ffk ACFOAM ® -IV INSULATION ATLAS UPDATED: 05.19.2014 PRODUCT DATA SHEET DESCRIPTION: Closed -cell polyisocyanurate (polyiso) foam core integrally bonded to heavy weight high performance inorganic coated glass facers. ACFoam® -IV is offered in a variety of thicknesses, providing long -term thermal resistance (LTTR) values from 5.7 to 26.8. Available in 4ft x 8ft (1220mm x 2440mm) and 4ft x 4ft (1220mm x 1220mm) panels. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi) and CAN /ULC -5704 Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3. ADVANTAGES: When using ACFoam ® -IV in adhered systems, field testing has confirmed significantly more efficient use of solvent -based adhesives than with organic faced insulation. Adhesive application rates vary by manufacturer. Check adhesive manufacturer's recommendation for application rates. The number of fasteners required to attach ACFoam® -IV in a mechanically attached membrane roof system has been reduced from 5 to 4. Manufactured using CFC -, HCFC- and HFC -free foam blowing technology with zero ozone depletion potential (ODP) and virtually no (negligible) global warming potential (GWP). Recognized by the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute as resistant or highly resistant to mold growth based on independent testing using GREENGUARD Test Method GGTM.P040 (ASTM D6329) for microbial resistance. ACFoam® -IV contains between 9.4% and 4.2% recycled materials by weight (Atlas Technical Bulletin: TB -7). Class A ratings can be achieved with ACFoam ® -IV in a minimum thickness of 1.0" when placed directly on a combustible deck (1:12 maximum deck slope). APPLICATION: Manufactured and tested for use in new and re- roofing applications. ACFoam ® -IV is used in built -up (BUR), modified bitumen, metal, ballasted single -ply, mechanically attached single -ply and adhered single -ply roofing systems. These roofing systems depend on proper installation for successful performance. Refer to FM Approvals® RoofNav and UL Online Certifications Directory for additional application details. INSTALLATION: ACFoam ® -IV shall be kept dry before, during and after installation. This product will burn if exposed to an ignition source of sufficient heat and intensity. Do not apply flame directly to ACFoam® -IV insulation. Refer to PIMA Technical Bulletin 109: Storage and Hand ling Recommendations for Polyiso Roof Insulation. An offset or staggered multi -layer application of ACFoam® is strongly recommended when the total insulation thickness exceeds 2.7" (Atlas Technical Bulletin: TB-5). Typical field fastening requirements can be obtained from membrane system manufacturer or FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1 -29. Prior to installation, Atlas Roofing Corporation recommends that you consult your local building codes, contract documents, professional engineer, FM Global, Miami -Dade County and membrane manufacturer for additional installation guidelines as well as design enhancements. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES THERMAL DATA DIMENSIONAL STABILITY ASTM D2126 <2% ®® COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ASTM D1621 WATER ABSORPTION ASTM (209 & D2842 WATER VAPOR TRANSMISSION ASTM E96 PRODUCT DENSITY ASTM D1622 FLAME SPREAD ASTM E84 (10 min.) SMOKE DEVELOPMENT ASTM E84 (10 min.) 20 psi (140 kPo) or 25 psi (172 kPo) <1.5%, <3.5% < 4.0 perm (228.8ng/ (Pa•s•m2)) Nominal 2.0 pcf (32.04 kg /m3) 140 -60 150 -170 TENSILE STRENGTH ASTM D1623 > 730 psf (35 kPo) SERVICE TEMPERATURE -100° to +250 °F 'Numerical ratings are not intended to reflect performance under actual fire conditions. Flame spread index of < 75 and smoke development < 450 meet code requirements for foam plastic roof insulation. (odes exempt foam plastic insulation when used in FM 4450 or UL 1256. Physical properties listed above are presented as typical average values as determined by accepted ASTM test methods and are subject to normal manufacturing variation. • ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi) • CAN /ULC -5704, Type 2, Class 3 or Type 3, Class 3 • CCMC No. 12423 -L • UL Certified for Canada - Insulated Roof Deck Assemblies Construction No. (38 and 52. Meet (AN /UL(-S126 -M86, (AN /ULC- S101 -M89 and (AN /UL(- Sl07 -M87 • UL Standard 1256 Classification Construction No. 120, 123 & 292 • UL Standard 790 (ASTM E108) Roofing Systems Classification • UL Standard 263 (ASTM El 19) Fire Resistance Classification 5.7 8.6 11.4 14.4 17.4 20.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 *3.0 *3.5 25.4 1.00 38.1 1.50 50.8 2.01 63.5 2.53 76.2 3.06 88.9 3.60 2.625 4.375 4.375 4.375 4.375 4.375 66.68 111.13 111.13 111.13 111.13 111.13 23.6 *4.0 101.6 4.15 4.375 111.13 LTTR (long term thermal resistance) values were determined in accordance with (AN /UL(- S770 -09. Test samples were third -party selected and tested by an accredited material testing laboratory. The LTTR results were reviewed by FM Global and certified by the PIMA Quality Mark Program. zRSI is the metric expression of R -value (mz • K /W). *To minimize the effects of thermal bridging, Atlas strongly recommends the use of multiple layers when the total desired or specified R -value requires an insulation thickness greater than 2.7" thick. • UL Standard 1897 Uplift Resistance • FM Standard 4450/4470 Approved Refer to FM Approvals® RoofNav for Specific System Details • IBC Chapter 26 & NBC Sections on Foam Insulation • California State Insulation Quality Standards and Title 25 Foam Flammability Criteria (Li(ense #TC 1231) • Miami -Dade County Approved • State of Florida Product Approval (FL6796) Other than the aforementioned representations and descriptions, Atlas Roofing (orporation (hereafter, "Seller ") makes no other representations or warranties as to the insulation sold herein. The Seller disclaims all other warranties, express or implied, including the warranty of merchantability and the warranty of fitness for a particular purpose. Seller does, however, have a limited warranty as to the LTTR -Value of the insulation, the terms of which are available upon request from the Seller. Seller shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to the cost of installation, removal, repair or replacement of this product. Buyer's remedies shall be limited exclusively to, at Seller's option, the repayment of the purchase price or resupply of product manufactured by Atlas in a quantity equal to that of the nonconforming product. Atlas distributors, agents, salespersons or other independent representatives have no authority to waive or alter the above limitation of liability and remedies. 770 - 952 -1442 • ATLAS ROOFING CORPORATION • 2000 RIVEREDGE PARKWAY, SUITE 800 • ATLANTA, GA • 30328 • WWW.ATLASROOFING.COM Product Data Sheet Edition: 01/2011 Version no.: 0001 Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) Overview: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is a rigid extruded polystyrene insulation board that can be used in either a Sika Sarnafil roofing or waterproofing applica- tion. Sarnatherm -XPS (25psi) is also available in tapered configurations to enhance drainage. Composition: Sarnatherm XPS is a closed -cell extruded polystyrene foam with a smooth - skin surface on the face and back surfaces. Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is available in 2 x 8 ft. (0.6 x 2.4 m) or 4 x 8 ft. (1.2 x 2.4 m) sizes. Features: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) has excellent insulating characteristics, low water absorption, excellent compressive strength and is UL Classified. Packaging: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is provided in labeled bundles that are wrapped in a protective polyethylene film. The amount of Sarnatherm per bundle var- ies with board thickness. Installation: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is installed either under or over the Sika Sarnafil roofing /waterproofing membrane depending on the system design. Overburden is utilized to hold the insulation in place in a waterproofing ap- plication. Polystyrene should not come in contact with PVC. Always place a separation layer such as Sarnafelt NWP between the Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) and the membrane in both roofing and waterproofing applications. During installation in hot, sunny weather, protect the insulation with a white covering to prevent excessive heat build -up and potential warping of the insulation boards. Availability: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is available directly from Sika Sarnafil Authorized Applicators. Contact your Sika Sarnafil Regional Office or visit our website for further information. Sarnafil Warranty: As a Sika Sarnafil supplied accessory, Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) is included in Sika Sarnafil's System Warranty to the Building Owner. Maintenance: Sarnatherm XPS (25psi) requires no maintenance. Areas of frequent traffic may require protection from damage. Technical: Sika Sarnafil provides technical support. Technical staff is available to advise Applicators as to the correct installation methods of Sarnatherm XPS (25psi). Technical Data (as manufactured): ASTM Test Method Value Thermal Resistance(4) per in., Thermal Values 5.0 75 °F mean temp., ft2 h. °F /Btu as min Nominal Thicknessm R- Valuel2i Board Size Min Compressive Strenath(3) 2.0 inch (51 mm) 10 2x8 ft. (0.6 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 3.0 inch (76 mm) 15 2x8 ft. (0.6 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 4.0 inch (102 mm) 20 2x8 ft. (0.6 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 2.0 inch (51 mm) 10 4x8 ft. (1.2 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 2.5 inch (64 mm) 12.5 4x8 ft. (1.2 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 3.0 inch (76 mm) 15 4x8 ft. (1.2 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) 4.0 inch (102 mm) 20 4x8 ft. (1.2 x 2.4 m) 25 psi (172 kPa) Property ASTM Test Method Value Thermal Resistance(4) per in., C 518 5.0 75 °F mean temp., ft2 h. °F /Btu as min Compressive Strength131, psi, min D 1621 25 Water Absorption, max % by volume, max C 272 0.3 Water Vapor Permeancel5 >, perms, max E 96 1.5 Maximum Operating Temperature, °F -- 165 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion, in. /in, °F -- 3.5 x 10 -5 Flexural Strength, psi, min C 203 50 Dimensional Stability, % linear change, max D 2126 2.0 Flame Spread(6) E 84 15 Smoke Developed E 84 165 (1)Not all product sizes are available in all regions. (2)R means resistance to heat flow. The higher the R- value, the greater the insulating power. R- values are expressed in ftz•h• °F /Btu. (3) Vertical compressive strength is measured at 10% deformation or at yield, whichever occurs first. (4) Values are consistent with criteria of ASTM C 578 and requirements of FTC R -value rule. (5)Based on 1 inch (25.4 mm) thickness. (6) This numerical flame spread rating is not intended to reflect hazards presented by this or other material under actual fire condi- tions. Corporate Office Sika Sarnafil A Division of Sika Corporation 100 Dan Road Canton, MA 02021 Tel.: (781) 828 -5400 1- 800 - 451 -2504 Fax: (781) 828 -5365 Web: usa.sarnafil.sika.com Email: webmaster.sarnafil @us.sika.com Canada Office Sika Sarnafil A Business Unit of Sika Canada 6820 Davand Drive Mississauga, ON L5T 1J5 Tel.: (905) 670 -2222 1- 800 - 268 -0479 Fax: (905) 670 -5278 Web: can.sika.com Disclaimer: The information, and, in particular, the recommendation relating to the application and end -use of Sika Sarnafil products, are given in good faith based on Sika Sarnafil's current knowledge and experience of the products when properly stored, handled and applied under normal conditions in accordance with Sika Sarnafil recommendations. In practice, the differences in materials, substrates and actual site conditions are such that no war- ranty in respect of merchantability of fitness for a particular purpose, nor any liability arising out of any legal relationship whatsoever, may be inferred from this information. The user of the product must determine the product's suitability for the intended application and purpose. Sika Sarnafil reserves the right to change the properties of its products. The proprietary rights of third parties must be observed. All orders are accepted subject to our current terms of sale and delivery. Users must always refer to the most recent issue of the local Product Data Sheet for the product concerned, copies of which will be supplied on request. NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flashings, counterflashings and fabricated sheet metal items and accessories, including but not limited to: 1. Gutters and downspouts 2. Conductor heads /scuppers 3. Accessories, including rainscreen accessories B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry 2. Section 04 2019 —Veneer Stone Masonry. 3. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07 2700 —Weather Barriers. 5. Section 07 4646 — Fiber Cement Siding. 6. Section 07 9000 - Joint Protection. 7. Section 08 6300 — Metal Framed Skylights. 8. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 9. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 10. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 2. ASTM A625/A625M - Standard Specification for Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single Reduced. 3. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 4. ASTM A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 6. ASTM B101 - Standard Specification for Lead - Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 7. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 8. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 9. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 10. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 11. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 12. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. C. Copper Development Association Inc.: 1. CDA - Copper in Architecture - Handbook. D. Federal Specification Unit: 1. FS TT -C -494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Sheet Metal Flashings: Conform to the following criteria of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for components indicated in Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal work with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre - installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design compliance. B. Materials and Resources Characteristics: 1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content including: 2.2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; structural steel sheet, G90 zinc coating; 0.024 and 0.019 inch thick steel, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. B. Pre - Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M; structural steel sheet, G90 zinc coating; 0.024 and 0.019 inch thick core steel, shop pre- coated. C. Pre - Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209; alloy and temper as required for application and finish; 0.032 inch thick; mill finish shop pre- coated. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/240M; Type 316, dead soft fully annealed, 0.018 inch thick; smooth surface, Number 2B finish, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. E. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 Ib /sq ft 0.039 inch thick. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Penetration Flashing: Section 07 2700 — Weather and Air Barriers. B. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal. C. Underlayment: ASTM D226; Type I, No. 15 unperforated asphalt felt. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized building paper. E. Primer: Zinc molybdate type. F. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd or FS TT -C -494, Bituminous. G. Sealant: Type E butyl sealant. H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. I. Downspout Boots: Cast Steel or compatible with roof drain conveyance system per Civil Drawings. Provide screened opening at receptor. J. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered. K. Rainscreen Accessories: 1. Top and bottom closure: Similar to VaproShield "VaproVent L Strip" and "VaproVent Hook Strip ". Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Parapet Vent Screen: Insect screen similar to CavClear "Weep Vent ". 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form sections shape indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet metal, interlocking with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Tin edges of copper sheet to be soldered. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints. G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam or solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. I. Fabricate gutters to profile and size indicated. J. Fabricate downspouts to rectangular profile; profile and size indicated. K. Fabricate accessories in profile and size to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices, Gutter Supports, and Downspout Support Brackets: In accordance with SMACNA requirements or Type recommended by fabricator, and approved by submittal L. Seal metal joints. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Resin Coating: Two -coat system as specified for pre- finished sheet metal system, conforming to AAMA 2605. Confirm components matching metal roof panel finish. B. Washcoat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with washcoat compatible with finish system, as recommended by finish system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. C. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Seal top of reglets with sealant. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements B. Inspection will involve surveillance of Work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Door and Window Head Flashing: Pre - finished aluminum flashing, 24 ga, formed in 10 -feet or less in length in single piece with drip for each opening. Furnish as detailed on Drawings. Color as selected by Architect: match door /window frames B. Parapet Cap Flashings: Pre - finished galvanized steel flashing, 0.024 inch thick core (unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings), formed in 10 -feet or less in length in single piece with seams as indicated. Furnish as detailed on Drawings. Secure with continuous cleat. Color as selected by Architect: match metal roofing panels C. Metal Fascia: Pre - finished galvanized steel flashing, 0.028 inch thick core (unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings), formed in 10 -feet or less in length in single piece, or more than 10- feet lengths with flat lock seams (spacing as approved by Architect). Furnish as detailed on Drawings. Coordinate with metal roofing, metal gutter, and metal soffit panel installations. Color as selected by Architect: match metal roofing panels D. Soffit Flashing Clip: Refer to Section 07 4213 — Metal Soffits. E. Sill Flashings / Precast Concrete Cap: Pre - finished galvanized steel flashing, 0.022 inch thick core (unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings), formed in 10 -feet or less in length in single piece, or more than 10 -feet lengths with flat lock seams. Furnish as detailed on Drawings. Color as selected by Architect: F. Counterflashings (not exposed to view): Galvanized steel, 0.019 inch thickness, profile as indicated. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 G. Gutters and Downspouts: Pre - finished galvanized steel sheet, 0.028 inch thick core (unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings), formed in 10 -feet or less in length in single piece with seams as indicated. Secure gutters and downspouts with brackets of type, material and gauge as indicated in approved shop drawings /submittals. Furnish as detailed on Drawings. Color as selected by Architect: match metal roofing panels for exposed -to -view items H. Scupper Boxes: Dimensions and material as indicated on Drawings. Color as selected by Architect: match metal roofing panels Provide weather seal compatible with items penetrating the roof system. Refer to Section 07 5303. END OF SECTION Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes firestopping and through - penetration protection system materials and accessories; firestopping tops of fire rated walls; and smoke sealing at joints between floor slabs and exterior walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 2. Related piping work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire - Resistive Joint Systems. B. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping (Through- Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code FM, UL, or WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. Firestopping 078400-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed applicable code requirements. F. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F- Ratings and temperature T- Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F- Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1- hour. 2. Floor Penetrations: Fire F- Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1- hour. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. F. Perform Work in accordance with City of Olympi Public Work's standard. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. Firestopping 078400 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials. D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. 3M fire Protection Products 5. Pecora Corporation 6. United States Gypsum Co. 7. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non - asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. 8. Mortar where permitted by applicable code. C. Color: Dark gray or as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. Firestopping 078400-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture. D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. F. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:Final cleaning. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. Firestopping 078400 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.7 SCHEDULES Storage Room Walls over 100 SF 1 hour Above Listed Room Walls to room partitions, metallic 3/4 hour pipe and conduit Above Listed Room Walls to room partitions, non - metallic 3/4 hour pipe and conduit END OF SECTION Firestopping 078400 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Refer to Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Section includes sealants and joint backing, hollow gaskets, and accessories. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 26 00 — Vapor Retarders. 2. Section 07 27 00 — Weather, Vapor and Air Barriers. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. 4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. 5. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. 6. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 2. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 3. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 6. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials -Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 7. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Products Data: Submit data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. D. Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories failing to achieve airtight or watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, and sealants which do not cure. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Joint Protection 079000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with sections referencing this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 0.1 MANUFACTURERS —JOINT SEALERS A. Products complying with Project requirements; produced by a single manufacturer for each type required, and by one of the following approved manufacturers for the sealer type listed: 1. Urethane: Bostik, Pecora, Tremco, Sika, and Sonneborn. 2. Silicone: Dow, General Electric, Pecora, Sonneborn, and Tremco. 2.2 SEALANTS A. Interior Sealants: Comply with low VOC limit requirement in Section 013529 — LEED Project Requirements . B. High Performance General Purpose Exterior ( Nontraffic) Sealant (GP -1): Silicone; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Products: Dow - Corning 790; Sonolastic 150 and Sonolastic 150 Tint Base. 2. Color: Colors as selected 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and softjoints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. C. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior nontraffic joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. General Purpose Traffic Bearing Sealant (GP -2): Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T; multi- component. 1. Products: Pecora'Dynatrol II'; W.R. Meadows 'High-Spec' 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces 3. Applications: Use for exterior pedestrian and vehicular traffic bearing joints. D. Exterior Compressible Gasket Expansion Joint Sealer (JS -1): ASTM D2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene) compression gasket. 1. Color: As selected by Architect 2. Size and Shape: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Applications: Use for exterior wall expansion joints. Joint Protection 079000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 E. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant (JS -2): Butyl or polyisobutylene, non - drying, non - skinning, non - curing. 1. Applications: Use for concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work and concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. F. General Purpose Interior Sealant (GP -3): Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, single component, paintable. 1. Color: Colors as selected 2. Applications: Use for interior wall and ceiling control joints, joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces, and other interiorjoints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. G. Tile Sealant (TS -1): White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resista nt. 1. Applications: Use for joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces, and joints between toilet room counter tops and wall surfaces. H. Acoustical Sealant (AS -1): Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non - skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only at acoustically rated construction. a. Provide sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. 0.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 percent larger than joint width; manufactured by NMC, Inc. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. C. Verifyjoint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter impairing adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints. C. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193 or manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. Joint Protection 079000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 or manufacturer's written instructions. B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width /depth ratio of 2: 1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. I. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type GP -1. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type GP -2. C. Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Type GP -1. D. Joints Between Concrete Panels and Between Panels and Adjacent Work: Type JS -1. E. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work: Type JS -1. F. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type JS -2. G. Butt Joints in Exterior Metal Work and Siding: Type JS -2. H. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type JS -2. I. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type GP -1. J. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type GP -3. K. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type GP -3. L. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Counter tops and Walls: Type GP -3. M. Interior Walls, Between Metal Stud Track /Runner and Adjacent Construction, Between Outlet Boxes and Gypsum Board: Type AS -1. END OF SECTION Joint Protection 079000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non - rated. B. Conform to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. C. Related Sections: 1. Sections 0135 26— LEED Project Requirements. 2. Section 08 12 14 - Standard Steel Frames. 3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. 4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of wood doors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E413 - Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. C. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI - Quality Standards Illustrated. D. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association: 1. HPVA HP -1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. G. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL- Building Materials Directory. 2. UL 1013 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Uniform Building Code: 1. UBC Standard 7 -2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 0135 26 and 0135 29 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. Flush Wood Doors 081416 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing. D. Product Data: Submit information on door core materials and construction, and on veneer species, type and characteristics. E. Samples: 1. Submit two samples of door veneer, 6x6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions. Date Submitted Date Approved Supplier 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade. B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500. C. Fire Rated Door [and Panel] Construction: Conform to UBC Standard 7 -2. D. Fire Rated Stair Doors: Rate of rise of 450 degrees F across door thickness. E. Installed Fire Rated Door and Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings. F. Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Tested in accordance with UL 1784. 1. Air Leakage: Maximum 3.0 cfm /sf of door opening with 0.10 inch water gage pressure differential. G. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door. 1. Indicate temperature rise rating for stair doors. 2. Attach smoke label to smoke and draft control doors. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI Section 1300. C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. Flush Wood Doors 081416 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.8 WARRANTY A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. C. Furnish manufacturer's "Life of Installation" warranty for interior doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Lynden Doors 2. Vancouver Doors 3. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 4. Eggers Industries 5. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. B. Product Description: Solid core flush wood doors; wood veneer facing material; fire rated and non -rated types; flush glazed design; without louvers; shop finished wood doors. 1. Flush Exterior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick; solid core, five ply construction. 2. Flush Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick; solid core, five ply construction, fire rated and non -rated as indicated on Door Schedule. 3. FSC Certified components may be provided in order to contribute to overall requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Solid Core, Non - Rated: AWI Section 1300, Type SCL Structural Composite Lumber. B. Solid Core, Fire Rated: AWI Section 1300, Type FD 3/4. C. Exterior Veneer Facing: AWI Premium quality wood, quarter sliced, with balanced matched grain, for transparent finish. Pair match multiple door leaves in single opening. 1. Wood: Maple species D. Interior Veneer Facing: AWI Premium quality wood, quarter sliced, with balanced matched grain, for transparent finish. Pair match multiple door leaves in single opening. 1. Wood: Maple species E. Facing Adhesive: Type I — waterproof and compliant with low VOC limits. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing and Louver Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws. B. Wood Louvers: Wood, of same species as door facing. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. Flush Wood Doors 081416 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Furnish lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. C. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Hardwood for transparent finish. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Bond edge banding to cores. F. At exterior doors, furnish aluminum flashing at top and bottom rail. G. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Furnish solid blocking for through bolted hardware. H. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. I. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weather stripping devices. J. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1300. 2.5 SHOP FINISHING A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. B. Seal door top edge with clear sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to maximum of 3/4 inch. 1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Machine cut doors for hardware installation. E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 1114 and hardware specified in Section 08 7100. F. Install door louvers plumb and level. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 8000. H. Site finish doors in accordance with Section 09 9000. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. C. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. D. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. Flush Wood Doors 081416 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. C. Adjust closer for full closure. END OF SECTION Flush Wood Doors 081416 -5 LN) Lynden Door Lynden Door Architectural Series GREENDORTM FACES: SUBSTRATE CORE: STILES: RAILS: ASSEMBLY: ADHESIVES: MAXIMUM SIZE: THICKNESS: Division 08 14 16 Wood Flush Doors LD3500 FSC NAU F SCLC -5 Structural Composite Lumber Core FSC CoC -NAUF Non Rated or 20 min. HPVA Architectural "A" grade wood veneer (minimum thickness 1/50" before sanding) Opfions: "AA" grade wood veneer, paint grade MDO Hardboard (SCLC3) Engineered wood composites Structural Composite Lumber WDMA I.S. 1 -A C -3 (CE) Compatible with face veneer, mill option AWS Type A wood or Type B veneered Option: (ME) Matching with face veneer Integrated as part of the core. Stiles are securely bonded to the core and the assembled unit is sanded prior to application of faces. Type 1 POMT -E PRESSURE WITH HOSE STREAM NEUTRAL PRESSURE WITH HOSE STREAM 4'0" x 9'0" (1220mm x 2743mm) 4'0 x 10'0 (1220mm x 3050mm) 20 min rated 1 3/:' (45 mm) Option: Up to 2 %" (63.5 mm) Non -rated 1 3 /8" (35 mm) or 1 '/," (45 mm) Option: Up to 21/2" (63.5 mm) WARRANTY: Life of original installation for interior use only. See warranty terms and conditions STANDARDS: WDMA IS -1 A and AWS Custom Grade Option: WDMA IS -1 A and AWS Premium Grade Performance attributes meet or exceed WDMA IS -1 A and AWS Extra Heavy Duty standards. FIRE RATING: Positive Pressure Category B or Neutral Pressure Option: Positive Pressure Category A Positive Pressure tested in accordance with UBC 7 -2 1997, UL -1 OC and NFPA 252 Neutral Pressure with hose stream tested in accordance with UBC -7 1994 and UL -10B For additional information on fire doors please refer to the Lynden Door Fire Door Technical Sheets. ACOUSTICAL RATING STC 35 ASTM E90 -09 - Non Operable OITC 31 ASTM E90 -09 - Non Operable ENVIRONMENTAL Affribufes: This product is an FSC Mixed Source product with all the wood in the door being FSC Certified or FSC Controlled. All adhesives and binders in this product contain no added urea - formaldehyde. This product is manufactured with pre- consumer recycled material. This product may contribute to credits requiring regional harvesting or recovery of raw material and regional manufacturing. For additional information on product contribution please refer to the GREENDORTM Contribution Sheets. Manufacturing Options BLOCKING: No additional blocking required. Core material complies with Screw holding WDMA TM -10 extra heavy duty. MACHINING: Machining for hardware, open cutouts, installation of lites and louvers, applied moldings, plant ons, raceways, concealed vertical rods, decorative routing, dutch doors, doors and transoms - Hardware cutouts shall be factory machined from manufacturers' templates and shop drawings. TRANSPARENT FINISH WDMA TR6 / AWS System 9 -UV cured catalyzed polyurethane finishes in standard and custom match stains Opfions: Other finish systems available OPAQUE FINISH: Factory painting in standard and custom match colors Opfions: Standard or color tinted priming available All data and information provided is for informational purposes only. It is subject to change without notice. To be sure you have the latest revision page please either visit our website @ www.lyndendoor.com or contact your Lynden Door, Inc. representative. August 30, 2010 - Revision 3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Non -rated access door and frame units for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access units. C. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, rough -in dimensions. 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 017000 - Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations of all access units. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as on shop drawings. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 013000 - Coordination & Meetings. B. Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical work requiring access units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. KARP B. MILCOR C. Larsen's D. J.L. Industries E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.1 ACCESS UNITS - CEILINGS (NON- RATED) A. Non -Rated Door and Frame Unit: In gypsum wallboard ceilings: Provide and install KARP Style "MC" Standard Flush Access Door, 24 "x12 ". 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 14 gauge steel. Access Doors and Frames 083113 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Fabricate door panels of 14 gauge steel; prime painted. C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. D. Hardware: 1. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges that open to 175 degrees. 2. Lock: One per door; flush, screwdriver operated. All doors to have interior latch release mechanism. E. Anchors: Appropriate for attachment to substrate. 2.5 FINISHES A. Prime - painted on steel. Field paint per Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Coordination and Meetings. B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Locations as indicated on Drawings. Exact locations are to be coordinated with controls on HVAC equipment. Install access doors in GWB ceilings adjacent to exhaust fan units. END OF SECTION Access Doors and Frames 083113 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront system, complete with reinforcing, fasteners, anchors, and attachment devices. 2. Accessories necessary to complete work. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchoring devices which are built into masonry. 2. Anchoring devices which are cast in concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF -45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 501.2 Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage. 2. 2605 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 3. 606.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 4. 607.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 5. 608.1 Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 6. 701.2 Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping. 7. Manual #10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. 8. SFM -1 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A117.1 Safety Standards for the Handicapped. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 Structural Steel. 2. A123 Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. B209 Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. B221 Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 5. B308 Aluminum -Alloy 6061 -T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 6. E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 7. E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.3SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures defined on the Structural Drawings. The design pressures are based on the International Building Code; 2006 Edition. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm /ftz at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf, 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Thermal Transmittance (U- factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U- factor) shall not be more than: a. Glass to Exterior — 0.47 (low -e) or 0.61 (clear) b. Glass to Center — 0.44 (low -e) or 0.61 (clear) C. Glass to Interior -0.41 (low -e) or 0.56 (clear) d Project Specific, Assembly w/ Glazing: U = 0.39; SHGC = 0.25 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior — 70frame and 69giass (IOW -e) or 69frame and 58glass (clear). b. Glass to Center— 62frame and 68giass (IOW -e) or 63 frame and 56glass (clear). C. Glass to Interior— 56frame and 67giass (IOW -e) or 54frame and 58glass (clear). 7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor - Indoor Transmission Class (OITQ When tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior — 38 (STC) and 31 (OITC) b. Glass to Center — 37 (STC) and 30 (OITC) C. Glass to Interior — 38 (STC) and 30 (OITC) C. Thermal Requirements: 1. Framing systems shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differentials of 180 °F without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. Ensure doors function normally within limits of specified temperature range. D. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI /ASTM E330: 1. Wind loads for exterior assemblies: a. Basic loading: Refer to Structural Drawings. Deflection: Maximum calculated deflection of any framing member in direction normal to plane of wall when subjected to specified design pressures for spans up to and including 13' -6" shall be limited to [1/175] of its clear span and for spans greater than 13' -6" deflection shall be limited to [1/240 + Y4 "] of its clear span, except that maximum deflection of members supporting plaster surfaces shall not exceed 1/360 of its span. Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 E. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1.4SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 00 - Submittals. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware, accessories, and other required components. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication, installation and finish of specified systems. 2. Include following: a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints. 3. Provide detailed drawings of: a. Composite members. b. Joint connections for framing systems and for entrance doors. C. Anchorage. d. System reinforcements. e. System expansion and contraction provisions. f. Glazing methods and accessories. g. Internal sealant requirements. 4. Schedule of finishes. E. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturers standard samples indicating quality of finish. 2. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional samples illustrating range of variation. F. Test Reports /Certification: 1. Standard Systems: Submit certified copies of previous test reports substantiating performance of system in lieu of retesting. Include other supportive data as necessary. 2. Submit certification from manufacturer stating percent of recycled aluminum in framing system; identify post- consumer and post - industrial content. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: 1. To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for systems from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer approved by systems manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of specified systems. C. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM -1 and manufacturer's written instructions. D. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local amendments. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 0160 00. B. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on any surfaces. E. Replace damaged units. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties in accordance with Section 0170 00 — Project Closeout. B. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions. C. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty for storefront system as follows: 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer, Tri -Fab 451T system. 2. Kawneer, 500 Swing Door with 5" vertical and top rails, 10 -1/2" bottom rail. B. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 0160 00 — Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.02 Materials A. Aluminum (Framing and Components): 1. Material Standard: ASTM B 221; 6063 -T6 alloy and temper 2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall provide structural strength to meet specified performance requirements. 3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross - sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.03 Accessories A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be Stainless Steel. B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskets shall be extruded EPDM rubber. C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. D. Thermal Barrier (Trifab' VG 451T): 1. Kawneer IsoLock' Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4) separation consisting of a two -part chemically curing, high- density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR -A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. E. Entrance Hardware: Per Hardware Schedule 1. Weatherstripping: Kawneer Sealair weathering. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in aluminum extrusion applied to interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners. 3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one -piece with ribbed surface Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 4. Butt Hinge: Stainless steel with powder coating and non - removable pins (NRP) 5. Push /Pull: CO- 12 /CP -II 6. Closer: Norton 8100 7. Cylinder Lock: Refer to Section 087100. 8. Cylinder Guard: Standard by manufacturer. 2.04 Related Materials A. Sealants: Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. B. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section. 2.05 Fabrication A. General: 1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 2.06 Finishes A. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic° AA- M12C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating 2. Color: Medium Bronze. 2.07 Source Quality Control A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum storefront specified herein from a single source. 1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum storefront is part of a building enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware, windows, curtain wall system and related products, provide building enclosure system products from a single source manufacturer. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate aluminum storefront in accordance with framing manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive storefront system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable tolerances. 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements /openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 3.02 Installation Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 A. General: Install framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA storefront and entrance guide specifications manual. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. 2. Weathertight Construction: Install sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction. 3. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. 4. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 5. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp and twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances aligning with adjacent work. B. Related Products Installation Requirements: 1. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. 2. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section. a. Reference: ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Manual. 3.03 Field Quality Control A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's field service representative shall attend the pre - installation conference and visit the site during the installation of the first unit. 3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. Protection: Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum storefront system from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 3.05 SCHEDULE Refer to the Door Schedule, Door /Frame Types, and Floor Plans for items not specifically scheduled. END OF SECTION Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 084113-6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 54 13 FIBERGLASS FIXED FRAME STOREFRONT WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass fixed frame windows. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 2700 - Air Barriers: Water- resistant barrier. B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants and caulking. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors. 2. AAMA 613 - Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic Coatings on Plastic Profiles. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C 1048 - Heat - Treated Flat Glass- -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 4. ASTM E 547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. ANSI /AAMA /NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windows shall meet Rating F -R specifications in accordance with ANSI /AAMA /NWWDA 101/I.S.2. B. Window Air Leakage, ASTM E 283: Window air leakage when tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) shall be 0.25 cfm /ftz of frame or less. C. Window Water Penetration, ASTM E 547: No water penetration through window when tested under static pressure of 4.5 psf (42 mph) after 4 cycles of 5 minutes each, with water being applied at a rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, and installation details. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site undamaged in manufacturer's or sales branch's original, Fiberglass Fixed Frame Storefront Windows 085413 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and product name. Include installation instructions. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Store materials off ground and under cover. 3. Protect materials from weather, direct sunlight, and construction activities. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Pella Corporation, 102 Main Street, Pella, Iowa 50219. Toll Free (800) 54- PELLA. Phone (641) 621- 1000. Website www.pella.com. Contact Eli Griffin griffinej @pella.com 425 - 223 -2148. 2.2 FIBERGLASS FIXED FRAME WINDOWS A. Fixed Frame Windows: Pella Impervia. 1. Factory - assembled fixed frame window. 2. Frame Material: Duracast. 5- layer, pultruded- fiberglass material, reinforced with interlocking mat. B. Frame: 1. Type: Nailfin. 2. Overall Frame Depth: 3 inches. 3. Nominal Wall Thickness of Fiberglass Members: 0.050 inch to 0.080 inch. 4. Frame Corners: a. Mitered. b. Joined and bonded with thermoset polyurethane adhesive, nylon corner lock, and mechanically fastened. 5. Jambs: Contain optional factory - drilled, counter - bored, installation screw holes. 6. Head and Sill: Contain optional factory - drilled, counter - bored, installation screw holes. C. Glazing: 1. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Quality 1. a. Tempered Glass as required by code: ASTM C 1048. 2. Type: Polyurethane reactive (PUR) hot -melt glazed, 1 -inch thick, insulating glass multi -layer Low -E coated with argon Total U -Value to be .27 or better 2.4 TOLERANCES A. Windows shall accommodate the following opening tolerances: 1. Vertical Dimensions Between High and Low Points: Plus 1/4 -inch, minus 0 inch. 2. Width Dimensions: Plus 1/4 -inch, minus 0 inch. 3. Building Columns or Masonry Openings: Plus or minus 1/4 -inch from plumb. 2.5 FINISH A. Exterior and Interior Duracast Finish: Factory - applied powder -coat paint, comply with AAMA 613. 1. Brown Exterior with Brown Interior Fiberglass Fixed Frame Storefront Windows 085413 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.6 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Flashing /Sealant Tape: Pella SmartFlash. 1. Aluminum -foil- backed butyl window and door flashing tape. 2. Maximum Total Thickness: 0.013 inch. 3. UV resistant. 4. Verify sealant compatibility with sealant manufacturer. B. Interior Insulating -Foam Sealant: Low - expansion, low- pressure polyurethane insulating window and door foam sealant. C. Exterior Perimeter Sealant: "Pella Window and Door Installation Sealant" or equivalent high quality, multi - purpose sealant as specified in the joints sealant section. D. Block Frame Installation Accessories: Vinyl installation fin PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive windows. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install windows to be weather - tight. C. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. D. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion. E. Integrate window system installation with exterior water - resistant barrier using flashing /sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing /sealant tape with water - resistant barrier using watershed principles in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions. F. Place interior seal around window perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air barrier using insulating foam sealant. G. Seal window to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish or glass. C. Remove labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed windows to ensure that, except for normal weathering, windows will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Fiberglass Fixed Frame Storefront Windows 085413 -3 BRAND SUMMARY r ILLLLJ FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET Window type 01 & 02 Pella® Impervia "' Fixed Frame Direct Set windows have all the Pella innovations you demand. The frame and glass stop are made of Duracast' fiberglass composite, Pella's patented, five layer, engineered fiberglass composite. Each window uses three -way reinforced corners for increased strength. All frame corners are locked in place with corner locks and injected with a dual purpose sealant/ adhesive for long- lasting performance. Frame corners are additionally secured with mechanical fasteners. Pella Impervia windows are pre - finished with powder -coat paint. This paint meets the stringent AAMA 623 standards. Powder -coat paint is resistant to dents, scratches and damaging UV light. Duracast fiberglass composite can withstand extreme heat (over 200` F), intense cold ( -40` F), and is seacoast worthy. The 3" deep block frame is our most versatile frame. Units can be installed in masonry openings using installation clips, or in wood frame openings using optional fins. Units can also be field - joined together. Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- FFDS -2 PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE Size Performance Data FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET Features and Options SIZE AND PERFORMANCE DATA Powder -Coat White Block Frame Special Sizes • PERFORMANCE O Insulated Glass Options / Low -E Types Meets or Exceeds AAMA /WDMA Ratings F -CW50 Advanced Low -E Insulating Glass with argon Hallmark Certified Air Infiltration (cfm /ft2 of frame Q 1.57 psf wind pressure) 0.10 Water Resistance 7.5 psf Design Pressure 50 psf OTHER O Forced Entry Resistance Level (Minimum Security Grade)2 40 FEATURES AND OPTIONS Block Frame Block Frame Glazing Type Powder -Coat White S Dual -pane Insulating Glass S Powder -Coat Tan or Brown O Insulated Glass Options / Low -E Types Dual -color (Tan or Brown exterior with White interior) O Advanced Low -E Insulating Glass with argon O NaturalSun Low -E Insulating Glass with argon O Grilles- Between- the -Glass SunDefenseT"' Low -E coating Insulating Glass with argon O Traditional, Prairie, Top Row O Clear Insulating Glass (no Low -E coating) S Applied Grilles Additional Glass Options Equally Divided, Unequally Divided and Top Row O Annealed Glass S Tempered Glass O Obscure Glass3 O Gas Fill/ High Altitude Argon S High Altitude O High Altitude with argon O S = Standard; O = Optional (1) Composite units are not AAMA /WDMA performance certified. Pella Impervia composites are engineered to meet performance class and grade shown in the design data tables. (2) The higher the level, the greater the product's ability to resist forced entry. (3)Contact your local Pella sales representative for current offering. Open frame no sash available for PTAC (Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner) applications. Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- FFDS -3 GLAZING PERFORMANCE - TOTAL UNIT Fixed Frame Direct Set FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET o U Impenia Shaded Areas Meet ENERGY STAR' Performance Criteria in Zones Shown Type of Glazing 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/5 mm glass LL 0.30 _ 0.59 > 68 u 54 U. S. Canada2 Zone ER 36 Zone with grilles-between-the-glass 0.30 0.54 61 54 33 with applied grilles 0.30 0.48 55 54 29 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/6 mm glass 0.30 0.58 67 54 35 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.30 0.58 61 54 35 with applied grilles 0.30 0.47 54 54 29 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/2.5 mm glass with foam insulation 0.30 0.63 70 56 38 with grilles-between-the-glass 030 0.57 63 56 35 with applied grilles 0.30 0.51 56 56 31 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/3 mm glass with foam insulation 0.30 0.62 70 56 38 with g rilles- between -the- g lass 0.30 0.56 62 56 34 with applied grilles 0.30 0.50 56 56 31 i 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/5 mm glass with foam insulation 0.29 0.59 68 55 37 with 9 rilles- between -the lass 0.29 0.54 61 55 34 with applied grilles 0.29 0.48 55 55 31 1" NaturalSun Low -E IG with argon/6 mm glass with foam insulation 0.29 0.58 67 55 36 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.29 0.52 61 55 33 with anolied arilles 0.29 0.47 54 55 30 1" SunDefense IG with argon/2.5 mm glass 0.28 0.24 58 59 18 with rl I les- between-t e-g lass 0.28 0.22 52 59 with applied grilles 0.28 0.20 46 59 16 1" SunDefense IG with argon/3 mm glass 0.28 0.24 57 59 18 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.28 0.22 51 59 17 with applied grilles 0.28 0.20 46 59 16 1" SunDefense IG with argon/5 mm glass 0.27 0.24 56 57 19 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.27 0.22 50 57 18 with applied grilles 0.27 0.20 45 57 17 1" SunDefense IG with argon/6 mm glass 0.27 0.24 55 57 19 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.27 0.22 50 57 18 with applied grilles 0.27 0.20 44 57 17 19 1" SunDefense IG with argon/2.5 mm glass with foam insulation 0.27 0.24 58 60 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.27 0.22 52 60 18 with applied grilles 0.27 0.20 46 60 17 1" SunDefense IG with argon/3 mm glass with foam insulation 0.27 0.24 57 60 19 with grilles- between -the- g lass 0.27 0.22 51 60 18 with applied grilles 0.27 0.20 46 60 17 1" SunDefense IG with argon /5 mm glass with foam insulation 0.26 0.24 56 59 21 with grilles-between-the-glass 0.26 0.22 50 59 19 with applied grilles 0.26 0.20 45 59 18 1" SunDefense IG with argon/6 mm glass with foam insulation 0.26 0.24 55 58 21 with g rilles- between -the lass 0.26 0.22 50 58 19 with applied grilles 0.26 0.20 44 58 18 R -Value = 1 /U- Factor See the Product Performance section SHGC - Solar Heat Gain Coefficient for more detailed information or visit VLT % = Visible Light Transmission www.energystar.gov for Energy Star guidelines. CR = Condensation Resistance ER = Canadian Energy Rating I1) Glazing performance values are calculated based on NFRC 100. (2) The values shown are based on Canada's updated ENERGY STAR* initiative. Far center -glass values, see the Product Performance section. Climate Zones �.�+ OD �r ti Wo Y Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08- Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- -FDS -5 SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS r Indoor - Outdoor Transmission Class FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET Product Frame Size Glazing System STC OITC Rating Rating FIXED FRAME 47 -1/2" x 47 -1/2" 1" clear IG with 2.5 mm glass 27 21 DIRECT SET Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.Pel]aADM.com F2- FFDS -8 GRILLE TYPES Typical Grilles Profiles FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET Typical Grille Patterns GRILLE PROFILES Grilles- Between - the -Glass A 4 3/4" Contoured (Actual Size) GRILLE PATTERNS Grilles- Between- the -Glass i Traditional 9 -Lite Prairie, Top ROW2 Applied Grilles (to simulate multiple unit composites) LJLJ ❑❑ 4x4 2x2 1x2 2x1 :E . 17- 2x2 2x2 3x2 3x3 4x1 3x1 The above are examples only. Pella 2012 Are Applied Grilles 1 -5/8" Applied Grille (Scale 6" = 1'0") See Shop Drawings for Grid Pattern (1) Standard corner lite dimension for Prairie patterns = 4" visible glass (VG). (2) Standard visible glass to center line of separator bar = 14" or half of total VGH, whichever is smaller. Multiple rows are available up to 50% glass size. Equally Divided Select up to 4 lites wide or high 2x3 30 Unequally Divided Custom Specify - select up to 3 lites wide or high 3x2 Top Row Select desired number of lites wide. Horizontal bar height is variable up to 50% glass size. 2x1 hitectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- FFDS -9 DETAILED PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS r FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET • Frame is DuracastO fiberglass composite — five -layer pultruded fiberglass material [with foam insulation;], reinforced with a Pella patented interlocking mat. • Overall frame depth is 3 ". • Nominal wall thickness of Duracast fiberglass composite members is .050" to .070" thick. • Frame corners are mitered, joined and bonded with corner lock and mechanically fastened with injected polyurethane adhesive. • Jambs contain optional factory- drilled (counter- bored) installation screw holes. • Duracast fiberglass comppsitp su aces with powder -coat paint finish. • Color is [WI ite}["Tem ][Brown ] -or- • Dual -color option Reml = exterior with White interior. FOAM INSULATION INSERTS, GLAZING SYSTEM • Quality float glass complying with ASTM C 103h. • 1" insulating glass [[annealed] [tempered]], [[clear] [Advanced Low -E coated with argon] [NaturalSu DefenseTm Low -E coating IG with argon] SunDefensM Lo.— bscure] [clear obscure tempered]], sealed an one o sas i. • High altitude glazing available. • Open glaze also available - frame and stops only. Grilles • Grilles- Between -the -Glass • Insulating glass contains 3/4" contoured aluminum grilles permanently installed between two panes of glass. • rille a facto in' e a o • Interior an Exterior App ie gri es • 1 -5/8" aluminum grilles are applied to the interior and exterior of glass. • Grilles are factory prefinished [White] [Tan] [Brown] to match interior and exterior finish. OH — HEAD �J— SILL > :.••..•...: : 'N ...: 0— IAMB I M — INTEGRAL MULLION (1) Foam insulation inserts are only available with Advanced Low -E and SunDefenseT' Low -E insulating glass. Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- FFDS -14 UNIT SECTIONS Block Frame FIXED FRAME DIRECT SET NO FIN FJi I I OJ — JAMB TYPICAL JOINING MULLIONS WITH STANDARD FIN E_ C N r c-j `l- �- a— si �R i — JAMB MBINATION Horizontal Shown) Scale 3" = 1'0" All dimensions are approximate. Factory- assembled integral mullions have a 3" overall frame width. Combination joining mullions are 3 -1/4' frame width. See the Installation and Performance section at PellaADM.com for mullion applications and structural limitations. WITH OFFSET FIN N 0i — JAMB Imperviii Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F2- FFDS-15 PRODUCT USE AND INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS PERFORMANCE NOTE ON BARRIER WALL SYSTEMS Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Other Non -Water Managed Wall Systems Significant concerns have been raised regarding moisture problems including unacceptable water infiltration associated with the use of barrier wall systems which do not allow for the proper management of moisture within the wall system, such as EIFS (also known as synthetic stucco) and other stucco -like systems (sometimes referred to as "hard coat" or "one- coat" stucco) that use EIFS like coating systems, but omit the foam board. Specifically, a large number of EIFS installations, as well as other barrier type wall systems, have been found to have problems with excessive moisture in the wall cavity. The basic problem is that barrier systems do not account for the fact that moisture can —and will — penetrate the exterior wall surface. Once moisture penetrates a barrier wall, it remains trapped inside the wall cavity, where it may damage and even rot sheathing, framing and other moisture - sensitive building elements. In a large number of cases, the moisture problems have caused deterioration serious enough to require extensive repairs. These problems often show up where there are penetrations in the building's exterior, such as at windows and doors, however, moisture problems are not limited to these areas. It is generally agreed that the root cause of barrier- system moisture problems is the inability of such systems to allow moisture that should be expected in any building exterior system to weep or evaporate to the building exterior, and that the problems are not caused by the penetrating components themselves, whether they are windows, doors, decks, or other features. As a result of these problems, except in extremely and climates, barrier -type systems are not recommended over wood frame construction or over any other substrate that could be adversely affected by moisture. Pella Corporation will not be responsible for claims or damages caused by anticipated or unanticipated water infiltration, deficiencies in building design, construction, and maintenance, failure to install Pella products in accordance with approved methods, or the use of Pella products in systems, such as barrier wall systems, which do not allow for the proper management of moisture within the wall system. Pella products should not be used in barrier Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, (EIFS) (also known as synthetic stucco) or other non -water managed systems. Except in the states of California, New Mexico, Arizona, Nevada, Utah and Colorado, Pella makes no warranty of any kind on and assumes no responsibility for Pella windows and doors installed in barrier EIFS. In the states listed above, the installation of Pella Products in EIFS or similar systems must be in accordance with Pella's instructions for that type of construction. Contact your local Pella representative for considerations with non -water managed wall systems and on large or complex installations. Moisture infiltration problems in anytype of building can be reduced by proper flashing and /or sealing around all building penetrations, including windows and doors. Proper flashing under and around window and door openings can reduce moisture problems in barrier systems, however, the performance of any building system is also dependent upon the design and workmanship of the entire building system, which must take into account local conditions, climate, building codes, inherent component limitations, and the effects of aging and weathering on building components. Even when general installation recommendations are made by Pella Corporation, the determination of the suitability of all building components for each project, as well as the design and installation of flashing and sealing systems, are the responsibility of the architect, contractor, installer, and /orthe manufacturerof the exterior finish system specified for the project. Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F -PP -6 PRODUCT PERFORMANCE INDUSTRY CERTIFICATION Imperria HALLMARK CERTIFICATION The WDMA Hallmark Certification Program gives specifiers a method of identifying windows and doors that are Jmanufactured in accordance with WDMA standards, The WDMA Hallmark is considered a mark of excellence among architects, contractors and other specifiers and is accepted industry-wide. WDMA Standards are referenced by HUD /FHA in their Minimum Property Standards and by many other government agencies in their construction specifications. Hallmark Certification verifies conformance with AAMA /WDMA 101 /1.5.2 -97, or most recent versions, and is determined by in -plant inspection of the manufacturing facilities and by sampling and testing of product. Many Pella Impervia products are Hallmark Certified and are clearly labeled with performance class and grade information. General performance class and grade information is found under each product section titled Product Selection Guide —Size and Performance Data. Individual unit class and grade ratings are found on the Design Data pages in each section. For additional information about the Window and Door Manufacturers Association, contact: Window and Door Manufacturers Association 401 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 2200 Chicago, IL 60611 Telephone: 312- 321 -6802 Fax: 312 - 673 -6922 Web site: www.wdma.com NFRC RATING NFRC The NFRC has a single purpose —to establish and improve upon uniform energy rating procedures for all brands of windows and doors. This means that when a product is NFRC certified, the ratings shown on the label have been determined by an independent laboratory using one standard method (as defined by the NFRC). This allows direct comparisons with other NFRC- certified products. Pella' Impervia' products have been certified by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC), and are clearly labeled with U- Factor information, Solar Heat Gain (SHGC) and visible light transmittance (VT). A label containing the NFRC performance data is located on each Pella Impervia window and door. Pella Corporation is a founding member of the NFRC and continually supports its work on behalf of homeowners and the building industry. If you have questions about the NFRC, feel free to contact them at: NFRC 6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 140 Greenbelt, MD 20770 Telephone: 301 - 589 -1776 Fax: 301 - 588 -3884 Web site: www.nfrc.org Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.FellaADM.com F -PP -15 PRODUCT WINDOW AND DOOR PERFORMANCE Compliance Information Pella windows and doors meet or exceed one or more of the following industry and federal performance standards: • WDMA— Window and Door Manufacturers Association 1. 101/I.S.2 -97 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors 2. 101/I.S.2/A440 -05 Standard /Specification for Windows, Doors and Unit Skylights 3. 101/I.S.2/A440 -08 North American Fenestration Standard /Specification for windows, doors, and skylights 4. I.S.4 Water Repellent Preservative • AAMA— American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. 101/I.S.2 -97 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors 2. 101/I.S.2/A440 -05 Standard /Specification for Windows, Doors and Unit Skylights 3. 101/I.S.2/A440 -08 North American Fenestration Standard /Specification for windows, doors, and skylights INDUSTRYTESTING METHODS Pella products have been tested under the applicable procedures listed below: NFRC 100 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U- Factors NFRC 200 Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence AAMA—AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION AAMA 613 -02 Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic Coatings on Plastic Profiles AAMA 906.3 Voluntary Specification for Sliding Glass Door Roller Assemblies AAMA 1302.5 Forced -Entry Resistant Test for Windows AAMA 1303.5 Forced -Entry Resistant Test for Sliding Glass Doors AAMA 2603 -98 Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels ASTM B 117 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing ASTM C 236 Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box ASTM C 961 Standard Test Method for Lap Shear Strength of Hot - Applied Sealants ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass ASTM C 1048 Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass —Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass ASTM C 1 199 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Steady -State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems ASTM D 1929 Using Hot Box Methods ASTM D 76 Standard Specification for Tensile Testing Machines for Textile ASTM D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics ASTM D 578 Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Strands ASTM D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and /or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D 648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load ASTM D 737 Standard Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM D 1777 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials ASTM D 1929 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics ASTM D 2261 Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of Fabrics by the Tongue (Single Rip) Procedure (Constant Rate of Extension Tensile Testing Machine) Continued on next page Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors I www.PellaADM.com F -PP -19 PRODUCT INDUSTRY TESTING METHODS PERFORMANCE 0Impervia ASTM D 2471 Standard Test Method for Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Temperature of Reacting Thermosetting Resins ASTM D 2565 Standard Practice for Xenon -Arc Exposure of Plastics Intended for Outdoor Applications ASTM D 2653 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Elastomeric Yarns (CRE Type Tensile Testing Machines) ASTM D 2990 Standard Test Methods for Tensile, Compressive, and Flexural Creep and Creep- Rupture of Plastics ASTM D 3822 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Single Textile Fibers ASTM D 3917 Standard Specification for Dimensional Tolerance of Thermosetting Glass- Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes ASTM D 5028 Standard Test Method for Curing Properties of Pultrusion Resins by Thermal Analysis ASTM D 5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact) ASTM E 90 Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences ASTM E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences ASTM E 547 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials ASTM E 773 Standard Test Methods for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units ASTM E 774 Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units ASTM E 1 105 Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differences ASTM E 1300 Standard Practice for Determining Minimum Thickness of Annealed Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load ASTM E 1423 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems ASTM E 1425 Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Exterior Windows and Doors ASTM F 588 Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Window Assemblies to Forced -Entry Excluding Glazing ASTM F 842 Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Forced -Entry Resistance of Horizontal Sliding Door Assemblies ASTM G 53 Recommended Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent UV- condensation type) for Exposure of Non - Metallic Materials ASTM G 85 Practice for Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Federal Specification Glazing Thickness DD -G Federal Screening, Insect Non - Metallic Specifications FS LS 125B Pella 2012 Architectural Design Manual I Division 08 - Openings I Windows and Doors www.PelI.ADM,com F -PP -20 Impervia 00 PELLAO IMPERVIe LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY AND PELLA FIBERGLASS -RESIN 20/10 LIMITED WARRANTY Congratulations on choosing Pella Impervia and /or Pella fiberglass -resin window and door products to protect and beautify your home. These superior - quality windows and patio doors have been designed to give you years of comfort. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read this entire Pella Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability ( "Limited Warranty ") before purchasing or installing this product. Refer to the Pella Impervia Owner's Manual for the required care and maintenance of your Pella products (Owner's Manuals available on pella.com). By installing or using this product, you are acknowledging that this Limited Warranty is part of the terms of sale. LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTIES FOR PRODUCTS INSTALLED IN OWNER- OCCUPIED SINGLE - FAMILY HOMES EXCLUDE PELLA IMPERVIA'S DURACAST® MATERIAL FOR RECTANGULAR PRODUCTS INSTALLED IN OTHER THAN OWNER - OCCUPIED SINGLE - FAMILY HOMES This Limited Warranty applies only to Pella Impervia and Pella fiberglass -resin products ( "Covered Pella Products "). Pella makes the following exclusive express Limited Warranties for Pella Impervia and Pella fiberglass -resin products installed in owner - occupied single - family homes within the United States and Canada, subject to the stated conditions and limitations. Nontransferable Limited Lifetime Warranty on Pella Impervia's Duracast Material. Pella warrants that its Duracast material, which makes up the rectangular frame, sash or panel parts of Pella Impervia window and door products, will be free from cracking, splitting, corroding and warping for as long as you own your home. If Pella is given proper notice of a defect in the Duracast materials of a Pella Impervia rectangular window or door product, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective part(s) or product(s) (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price. This Limited Lifetime Warranty is provided to the original homeowner and may not be assigned or transferred. The Duracast Limited Lifetime Warranty does not cover the paint finish applied to the Duracast material, which is covered under the transferable ten -year (10 -year) warranty on material and workmanship found below. In addition, the Transferable Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty on materials and workmanship replaces the Limited Lifetime Warranty on Pella's Duracast® material when you transfer ownership of your single - family home or cease to occupy your home. 20/10 LIMITED WARRANTY ON PELLA'S FIBERGLASS -RESIN MATERIAL FOR NONRECTANGULAR PRODUCTS INSTALLED IN OWNER- OCCUPIED SINGLE - FAMILY HOMES, RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS Pella's Fiberglass -Resin Material (Non - Duracast Material) — Transferable Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty. Pella warrants that its fiberglass -resin material, which makes up the frame and glass stops of the nonrectangular Special Shapes (i.e., half - circles, triangles, etc.), shall be free of defects in material or workmanship that significantly impair their proper operation and function for ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. If Pella is given notice of a defect in materials or workmanship of a Pella product occurring within ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective part(s) or product(s) (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price. This Limited 10 -Year Warranty may be transferred. The following applies to the Pella Impervia® Limited Lifetime Warranty and the Pella Fiberglass -Resin 20110 Limited Warranty: TRANSFERABLE LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR NONGLASS MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND GLASS FOR DURACAST PRODUCTS INSTALLED IN RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS Nonglass Materials and Workmanship. Transferable Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty. This Transferable Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty applies to the Duracast material not installed in owner - occupied single - family homes, and automatically replaces the Duracast Material Nontransferable Limited Lifetime Warranty for products installed in owner - occupied single - family homes, upon Buyer's transfer of ownership of the single - family home or at such time that the Buyer ceases to occupy the home within ten (10) years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. Pella° warrants that all nonglass components of its Covered Pella Products shall be free of manufacturing defects in material or workmanship that significantly impair their proper operation and function for ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. If Pella is given notice of a defect in materials or workmanship of a Pella Impervia product occurring within ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective part(s) or product(s) (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price. This Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty may be transferred. Nonlaminated Glass. Transferable Twenty -Year (20 -Year) Limited Warranty. Pella warrants that the glass in Pella products shall be free from premature failure or permanent material obstruction of vision due to a failure of the glass seal for twenty (20) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. If Pella is given notice of a glass defect occurring within twenty (20) years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective glass (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price. Exterior Surround Made with AZEK® Trim. Transferable Twenty- Five -Year (25 -Year) Limited Warranty. Pella warrants that the exterior surround, made with AZEK Trim, shall be free of rot, corrosion, delaminating or excessive swelling from moisture for twenty -five (25) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. Product must be installed and painted (finished) in accordance with Pella's Installation Instructions. If Pella is given notice of a defect occurring within twenty -five (25) years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective component(s) (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price of the defective parts. This warranty does not cover the painted finishes or coating applied to the product by the original purchaser or any third party. LIMITED WARRANTIES ON FRAMES USED ON BAY AND BOW WINDOWS FOR PELLA IMPERVIA PRODUCTS INSTALLED IN OWNER - OCCUPIED SINGLE FAMILY HOMES, RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS* Nonglass Components. Transferable Ten -Year (10 -Year) Limited Warranty. Pella warrants that the nonglass components of its Covered Pella Products shall be free of manufacturing defects in material or workmanship or termite damage that significantly impair their proper operation and function for ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. If Pella is given notice of a defect in materials or workmanship occurring within ten (10) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) repair or replace the defective part(s) or product(s) (with cost of labor included only within two [2] years of the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer) or 2) refund the original purchase price. This Limited Warranty on Nonglass Components does not apply to nonpainted hardware finishes. Interior Factory Finish. Two -Year (2 -Year) Limited Warranty. Pella warrants that all factory- applied interior paint and stain finishes to bay /bow frames by Pella Corporation will be free of any "Finish Defect" for a period of two (2) years from the date of sale by Pella or a Pella- authorized dealer. Pella products with factory- applied interior primer only are excluded from the interior finish Limited Warranty. A Finish Defect includes cracking, peeling, checking, delaminating, blistering, flaking, chalking in excess of a numerical rating of six (when measured in accordance with the standard practice specified in ASTM D659) or fading or change in color in excess of five "E" units (NBS), calculated in accordance with ASTM 2244. If Pella is given notice of such Finish Defect within two (2) years from the date of sale, Pella shall, at its sole option: 1) refinish the product (the finish may not necessarily be the same finish as originally applied to the product), 2) furnish labor to replace or repair any defective finish workmanship (and provide replacement materials if Pella determines such materials are necessary to make the repairs) or 3) refund the original purchase price of the defective item in question. This Finish Warranty is provided to the original Buyer and may not be assigned or transferred, although the limitations of liability set forth herein apply to all sales and persons. *Bay and bow windows for Pella Impervia made with wood frame CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL LIMITED WARRANTIES Limitation of Warranty. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH PELLA® INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS VOIDS ALL WARRANTIES UNLESS IT IS CLEARLY ESTABLISHED BY THE BUYER OR USER OF THE PRODUCT THAT THE DEFECT OR FAILURE IS UNRELATED TO SUCH NONCOMPLIANCE. This Limited Warranty does not extend to the use of Covered Pella Products under abnormal conditions, conditions that exceed the stated performance parameters of the product as provided on the product labeling and in the Pella Architectural Design Manual, or under conditions not reasonably foreseeable to, or beyond the control of, Pella. Buyer and User assume all risk of any such use. This Limited Warranty is the exclusive warranty for the Covered Pella Products. NEITHER PELLA NOR SELLER MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE. This disclaimer of implied warranties may be limited or ineffective if you are a consumer, as that term is defined by the Magnuson Moss Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301, in which case the duration of any implied warranties shall be two (2) years from the date of sale by Pella or its authorized dealer. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts for consumers, so the above limitation may not apply to you, in which event the manner of presenting any claim thereon shall be the same as provided in the express warranties stated herein. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have additional rights, which vary from state to state. Allocation of Risks of Pella Product Performance. Because all construction must anticipate some water infiltration, it is important that the wall system be designed and constructed to properly manage moisture. Pella Corporation is not responsible for claims or damages caused by anticipated or unanticipated water infiltration; deficiencies in building design, construction and maintenance; failure to install Pella products in accordance with Pella Installation Instructions; or the use of Pella products in barrier wall systems, which do not allow for proper management of moisture within the wall system (see the following). The determination of the suitability of all building components, including the use of Pella products, as well as the design and installation of flashing and sealing systems, is the responsibility of Buyer or User, architect, contractor, installer or other construction professional, and is not the responsibility of Pella. All risks related to building design and construction, or the maintenance, installation and use of Pella products, shall be assumed by Buyer and /or User. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Pella products should not be used in barrier wall systems, which do not allow for proper management of moisture within the wall systems, such as Exterior Insulation Finish Systems (EIFS) (also known as synthetic stucco) or similar systems. Except in the states of California, New Mexico, Arizona, Nevada, Utah and Colorado, Pella makes no warranty of any kind on and assumes no responsibility for Pella windows and doors installed in barrier wall systems. In the states listed above, the installation of Pella products in EIFS or similar barrier systems must be in accordance with Pella's instructions for that type of construction. Limitation of Liability. This Limited Warranty sets forth the maximum liability for our products. IN NO EVENT (INCLUDING WHERE THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS DEEMED NOT TO APPLY TO THE SALE OR PRODUCT IN QUESTION) SHALL PELLA OR SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE SALE, INSTALLATION OR USE OF ANY PELLA® PRODUCTS. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages for consumers, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. Limitation of Remedy. THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE BUYER OR USER, AND THE SOLE LIABILITY OF PELLA AND SELLER, FOR ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, INJURIES OR DAMAGES (INCLUDING CLAIMS BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE) RESULTING FROM THE SALE, INSTALLATION OR USE OF THESE PRODUCTS, SHALL BE, AT THE OPTION OF PELLA, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT OR THE RETURN OF THE ORIGINAL PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, AS PROVIDED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF PELLA OR SELLER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. Replacement products shall be a reasonably similar current product and may not exactly match the original. Even where Pella chooses to repair or replace product within two (2) years of the date of sale, the costs covered by this warranty do not include any labor or material costs associated with finishing space surrounding or adjacent to the repaired or replaced product, including furnishing any trim or other carpentry work. Replacement product provided pursuant to this Limited Warranty shall be subject to the applicable Pella product Limited Warranty only for the remainder of the original warranty period on the product being replaced. If Pella or Seller provides any of the remedies identified in the Limited Warranties above (i.e., repair, replacement of product or refund of the purchase price), then Buyer and /or User agrees that this limitation of remedy shall not have failed of its essential purpose. DISCLAIMER — WHAT THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER Pella is not responsible for or makes no warranty as to: 1) Product failure, loss or damage due to: • Normal wear and tear. • Improper storage, handling, installation, finishing, use, modification or maintenance. • Mechanical abrasion to finishes. • Non - factory- applied finishes, applied sealants or caulking. Finishes applied by your local dealer /contractor are not covered by this warranty. • Damage caused by failing to finish your bay or bow frames in a timely manner to protect them from UV rays and the elements. • Nonfactory finishing, repairs or modifications performed by anyone other than Seller (or one of its subcontractors). • Finishes of non -Pella products. • The buyer's choice of finish, or whether the chosen finish on bay or bow frames is a match to other or existing finishes. • Structural settlement, movement or vibration. • Product or finishes exposed to excessive localized heat, high- moisture environments (including pools, hot tubs and greenhouses) or water leakage. • Finish failure or any other losses arising from defects in the existing structure. • Interior prime finish on bay or bow frames. • Normal wear, fading or discoloration of finish from product usage, age or exposure to direct sunlight. • Acts of God. • Acid rain or other corrosive elements. • Installation of anything other than standard factory- installed glass in Duracast® frames. • Accidents, including accidental glass breakage. • Application of after - market window films to glass surfaces. • Damage caused by inappropriate finishes, solvents, brickwash or cleaning chemicals. • Glass breakage, not the fault of Pella, that results in seal failure. • Damage to glass as a result of improper use or application. • Damage caused by high in -home humidity (condensation, frost and mold). • Accident; misuse; abuse; alterations; improper handling operation or cleaning. • Products subjected to conditions outside product design limitations. • Improperly installed security systems. • Products with modifications that are not approved by Pella Corporation. • Hardware finishes. • Ripping, tearing or other damage not the fault of Pella to window screens associated with wear and tear through product use. • Insects, including grasshoppers (with the exception of coverage for termites on bay or bow frames). • Finishing or modifying the structure containing repaired or replaced product. • The purchase, damage, repair or replacement of non -Pella products. • Products that have not been paid for in full. 2) Minor imperfections in the product: • Minor imperfections in glass that do not affect the product's structural integrity or significantly obscure vision. • Minor variations in glass color. • Variations in wood grain, color, texture or natural characteristics on bay or bow frames. 3) Installation inconsistent with Pella Installation Instructions: • Damage resulting in whole or in part from installation inconsistent with Pella's Installation Instructions. • Altered or reinstalled products. • Products used in nonvertical glazing applications. • Combinations not built by Pella or not built in accordance with Pella's recommendations for mulling and combining Pella products. WDMA Hallmark Certification. Pella® products labeled with the Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) Hallmark Certification are tested in accordance with applicable WDMA performance standards, which require products to be tested for air infiltration, water infiltration and structural performance. The WDMA certification standards measure the performance of a single sample of the product at the time of manufacture. Performance of Pella products, as measured by the WDMA standards, will change over time depending upon the conditions of use. For details on Hallmark Certification, go to WDMA.com. All Hallmark Certification performance ratings apply to individual products only. Pella makes no claims as to the overall performance of mulled and /or product combinations. NFRC Standards. Pella° products labeled with the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Energy Performance label are tested in accordance with NFRC standards. NFRC ratings are based on a combination of computer simulations and physical testing of product samples. For details on NFRC Energy Performance ratings, go to NFRC.org. Argon. For Pella products labeled as having Low -E insulating glass with argon, Pella injects argon at the time of manufacture. No warranty is made as to the amount or percentage of argon present in the insulating glass. It is known that argon within insulating glass dissipates over time. The manner of use and conditions of installation of the product will affect the rate of dissipation of argon out of the insulating glass. Pella makes no warranty regarding the rate of dissipation of argon or the amount of argon remaining in the window at any time after manufacture. Prompt Notice of Claim. Within the warranty period, Buyer or User shall promptly notify Pella, and in no case more than one (1) year after any defect or other basis of a claim covered by this Limited Warranty is discovered or should have been discovered. Any claims otherwise covered by the foregoing warranties, but for which Pella did not receive notice within one (1) year from the time the problem first became known, shall be barred. Limited Warranty Claim Procedure. Claims under these Limited Warranties may be made in writing to Pella Corporation, Customer Service Department, 102 Main Street, Pella, IA 50219, by calling for service at 800 - 374 -4758 or by going to http : / /warranty.pellaimpervia.com. Claims to Pella should include the following information: 1. Claimant's name, address and phone number and the installation address (if different); 2. A description of the product, purchase price, date and location of purchase, and copies of invoices; 3. The Pella serial number located on the insulating glass spacer or the unit identification number located on the lower left -hand corner of the glass (as seen from the inside); 4. A description of the product concerns (photos may be included); and 5. A brief summary of attempts made to address the concerns. Pella may charge a fee for on -site product inspections. No Statement of Useful Life. This Limited Warranty is not a statement of the useful life of any Pella® products. Entire Agreement. With the exception of a written statement signed by an authorized Pella representative, this Limited Warranty and all the terms contained herein constitutes the entire agreement between Pella /Seller and Buyer /User. This Limited Warranty, including all Limitations of Liability contained herein, is made a part of any such written agreement, unless expressly excluded therein. By purchasing or using the product covered by this Limited Warranty, Buyer /User agrees that they are not relying on any oral statements made by anyone that are in any way contrary to this Limited Warranty. No Amendment Except in Writing. Pella and Seller offer this product, and Buyer and User accept it, subject to the foregoing Limited Warranty, which may be modified only by written agreement signed by a duly authorized representative of Pella. For the most up -to -date warranty information, see the complete warranties for all Pella products on pella.com. Read the Pella Impervia Owner's Manual for the required care and maintenance of your Pella products. All Pella Owner's Manuals are available on pella.com. © 2010 Pella Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A. WPI0710 PREPARING FOR NAIL FIN WINDOW INSTALLATION YOU WILL NEED TO SUPPLY: A A TOOLS REQUIRED: • Impervious or composite shims /spacers \ `-� • Tape measure r • Fasteners (see nail fin anchor instructions at the end of this booklet) • Level • Closed cell foam backer rod /sealant backer • Square AL. -#10x2" Corrosion - resistant screws (See Anchor Table for use) • Hammer ewm�— • Pella' SmartFlash" foil backed butyl window and door • Stapler flashing tape or equivalent e • Scissors or utility knife • Low expansion, low pressure polyurethane insulating window and door foam sealant . Small flat blade screwdriver DO NOT use high pressure or latex foams. • Sealant Gun • Pella Window and Door Installation Sealant or equivalent high quality, s.. ,", .- multi- purpose sealant • Screw Gun with a Phillips Driver bit Note: Other construction materials may be required. Read and understand the instructions and inspect the wall conditions before you begin. INSTALLATION WILL REQUIRE (2) OR MORE PERSONS FOR SAFETY REASONS. Store windows in upright position, out of direct sunlight. ROUGH OPENING VERIFICATION A. Confirm the opening is plumb and level. NOTE: It is critical the bottom is level and it does not slope to the interior. B. Remove dirt, oil or debris from the opening and surrounding wall surfaces. C. Confirm the window will fit the opening. Measure all four sides of the opening to make sure it is 1/2" to 3/4" larger than the window in both width and height. On larger openings measure the width and height in several places to ensure the header or studs are not bowed. NOTE: 1 -112" or more of solid wood blocking is required around the perimeter of the opening. Fix any problems with the rough opening before proceeding. PREPARE THE WINDOW FOR INSTALLATION A. Remove plastic wrap and cardboard packaging from window. DO NOT cut checkrail bands (if present) or remove plastic shipping spacers located between the window sash and frame. DO NOT open the window until it is securely fastened. B. Inspect the product for any damage such as cracks, dents or scratches. DO NOT install damaged windows. C. Remove screens and hardware (if necessary). Label them at set them aside in a protected area. Windows with Half Screens: From the exterior, pull one side of the screen near the shipping clips until the clips disengage from the frame. Rotate the shipping clips toward the exterior of the screen until they snap free from the screen. D. Fold out installation fin to 90• (units with fold up fin only). Be careful not to remove or tear the fin corners. NOTE: if the fin is not at 90•, the window will not line up correctly on the interior. E. Curved Units with Fins: Install clips on wood windows with non - structural flex fins or pre -drill holes on wood windows with rigid curved fin. See nail fin anchor instructions at the end of this booklet. Curved Units with Flexible Fins: Install Clips or pre -drill holes for frame screws Curved units with Rigid Fins: pre -drill holes through fin. Units with wide EnduraClad Exterior trim and narrow fins with NO pre - punched holes: Install clips or pre -drill holes for frame screws. See nail fin anchor instruction at the end of this booklet. Additional preparation may be required for performance upgrade, impact resistant products or to comply with local building code requirements. F Read the entire instruction before proceeding. Interior O O Pull screen near shipping clip chp �, D O E #6 x 5/8" corrosion Fixed resistant screws Extruded Fin 6" from end Lip E O These instructions were developed and tested for use with wall systems designed to manage water. These instructions are not to be used with any other construction methods or window frame types. Installation instructions for use with other construction methods or frame types may be obtained from Pella® Corporation, your local Pella retailer or www.installpelia.com. Building designs, construction methods, building materials, and site conditions unique to your project may require an installation method different from these instructions and /or additional care. Determining the appropriate installation method is the responsibility of you, your architect, or construction professional. PELLfl Always read the Limited Warranty before purchasing or installing Pella® products. By installing this product, you are acknowledging that this Limited W A R R A N 7 y Warranty is part of the terms of the sale. Failure to comply with all Pella installation and maintenance instructions may void your Pella product warranty. See Limited Warranty for complete details at www.petia.com /warranty. NF-3 Revised 12/20/2012 02012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW NEW CONSTRUCTION INSTALLATION WITH NAIL FIN AFTER BUILDING WRAP opi _[:�M Sill Flashing Tape #1 Sill Flashing Tape #2 Water Resistive Barrier Sheathing Framing 1 PREPARE THE OPENING Refer to the nail fin installation preparation section at the beginning of this booklet. A. Cut the building wrap. Refer to the diagram for other window shapes on the next page. Water Resistive Barrier o 1 j 3rd cut: I � cut Exterior I B. Fold the building wrap in at the jambs and staple it in place. Fold the top flap up and temporarily fasten with O flashing tape. 1 g C. Cut 2 pieces of flashing tape 12" longer than opening width. D. Apply sill flashing tape #1 at the sill extending 1" to the exterior and 6" up each jamb. E. Cut 1" wide tabs at each corner by tearing the foil 112" each way from corner. F. Apply sill flashing tape #2 overlapping tape 41 by 1" minimum. NOTE: Press all tape down firmly. G. Install and level sill shims. Place 1" wide x 1/4" to 3/8" thick shims 1/2" from each side. Keep shims back 112" from interior face of window. Place additional shims under each mullion and sliding window interlocker. For vinyl windows, add shims so maximum spacing is 18 ". H. Attach shims to prevent movement after they are level. NOTE: Improper placement of shims may result in bowing the bottom of the window the bottom of the window. Water Resistive Barrier cut � ....... 2� r� 1 A 3", "t J..... .:................ / Exterior I 1B 3� Window Top Corner Nai - ng in - -- - - -- -- li F— I i Window Bottom 2SETTING AND FASTENING THE WINDOW A. Insert the window into the opening on the sill spacers. Center the window between jambs. MA I = IN All I B. Drive two fasteners, one near each end of the top nailing fin. (See nail fin anchor instructions at the end of this booklet) C. Plumb and square the window using shims at the locations Interior Interior View shown. Adjust shims to plumb and square the window. Keep a 2C shims 112" short of window 2C frame depth. Mid NOTE: DO NOT shim above the window. Additional shims are required at screw locations for large units and II For windows over 53` tall. combinations. See the nail fin anchor instructions at the end of this booklet. D. Check the window placement by measuring from the 2C interior surface of the window frame orjamb extension to the interior surface of the wall for consistency. If the dimensions are not equal, confirm the fins are folded fully to 90° (if applicable). E. Drive two fasteners, one near each end of the sill nailing fin. Interior F. Check window operation. Vent awning and casement: See lock lever and crank 2D 1i handle instructions at the end of this instruction. Lift the lock lever and turn the crank handle to open the window. Remove the shipping spacers. Open and close the window to test for proper operation. Double Hung: Cut the checkrail bands (if applicable) and remove shipping spacers. Open, close and tilt the sashes to test for proper operation. Check for i( " equal sash to frame reveal from top to bottom. NOTE: Adjust shims to correct any issues with plumb, square, operation or reveal. G. Close and lock the window. H. Finish driving fasteners into the nailing fin. Refer to the nail fin anchor instructions at the end of this booklet. NF-4 Revised 1212012012 © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW I NEW CONSTRUCTION INSTALLATION WITH NAIL FIN AFTER BUILDING WRAP f (CONTINUED) n Corner Flashing Tape Corner Flashing Tape Flashing Tape 'e Flashing Tape ling / 31NTEGRATING WITH THE BUILDING WRAP A. NOTE: Apply flashing tape 1/2" onto frame cladding with fold -up or slide -in fins. Pre -fold flashing tape at 112" to assist with application. For siding less than 1/2" thick, adjust the placement of the tape to allow the exterior sealant to cover the tape edge. Flashing Tape1 Curved and angle top units without pre - applied fin corners: Cut our 1 -1 /2" long pieces of flashing tape. Apply one to each end of sill fin to extend it 1 -112" past each jamb. Apply one to the bottom end of each jamb fin beginning 1 -112" from the end of the fin and lapping over the first piece of flashing tape. B. Apply straight side flashing tape. Cut two pieces of flashing tape 4" taller than straight sides. Apply tape over the fin and onto weather resistive barrier. Extend tape 2" above and below straight sides. 3g Angle top Units: On the short side, do not allow the side tape to extend higher than what the top tape will cover. Building Wrap Cutting Patterns for Window Shapes -_ �•••••••••'•. • Half Circle Full Circle Quarter Circle Oval Right Triangle Arch Head Dog House Trapezoid Rectangle NF-5 Revised 1212012012 Circle Head Octagon C. Apply top flashing tape. Rectangular Units: Cut one piece of flashing tape to extend 1 " past both side flashing tapes. 3C ' 3C Curved Top Units: Using several short pieces, start taping from the sides of the window working towards the peak. Cut each piece short enough so each piece overlaps the previous piece. Tighter curved frames will require @xterior shorter pieces of tape. j I �Ilr Ri r�rri- d- = NOTE: DO NOT TAPE OVER BOTTOM NAILING FIN. D. Fold down top flap of weather resistive barrier. E. Apply flashing tape to top diagonal cuts. Cut pieces of flashing tape at least 1" longer than each diagonal cut. Lap tape 1" past end of cut onto weather barrier. Overlap multiple pieces of tape by 1 " when necessary. NOTE. PRESS ALL FLASHING TAPE DOWN FIRMLY. 111 F. Install interior sealant. Refer to the interior sealant instructions at the end of this booklet. G. Install head flashing, properly incorporating it with the siding and building wrap according to applicable code requirements. H. Install exterior sealant. (After wall cladding is installed) Refer to the exterior sealant instructions at the end of this booklet. © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW NAIL FIN WINDOW ANCHOR INSTRUCTIONS Note: Standard performance only. Additional anchoring may be required for performance upgrade, impact resistant products or to comply with local building code requirements. EVERY E $ E E • j s E Single -, Double -Hung Anchorclusters,seetable. PLACE FASTENERS ATTHE LOCATIONS INDICATED. E , evEar� E • • • . • I- � y • CYCNY • I'- E E EVERY E E • • �SRy • • E T • • • • _T Sliding Window XO / OX EVERY wE Si E • • • • E EvErn 5 • • E } • Casement ENCOMPASS BY PELLA * /THERMASTAR BY PELLA" AND PELLA® 350 SERIES WINDOWS * = For light gauge steel framing, use #10 self - drilling modified truss head screws. NOTE: Do not over -drive fasteners, but allow for movement of building materials. Refer to the supplemental instruction included with the unit for securing mullion end anchors (if applicable). NF-14 Revised 12/20/2012 © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW PG Max Max Edge Max. Anchor Type Product Rating Frame Frame Spacing Intermediate Anchor Cluster Width Height (E) Spacing (S) Wood (inches) (inches) Encompass and < 50 Any Any Every Other Pre - Punched 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None ThermaStar Windows 50 Any Any Every Pre - Punched Hole #8 x 2" Screw with Washer None 30 40" 63" 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None 350 Series 40 40" 63" 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail 5 nails, 2" apart at Checkrails SH and DH +401 Any Any 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail 5 nails, 2" apart at Checkrails -60 and Mullion Ends 30 76" 48" 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None 350 Series 2 Panel 40 76" 62" 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail 5 nails, 2 inches apart Meeting Sliding Windows _ _ Stiles +40/ -60 76" 72" 6" 8.1 010 x 2" Screw with 3 Screws, 2" apart at Meeting Washer Stiles 30 123" 48" 6" W 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None 350 Series 3 Panel 40 123" 62" 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail 5 nails, 2" apart at Meeting Stiles Sliding Windows All Other Any Any 6" 8" #10 x 2" Screw with Washer 5 Screws, 2" apart at Meeting Stiles 350 Series 40 Any Any 6" 8" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None CM, AW, FX 60 Any Any 4" 4" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None 350 Series FX All Any Any 4" 4" 1.5" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail 5 nails, 2" apart at Mullion Ends Composites * = For light gauge steel framing, use #10 self - drilling modified truss head screws. NOTE: Do not over -drive fasteners, but allow for movement of building materials. Refer to the supplemental instruction included with the unit for securing mullion end anchors (if applicable). NF-14 Revised 12/20/2012 © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW NAIL FIN WINDOW ANCHOR INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED) Note: Standard performance only. Additional anchoring may be required for performance upgrade, impact resistant products or to comply with local building code requirements. PELLA" IMPERVIA, ARCHITECT SERIES" (850), DESIGNER SERIES" (750) AND PELLA* PROLINE (450) NAIL FIN ANCHOR SPACING INSTRUCTIONS * = For light gauge steel framing, use #10 self - drilling modified truss head screws. ** Refer to the Pella" EnduraClad® Exterior trim with narrow nailing fin anchoring instructions. NOTE: Do not over -drive fasteners in vinyl fins, but allow for movement of building materials. Refer to the supplemental instruction included with the unit for securing mullion end anchors (if applicable). Imo- >73" 0. 1/31 >73" 1/3 i 113 i 1/3 Screws not required at the sill. '3 '3 3 #10 x 3 -1/2" corrosion resist wood screw Drill 1/8" diameter hole through the c hole in the frame Add frame anchor screws for vent and fixed clad -wood casements over 73" #6 x 5/8" corrosion resistant screws 'a 6" from end 16" 16" Lip / .110 �d�\ Clip t Install Clips or frame screws for windows with non - structural curved flex fins Drill 1/8" diameter Holes for windows with curved rigid fins NF-15 Revised 1212012012 © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW PG Max Max Edge Max. Anchor Type Product Rating Frame Width Frame Height Spacing Intermediate Frame Anchors (inches) (inches) (E) Spacing (S) Wood Impervia Windows All Any Any Every Pre- Punched Hole 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None All 73" 73" Every Pre - Punched 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None 450,750 and 850 Clad Wood - - -- - CM, AW or FX Windows All >73" >73" Every Pre - Punched Hole 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail #10 x 3 -1/2" Screws at 1/3 points along head and jambs 450,750 and 850 SH or DH All Any Any Every Pre - Punched Hole 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None Windows Clad Wood Curved Shape Windows with Flexible Fin All Any Any 6 " ** 16 " *" (2) #6 x 1 -1/2" screw ** (2) #6 x 5/8" holding each or Wide EnduraClad Exterior per clip clip ** to the window frame trim with narrow fin. Clad Wood Curved Windows All Any Any 6" 12" 2" 11 Ga. Roofing Nail None with Rigid Fin * = For light gauge steel framing, use #10 self - drilling modified truss head screws. ** Refer to the Pella" EnduraClad® Exterior trim with narrow nailing fin anchoring instructions. NOTE: Do not over -drive fasteners in vinyl fins, but allow for movement of building materials. Refer to the supplemental instruction included with the unit for securing mullion end anchors (if applicable). Imo- >73" 0. 1/31 >73" 1/3 i 113 i 1/3 Screws not required at the sill. '3 '3 3 #10 x 3 -1/2" corrosion resist wood screw Drill 1/8" diameter hole through the c hole in the frame Add frame anchor screws for vent and fixed clad -wood casements over 73" #6 x 5/8" corrosion resistant screws 'a 6" from end 16" 16" Lip / .110 �d�\ Clip t Install Clips or frame screws for windows with non - structural curved flex fins Drill 1/8" diameter Holes for windows with curved rigid fins NF-15 Revised 1212012012 © 2012 Pella Corporation NC_NFAW NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 62 00 UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manufactured plastic unit skylights with integral metal frame, integral curb, ceiling diffuser, tube extensions and flashings. B. Related Sections: 1. Rough Carpentry: Wood framing for rough opening. 2. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood support curbs. 3. Section 07 26 00 - Vapor Retarders: Sealing roof vapor retarder at penetrations. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 101 - Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 4. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. 5. ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics. 6. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Federal Specification Unit: 1. FS TT -C -494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Allow for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling surface temperature range of 170 F degrees without causing detrimental effects to system or components. B. Provide glazing system with minimum visible light transmittance of 90 percent for clear skylights, 50 percent for white skylights. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and installation details. C. Product Data is included at the end of this Section. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions are included at the end of this Section. Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Unit Skylights 086200-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with installation of [curbs specified elsewhere] [and] roofing and flexible flashing systems. C. Coordinate Work with continuity of vapor retarders specified in Section 07 26 00. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for unit skylights. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT SKYLIGHTS A. Solatube 330 DS "Sofa Master" unit to include the following: 1. Closed Ceiling Diffuser: Prismatic diffuser square or round as indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plan, including trim ring where required. 2. Flashings: Self- mounted, minimum 8 -inch or 11 -inch height to install in flat roofs. 3. Transition box for square diffusers. 4. Extension tubes. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, concealed. B. Counterflashings: Same metal type and finish as skylight frame. C. Protective Back Coating: Zinc molybdate alkyd or Bituminous, FS TT -C -494. D. Sealant: Manufacturer's recommended sealants integral with each unit skylight installation, nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating butyl based sealants. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory- assembled unit consisting of plastic glazing, extruded aluminum glazing retainer, gaskets, inner frame, and integral curb with self- contained roof flashing flanges, and self- contained flashing. B. Fabricate free of visual distortion and defects. C. Fabricate to achieve leakproof, and weathertight assemblies. D. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. Unit Skylights 086200 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify openings and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Apply protective back coating on aluminum surfaces of skylight units to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's installation instructions. Flash curb assembly into roof system. B. Place unit skylights and secure to curb assembly. Install integral setting sealant and counterflashing for watertight installation. C. Only waterproof and weathertight assemblies will be acceptable. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Install one each at Toilet Rooms 114 and 115. END OF SECTION Unit Skylights 086200 -3 :�: SOLATUBE® Model; Solatube 330 DS -C Closed Ceiling (21 in. /530 mm Daylighting System) Project: Olympia Federal Yelm Branch Location: Yelm, WA Type: Product Specifications Appear in CSI Division 08, Section 08 62 23. For budgeting and quotations use only. Qty: Model Capture Zone Transfer Zone Delivery Zone JJJJJJ J _DJ J SK —�� J��� L2 = =E:l 1 2 2a 3 3a 4 4a 4b 5 5a 5b 6 1 Model 330 DS -C SolaMaster -' Solatube 330 DS -C (21 in. /530 mm Daylighting System) Closed Ceiling Capture Zone 2 Dome DA Acrylic Dome (Meets UFC -ATFP) 2a Dome Options (Leave blank if not desired) B Security Bar PB Dome Edge Protection Band* SK Dome Security Kit SS Secondary Diffuser * Not for use with Curb Cab Flashing 3 Flashings F4 4 -inch F8 8 -inch Fi 1 11 -inch Self Mounted ` ❑ Self Mounted * Self Mounted ❑ FC Curb Cap (Curb by Others) % FSM Metal Roof Flashing 3a Flashing Options (Leave blank if not desired) T12* Roof Flashing Turret Extension 12 in. /300 mm FI Flashing Insulator T24* Roof Flashing Turret Extension 24 in. /600 mm CI Curb Insulator T36* Roof Flashing Turret Extension 36 in. /900 mm CCI Curb Cap Insulation T48* Roof Flashing Turret Extension 48 in. /1200 mm * Specify additional extension tubes in #4a Solatube International, Inc. 12210 Oak Ridge Way I Vista, CA 92081 -8341 1 T. 888.SOLATUBE I F: 760.597.4488 1 www.solatube.com I Part No. 900310 v3.4 Transfer Zone 4 Top Tube and Bottom Tube Required AK 16" Top Tube Angle Adapter and 16" Bottom Tube Angle Adapter 48 Extension Tubes Required Assuming 8 -inch Run measured from top of roof deck to bottom of ceiling plane along centerline of tubing (allow for 2" overlap) self flashing ** using 24" lengths. See 4b for optional 48" length. EO No Extension Tube — Max Run = 38" E6* Six Extension Tubes — Max Run = 170" i rov _"ce , r 6 E1* One Extension Tube — Max Run = 60" E7* Seven Extension Tubes — Max Run = 192" y E2* Two Extension Tubes — Max Run = 82" E8* Eight Extension Tubes — Max Run = 214 " E3* Three Extension Tubes — Max Run = 104" E4* Four Extension Tubes — Max Run = 126" E9* E10* Nine Extension Tubes — Max Run = 236" Ten Extension Tubes — Max Run = 258" E5* Five Extension Tubes — Max Run = 148" EXX* Total Run Length to be Determined by Bidding Contractor `Compatible with dome ring to be used as a top tube or extension tube **Total tube run will vary depending on flashing used. 4b Extension Tube Options (Leave blank if not desired) Al One 0 -90 Degree Extension Tube (Angle Adapter) E Wire Suspension Kit (50 ft.) A2 Two 0 -90 Degree Extension Tubes (Angle Adapter) EL Optional 48" Extension Tube (Substitute one 48" for two 24" above) Delivery Zone 5 Diffuser Lens r Yt Li OptiView® Diffuser L2 Prismatic Diffuser Diffuser /Ceiling Assembly includes transition box. 58 Effect Lens* (Leave blank if not desired) LN Natural Effect Lens *Effect lens is optional; does not come standard. 5b Options (Leave blank if not desired) D Daylight Dimmer TM 6 Measurement Standard M Metric I Imperial Accessories (Order separately) SW Low voltage switch (white) required to operate Solatube Daylight Dimmers. Note: Only one switch is required per ten (10) synchronously controlled dimmers. CA Two Conductor Low Voltage Cable (500 ft.) d 330 DS- C- DA- F8- AK- EI- L2 -LN -1 Q SolaMaster Series° 330 DS -C (21 in. /530 mm Daylighting System), Acrylic Dome, 8 -inch High Self Mounted Flashing, 16" Top Tube E M Angle Adapter and 16" Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, One Extension Tube, Prismatic Diffuser, Transition Box, and Natural Effect Lens. W For non - metric installations. Solatube International, Inc. 12210 Oak Ridge Way I Vista, CA 92081 -8341 IT. 888.SOLATUBE IF: 760.597.4488 1 www.solatube.com I Part No. 900310 v3.4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 6300 METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum- framed canopy, vestibule ceiling /interior skylight, including glazing system, fasteners, anchors, reinforcement, and flashings. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Framing per Structural Drawings. 2. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing 1.2 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association: 1. AA DAF -45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls. 2. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric). 3. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension. 5. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 6. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 7. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. Federal Specification Unit: 1. FS TT -C -494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. E. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168[- January 7, 2005] - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. Metal- Framed Skylights 086300 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand loads as indicated on Drawings and required by local jurisdiction. B. Deflection: Design and size components for maximum allowable deflection of glazing support member of 1/180 of span. C. Movement: Design system to limit stress on elastomeric sealants to 20 percent of tested tensile adhesion and maximum compression or elongation to 25 percent of neutral dimension. D. Expansion / Contraction: Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at static pressure differential of 12 psf. F. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing layout, spacing of members, framing member profiles, anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint locations and details, and identify shop and field welds by AWS Welding Symbols, A2.0. Include structural calculations sealed by professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation requirements. D. Test Reports: Indicate substantiating engineering data, test results of previous testing of similar assemblies meeting performance criteria, and other supporting data. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, safety precautions, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design submittals. Metal- Framed Skylights 086300 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements. 1. Materials Resources Certificates: a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products. b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site. 2. Indoor Air Quality Certificates: a. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive and sealant and related primer. b. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior paint and coating. C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products. 1. Provide cost data for the following products: a. Products with recycled material content. b. Regional products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Provide removable material to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of roofing system and structural framing. C. Coordinate the Work with continuity of vapor retarder specified in Section 07 2600. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish two year manufacturer warranty for materials and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS A. Manufacturers: Kawneer "1600 Series" Curtainwall Framing System. B. Fabricator: Mission Glass; Olympia, WA. C. Product Description: 1. Skylight Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system. 2. Glazing System: As engineered by fabricator and accepted by Architect. Metal- Framed Skylights 086300 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3. Glazing: Non - insulating glass, fully tempered, and frosted. 2.2 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS A. Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design compliance. B. Materials and Resources Characteristics: 1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content. 2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500 miles of Project site. C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics: 1. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2. Interior Anti - Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC -03. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063 -T6 members complying with ASTM B221. B. Glass: Conform with requirements specified in Section 08 8000. C. Contact Structural Sealant: Silicone, ASTM C920, Class 25, Type M, S, NS, cure; maximum hardness (Shore A) of 40, in accordance with ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength of 350 psi, in accordance with ASTM D412. D. Weather Seal Structural Sealant: Silicone, ASTM C920, Class 25, Type M, S, NS, cure; maximum hardness (Shore A) of 25, in accordance with ASTM D2240, minimum peel strength of [30] lb/inch, in accordance with ASTM C794. E. Perimeter Sealant: As submitted and accepted. F. Flashings: Same metal type, thickness, and finish as skylight frame, and secured with concealed fastening method. G. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc rich type. H. Protective Coating: Bituminous coating, FS TT -C -494, Type II. I. Fasteners: Stainless steel or non - corrosive type as recommended by skylight fabricator. J. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form skylight rafters as indicated on Drawings. B. Fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints rigid, with connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. D. Maintain continuous air and vapor retarder throughout assembly, with retarder plane aligned with inside pane of glazing continuing to heel bead of glazing sealant. E. Drain water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, and migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. F. Prepare components to receive anchorage devices. Ensure that fasteners and anchorage devices will be concealed upon completion of installation. Metal- Framed Skylights 086300-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Color to match aluminum framed storefront and entrance systems. C. Galvanizing for Nuts, Bolts and Washers: ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify structural curb is ready to receive skylight system. Coordinate installation of roofing and other adjacent Work to ensure weathertight construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set skylight structure plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or glazing panels. Anchor securely in place in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent Work. C. Apply minimum 1 coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals. D. Install sill flashings. E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to ensure continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install glazing in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. G. Mask adjacent surfaces, clean joint surfaces, and install backing and field - applied sealants in accordance with requirements of Section 07 9000 for weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb, Level, or Line: 1/8 inch per 10 feet, or 3/8 inch total in overall dimension. C. Alignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: Within 1/16 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field water test in compliance with AAMA 501 on each completed skylight. B. Perform one test on each skylight assembly after completion. C. When testing results in leakage, eliminate causes of leaks and retest until no leaks occur. 3.5 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by methods recommended by skylight manufacturer. Metal- Framed Skylights 086300 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 10 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. END OF SECTION Metal- Framed Skylights 086300 -6 �4 lul�2111�l�,l Building on the proven success of Kawneer's 1600 Wall System® which set the standards for curtain wall engineering, 1600 Wall System ®1 and 1600 Wall System ®2 provide reliability with versatile features. Both are stick - fabricated, pressure glazed curtain walls for low -to- mid -rise applications and are designed to be used independently or as an integrated system to provide visual impact for almost any type of building. • 1600 Wall System ®1 is an outside glazed, captured curtain wall • 1600 Wall System ®2 is a Structural Silicone Glazed (SSG) curtain wall Aesthetics Even the smallest details of 1600 System ®1 /1600 Wall System ®2 reflect the aesthetics and reliability that derive from Kawneer's precise engineering and experience. The joinery for both systems is accomplished with concealed fasteners to create unbroken lines and a monolithic appearance. When using optional, open back horizontal mullions, the fillers snap at the edge, producing an uninterrupted sight line. KCKAWNEER AN ALCOA COMPANY Performance Key aspects of 1600 System ®1 and 1600 Wall System ®2 are enhanced for higher performance. Pressure equalization has been designed into the system and all components are silicone compatible to provide superior longevity. For installations where severe weather conditions are prevalent, 1600 Wall System ®1 has been large missile hurricane impact and cycle tested. Proven through years of high performance, both systems are tested according to industry standards: Air Performance ASTM E -283 Static Water Penetration ASTM E -331 Dynamic Water Penetration AAMA 501.1 Structural Performance ASTM E -330 "U" Value, CRF AAMA 1503.1 Sound Transmission Rating ASTM E 90 -90 Seismic Performance AAMA 501.4 For the Finishing Touch Permadonic Anodized finishes are available in Class I and Class II in seven different colors. Hunter Henry Center at Mississippi State University, Painted Finishes, including fluoropolymer that meet or exceed Mississippi State, MS AAMA 2605, are offered in many standard choices and an unlimited Architect: Foil Wyatt Architects & Planners, P.A., Jackson, MS number of specially- designed colors. Glazing Contractor: American Glass Company, Inc., Columbus, MS Solvent -free powder coatings add the "green" element with high performance, durability and scratch resistance that meet the standards of AAMA 2604. 1600 Wall System®! 1600 Wall System ®2 1600 Wall System 61 /1600 Wall System 62: • for reliability • for performance • for versatility • for a smooth, monolithic appearance • for uninterrupted sight lines Kawneer Company, Inc. kawneer.com Technology Park / Atlanta 770 . 449 . 5555 555 Guthridge Court Norcross, GA 30092 ©jj'nnKawneer Company, Inc. 2007 LITHO IN USA Form No. 07 -2013 `` ` 1 KAWNEER AN ALCOA COMPANY NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 01. B. Section includes hardware for doors. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. 2. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 3. Division 26 - Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 4. Division 28 - Access Control: Card access system, or per Banking Equipment Supplier. 5. Division 28 - Intrusion Detection: Security system, or per Banking Equipment Supplier. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A156.1- Butts and Hinges. 2. ANSI A156.2 - Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 3. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. 4. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls - Closures. 5. ANSI A156.5 - Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. 6. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. 7. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions. 8. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches. 9. ANSI A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. 10. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes 11. ANSI A156.19 - Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. 12. ANSI A156.23 - Electromagnetic Locks. 13. ANSI A156.24 - Delayed Egress Locks. 14. ANSI A156 - Complete Set of 24 BHMA Standards (A156 Series) with Binder. B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association: 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Products. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 3. UL - Building Materials Directory. E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. Door Hardware 087100-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed), or other testing laboratory approved by applicable authorities. 1. Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, and templates. C. Samples: 1. When requested by Owner or Architect, submit one sample of typical lockset, illustrating style, color, and finish. 2. Approved samples may be incorporated into Work. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Section 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements. 1. Materials Resources Certificates: a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products. b. When within 500 miles of project site, certify source for local and regional materials and distance from Project site. C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products. 1. Provide cost data for the following products: a. Products with recycled material content. b. Local and regional products. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. D. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A156 series. 2. NFPA 80. 3. UL 305. B. Furnish hardware marked and listed in BHMA Directory of Certified Products. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with minimum three years documented experience. Door Hardware 087100-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and installation templates, when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items. 1. Provide templates or actual hardware as required to ensure proper preparation of doors and frames. C. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections. D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish seven -year manufacturer warranty for locksets, and ten -year for door closers. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance materials. B. Furnish special wrenches and tools applicable for each different and for each special hardware component. C. Furnish maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: As indicated in Hardware Groups included at the end of this Section. 1. Substitutions: Upon approval by Architect and General Contractor. B. Supplier: Benson Industries, Lakewood, WA (Contact: Mark Turnbull, AHC). 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General Hardware Requirements: Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable ANSI A156 standard for type of hardware required. Furnish each type of hardware with accessories as indicated in Schedule and as required for applications indicated and for complete, finished, operational doors. 1. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to door and frame manufacturers sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in Work. 2. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door and frame manufacturers; coordinated by hardware supplier or hardware manufacturer. 3. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required to secure hardware. a. Finish: Match hardware item being fastened. 4. Fire Ratings: Provide hardware with UL or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed) listings for type of application involved. Door Hardware 087100-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 5. Electrical Devices: Make provisions and coordinate requirements for electrical devices and connections for hardware. B. Hinges: ANSI A156.1, full mortise type complying with following general requirements unless otherwise scheduled. 1. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 2. Number: Furnish minimum three hinges to 90 inches high, four hinges to 120 inches high for each door leaf. a. Fire Rated Doors To 86 inches High: Minimum three hinges. 3. Size and Weight: 4 -1/2 inch heavy weight typical for 1 -3/4 inch doors. a. Doors Over 40 inches Wide: Extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing hinges. b. Doors 2 inch Thick: 5 inch extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing. C. Doors Over 48 inches Wide: 5 inch extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing. 4. Pins: Furnish nonferrous hinges with non - removable pins (NRP) at exterior and locked outswinging doors, non - rising pins at interior doors. 5. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug. C. Locksets: Furnish locksets compatible with specified cylinders. Typical 2 -3/4 inch backset. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. 1. Mortise Locksets: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bored (Cylindrical) Locksets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated. D. Latch Sets: Match locksets. Typical 2 -3/4 inch backset. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt; verify type of cutouts provided in metal frames. 1. Mortise Latch Sets: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bored (Cylindrical) Latch Sets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated. E. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3, Grade 1, rim type, with push pad cross bar, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt verify type of cutouts provided in metal frames. 1. Types: Suitable for doors requiring exit devices. F. Removable Mullion: Furnish where indicated in the Drawings or Schedule. G. Electric Strikes /Locks: Refer to Schedule H. Cylinders: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, 6 -pin type interchangeable core type cylinders. 1. Keying: Keyed as directed by Owner. 2. Include construction keying. 3. Keys: Nickel silver. Stamp keys with "DO NOT DUPLICATE ". 4. Supply keys in the following minimum quantities: a. 5 master keys. b. 3 grand master keys. C. 3 great grand master keys. d. 5 construction keys. e. 3 control keys and 10 extra cylinder cores. f. 3 change keys for each lock. Closers: ANSI A156.4 modern type with cover, surface mounted and overhead concealed closers; full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non - freezing hydraulic fluid; closers required for fire rated doors unless otherwise indicated. Door Hardware 087100-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Adjustability: Furnish controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds, and back checking. 2. Arms: Type to suit individual condition; parallel -arm closers at reverse bevel doors and where doors swing full 180 degrees. 3. Location: Mount closers on inside of exterior doors, room side of interior doors typical; mount on pull side of other doors. 4. Operating Pressure: Maximum operating pressure as follows. a. Interior Doors: Maximum 5 pounds. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. C. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire rating, maximum 15 pounds. Door Controls and Overhead Holders: Furnish with accessories as required for complete operational installation. 1. Low Energy Power Door Operators: ANSI A156.19 power mechanism which opens and closes door upon receipt of signal. K. Sliding Door Hardware: ANSI A156.14; furnish complete hardware sets for operational installation. L. Push /Pulls, Manual and Automatic Bolts, Protection Plates, Gaskets, Thresholds, and Trim: Furnish as indicated in Hardware Schedule, with accessories as required for complete operational door installations. 1. Push /Pulls: ANSI A156.6; as indicated on Schedule. 2. Manual and Automatic Bolts: ANSI A156.16 Grade 1 top and bottom flush bolts, with dust -proof floor strike, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Kickplate. Mop Plate: ANSI A156.6, metal; height indicated in Schedule by 1 inch less than door width; minimum 0.062 inch thick bronze. 4. Weatherstripping: Furnish continuous weatherstripping at top and sides of exterior doors. 5. Fire Rated Gaskets: Furnish continuous fire rated gaskets at top and sides of fire rated doors. 6. Thresholds: Maximum 1/2 inch height. 7. Wall Stops: ANSI A156.1, Grade 1, wall stops with no visible screws. 8. Floor Stops: ANSI A156.1 Grade 1 as indicated on Schedule; furnish with accessories as required for applications indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Lock Trim: Furnish levers with trim as indicated in Schedule. 1. Do not permit through bolts on solid wood core doors. B. Through Bolts: Do not permit through bolts and grommet nuts on door faces in occupied areas unless no alternative is possible. 1. Do not use through bolts on solid wood core doors. C. Key Cabinet: 1. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel or aluminum construction, piano hinged door with cylinder type lock master keyed to building system. 2. Cabinet Size: Size for Project keys plus sufficient room to allow for 10 percent growth. 3. Horizontal metal or plastic strips for key hook labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels. 4. Finish: manufacturer's standard finish, color as selected. 2.4 FINISHING A. Finishes: ANSI A156.18; furnish following finishes except where otherwise indicated in Schedule at end of section. 1. Typical Door Hardware Items: BHMA 626 or 652, dull chromium (verify with Architect). 2. Furnish manufacturer's standard finishes to match similar hardware types on same door, and maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use and BHMA category of finish. Door Hardware 087100-5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify electric power is available to power operated devices and is of correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. B. Mounting Heights From Finished Floor to Center Line of Hardware Item: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and applicable codes where not otherwise indicated. 1. Locksets: 38 inch. 2. Push /Pulls: 42 inch. 3. Dead Locks: 48 inch. 4. Exit Devices: 42 inch or 38 inch. Confirm coordination of horizontal mullions with the Architect. 5. Top Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10 inches from head of frame to center line of hinge. 6. Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12 -1/2 inches from floor to center line of hinge. 7. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each other. 8. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4 inch. to 5/16 inch from stop side of door. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant inspect installation and certify hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish. 3.6 SCHEDULES: The following hardware sets are intended to establish type and standard of quality when used together with requirements of this Section. Examine Drawings, Door Schedule and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for door openings. H1 Door 100A WD x AL 8 Butts BO BB5006 -45ON 1 Exit Rim Device PR 2108 x V4908A x 5300 1 Exit Rim Device PR 2101 x 5300 1 ea Mortise Cylinder SC 26 -091 2 ea Cylinder SC 20 -057 1 Auto Operator RE 8100 Push FWH 2 ea Actuator MS 59 -HSS (exterior bollard actuator Wikk BPS SM PRP36 DB) Door Hardware 087100-6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1 Actuator MS 59 -HSS -V 1 Switch AC 1310 -2 1 Concealed Closer NO 790OBFI 2 ea Kickplate TR KO 050 10 X 34 2 ea Floor Stop TR 1201 2 ea Threshold PE 2727A 1 Weatherstrip PE 2891AS @ Head 2 ea Weatherstrip PE 290AS @ Jambs 2 ea Door Bottom /Sweep PE 1810OCNB 1 Removable Mullion PR KR822 2 ea Meeting Stile Seal /Weatherstrip PE 319CN 1 Electric Dogging AC RE 1540 - 2100- 24VDC -AE 1 Electrical Power Transfer VD EPT 10 1 Power Supply AC 1426 -04 -AO Note: Door shall be unlocked and locked at start and close of business. Auto Operator shall be activated by push - pad during business hours. When door is locked, the operator shall be disabled so as not to wear out gears. In an emergency lockdown, door shall be locked by remote switch (location by security consultant). Verify door leaf to have Auto - Operator. Provide signage to read as: "Door shall remain unlocked during business hours ". H2 Door 100B AL x AL 8 Butts BO BB5004 -45ON 1 Auto Operator RE 8100 Push FWH 1 Actuator MS 59 -HSS 2 ea Push Plates TR 1001 -3 2 ea Pull Plates TR 1017 -3 1 Concealed Closer NO 7900 BFI 2 ea Kickplate TR KO 050 10 X 34 Note: Verify door leaf to have Auto - Operator H3 Door 117B AL x AL 1 Cylinder SC 20 -061 1 Overhead Rain Drip PE 346C All other hardware by Aluminum Entrance and Storefront Supplier. Note: Access control for doors 106 and 110 provided by security consultant H4 Door 118, 120 AL x AL 1 Cylinder SC 20 -061 1 Overhead Rain Drip PE 346C Add to Door 120: 1 Auto Operator RE 8100 Push FWH 2 ea Actuator MS 59 -HSS (exterior bollard actuator Wikk BPS SM PRP36 DB) 1 Actuator MS 59 -HSS -V 1 Switch AC 1310 -2 All other hardware by Aluminum Entrance and Storefront Supplier. Note: Door 120 to be equipped with Auto - Operator that shall be activated by push -pad during business hours. When door is locked, the operator shall be disabled so as not to wear out gears. Door Hardware 087100-7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 H5 Door 106, 110, 111 WD x WD 119, 121 WD x WD 3 Butts BO BB5000 -450 1 Storeroom Lock SC ND80R RHO 1 Wall Stop (106, 111) TR 1270CX 1 Floor Stop (110) TR to suit conditions 3 Silencers TR 1229A Note: Access control for doors 106 and 110 provided by security consultant H6 Door 107 WD x WD 3 Butts BO BB5000 -450 1 Privacy Lock SC ND40S RHO 1 Wall Stop TR 1270CX 3 Silencers TR 1229A H7 Door 108 STL x STL (VAULT) All hardware by Vault manufacturer Note: Access control for doors 106 and 110 provided by security consultant H8 Door 112, 114, 115, 119, 121 WD x WD 3 Butts BO BB5000 -450 1 Privacy Lock SC ND40S RHO 1 Mop plate TR KM 050 6 X 35 1 Wall Stop TR 1270CX 3 Silencers TR 1229A END OF SECTION Door Hardware 087100-8 ................. ............................... . wii'siii'siiiii — .. ................... ' ........................ . . ; ..._ ..................... .............................. :.�� •: "•." "iiiiiiii ?i'si >i� -s< ?a `.' ................ ............. .............................. . Standard Features EZ Connect ** • PT200 & PT1000 provide the means of transferring electrical power from the frame to the door in a secure and discreet manner • PTCSE provides the means of transferring data from the frame to the door in a secure and discreet manner • Unit mortises into the edges of the door and frame and is completely concealed when the door is in the closed position • All metal construction including backboxes - NO PLASTIC PARTS • Ideal for high abuse or heavy traffic situations • UL/ULC Listed for use on fire doors • Packaged individually with fasteners for wood, steel or aluminum doors an frames • Not for use with swing -clear hinges, pocket pivots, butt hinges larger than i 1 '/z "offset pivots or center hung doors • PT1000 available with ABH Easy Connect option (Suffix EZ) -seepk • Standard Finishes: • US28 - Brushed Aluminum • S5 - Powder Coated Dark Bronze to match US10B Finish • Approximate shipping weight: 3 lbs. PT200 or PT1000 can be used for: • Door thickness - 1 3/4' • Butt hinges up to 5 "- allowing for 180° door swing • 5 1/2" butt hinges - allowing for 1301 door swing • 6" butt hinges - allowing for 1100 door swing • Up to 3/4' offset pivots - allowing for 180° door swing *Brand names aretrademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. :01f Proudly Innovation, Quality, Customer Service... ,,. .,Makes Life Simple LISTED Tel (630) 875 -9900 • Fax (800) 932 -9224 www.abhmfg.com • abhinfo @abhmfg.com Made In USA Medium duty overhead holder and stop for interior doors, single or double acting U �2D au /e 3? STANDARD FEATURES • For All Stainless Steel Components - Prefix N • Field adaptable functions • Non- handed /reversible • Single point hold -open in increments of 5° from 85° to 110° • Automatic hold -open and release by push and pull on door • Friction holder can be adjusted easily on site at any position and held under adjustable pressure • Maximum opening 110 °, minimum door thickness 1 3/8" • Wood and machine screws included • Available in all BHMA plated and sprayed finishes Contact ABH for special templating or other door opening Average weightlunit 1 3/4 lbs. www.abhmfg.com E -mail: abhinfo @abhmfg.com Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. 1222 Ardmore Ave., Itasca, IL 60143 02005 ABHMfg.,inc. 630.875.9900; FAX 800.9FAXABH (932.9224) Printed in USA 02/05 4000 SERIES CONCEALED WHEN ORDERING, please list. Model number Door closer number or other hardware Mounting means of the door and butt size Hold -open or dead -stop degree Door opening and thickness Finish SPECIFICATIONS. Material. Channel - steel /stainless steel 314" deep, 314" wide and .050 thick, arm - stainless steel /steel /brass 314" wide and 3116" thick; jamb bracket 314" wide, 3116" thick and 2 718" long; hold -open mechanism with sliding block will engage or release door by push or pull. Hold -open mechanism can be disengaged to function as stop only. A C S I 1- 8 0 0- 7 5 3 - 5 5 5 8 ACSI Series 1310 Mortise Keyswitches are designed to control electric locks, electric strikes, electric exit devices, and a variety of other control applications. ACSI 1310 keyswitches allow keying the electrically controlled openings to facility master key systems. DPDT contacts. Model Description 1310 -1 Keyswitch, single gang, wall mount A, 1310 -2 Keyswitch, single gang, 2 indicators (Red and Green), `N wall mount 1310 -3 Keyswitch, double gang, adjustable time delay (0 -30 sec.), wall mount 1310 -3 -2 Keyswitch, double gang, adjustable time delay (0 -30 sec.), 2 indicators (Red and Green), wall mount 1310 -4 Keyswitch, narrow style, 1 -314" frame mount 1310 -4 -2 Keyswitch, narrow style, 2 indicators (Red and Green), frame mount 1310 -5 Keyswitch, double gang, audible alarm, wall mount 1310 -5 -2 Keyswitch, double gang, audible alarm, 2 indicators (Red and Green), wall mount ACSI Series 1320 Pushbutton Switches provide a variety of functions for commercial and industrial door control applications. DPDT contacts. Model Description 1320 -1 Pushbutton, single gang, wall mount 1320 -2 Pushbutton, single gang, 1 indicator (Red or Green), wall mount 1320 -3 Pushbutton, single gang, 2 indicators (Red and Green), wall mount 1320 -4 Pushbutton, double gang, adjustable time delay (0 -30 sec.), 1 indicator (Red or Green), wall mount 1320 -5 Pushbutton, single gang, mushroom switch, wall mount" 1320 -5 -2 Pushbutton, single gang, mushroom switch, 2 indicators (Red and Green), wall mount*" 1320 -6 Pushbutton, narrow style, 1 -314" frame mount 1320 -6 -2 Pushbutton, narrow style, 2 indicators (Red and Green), 1 -314" frame mount *When ordering Part No. 1310 or 1320, specify momentary or maintained action. — Contacts available in SPDT form only. ACSI 1406 and 1426 Power Supplies are designed to operate exit devices equipped with ACSI Series 1550 Electric Latch Retraction. Features • UL Listed • Provides power and control electronics for up to two ACSI 1550 Electric Latch Retraction Exit Devices • Select from independent control of single exit devices from separate inputs (one or two single doors) or sequential operation of two exit devices from a single input (pair of doors) • Automatic door operator interface • Fire alarm interface • Field adjustable latch retraction time delay • 24VDC, 12VDC constant voltage outputs (250 mA each) Day/Night Mode -ACSI 1426 Power Supply .,_ Provides a separate input for retracting one exit device or two exit devices sequentially without activating the automatic door operator. While the latches are held retracted, the auto - operator can be activated independently from a different input. Note: Available with battery back -up, see 1460 Power Supply A C S 1 1- 8 0 0- 7 5 3 - 5 5 5 8 ACS[ 1406 Application CARD READER 115Y, CONTROLLER SERIES INPUT CONTROLLER 14DS-0"0 SERIES 115Y, POWER SUPPLY WIRES IN CONDUIT POWER (IF FRAMES ARE FILLID) CARD READER SUPPLY "1100 SERIES 1550 ELECTRIC 302 -03-03 MORTAR GUARD LATCH RETRACTION (IF FRAMES ARE FILLED) EXIT DEVICE ACSI 1426 Application with Day/Night Feature CARD READER CONTROLLER SERIES 115Y, 1428-04.AO INPIR POWER SUPPLY WIRES IN CONDUIT (IF FRAMES ARE FILLED) SERIES 1300 CARD READER -t 1 p w- DAYINIGHT CONTROL HANDICAP WALL ACTIVAT30N SWITCH I (2 TYPICAL) SERIE51100 302-03 -03 MORTAR GUARD SERIES 1550 ELECTRIC LATCH ELECTRIC (IF FRAMES ARE FILLED) RETRACTION EXIT DEVICE HINGE A C S 1 1- 8 0 0- 7 5 3 - 5 5 5 8 Input 1406, 1426, 1490 - 120VAC, 0.75A, 6011z 1410, 1420, 1440, 1460, 1400 -6100 - 120VAC, 1A, 5016011z - 240VAC, 0.6A, 5016011z Output 1406, 1426 - Main Output: 24VDC, 1.5A Unfiltered /Unregulated - Auxiliary 24V Output: 24VDC, 0.25A Unfiltered /Unregulated - Auxiliary 12V Output: 12VDC, 0.25A Unfiltered /Unregulated 1490 - 24VDC, 0.85A Unfiltered /Unregulated 1410, 1420, 1440, 1400 -6100 - 24VDC, 2A Filtered /Regulated 1460 - 24VDC, 4 AMP -Hour battery back -up Enclosure Dimensions/Type 1406, 1410, 1420, 1426, 1440, 1460, 1400 -6100 - 10 "x10 "x4 ", NEMA Type 1 Screw Cover Junction Box 1490 - 8 "x1 0 "x4 ", NEMA Type 1 Screw Cover Junction Box Enclosure Weight 1410 - 9 Ibs (w /all four plug -in boards installed onto mother board) 1406,1426 - 12 Ibs 1420, 1440, 1490, 1400 -6100 - 8 Ibs 1460 - 16 Ibs (wlbatteries) 10666 Gateway Blvd. ARCHITECTURAL St. Louis, Missouri 63132 CONTROL SYSTEMS, 1 -800- 753 -5558 - 314- 432 -5588 K INCORPORATED FAX: 314- 432 -2090 www.acsi- inc.com A C S 1 1- 8 0 0- 7 5 3 - 5 5 5 8 You supply the exit device and ACSI supplies high quality UL Listed modifications to a wide range of manufacturers exit devices. With over 25 years of electric locking experience, ACSI offers proven design, fast factory delivery and competitive pricing. ACSI engineers and technicians are available to provide system design, wiring diagrams and a variety of technical services. ACSI Series 1550 Latch Retraction Exit Device modifications provide a remote means of unlocking exit devices. • UL Listed for both Panic and Fire Exit Hardware • Continuous duty solenoids retract the latch bolt for momentary or maintained periods of time • Available in Mortise Exits, Rim Exits, Concealed and Surface Vertical Rod Exit Devices • Standard ACSI Series 1550 System includes: 1) ACSI Series 1550 Exit Device Modification 2) ACSI Series 1406 or 1426 Latch Retraction Power supply 3) ACSI Series 1100 Electric Hinge (no special unsightly power transfer device required) • Options include Authorized Egress Switch, Latch Bolt Monitoring, Signal Switch and Pneumatic Control Note: Electrified Vertical Rod Exit Devices are UL Listed to operate properly on doors not exceeding 48 inches wide and 96 inches high. ACSI Series 1510/1520 Modifications provide a remote means of locking or unlocking of Mortise Exit Devices. • Fail Safe (Power to Lock) Control • Fail Secure (Power to Unlock) Control • Continuous Duty Solenoids • Options include Authorized Egress Switch and Monitoring • No special power supply required Series 1540 Typical Installation 11M INPUT Ae0 ROWER POY/FR SUPPLY SUPMY 1r 7 wwES IR BERIEB 190U LQYOUIT pF 1AN DOOR CONTRM AREF M) SEWTS 98141d] 13i0 MORTM ELEC'IRIL 6EA�61100 DOOGSYO ELECTRIC GUARO OF FRA•ES EaR HINGE OEYIGE RAE FR1PO) ACSI Series 1560/1570 Modifications provide a remote means of locking or unlocking of outside lever handle trim controls. • Fail Safe (Power to Lock) Control • Fail Secure (Power to Unlock) Control • Continuous Duty Solenoids Note: Consult Factory for Vertical Rod Devices. ACSI Series 1540 Electric Dogging provides continuous latch retraction and dogging simultaneously. When the ACSI 1540 is energized, first time mechanical activation of the push bar will continuously hold the push bar and the latch retracted. When power is removed or interrupted from the 1540 exit device, the latch bolt will extend and the push bar is released. • UL Listed for Fire Exit Hardware • Provides quiet egress when electrically dogged - Ideal for theatres, libraries, churches and auditoriums • 24VDC operation, no special power supply required • Available in Mortise Exit, Rim Exit, Concealed and Surface Vertical Rod Exit Devices Note: Consult factory for Mortise Exit applications. ACSI recommends a 1440 power supply. 1440 options can include an external 24 hour, 7 day or 365 day timer. Series 1550 Typical Installation 11rv, INPUT 1cUB POY/FR SUPPLY waves w mrlGUrr BERIEB 1900 DOOR COMRDL 1 (IF fAAA�S ARE FRi ®) SERIES I 5560 ELECTWG LATON — RETRAGTIOR B ms 1100 ELECTRIC MORTAR Gun1m OF ES ERIT BINGE ARE FAlEO] .E KE E EE3., BB5000 STEEL with steel pin ANSI A8112 BB5001 BRASS with stainless steel pin ANSI A2112 BB5002 STAINLESS STEEL with stainless steel pin ANSI A5112 • TEMPLATE • BALI. BEARING • FIVE KNUCKLE • NON - RISING REMOVABLE PIN • BUTTON TIP PIN & PLUG LB8000 STEEL Full Mortise Hin es STANDARD WEIGHT - BALL BEARING For medium weight doors 1 average frequency 0 0 0 0 0 SIZE OPEN HEIGHT & WIDTH GAUGE SCREW SIZE NUMBER OF HOLES QUANTITY MACHINE I WOOD BOX I CASE 3.5 X 3 ( 353) .123 10 -24 x 112 10 x 1 6 3 ea. 48 ea. 3.5 X 3.5 ( 350) .123 10 -24 x 112 10 x 1 6 3 ea. 48 ea. 4 X 4 ( 400) .130 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 4.5 X 4 ( 454) .134 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 4.5 X 4.5 450) .134 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 5 X 4 ( 504) .146 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 5 X 4.5 ( 545) .146 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 5 500 .146 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 24 ea. with steel pin ANSI A8112 LB8001 BRASS with stainless steel pin ANSI A2112 LB8002 STAINLESS STEEL with stainless steel pin ANSI A5112 • TEMPLATE • LUBE BEARING • THREE KNUCKLE • NON - RISING REMOVABLE PIN • FLUSH TIP PIN & PLUG STANDARD WEIGHT - LUBE BEARING For medium weight doors / average frequency 0 0 o �o 0 0 0 0 SIZE OPEN HEIGHT & WIDTH GAUGE SCREW SIZE 11 NUMBERI I OF HOLES QUANTITY MACHINE I WOOD I BOX I CASE 4 X 4 400 .130 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 4.5 X 4 454 .134 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 4.5 X 4.5 450 .134 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 5 X 4 504 .146 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 48 ea. 5 X 4.5 545 .146 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 5 ( 500) .146 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 24 ea. "Over 125 Years of Oualky" AH -7 Ak- omer over 125 years of auar4 .e BB5004 STEEL with steel pin ANSIA8111 BB5005 BRASS with stainless steel pin ANSI A2111 BB5006 STAINLESS STEEL with stainless steel pin ANSI A5111 • TEMPLATE • FOUR BALL BEARINGS • FIVE KNUCKLE • NON - RISING REMOVABLE PIN • BUTTON TIP PIN & PLUG LB8004 STEEL Full Mortise Hinges HEAVY WEIGHT — BALL BEARING For heavy weight doors / high frequency 0 o �o 0 0 SIZE OPEN HEIGHT & WIDTH GAUGE SCREW SIZE NUMBER I OF HOLES'l QUANTITY MACHINE I WOOD BOX I CASE 4.5 X4 ( 454) .180 12 -24 x 112 12x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 4.5 X 4.5 450) .180 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 4 504 .190 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 4.5 ( 545) .190 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 5 ( 500) .190 12 -24 x 112 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 24 ea. 6 X 4.5 ( 645) .203 1/4 -20 x 1/2 14 x 1 1/2 10 3 ea. 18 ea. 6 X 5 ( 605) .203 1/4 -20 x 112 14 x 1 1/2 10 3 ea. 18 ea. 6 X 6 600 .203 1/4 -20 x 112 14 x 1 1/2 10 3 ea. 18 ea. with steel pin ANSIA8111 LB8005 BRASS with stainless steel pin ANSIA2111 LB8006 STAINLESS STEEL with stainless steel pin ANSIA5111 • TEMPLATE • LUBE BEARING • THREE KNUCKLE • NON - RISING REMOVABLE PIN • FLUSH TIP PIN & PLUG HEAVY WEIGHT — LUBE BEARING For heavy weight doors / high frequency 0 �Oo 0 0 0 0 SIZE OPEN HEIGHT & WIDTH GAUGE SCREW SIZE I NUMBER OF HOLES QUANTITY MACHINE I WOOD BOX I CASE 4.5 X 4 ( 454) .180 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 4.5 X 4.5 ( 450) .180 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 4 ( 504) .190 1224 x 1/2 12 x 1 114 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 4.5 545) .190 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 36 ea. 5 X 5 ( 500) .190 12 -24 x 1/2 12 x 1 1/4 8 3 ea. 24 ea. 6 X 4.5 ( 645) .203 1/4-20 x 1/2 14 x 1 112 10 3 ea. 18 ea. 6 X 5 ( 605) .203 1/4-20 x 1/2 14 x 1 1/2 10 3 ea. 18 ea. 6 X 6 ( 600) .203 1/4 -20 x 112 14 x 1 1/2 10 3 ea. 18 ea. AH -1 0 "Over 125 Years of Quality" CONCEALED (IN 1314" TUBE) MOUNTING ► Standard 2030 series closer shipped with standard arm, standard track, mounting /finish plate, and wood and machine screw pack. See 2030 Series page 13 & 14 for options. ► Sized cylinders for interior doors to 4'6" and exterior doors to 3'6 ". ► Handed for right or left swinging doors. ► Aluminum frame requires minimum 13/4" (44 mm) x 4" (102 mm) tube. ► Closers to meet AOA requirements. See 2030 Series page 15. ► Standard or optional custom powder coat finish. ► Optional plated finish on arm, fasteners and finish plate. LCN 2030 SERIES The concealed 2030 Series coo PACER ® is a heavy duty closer designed to fit in a narrow, L.6. minimum 1314" aluminum transom. The single lever arm and roller assembly provide smooth, quiet door control and the choice of finishes and track functions meet virtually all architectural requirements. The 2030 Series is UL & cUL listed for self - closing doors, without hold -open. Tested and certified under ANSI Standard A 156.4, grade 1. CONCEALED MOUNTING FINISH CYLINDER ARM 'ARM FUNCTION o� 160 a o v s O • O • • 16161&10 • O 180° O 110° * Available Closer available with less than 5 0 lbs. opening force on 36" door. p Notavailable "Maximum opening /hold -open point with standard template. See individual closer series for degrees of opening per installation. LCN CLOSERS 121 LC N o W. RAILADAQ AVE. P.O 11 P.D. BOX ion PRINCETON, Il, USA 61356 -0100 PHONE 800- 526 -2400 FAX 600 -248 -1460 www.icn.ingersollrand.com 9/07 LCN 2030 SERIES coo MOUNTING Q For interior or exterior doors. Single acting cylinder in head frame 0 Concealed arm and track in door �top rail. MAXIMUM OPENING o Butt hinge template allows 180 °, trim permitting. Limited to 110° when optional bumper is installed. Adjustable hold -open points from 850 to 1100, with hold -open track. Consult factory if door will be held open at 180° Offset pivot template allows 115 °, trim permitting. Limited to 95° when optional bumper is installed. Hold -open point 85° with hold -open track. Center pivot template allows 120 °, trim permitting. Limited to 100° when optional bumper is installed. Adjustable hold -open points from 85° to 100 °, with hold -open track. LCN® ► Butt Hinges should not exceed 5" (127 mm) in width. ► Auxiliary Stop is recommended where a door cannot swing 180 °. Optional track bumper assembly assists backcheck in cushioning the opening swing of the door. It is not intended to replace an auxiliary stop. ► Top Rail 13/8" (35 mm) mortise required. With Fire Shield, 113/32" (36 mm) mortise required. 5/16" (8 mm) cutout required at top of the door, stop face only. ► Door Thickness 13/4" (44 mm) minimum. ► Hollow Metal Frame Consult factory for installation instructions. ► Wood Frame installation simplified by W000 MOUNTING CLIP SET 2030 -416 for center pivoted or 2030 -417 for offset pivoted and butt hung installations. Consult factory for preparation details. LCN CLOSERS PHONE 800- 526 -2400 121 W. RAILROAD AVE. FAX BOO- 248.146D 1 I'� L P.O. BOX 103 www.Icn.ingersollrand.com PRINCETON, IL, USA 61356 -0100 9/07 CYLINDERS CYLINDER, 2030 -3071 Standard, handed, cast iron cylinder assembly with mounting plate. For various applications see "Table of Sizes" on 2030 Series page 15 ARM STANDARD ARM, 2030 -3077T Handed arm. Track roller not included with arm. TRACKS STANDARD TRACK, 2030 -3038 Standard, non hold -open, non - handed track. Will accept hold -open clip and /or bumper assembly. STANDARD TRACK with BUMPER, 2030 -3038B Optional, non hold -open, non - handed track with bumper. Will accept hold -open clip. HOLD -OPEN TRACK, 2030 -3038H Optional, non - handed hold -open track. Will accept bumper assembly. HOLD -OPEN TRACK with BUMPER, 2030- 3038HB Optional, non - handed hold -open track with bumper. LCM 2030 SERIES 303B 3038B 3038H 3038HB ... ItY 0 coo W L, L2 Q LCN CLOSERS PHONE 800- 526 -2400 121 W. RAILROAD AVE. FAX 000 -248 -1460 P.D. BOX 100 www.lcn.ingersollrand.com UK 13 PRINCE MN, USA 61356 -0100 9/07 LCN 2030 SERIES COO INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES j� FIRE SHIELD, 2030 -420 y 22 gauge steel liner mounts in the track mortise of the door's coo top rail for 20 minute labeled wood doors. C-0 y WOOD MOUNTING CLIP SET 2030 -416 Simplifies mounting center pivoted 2030 closer in wood frame. Includes latch stile clip, hinge stile clip, and cover. For use with Ives Series center pivots. Consult factory for special template. WOOD MOUNTING CLIP SET, 2030 -417 Simplifies mounting offset pivoted or butt hung 2030 closer in wood frame. Includes two clips. For use with offset pivots. TRACK BUMPER, 2030 -169 Mounts in track to assist backcheck. Limits maximum opening. Consists of bumper, bumper post, and mounting screw. NOTE: Track bumper does not replace auxiliary stop. HOLD -OPEN CLIP, 2030 -3054 Mounts in track to provide hold -open function. Hold -open point controlled by clip location. TRACK ROLLER, 2030 -3034 Quiet, low friction roller assembly. Shoulder dimension "X" =1/16" (2mm). LCN® 14 LCN CLOSERS PHONE 806- 526-2400 121 W. RAILROAD AVE. FAX 800- 248 -1460 P.O. BOX 100 www.len.ingersollrand.com PRINCETON, IL, USA 61356 -0100 9/07 TABLE OF SIZES Select closer based on width of door. 2030 Series cylinders available in size 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Closing power of all 2030 Series closers may he increased 35 %. Specify next higher size closer where strong drafts exist. Indicates recommended range of door width for closer size. EXTERIOR (and VESTIBULE) DOOR WIDTH size 3 size 4 size 5 2033 2034 .... ......... ___ 2035 ------------ - - - - -- Minimum Door Width INTERIOR DOOR WIDTH Minimum Door Width size 4 I size 5 REDUCED OPENING FORCE 2030 CLOSERS CAUTION I Any manual door closer, including those certified by BHMA to conform to ANSI Standard A156.4, that is selected, installed and adjusted based on ADA or other reduced opening force requirements may not provide sufficient power to reliably close and latch a door. Refer to POWER OPERATORS section for information on systems that meet reduced opening force requirements without affecting closing power. ® DOOR WIDTH _ 36" �2" 48" B5�Ibs 2033 2033 2034 .,: 2032...!.. : 2032 * Maximum opening force LCN 2030 SERIES HOW -TO -ORDER 2030 SERIES CLOSERS 1. SELECT CYLINDER SIZE ❑ 2031(ADA) ❑ 2032 ❑ 2033 ❑ 2034 ❑ 2035 2. SPECIFY HAND ❑ RH ❑ LH 3, SPECIFY FINISH ❑ Standard Powder Coat Aluminum, Dark Bronze, Tan, Statuary, Light Bronze, Black, Brass. CLOSER OPTIONS TRACK ❑ Standard with Bumper (BUMPER) ❑ Hold -open (H) ❑ Hold -open with Bumper (HBUMPER) FINISHES ❑ Custom Powder Coat (RAL) ❑ Plated Finish, US SCREW PACK ❑ TORX Machine Screw (TORX) INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES ❑ Fire Shield, 2030 -420 ❑ Wood Clip Set, 2030 -416 ❑ Wood Clip Set, 2030 -417 SPECIAL TEMPLATE ❑ ST- 0 Q LAM LJ D LCN CLOSERS PHONE 8D0. 526 -2400 121 W. RAILROAD AVE, FAX 800 -248 -146D P.O. BOX 100 www,lcn.ingersollrand.com LCN. 5 PRINCETON, IL, USA 61355 -0100 9/07 Sedco 59 Series The 59 Series push plate switches are designed to provide reliable activation of any automatic door. The 59 Series features 4" square face plates in either stainless or a blue powder -coated aluminum faceplate, with a 4-1/2" backplate to eliminate wail damage, and is designed to fit single -gang, 2 -gang, or surface mount boxes with no adapters necessary. All 59 Series switches ship standard with tamper - resistant screws. Sedco 59R4 Series The 59R4 Series push plate switches offer the benefits and options of the 59 Series, but come with a round 4" push plate and round 4-1/2 "backplate. All faceplate styles available with the 59 Series are available on the 59R4. Sedco 59R6 Series The 59136 Series push plate switches offer the benefits and options of the 59 Series, but come with a round 5 -1/2" push plate and round 6" backplate. All faceplate styles available with the 59 Series are available on the 59116. FEATURES & BENEFITS • 4" X 4" all active faceplate • 4-1/2" X 4-1/2" formed stainless steel backplate • Includes tamper - resistant screws • Includes rubber bellows for increased weather protection • Fits single or 2 -gang electrical boxes or MS Sedco surface box AVAILABLE OPTIONS • Architectural finishes (US3, US4, US1O, US1013, US32) • Customized faceplates (including logos and /or text) Sedco 59J Series The 59J Series push plate switches offer the benefits and options of the 59 Series, but are designed for mounting into a jamb or optional surface box. Sedco 59V Series The 59V Series push plate switches offer the benefits and options of the 59 Series, and includes two jamb -style faceplates with a 4 -1/2" stainless backplate. The 59V Series is designed to be installed in a vestibule and has the ability to activate two automatic doors independently. *NOTE: Faceplate legends shown on this row are available for the 59R4, 59R6 and 591 Series Switches. 59 -P 59 -H 59-HSS 59 -W 59 -WSS 59 -PLAIN Custom — Available in All Sizes & Styles t 'g`I i' t^3 8701 Castle Park Drive NI Indianapolis, IN 46256 ■ Phone: 317 -842 -2545 ■ Fax: 317 - 849 -3387 K www.mssedoo.com 5000 Series Door Closers AWAABLUf OVERVIEW Features • Non - handed • Staked valves • Standard, separate and independent, latch, sweep and backcheck intensity valves • Cast aluminum body • Rack- and - pinion design • 1- 1 /4 "(32mm) diameter piston 5/8"(1 6mm) diameter pinion journals • 2 -1 /8" (54mm) projection (standard covers) • All standard arm applications (with slim, full or metal covers) allow doors to swing 180 degrees, conditions permitting • 8300/8301 - shipped with slim -line plastic cover • 8500/8501 - shipped with full plastic cover • Full size template • 10 -year limited warranty Optional Features • Metal, architectural plastic or architectural metal covers (8500 or 8501 only) • Lead lined metal cover - suffix MLL • Delayed action • Heavy -duty arms; Regular Rigid, Parallel Rigid, CloserPlus®, CloserPlus Sprine, UnitrolO • Slide Tracks: push or pull side mounting Compliance Standards • ANSIJBHMA A156.4, Grade 1 certified BHMA • UL listed • UL10C compliant for positive pressure • ADA compliant (8301 and 8501) l Features 1 8300 1 8500 I 8301 8501 i � f I i Sized springs 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 with 50% additional adjustment X X .. - - - - -- - - - - - -- .- ._ .. ..... .... .... .. ... _ ... .... ..... ..._.- -- -- ----- - - - -- - - -- - -- ........... — _.... ... .. ... .... -= - - - - -- - -... _ _ _ ------------ - - -- --- f Adjustable spring sizes 1 through 6 I X X Bi -pack packaging standard (regular arm and top jamb mounting) X X i Tri -Style® packaging standard (regular arm, top jamb and parallel arm mounting) X X a TAU OF CONTENTS Overview................................................................................ ..............................2 Howto Order .............................................................................. ..............................4 FactPnPrclFinishPs .......................................................................... ..............................5 Features................................................................................... ..............................6 OptionalFeatures .......................................................................... ............................6 -7 SuggestedSpecifications .................................................................... ..............................8 Applications............................................................................... ...........................9 -12 TechnicalDetails ........................................................................... ..........................13 -25 Accessories................................................................................ ..........................26 -38 PartsList ................................................................................... ..........................38 -50 -r. soon z www.nortondoorcontrols.com 3/08 ASSAABLOY, the global leader indoor opening solutions 8000 Series Door Closers - ASSAABLOv `' OVER1liEW `.. Cutaway View STANDARDS `.. +` aSeries 8301 and 8501 door closers are designed to comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.) and ANSIJBHMA standard A117.1. All series 8300/8500/830118501 are ANSIJBHMA All 56.4, Grade 1 certified, lW © All Norton series 8300185001830118501 closers with non -hold open arms are listed by Underwriters Laboratories for labeled fire doors. This includes compliance to UL10C and UBC -72 (1997) for 3 -hour assemblies. The product is manufactured in an ISO 9001 facility. These closers are listed by the New York City Materials and Equipment Acceptance Division. ASSAABLOY, the global leader in door opening solutions Norton FEATURES - Aluminum Alloy Housing Closer bodies are constructed of a special aluminum alloy, carefully selected to accommodate interactive steel components and operating conditions. Rack & Pinion Operation Provides a smooth constant control of the door through its full opening and closing cycle. 180° door swing can be achieved when door, frame, hardware and arm function do not interfere. Non - handed With few exceptions all series 830018500 and series 8301/8501 door closers are non - handed and can be installed on either right- or left-hand swing doors. Pinion shaft extends vertically through the closer body in both directions. Some options, as noted on pages 6 -7, will require that the hand of the closer be specified. Sweep Speed Control Valve Allows adjustment of door speed from the door's full open position down to approximately 10° from the closed position. Latch Speed Control Valve Allows adjustment of door speed from approximately 10° down to the door's fully closed position. ! �. "c Optional Metal Cover This steel cover is non- handed for regular and parallel arm applications, but is handed for top jamb applications, Cover is available in sprayed or plated finishes. �R 800; 6 Tri -Style® 830118501 comes with screws, brackets and soffit plates to allow for regular, top jamb, and parallel arm installations. Adjustable Backcheck Valve Provides control of the door in the opening cycle, beginning at approximately 75° of door opening. It cushions the door opening when the door is forcibly opened beyond its pre- adjusted limits. Standard Molded Covers Molded of high - impact U.L. listed material. These covers are non - handed for all applications. Warranty Limited ten -year warranty for defects and life of the building on the aluminum housing. Closer Fluid NorGlide® closer fluid is a specially formulated multi - viscosity hydraulic fluid that contains lubricity and anti - oxidation agents that provide optimum performance and efficiency. This fluid complements the interaction of the door closer's aluminum housing with its steel and brass components, while maintaining stable viscosity to allow the door closer to perform in temperatures rangingfrom extremely high to as low as -40° F. Optional Architectural Covers * Plastic Architectural plastic covers are molded of high - impact U.L. listed material. They are non - handed and available in sprayed finishes. Metal The architectural metal covers are steel and non - handed for all applications. These covers are available in sprayed or plated Finishes. 8000 Series Door Closers Door Closer Power Options Series 830018500 Sized Door Closer Available in five different power sizes (2, 3, 4, 5 or 6). Each power size is adjustable up to 50% stronger than the minimum closing force for that size; as outlined in ANSI/ BHMA standard Al 56A option PT4C. Series 830118501 Multi -Sized Door Closer Adjustable through the power range of sizes 1 through 6; as outlined in ANSI/ BHMA specification A156A option PT 4H. Closers will also comply with the opening force requirements as outlined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and ANSI /BHMA standard A117.1 for interior doors. For Parallel Arm Applications - Consult factory for doors swinging more than 120° www.nortondoorcontrols.com 3108 ASSAABLQY, the global leader indoor opening solutions 5000 Series Door Closers Regular Arm 8301 - slim cover This is the only pull -side application where a double lever arm is used. It is the most power - efficient application for a door closer. Sufficient frame, door and /or ceiling clearance must be considered. Top jamb For efficiency reasons this application provides the best alternative to the regular arm application. There must be sufficient frame face and /or ceiling clearance forthis application. It requires a top rail on the door ofjust 2-1 /4° (57mm). This application provides the best door control for doors in exterior walls that swing out of a building. Parallel Arm This application provides the most appealing design appearance for a surface- mounted door closer having a double lever arm. This also makes it beneficial in vandalism -prone areas. it is on the push side of the door and the arm assembly extends almost parallel to the door. In the closed position, there is very little or no hardware projecting beyond theframe face in mostsituations, 3108 www.nortondoorcontrols.com ASSAABLOY, the global leader indoor opening solutions r� Sf+' .Norton APF'Ll[ATIONS , 8501 - full cover Since the arm assembly projects directly out from the frame, this application may present an aesthetics issue or be prone to vandalism. The entire door closer and arm assembly project from the frame, similar to the regular arm application, where matters of appearance and malicious abuse can be of concern. Consideration must be given to depth of frame reveal. Due to the geometry of the arm it is approximately 25% less power efficient than a regular arm application. The entire closer and arm assembly are mounted below the frame stop. Top rail clearance dimensions will vary based on the type of cover used. (See pg.15) C t v s a 3 VI L 4 CL cu o — au o V O CO s 4. C 41 .� :3 u c rp ra a� c c 0 ro '� O E O a d E= o � 3 c 0 c a C) vi c O N ..3 L 7 d 4 S b O CL V co d vi 0 I a x a V I LAI a a� N LIW a � � L V W - m LLI E M C W N� r E � W t3 ao i E 'C �Lf) ui i Qaa�QE =Z � ENS ^ llll� w C E LLI a) LLI W Q li Z a =~ U Q N N - U T H 'y � a LCI Q � LL, et m u r .. _ \ � � o 0 ® m Q Z I m T J ¢ EI a�e);oop W m Q ® ®® W W� ¢ o O m. IDatJ 0 LL. W M�M w w ,w Y`I r Z W a a W W a a G U H C t v s a 3 VI L 4 CL cu o — au o V O CO s 4. C 41 .� :3 u c rp ra a� c c 0 ro '� O E O a d E= o � 3 c 0 c a C) vi c O N ..3 L 7 d 4 S b O CL V co d vi 0 I a x a V I LAI a a� N LIW a � � L V W - m LLI E M C W N� r E � W t3 ao i E 'C �Lf) ui i Qaa�QE =Z � ENS ^ llll� w C E LLI a) LLI W Q li Z a =~ U Q N N - U T H 'y � a LCI Q � LL, et m u r .. _ \ � � o 0 ® m Q Z I m T J ¢ EI a�e);oop W m Q ® ®® W W� ¢ o O m. IDatJ e IL71� n cc W z Fi a W �c z J a O 0 Go (r� W K H LU m O co Z NI 0 co E E T 00 M � E T r1 T u N T b Ln u ^vim E - m L, E u z o Z w V J r 2 Z m w F-- J ¢ D p u (� N �00 L \117 C L V v 4.1 '2 v 3L 'n O a a L `p cn X O cu U ¢ = W O 4 .c U O " sb0 4� m � 3 , t C CL C C Y O O a d E L O a3 = 0 CO c in ao tn N E v a s0 � o a� O U co O Ln 0 r J U I m Z NI LO O co r C i1 E E =3 O 15 2 Q �< N 7 O c O o 1 Q r0 Q c u a u d ZY auCL , IL CO ul D D H W W z W a a W W J Ile o v H a e IL71� n cc W z Fi a W �c z J a O 0 Go (r� W K H LU m O co Z NI 0 co E E T 00 M � E T r1 T u N T b Ln u ^vim E - m L, E u z o Z w V J r 2 Z m w F-- J ¢ D p u (� N �00 L \117 C L V v 4.1 '2 v 3L 'n O a a L `p cn X O cu U ¢ = W O 4 .c U O " sb0 4� m � 3 , t C CL C C Y O O a d E L O a3 = 0 CO c in ao tn N E v a s0 � o a� O U co O Ln 0 r J U I m Z NI LO O co r C i1 E E =3 O 15 2 Q �< N 7 O c O o 1 Q r0 Q c u a u d ZY auCL n LU ICL ®®® L) J 0 W Z H W J Gp J a 0� N W LU ce LL _ LL H0 J LU J la-I p v p ca W � J U Z m �I N V G _ E w E ti LL. "N � h r m j d w z n v v v 3s v v o ,� ` Q �aH 0 t V aJ c bO V 4 7 CM= tj R :3 3 :3 aa r� C C O R 2 `O E O a, CL Es o w 3 r- 0 ao 'v, °o C .L^ K.2 E Ora 4-A-0 s ao 0 a CL 0 u 00 C) 0 0 v H D VI N N ti N E v N C � 0 C N N N N o 0 C C CO L.L o u° o u 0 ?' LL. m W J LU 0.. W W LU 0. W a W H o H Z W � u n LU ICL ®®® L) J 0 W Z H W J Gp J a 0� N W LU ce LL _ LL H0 J LU J la-I p v p ca W � J U Z m �I N V G _ E w E ti LL. "N � h r m j d w z n v v v 3s v v o ,� ` Q �aH 0 t V aJ c bO V 4 7 CM= tj R :3 3 :3 aa r� C C O R 2 `O E O a, CL Es o w 3 r- 0 ao 'v, °o C .L^ K.2 E Ora 4-A-0 s ao 0 a CL 0 u 00 C) 0 0 v H D VI N N ti N E v N C � 0 C N N N N o 0 C C CO L.L o u° o u T ^ J E ^— E o E O rf1?jrJ d � s IL W O ro � N O � a a U > L g = J J N Z ui W a o u M T ^ J E ^— E o E rf1?jrJ d � s NY O ro � N O � a a U > L ou.i W ^ J E ^— E rf1?jrJ w lqt r F- r M fi(((ll T O ro E 00 _ O �? J r = W m W = co v a�i v O tA 3 s cu -C Q o Ln (Li N N L T bD a — x a U Q -C b0 H u u bO Q f _a_ m 'f rr~v � N 3 a� � � Y 4 E GJ (U E -a o a 3 c . °- 00. tm o c �n 0 N ° E U O 7 d 4.1 -0 b4 � L d as u° � V E c E E N E : c G 0 Q c -a 7 Q N z N N H Q C C m Q a u° ¢ c u ¢ E rf1?jrJ w lqt r F- fi(((ll T " _ m r, � ,, u J r = W m W = N g = J J N ¢ a p co v a�i v O tA 3 s cu -C Q o Ln (Li N N L T bD a — x a U Q -C b0 H u u bO Q f _a_ m 'f rr~v � N 3 a� � � Y 4 E GJ (U E -a o a 3 c . °- 00. tm o c �n 0 N ° E U O 7 d 4.1 -0 b4 � L d as u° � V E c E E N E : c G 0 Q c -a 7 Q N z N N H Q C C m Q a u° ¢ c u FtIM EXIT DEVICES 5300 Standard k�ft_ Apex 2I 00 Series - Reversible Apex F=L_Ml00 Fire Exit Series — Reversible DOORS - For all types of single and double doors with a FINISHES - 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, 626, 628, 630. For Finish mullion. For mullions, see page 18. Available for 1- 314 "to description see page 3. 2 -1/4 "thick, up to 4 -0 wide opening. For thicker doors, CYLINDERS - Rim Type, not furnished standard. Specify consult factory. Furnished standard for 1 -3/4 "thick, when required. For cylinder details see page 19. 3 -0 "wide opening. DEVICE - Covers ANSI All 5.2 (Type 161), All 5.18 cylinder lock and All 5.1 (Type 86) Mortise Lock preparation. FUNCTIONS - Functions are field selectable except for the Double Cylinder option. The device is furnished for a desired function if specified. If not specified the "03" function is furnished standard. DOUBLE CYLINDER - Handed, 10" Function available. Requires two rim type cylinders, not furnished standard. See page 5 and 19. BASE MATERIAL - The Cover, Touchbar, Device Channel, Lock/Hinge Side Filler and End Cap are furnished of heavy wrought Brass, Bronze or Stainless Steel. 628 Devices are furnished with Aluminum, Brass, Bronze and Stainless Steel components. See "Finish & Base Material" chart on page 3. CHASSIS - Investment Cast Steel, Zinc Dichromated. LATCHBOLT - Stainless Steel, Deadlocking, 3/4 "throw. STRIKES - No. S300, investment Cast Stainless Steel, Black Powder Coated furnished standard. No. S988, optional strike for use on Aluminum Door applications, please specify when ordering. No. S458, optional strike for use on Mullion applications, please specify when ordering. For optional strike information see page 30. DOGGING - 1/4" turn hex key dogging standard. NOT available on Fire Exit Hardware. TOUCHBAR HEIGHT - 39 -15/16 from floor standard. May be varied as situation dictates. REVERSIBLE - Reversible for all functions and Trims. Standard packaging RHRB. UL LISTED - Panic and Fire Exit Hardware. For FIRE EXIT HARDWARE Ratings see page 35. Conforms to ULI OC and UBC 7 -2. ANSI /BHMA - Devices are BHMA certified for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1. STILE WIDTH - See Stile Information on page 32. RETROFIT APPLICATIONS - The 2100 and FL2100 Series Devices are designed to retrofit into other manufacturers' mounting hole locations. 1700 Series Pull Trim and 4900 Series Lever Trim may also be factory set for these applications by specifying prefix "R" (e.g. 2108 R4908A). Consult factory for details. Apex 21 Series -- Nonhanded The 21 Series Device is designed to be compatible with many manufacturers' Access Control exterior trim. The device incorporates a center driven cam to receive the tail- piece of the access control product. The tailpiece rotation required to retract the latch is a minimum of 50 degrees. Consult factory for details. DEVICE OPTIONS Page DE Delayed Egress ..................... .............................24 E Electric Device ..................... .............................28 ELR Electric Latch Retraction ...... ........... ..................21 FL Fire Exit Hardware ................ ..............................4 HC Windstorm and Hurricane Code Device .............20 LDS Latchbolt Monitoring Double Switch ...................29 LS Latchbolt Monitoring Switch . .............................29 TDS Touchbar Monitoring Double Switch .................29 TS Touchbar Monitoring Switch . .............................29 WT DS Weatherized Touchbar Mon. Dbl. Switch ..........29 WTS Weatherized Touchbar Monitoring Switch .........29 To specify add Prefix to Device No. (e.g. TS2103) Suffix Description Page ALK Exit Alarm: battery operated . .............................27 ALW Exit Alarm: remote power ..... .............................27 BRL Braille Touchbar ..................... .............................31 CD Cylinder Dogging ................... .............................19 DS Door Position Monitoring Switch .......................29 SEC Security Screws .................... ..............................3 SNB Sex Nut and Bolt ................... ..............................3 WALW Weatherized Exit Alarm: remote power .............27 To specify add Suffix to Device No. (e.g. 2103CD) �- E 4900A 4900B 4900C 4900D 4900K "A" Lever "B" Lever "C" Lever "D" Lever "K" Knob 1. All the escutcheons and levers are castings or forgings. 2. Specify Lever or Knob Design (A,B,C,D,K) and Handing ( "A" Lever x RHRB furnished standard) 3. 626 Trim furnished for 628 and 630 Devices. V4908A Vandal Resistant Trim A heavy duty lever trim designed to with stand abuse and vandalism. Composed of extra strength shock- absorbing "overload" springs and heavy duty investment cast stainless steel internal components. Lever returns to the "home" position eliminating the need to reset the lever. Retrofit Applications The 84900 Series Trim is designed to retrofit into other manufacturers' installations when used with the wide stile Apex Series Devices.Consult factory for details. • For Trim dimensions seepage 34. 2101 2102 • Trims are BHMA certified for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1. 2105 2108 • Trims are through bolted and will cover 161 and 86 cutouts (except for 2000C Trim). W 2115 1. All the escutcheons and levers are castings or forgings. 2. Specify Lever or Knob Design (A,B,C,D,K) and Handing ( "A" Lever x RHRB furnished standard) 3. 626 Trim furnished for 628 and 630 Devices. V4908A Vandal Resistant Trim A heavy duty lever trim designed to with stand abuse and vandalism. Composed of extra strength shock- absorbing "overload" springs and heavy duty investment cast stainless steel internal components. Lever returns to the "home" position eliminating the need to reset the lever. Retrofit Applications The 84900 Series Trim is designed to retrofit into other manufacturers' installations when used with the wide stile Apex Series Devices.Consult factory for details. • For Trim dimensions seepage 34. 2101 2102 • Trims are BHMA certified for ANSI 156.3, Grade 1. 2105 2108 • Trims are through bolted and will cover 161 and 86 cutouts (except for 2000C Trim). 2114 2115 • Cylinder, Rim Type,.not furnished standard. For cylinder details see pagerlq,-` - FL2101 ANSI 0'ls 02 03 05 08 " 10* 14 75 Function Double Cylinder No Cylinder No Cylinder Exit Only Dummy Key Key Key Inside Key Lever /Knob Thumbpiece (cover plate) Trim Retracts Locks /Unlocks Locks /Unlocks Locks /Unlocks Always Always Latchbolt Thumbpiece Lever/Knob Lever/Knob Active Active Device 2101 2102 2103 ** 2105 2108 2110 2114 2115 Nos. FL2101 FL2103 ** FL2105 FL2108 FL2110 FL2114 FL2115 Trim 1701 1702A 1703A 1705A 4908A 4908A 4914A 1715A Nos. R1701 R1702A R1 703A R1705A V4908A V4908A R4914A R1715A 2101 2102C 2103C 2105C R4908A R4908A 2015C 4901 4902A 4903A RV4908A RV4908A R4901 R4902A R4903A Device with Trim: Add Suffix: for options, see page 4. Device No. Add Prefix: "V" Vandal Resistant Lever Trim "R" Retrofit Trim Add Prefix for options, Add Suffix: Lever or Knob Design (A,B,C,D, K) see page 4. Grip Design (A,B,C) S Add Suffix: "KNR" Knurled Lever or Grip TS2108CD x V4908AKNR x RHRB x 626 x S300 x 3=O" x 7`•0" x 1 -314" 1 1 T __F —T_ Device w /options Trim No. Hand Finish Strike Door Size Device Only; Device no., hand, finish, strike, and door size including thickness: (e.g. TS2108CD x RHRB x 626 x S300 x 3' -0" x7' -0" x 1 -3/4 ") Trim Only: Trim no., hand, finish, strike, and door size including thickness: (e.g. V4908A x RHRB x 626 x 1 -314 ") "'10" Function is handed '" 2103 & FL2103 x Cylinder Only Application includes Cylinder Attachment Kit "CA -03" CEM MULLIONS Mullion Cap MC822 9 4 STdHLEY phi P' Y Interlock Stabilizer 51447 ST989 Romovabla Mullior-is The Mullion is used to adapt a double door opening to two single door openings with Rim Exit Devices. When the full width of an opening is required, the mullion may be removed. KEY REMOVABLE MULLION (KR) - Provides a secure yet quick & easy means of removing the 822 or FL822 Mullion. The mullion can be reinstalled and locked without the need of the key. STOCK SIZE - For openings 84' high. For openings less than 8 -0" high the mullion can be cut down. For openings greater than 8-0" higfy sing the 822, KR822 or 811 mullions, consult factory. FINISHES - 600, 689, 695. For Fipisfi"clesc iption see page 3. Mullion Base $22. FL822, KR822, FLKR822 Mullion MB822 U.L. LISTED - FL822 and FLKR822 listed for Fire Exit Hardware. For FIRE LABEL RATING Chart see page 35. Mullion MULLION -2 "x3 "Steel. Cap MC811 MULLION BASE - Investment Cast Steel, 2 "wide 3-10" deep. Furnished with steel anchors for concrete floors. INTERLOCK - Black Powder Coated Investment Cast Stainless Steel. Fumished standard for FL822 and FLKR822 Mullions, it interlocks the mullion to the Rim Active Case and 5300 or 5301 Strike. STABILIZERS - Black Powder Coated Steel. Stabilizers are famished standard for FL822 and FLKR822 Mullions. MULLION CAP SPACER - Minimum width 3- 112 ". For 2-114" frame spacer specify part no, MCS822. 822, FL822 MULLION CAP - MC822 Investment Cast Steel, 4 "wide 3- 518 "deep. KR822, FLKR822 KEY REMOVABLE MULLION CAP ASSEMBLY - Investment Cast Steel - can be ordered to convert existing 822 or FL822 mullions to Keyed Removable Mullions. Retrofits to the hole pattern of an MC822 Mullion Cap. To order specify KMCB22 or KMC822F. For wire run information, please consult factory. CYLINDER - not fumished standard - Rim Type required. See page 19 for cylinder details. HC—_S22, HCKR$22 Mullion MULLION -2"x3" Steel Mullion is reinforced with a 1-1/2"x2-112" 11 gage Steel Tube. MCB22 or KMC822 Mullion Cap and MB822 Mullion Base Assemblies are used to secure the HC Mullion in the door opening. The S1447 Interlock must be used to Interlock the Active Case with the Strike and is furnished standard with the HC822 Mullion. 8'1 -1 Mullion MULLION -2"x 3 "Steel Mullion. MULLION CAP -Cast 4- 112 "wide x 2 -5116" fumished with machine screws for metal frames. Mullion MULLION BASE -Cast 2 "wide x 2- 314 ", furnished with sheet metal screws and plastic anchors. Base MB811 To Order: Specify Mullion No. Height Finish (e.g. 822 x 8' 0' x 600) �. a: ■ CYLINDERS, KEYS AND KEY CONTROL Full Size Interchangeable Core Cylinders for Exit Devices, Aluminum Doors, etc. Interchangeable Core Rim Cylinders for Exit Devices Available 605, 606, 612, 613, 625 and 626 finish. Everest C123 keyway standard. �r Cylinders for Adams Rite MS and 4700 Series Lori 4500 Series and Corbin Russwin DL3000 Series NumbeF Cnie Mechanism �- ` Number MtSi; x Conventional core Compression ring & spring 20 -057 Conventional core 20 -757 Primus core 20 -079 Housing only, less core Available 605, 606, 612, 613, 625 and 626 finish. Everest C123 keyway standard. �r Cylinders for Adams Rite MS and 4700 Series Lori 4500 Series and Corbin Russwin DL3000 Series NumbeF Cnie Mechanism �- ` C41far 26 -098 Conventional core Compression ring & spring 20 -062 Conventional core 3h6 " + 318° blocking rings 20 -766 Primus core 3h6" + %- blocking rings 20 -060 Housing less core None These cylinders include set screw pack B220 -050 for Adams Rite locks. Cylinders for Adams Rite 4070 Series Deadlocks Number Core Mel t stk►Stn Collar 20 -091 Conventional core 3116" + 3 /s " blocking rings 20 -722 Primus core 3116" + 318" blocking rings 20 -090 Housing less core None O K510 -711 Adams Rite MS Cam ((9 B520 -378 Adams Rite 4070 Cam Notes 1. Mortise cylinders available 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, and 626 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 626 only. 2. To differentiate between Classic and Everest, specify keyway. Example: C or CP (Classic), C123 (Everest). Everest C123 keyway standard. 3. All cylinders are 1112" long. 4. Specify LKB if 0- bitted Primus cylinders are required less key blanks. 15 ■ CYLINDERS, KEYS AND KEY CONTROL Full Size Interchangeable Core Mortise Cylinders 14 Cylinders for Schlage L- Series Mortise Locks . Hotel function cores are handed. Specify hand of door. Mortise Cylinders with Straight Cam for Exit Devices and Most Old Black Cast Iron Mortise Locksets .................. '� tdumber dare MQcleBntsln CDt�ai �'� OR hantsnn _ 26 -091 Conventional core Compression ring & spring Design Function Conventional Primus Housing Less Care ® Primus core All Except Below 30 -008 20 -798 30 -007 L &N 20 -059 Housing less core None 26 -064 L9060P Outside 30 -030 20 -782 30 -032 + 36 -083 Escutcheons (cylinders with compression ring) L9485P,L9486P Hotel Funtions 30 -010' NIA 30 -007 ® Sectional Trim All Except Below 30 -138 20 -776 30 -137 (cylinder with compression ring, spring and 19060P Outside 20 -061 20 -783 30 -032 + 31 -083 + 35 -082 -037 318° blocking ring) 1-9485P,1-9466P Hotel Funtions 30 -140" NIA 30-737 . Hotel function cores are handed. Specify hand of door. Mortise Cylinders with Straight Cam for Exit Devices and Most Old Black Cast Iron Mortise Locksets .................. '� tdumber dare MQcleBntsln CDt�ai �'� _ 26 -091 Conventional core Compression ring & spring 20 -061 3116" + 3 /a" blocking rings 20 -763 Primus core Compression ring & spring 20 -771 3/16 "+ 3 /8" blocking rings 20 -059 Housing less core None 26 -064 Compression ring & spring 26 -094 r 3116 -+ 31a- blocking rings O K510 -730 Straight Cam, Other Applications 0 L583 -255 Cam for All Functions Except L9060 Outside 0 K510 -680 Cam for L9060 Outside Notes 1. Available 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, and 626 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 626 only. 2. To differentiate between Classic and Everest, specify keyway. Example: C or CP (Classic), C123 (Everest). Everest C123 keyway standard. 3. All cylinders are 1112- long. 4. Specify LKB if 0- bitted Primus cylinders are required less key blanks. MSERI-ES LEVERS Extra Heavy Duty Commercial D- Series locks are for commercial, institutional and industrial use, such as schools, hospitals and factories, where a long life of dependable operation must be combined with a high degree of resistance to physical abuse. Popular functions of all lever designs are also available in Vandlgard ®, where levers are free- wheeling in the locked position to resist more forceful attacks. Performance Features Tested to exceed 3,000,000 cycles, greatly exceeding the 800,000 cycle ANSI Grade I requirement. Exceeds ANSI A156,2 Series 4000 Grade 1 locked lever torque requirements. Vandlgard'O functions have free - wheeling levers to resist force when locked. Independent heavy duty spring cages for effective lever support. Thru- bolred mechanism for positive interlock to door. Concealed mounting screws. Steel Larchbolr. Exploded View ,F-- Outside lever F use Outside Spring Cage Assembly IV Chassis Adjusts for 15/8- . 21/8" thick doors Push -Turn Button lCertain Function) ® Provides visible locking status Cylinder 6 -Pin Everest Standard Anti- rotation Plate o Inside Spring Cage Assembly Latch Screws Integrated spindle /springcage reduces lever wobble and droop w =;r p springcage Screws o ® Rose O Inside Lever L Latch t12" Throw Strike o L Strike Screws a 2 On our cover, the D- Series OMEGA an Satin Nickel. Specifications Handing: All D- Series lever locksets are non - handed. Door Thickness: 15 /s" to 2'A" (41mm -54mm) standard including Uandlgard® functions. 13/4" - 2" for function D85. See accessories (Page 11) for spacers required for 13 /s" doors. B ackset: 23/4" (70mm) standard. 23/8 ", 33/ "and 5" (Gomm, 95mm, 127mm) optional. Faceplate; Brass, bronze or stainless steel. 1' /s" x 2%" (29 mm x 57mm) square corner, beveled. Lock Chassis: Zinc plated for corrosion resistance. Latch Bolt: Steel, 1/2" (12mm) throw, deadlocking on keyed and exterior functions. 3/4" (19mm) throw anti - friction latch available for pairs of fire doors. Exposed Trim: Levers: Pressure cast zinc, plated to match finish symbols. Roses: Solid brass. Strike: ANSI curved lip strike 11/4" x 47h- x 13/16" lip to center standard. Optional strikes, lip lengths and ANSI strike box available. See page 12. Cylinder & Keys: 6 -pin Everest C123 keyway standard with two patented nickel silver keys per lock. Keying Options: Interchangeable core and Primus® high security cylinders. Master keying, grand master keying and construction keying. Warranty: Seven -year limited for all functions including Uandlgard©. Door Preparation Lever Designs MSERIES LEVERS Certifications ANSI Meets or exceeds A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 strength and operational requirements. Meets Al 17.1 Accessibility Code. Federal Meets FF- H -106C Series 161. California State Reference Code (CSFH) (Formerly Title I9, California State Fu Marshal Standard) All levers with less than Ih" (64mm) returns comply; levers return to within zh" of door face. M EA Certification All electrified locking (fail -safe, unlocked by switch or power failures) functions accepted for use in New York City by the City of New York, Department of Buildings (MEA 24- 04-E). All levers with less than 'h- (64mm) returns comply with California Fire Safety Codes. 314" and 112" throw latch approved for Hurricane Resistance with Miami -Dade County, Florida and the Florida Building Commission. UL / cUL: All locks listed for A label single doors, 4' x 8'. Letter F and UL symbol 3 M SERIES LEVERS Lever Designs & Finishes 606 X i ATHENS Symbol: ATH (L- Series 07) Material: Pressure cast zinc lever; wrought brass rose Finishes 605, 606, 612, 4i 2} 613, 619, 625, 626 31 3j RHODES Symbol: RHO (L- Series 06) Material: Pressure cast zinc lever; wrought brass rose Finishes 605, 606, 612, 613,619 , 625, a z,ly 626 I 3'- 612 & 29 TUBULAR (L- Series 03) Symbol: TLR Material: Pressure cast zinc lever; wrought brass rose Finishes 605, 606, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626 626 t..�^ q 6 2} 3� �3- Lever Designs & Finishes TI. 619 T 4ss: . s 619 Keyed functions available with Full Size Interchangeable Core options, Satin Nickel is Keyed functions available with Small Format Interchangeable Core options. I N I --�j *Only available with Tubular lever. 4 TACTILE WARMING (KNURLING) Change symbol designation as follows: 8AT for Athens 8RO for Rhodes 8SP for Sparta 8TRfor Tubular *E Only outside lever is knurled unless otherwise specified. Noravailable with Omega trim � Extended Factory Lead Time SPARTA Symbol: SPA (L Series 17) Material: Pressure cast zinc lever; wrought brass rose Finishes 605, 606, 612 a 613,619,625: 3 626 3 31 OMEGA Symbol: OME (L- Series Omega) Material: Pressure cast zinc lever; wrought brass rose Finishes 605, 606, 612, JAL 613, 619, 625, 2� 626 36 t� 3j Finishes 605 Bright Brass 606 Satin Brass 612 Satin Bronze 613 Oil Rubbed Bronze 619 Satin Nickel 625 Bright Chromium Plated 626 Satin Chromium Plated �f 626 Satin Chromium Plated MSERIES LEVERS Functions ANSI A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1 Non -Keyed Locks SCHLAGE ANSI ND10S F75 up_ ND12D F89 up_ NDI2DEL NDI2DEU ND25D !o ND40S F76 ND44S d � 1 Passage Latch Both levers always unlocked. Exit Lock Outside lever always fixed. Inside lever always unlocked. Electrically Locked (Fail Safe) Outside lever continuously locked electrically. Unlocked by switch or power failure. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever always free for immediate exir. Electrically Unlocked (Fail Secure) Outside lever continuously locked until unlocked by electric current. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is dosed. Inside lever always free for immediate exit. Exit Lock Blank plate outside. Inside lever always unlocked. Fp Bath /Bedroom Privacy Lock Push - button locking. Can be opened from outside with small screwdriver. Turning inside lever or closing door releases button. Hospital Privacy Lock Push - button locking. Unlocked from outside by turning emergency turn- button. Turning inside lever or closing door releases button. ND170 Single Dummy Trim Dummy trim for one side of door. Used for door pull or as matching inactive trim. Safe School Locks 6 Keyed Locks SCHLAGE ANSI ND50PD F82 O1 ND53PD F109 ND60PD F88 4 ape ND66PD F91 .0 ol, ND70PD F84 .8 up ___j ND73PD F90 1 Entrance /Office Lock t Push - button locking. Push -button Iocks outside lever until unlocked with key or by turning inside lever. Entrance Lock t Turn /push- button locking, pushing and turning button locks outside lever, requiring use of key until button is manually unlocked. Push -button locking; pushing button locks outside Iever until unlocked by key or by turning inside lever. Vestibule Lock t Latch retracted by key from outside when outside lever is locked by key in inside lever. Inside lever is always unlocked. Store Lock t * Key in either lever locks or unlocks both Ievers. Classroom Lock t �►! Outside lever locked and unlocked by key. Inside lever always unlocked. Corridor Lock t Locked or unlocked by key from outside. Push- button locking from inside. Turning inside lever or closing door releases button. When outside lever is locked by key it can only be unlocked by key. Inside lever is always unlocked. ND75PD Classroom Security Lock t e Key in either lever locks or unlocks outside lever. Inside lever is always unlocked. t Keyed functions available with Gpin (PD /LD), SFIC(GD/BD), or FSIC(RD /JD) cylinder. * Caution: Double cylinder locks on residences and any door in any structure which is used for egress are a life safety hazard in times of emergency and their use is not recommended Installation should be in accordance with existing codes only. Functions ANSI A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1 Keyed Locks SCHLAGE ANSI ND80PD F86 .0 up ND80PDEL a �P_ ND80PDEU •4 4p- ND82PD F87 .0 6 ND85PD O1 eSafe School Locks Storeroom Lock t Outside lever fixed. Entrance by key only. Inside lever always unlocked. Electrically Locked (Fail Safe) t Outside lever continuously locked electrically. Unlocked by key outside or by switch or power failure. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever always free for immediate exit. Electrically Unlocked (Fall Secure) t Outside lever continuously locked until unlocked by key or electric current. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever always free for immediate exit. Institution Lock t * Both levers fixed. Entrance by key in either lever. Faculty Restroom Lock ** e Outside lever fixed. Entrance by key only. Push - button in inside lever activates visual "occupancy" indicator, allowing only emergency master key to operate. Turning inside lever or closing door releases visual occupancy indicator. Rotation of inside spinner- button provides lock -out feature by keeping indicator thrown. t Keyed functions available with 6pin (PDILD), SFIC(GDIBD), or FSIC(RD /JD) cylinders. * Caution: Double cylinder locks on residences and any door in any structure which is used for egress are a life safety hazard in times of emergency and their use is not recommended Installation should be in accordance with existing codes only. ** 85 function locks are not available in Full Size & Small Format Interchangeable Cores. Vandlgard Functions SCHLAGE ANSI ND91PD F82 O1 ND92PD F109 .0 M up ND93PD F88 ND94PD F84 m N D95PD ND96PD F86 ND96PDEL a �p ND96PDEU a �p MSERIES LEVERS Entrance /Office Lock t Push- button locking. Push -button disengages outside lever until unlocked with key or by turning inside lever.Vandigard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. Entrance Lock t Turn /push- button locking; pushing and turning button disengages outside lever, requiring use of key until button is manually unlocked. Push - button locking; pushing button disengages outside lever until unlocked by key or by turning inside lever.Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. Vestibule Lock t Latch retracted by key from outside when outside lever is disengaged by key in inside lever. Inside lever is always unlocked. Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. Classroom Lock t Outside lever disengaged and unlocked by key. Inside lever always unlocked. Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. Classroom Security Lock t Key in either lever locks or unlocks outside lever. Inside lever is always unlocked. Storeroom Lock t Outside lever always disengaged. Entrance by key only. Inside lever always unlocked. Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle f rom latch when in locked condition. Electrically Locked (Fail Safe) t Ourside lever continuously disengaged electrically. Unlocked by key outsrde or by switch or power failure. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever always free for immediate exit. Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. Electrically Unlocked (Fail Secure) t Outside lever continuously disengaged. until unlocked by key or electric current. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside ]ever always free for immediate exit. Vandlgard is designed to disengage outside spindle from latch when in locked condition. 7 MSERIES LEVERS Standard Cylinders Schlage® locks are provided with cylinders precision built to extremely close tolerances and the highest standards of accuracy. Using only solid brass plugs, extruded brass shells, phosphor bronze springs, nickel silver keys and pins, ensures long life and ease of operation. For complete listing of cylinder parts, refer to the New D- Series Service Manual (SC- 2058). Conventional cylinders are available in Classic keyways or in patented EveresO keyways. Specify keyway to differentiate between Everest and Classic. Example: C (Classic) vs. C123 (Everest). Primus® High Security Cylinders Primus high security cylinders are available to add patented key control and varying degrees of geographical exclusivity to most Schlage 6 -pin key systems, whether Everest or Classic keyways. In addition to a conventional pin tumbler mechanism, Primus cylinders incorporate a patented finger pin and sidebar design providing a "dual- locking" cylinder that is virtually pick - proof. Resistance to drilling and other physical attack is optional by specifying 20 -500 Series UL437 Listed cylinders. Classic Primus cylinders are recommended for upgrading existing Classic key systems. Due to its extended patent life, the newly designed Everest Primus is recommended for new key systems and for upgrading existing Everesc' key systems. Specify keyway to differentiate between Everest and Classic. Example: CP (Classic) vs. C123 (Everest). Cylinder for Most Functions Tailpor for levers. Standard Cylinders* *Available in 606 and 626finish only. Everest C123 keyway standard. 8 Full Size Interchangeable Core i Schlage® figure -8 interchangeable core (IC) locksets allow immediate rekeying at the door simply by using a special control key to replace the core. Available in all lever designs, full size interchangeable cores can be integrated into any 5 or 6 -pin Schlage key. To order complete locks with full size cores, change suffix from PD to RD. Example: ND53RD. To order locks less core, change suffix to JD. To order with full size construction core, change suffix to TD. q Full Size Interchangeable Cores* NlEmker i7eSFr trpn _.... 2MM Conventional core 20-740 Primus high security core *Available 606 and 626 finish only. Everest C123 keyway standard. i �' %• j` i m door seen it, befo . .. ..... .. .. 8100 series swinging doors Planetary gear system in tandem with a proven .. �O­ perfiectedf: ever -sy4e gnarm assures the smoothest, .most auiet.oDeraitl& available without exception. w_Albrifries, doctor offices, and healthcare facilities demand that their daily routines proceed without the common noisy distractions associated with many competitive products. Eliminate your worry of:Post install performance by specifying record- Umbiried with World farno Swiss precision je h' lqgy and a pategpd-Icbritf6l'system with .... . .. ...... . '32 it pr rfl I yjhe8100 series i5 q_cess.o ec noog t i�iTd we'rfu' , I �and intelligent and . ".guarantees rapid 'land reliable door control and operation, even when. complex funedor-K are desired. I'MAR N: Fro Ten 4:.: �t rt. ­U et P 7- E J Z, 7 4910 St arcrest Drive 800 438-1937 Al jr- 'V: -Post Office Box 3099 704 289-2024 Fax ­Monroe. NC 28111-3099 www.reoord-usa.com . . . ....... .... ....... 01 P.0.0 rusty 1.9— ENTr i m c o PUSH AND PULL PLATES OA 3" x 12" 3-1/2" x 15" 4" X 16" ° BHMA J301 J301 J301 2" P 1 -7/8" 1 -7/8" Br, Bz, PI, SS 1109 -1 Push Plate .050 1117 -1 1117 -1 1117 -1 TRIMCO# 1001 -9 1001 -11 1001 -3P > OA 6" x 16" 8" x 16" 4" X 16" ° BHMA J405 J405 Black Plastic 1 /8" BHMA J301 J301 J301 Br, Bz, Pl, Ss Push Plate .050 Plastic Plates - .125 other standard colors and clear available. TRIMCO# 1010 -1 1010 -2 1010 -3 OA OA 3" x 12" 3-1/2" x 15" 4" X 16" 2" P 1 -7/8" 1 -7/8" 1 -7/8" 1109 -1 G 1117 -1 1117 -1 1117 -1 CL 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1 /2" BHMA CTC 5" 5" 5" ADA BHMA J405 J405 J405 Pull Plate - .050 - ADA Br, Bz, PI, SS TRIMCO# 1012 -2 1012 -3 OA 3-1/2" x 15" 4" X 16" P 2" 2" G 1109 -1 1109 -1 ° CL 1 -1 /2" 1 -1 /2" CTC 5 -1 /2" 5 -112" BHMA J405 J405 Pull Plate - .050 - ADA Br, Bz, PI, SS NOTE: All Metal Plates on this page are .050" thick. Custom sizes available. CL = clearance, CTC = center to center, G = grip, OA = overall size, P = projection PHONE: 323 - 262 -4191 MTrimco PULL PLATES TRIMCO# 1013 -2 1013 -213 1013 -3 1013 -313 OA 3 -1 /2" x 15 3 -1/2" x 15" 4" x 16" 4" x 16" P 2" 2" 2" 2" G 1193 -1 1193 -2 1193 -1 1193 -2 CL 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -112" 1 -1 /2" CTC 5 -112" 8" 5 -112" 8" BHMA J405 J405 J405 J405 Br, Bz, Al, SS q. Pull Plate - ADA TRIMCO# 1014 -2 1014 -213 1014 -3 1014 -313 i OA 3 -112" x 15 3-1/2" x 15" 4" x 16" 4" x 16" P2„ 2„ 2„ 2„ G 1199 -1 1199 -2 1199 -1 1199 -2 CL 1 -1 /2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -112" CTC 6" 8" 6" 8" BHMA J405 J405 J405 J405 Br, Bz, Al, SS Pull Plate - ADA TRIMCO# 1015.2 1015 -213 1015 -3 1015 -313 OA 3 -1/2" x 15 3 -1/2" x 15" 4" x 16" 4" x 16" P 2" 2" 2" 2" G 1139 -1 1139 -2 1139 -1 1139 -2 CL 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" CTC 6" 8" 6" 8" BHMA J405 J405 J405 J405 Br, Bz, Al, SS Pull Plate - ADA '3 o TRIMCO# 1017 -2 1017 -213 1017 -3 1017 -3B OA 3 -1/2" x 15 3 -1/2" x 15" 7" x 16" 7" x 16" P2" 2" 2" 2" G 1194 -1 1194 -2 1194 -1 1194 -2 o CL 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 1 -112" CTC 6" 8" 6" 8" BHMA J705 J705 J705 J705 c Br, Bz, Al, SS o Pull Plate - ADA NOTE: All Plates on this page are .050" thick. "B" Suffix indicates next larger size grip Custom sizes available. 24 HOUR FAX: 800- 637 -8746 CL = clearance, CTC = center to center, G = grip, OA = overall size, P = Projection M'Tr i m c o STOPS } TRIMCO# 1201 1201 -5 1201 C B 2 -1 /4" 3" 2 -314" H 3" 5" 3" BHMA L02131 L02131 L02131 Br, Bz, PI, SS Floor Stop - Cast 1201 CK is a heavy duty, high -abuse school design with reduces tampering and loss of rubber bumper. For surface mounting with wood screws, use 1200. m o TRIMCO# 1205 TRIMCO# 1207 P 3 -1/8" B 2 -1/4" CTC_ _ _Specify_ P 3 -314" M 318" x 2 -112 ° EYE 7/8" x 2-1/4" BHMA J501 HOOK 2 -3/4" Br, Bz, PI BHMA L01351 Base Stop For surface mounting with wood ° Base Stop and Holder - Cast screws, use 1204. For surface mounting with wood screws, use 1206. TRIMCO# 120B TRIMCO# 1209 B 1 -3/16" B 1 -114" P 3 -1/4" H 2" BHMA L02031 PI Br, Bz, PI Heavy Duty Stop Base Stop - Cast Ideal for high abuse installations like WS. prisons, schools, heavy doors. Installs with quick -set cement. Requires 1-1/2" diameter cored hole. Available for wall mount #1209W, TRIMCO# W1211 hold open feature #1209HO, and R 116" #1209HA with extra strong stainless B 1 -314" x 2" steel shaft and larger rubber. H 1" M Wrought BHMA L02141 Br, Bz, SS Universal Dome Stop Only the W 1211 and 12111 are recommended for high abuse applications. Patent #4,209,876 24 HOUR FAX: 800 - 637 -8746 CTC = center to center, M = material, OA = overall size, P = projection O 2P ETrimco ADAPTERS, STOPS AND SILENCERS TRIMCO# 1228 TRIMCO # 1229A OA 1" x 2 -3/8" x 2 -3/8" OA 1/2" x 1/2" Br, At BHMA L03011 Pipe Adapter for Wall Stop - Cast Silencers for Metal Frames 1.5 1 PS Pipe. Sold in multiples of 100 Pipe and Stop not supplied. TRIMCO# 1229B OA 5/8" x 3/4" BHMA L03021 Sold in multiples of 100 TRIMCO# 1229EL 1 1 4 I A" D 1 -1/8" Elevator Bumper - Grey Sold in multiples of 125 TRIMCO# 1231 1233 B 1 -518" x 2 -1/2" 1 -318" x 2 -3/4" H 2" 2 -718" BHMA L02181 L02181 Floor Stop - Cast Combo Pack Br, Bz, PE TRIMCO# 1234 TRIMCO# 1235 B 1 -1 /2" x 2 -3/4" o B 1 -3/8" H 3" P 2- 15/16" STR 1" X 2" o BHMA L02041 G> BHMA L01361 Br, Bz, PI Br, Bz, PI Base Stop - Cast Floor Stop, Holder - Cast WS Combo Pack B = base, H = height, OA = overall size, P = projection, STR = strike PHONE: 323 -262 -7191 fflTrimco fOCAL TRIMCO# 1271 SA 1271TB 1271CP ID 1 -1/4" 1 -1 /4" 1 -114" OD 1 -7/8" 1 -7/8" 1 -718" O P 11116" 11/16" 11116" FASTENER Self Adhesive Toggle Bolt / WS Pack_ COLOR Grey Grey Grey Rimless Rubber Will Bumper j TRIMCO# 1270CV 1270WV 1270CX 1270WX ID 1 -3/8" 1 -3/8" 1 -3/8" 1 -3/8" O OD 2- 3/16" 2- 3/16" 2 -3116" 2 -3/16" P 1" 1" i" 1" M Cast Wrought Cast Wrought BHMA L02251 L02251 L02101 L02101 Br, Bz, PI Br, Bz, PI, SS Br, Bz, PI Br, Bz, PI, SS Wall Bumper - Combo Pack Anti - Vandal Rubber Convex (X) available. Concave (V) shown Come with our combo pack TRIMCO# 1275RP TRIMCO# 1278CX ID 9/16" OD 1 -1 /2" OD 1" � P 1" P 9/16" BHMA L02101 BHMA LD21 D1 Br, Bz, PI, Al Br, Bz, PI Wail Bumper Small Wall Bumper WS x RP. Minimal Trim. WS x RP Anti - Vandal Rubber. Concave (V) shown Convex (X) available e TRIMCO# 1277179 Please specify fasteners as below' D 4" P 3/4" o BHMA L021 11 IL021 01 Br, Bz, PI Large Wall Bumper - Cast Available with concealed or exposed fasteners. Convex (X) only. Please specify fasteners as below* *New Wall Bumper Abbreviations: C = Cast MS = Machine Screw W = Wrought CP = Combo Pack X = Convex WS = Wood Screw V = Concave RP = Rawl Plug TB = Toggle Bolt 24 HOUR FAX: 800 - 637 -8746 D = diameter, ID = inside diameter, M = material, OD = outside diameter, P = projection, T = trim COL = color, M = material, OA = overall size �1Trimco NOTE: All Kick plates are made from solid 260 Brass, 220 Bronze, 304 Stainless Steel or 50051-134 Aluminum. All edges are relieved. Heavy bevel at extra charge. All .038 Protection plates are Stainless Steel ONLY. Specify countersinking if required. PHONE: 323 - 262 -4191 PLATES AND GUARDS TRIMCO# KA038 KA050 -1 KA050 -2 KA050 -3 OA 17 -48" H 17 -24" H 25 -42" H 43 -48" H M .038 .050 .050 .050 BHMA J101 J101 J101 .050 Br, Bz, Al, SS Armor Plate SS only 605 finish = 24" height maximum h u: 606/609 finishes = 36" height maximum x 611/612/613 finishes = 36" height maximum Aluminum and SS = 48" height maximum NOTE: All Kick plates are made from solid 260 Brass, 220 Bronze, 304 Stainless Steel or 50051-134 Aluminum. All edges are relieved. Heavy bevel at extra charge. All .038 Protection plates are Stainless Steel ONLY. Specify countersinking if required. PHONE: 323 - 262 -4191 TRIMCO# KMO38 KM050 OA Under 6" high Under 6" high M .038 .050 BHMA J103 Br, Bz, AI, SS Mop Plate SS only TRIMCO# K0038 K0050 TRIMCO# K0050.I1-LUM OA 7 " -16" H 7 " -16" H .050 Kick Plate M .038 .050 ExiT with an illuminated "EXIT" BHMA J102 Sign. Specify handing. Br, Bz, Al, SS Kick Plate SS only �— Add "ILLUM" for Illuminated exit. TRIMCO# KS050 TRIMCO# K6000 OA 6" high OA 4 -48" high M Countersunk COL Black, Grey Holes, 134E, M Plastic 118" .050 BHMA J106 Br, Bz, Al, SS Plastic Stretcher Plate - .050 Kick Plate Other heights are e Other colors and clear are available. available. NOTE: All Kick plates are made from solid 260 Brass, 220 Bronze, 304 Stainless Steel or 50051-134 Aluminum. All edges are relieved. Heavy bevel at extra charge. All .038 Protection plates are Stainless Steel ONLY. Specify countersinking if required. PHONE: 323 - 262 -4191 Awikk ccesskbility, Customer Service 877.421.9490 FAX 1.877.421.3158 Local 414.421.9490 AUTOMATIC DOOM ACTIVATION SOLUTIONS Hnma I Ahnuf Its I .Catalog I All Products I Rnllards I Mr�RFSS'Rmi I Cnnfaef Its I prp_sS Bollards Square, Round,Triangle and Rectangular Bollards "Best Bollards in the Business!" Contact Ga WwArSen icp for Custom -Stock Bollard say our Customers AND OUR COMPETITORS! Production Schedule How to create a Custom Bollard - Download the Checklists (Pdf Format) SgUare Rollard Checklist - Revised 1/18/12 Recta x-Bollard_r_h'-Lld1St- Revised 1/18/12 Rai lad Rollard rheck ist - Revised 1/18/12 Trla - Revised 1/18/12 - BPSS11 AHOOD 32D - 6 "X6"X48" tall, 304 Stainless Steel MORF -INM 10-BPD —R Special 6 "Rd x 42" Tall, in Mill Aluminum, powder coated in Red P -MCM— C -INM. '- BPSSMFHOOD 32D- 6 "X6 "X42 ",304 Stainless Steel , with welded flat top, over ADA push plate Click on MORE INFO for product pa es D E F G H I 3 K B- BPS SM -ING48 DB 6 "X6 "X48" tall, Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum No E-INEO G- Special 6 "x6 "x6 "x66" Tall, Triangle Bollard, in Stainless Steel s " RE-INI M L- BPS SM TUBE 32D In Stock item 6 "X6 "X42" Tall, in 304 Satin Stainless Steel ►- MOJtF_UWQ C- BPS SM -PRP36 LB -Light Bronze Anodized Aluminum, 6 "X6 "X42" Tall l' AdO6tE -NE0. H -BPD SM MILL -6 "RD X45" tall with Domed Top to be painted or powder coated ► MORE-INFO_ M -BPR SM CLEAR (628) 6 "RDX42" Tall, In Stock item, except Black Clear Anodized Aluminum, surface mount, 0 M E -11NEO D- BPR SM -AINS 32D 6 "Rd X 48.625" Tall, in Satin Stainless Steel )' MO E-MM I -BPR SM US32- Mirror Stainless Steel (629) 6"RD X42" Tall, surface mount, prep at 36" AFF k MORE_INEO. `d -BPS SM CLAD US4 -6 "X6 "X42" Tall, in US4 Satin Brass (606 - uncoated), surface mount, Special Switch sold separately Wikk's- PART # 4X4 -3 US4 )' MORE 94M u r� E- BPD Special 6" Rd x 42" Tall, in Mirror Stainless Steel 0- BPS SM PRP36 DB In Stock item 6 "X6 "X42" Tall Dark Bronze Anodized fIAID�RLIdEO__ ,� Bollard Examples in Dorinloadable (Pdf Format) Round- Ballard_Examples - Revised 1/18/12 Squnre _ Bollard - Examples- Revised 1/18/12 I Ii i Low Switch Examples - Revised 1/18/12 Rectangular Ballard_ Examples Special Colors (Pdf Format) Rowrlercoatina far Exterior antt Interior RNIDE Painting glom NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing for wood doors. 2. Glazing for aluminum storefronts, entrances, windows, and curtain wall systems. 3. Glass for casework displays. 4. Glass for canopies (Refer to Section 08 6300). B. Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. C. FGMA - Sealant Manual. D. FS TT -S- 001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type. E. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; UL -10B G. Warnock Hersey International, Inc. Classification for Glazing Materials H. NFPA 252 I. UBC 43.2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Product Data for Mirror Mounting Hardware. E. Product Data for adhesive applied glazing film. F. SAMPLES: Provide two (2) 6" x 6" samples of the glass and color specified. Sample shall have manufacturer's labels. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. H. Test Data: Provide test data for insulated glass confirming U- values and shading coefficients. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of Glazing 088000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 glazing compounds. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Contract Closeout. B. Warranty: Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Date Submitted to Architect Date Transmitted to Owner PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS - FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. PPG Industries, Inc. B. Viracon C. Libby- Owens -Ford Glass Co. D. Globe- Amerada Glass Co. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.2 FLOAT GLASS A. Clear, 1/4 -inch thickness, flat glass. 2.3 SAFETY GLASS A. Clear, fully tempered, conforming to ANSI Z97.1,1/4 -inch thickness and % -inch thickness as indicated on Drawings. 2.4 INSULATED GLASS UNITS - LOW "E" A. Quality Standard: PPG, Solarban 70XL, (2) Starphire. B. Dual seal polysulfide insulated units. C. %" Low'E', 1/2" air space; %" clear inner pane. F. U -value of 0.27 G. Visible light transmittance of 64% F. Shading coefficient of 0.32 G. Solar Factor (SHGC) of 0.27 H. Interpane space purged dry hermetic air. I. Total thickness of 1 -inch. Glazing 088000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.5 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Shore A hardness of 10 -20 black color. B. Structural Glazing: GE Ultraglaze 4000, color as selected. 2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; 1/2 x 1/8 inch size; black color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. C. Verify that backing material has been installed in proper location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrata compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.3 EXTERIOR - DRY METHOD A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/3 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 0140 00 - Quality Control. B. Inspection will monitor quality of glazing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 017000 - Contract Closeout. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is complete. D. Clean glass. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls. B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Glazing 088000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contractor for Construction, and Division 1. B. Refer to Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements C. Section includes: Gypsum board and joint treatment; gypsum sheathing; and textured finish. D. Related Sections: 1. Rough Carpentry 2. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 3. Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation: Acoustic and Thermal insulation. 4. Section 08 3113 - Access Doors and Frames: Metal access panels. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 4. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 5. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. 7. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases. 8. ASTM C1178 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 9. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 10. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 11. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 12. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 13. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. Gypsum Association: 1. GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. Gypsum Board Assemblies 092116-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2. GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound Control. C. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select stud thickness to resist minimum 5 psf uniform load and maximum 1/240 deflection. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. D. Product Data: Submit data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape; acoustic accessories, and expansion control. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, GA -214, GA -216 and GA -600 B. Fire Rated Wall Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings. 1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119. 2. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL Fire Resistance Directory and /or Warnock- Hersey Listing Manual. C. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Textile Wall Coverings: Comply with one of the following: a. Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Comply with requirements of applicable code when tested in accordance with NFPA 265 Method A or Method B test protocols. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Gypsum Board Assemblies 092116-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Celotex Building Products 2. G -P Gypsum Corp. 3. National Gypsum Co. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 5. Certainteed 6. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Gypsum Board Materials: ASTM C1396/C1396M; Type X fire resistant where indicated on Drawings. 1. Standard Gypsum Board: 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges. 2. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges. 3. Gypsum Sheathing Board: 1/2 or 5/8 inch thick as indicated on the Drawings, maximum available size in place; ends square cut, square or tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. 4. Gypsum Coreboard with Glass Mat Facings: % inch thick, maximum available size in place; square edges, ends square cut. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: Section 072116. B. Acoustic Sealant: Non - hardening, non - skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; Norseal V -703 Series. VOC- compliant. C. Gypsum Board Accessories: ASTM C1047; metal and paper combination; corner beads, edge trim, and expansion joints. 1. Metal Accessories: Galvanized steel. 2. Plastic Accessories: PVC plastic. 3. Edge Trim: Type L and U bead. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and GA -216 reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. E. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C1002; length to suit application. 1. Screws for Steel Framing: Type S12, self - drilling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Furring For Fire Ratings: Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA -600 requirements. B. Acoustic Accessories Installation: Gypsum Board Assemblies 092116-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Install acoustic sealant within partitions. C. Gypsum Board Installation: 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA -216 and GA -600. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most instances horizontal, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing in accordance with ASTM C1280, horizontally, with edges butted and ends occurring over firm bearing. 5. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 6. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum board with sealant. 7. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated on Drawings or on approved shop drawings. 8. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. D. Joint Treatment: 1. Finish in accordance with GA -214 Level 5. 2. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 3. Feather coats on to adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 4. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. E. Texture Finish: Trowel apply finish texture coating for smooth finish. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Finishes in accordance with GA -214 Level: 1. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. 2. Level 5: Walls exposed to view. 3. Level 5: Ceilings exposed to view. END OF SECTION Gypsum Board Assemblies 092116-4 CertainTeed Gypsum Board & Finishing Products Featuring G1asRoc °, ProRoc° ProFin7 & Marco' Brands CertainTeedll Quality made certain. Satisfaction guaranteed." r - r - r � Quality Made Certain. Satisfaction Guaranteed. BPB joins CertainTeed In December 2005, BPB joined CertainTeed in an acquisition by parent company, Saint - Gobain, creating the largest building materials manufacturer in the world. CertainTeed Corporation has helped shape the building products industry for more than 100 years. Founded in 1904 as General Roofing Company, the firm made its slogan "Quality Made Certain, Satisfaction Guaranteed," which quickly inspired the name CertainTeed. A Full Line Product Offering Today, CertainTeed is pleased to offer the: • ProRoc® Brand of Gypsum Wallboard Products • G1asRoc® Brand of High Performance Exterior Sheathing • ProFin® Brand Finishing Products v • Marco® Brand Joint Tapes and Corner Reinforcement Attentive Customer Service r moo: For technical support, product samples, installation advice, or to reach your local wallboard and finishing expert, call our customer service team toll free at — 800 -233 -8990. Mai 5 :11 1 - .�•�.. ����. t•� is -:...: .. ��? ':_ _. X: - -��. PRODUCT / DESCRIPTION CORE THICKNESS WIDTH LENGTH EDGE DETAIL ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD face paper and liner back paper. Used for STANDARD PRODUCTS 54" (1372 mm) 10' (3048 mm) C 36 Tapered Grade R residential or commercial applications. 12' (3658 mm) ProRoc® REGULAR Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 10'(3048 mm) Tapered virtually eliminating ridging and beading. Type VII bathrooms, laundries, utility rooms, 12'(3658 mm) Interior gypsum board with a solid set Grade W and kitchens. 8' (2438 mm) gypsum core enclosed in ivory- colored 1/4 (6.35 mm) " 4' (1219 mm) 9' (2743 mm) Square C 1396 SS L 30D face paper and liner back paper. Used Regular 3/8" (9.5 mm) 54" (1372 mm) 10' (3048 mm) Tapered C 36 Type III for interior walls and ceilings in standard 1/2" (12.7 mm) Type X 12' (3658 mm) specially formulated core for use in Grade R residential or commercial applications. fire - resistive designs. ProRoc® EVENWALL'" RESISTANT PRODUCTS Interior gypsum board with a solid set gypsum core enclosed in ivory- colored 8' (2438 mm) Rounded SS -L -30D face paper and liner back paper. Used for Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 9'(2743 mm) & C 1396 Type III interior walls and ceilings in standard 54" (1372 mm) 10' (3048 mm) C 36 Tapered Grade R residential or commercial applications. 12' (3658 mm) Evenwall edge results in stronger joints, Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 10'(3048 mm) Tapered virtually eliminating ridging and beading. Type VII ProRoc® EVENWALU" TYPE X Interior gypsum board having a specially formulated core for use in fire - resistive, Type X designs. Used for interior walls and ceilings in residential and commercial aplications requiring extended fire resistance ratings. Evenwall edge results in stronger joints, virtually eliminating ridging and beading. For Fire Safety Information, see www.certainteed.com ProRocO TYPE X Interior gypsum board having a specially formulated core for use in fire - resistive, Type X designs. Used for interior walls and ceilings in residential and commercial applications requiring extended fire resistance ratings. For Fire Safety Information, see www.certainteed.com ProRoc® TYPE C Interior gypsum boards consisting of a solid set, fire - resistive, Type C gypsum core enclosed in ivory- colored face paper and a strong liner back paper. ProRoc' Type C board features a specially formulated enhanced Type X core providing fire resistance ratings when used in tested assemblies. Used for interior walls and ceilings in residential and commercial applications requiring extended fire resistance ratings. 8' (2438 mm) Rounded C 1396 SS -L -30D Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 9'(2743 mm) & C 36 Type III 54' (1372 mm) 10' (3048 mm) Tapered Type X Grade X 12' (3658 mm) 8'(2438 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 9'(2743 mm) Tapered C 36 Type III 54' (1372 mm) 10'(3048 mm) Type X Grade X 12'(3658 mm) 8'(2438 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D Type C 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 9'(2743 mm) Tapered C 36 Type III 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 10'(3048 mm) Type X Grade X 12'(3658 mm) EL r-�IVIOISTURE RESISTANT PRODUCTS ProRoc® MOISTURE RESISTANT 8' (2438 mm) Water resistant gypsum board used 9'(2743 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D behind tiles in humid areas such as Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 10'(3048 mm) Tapered C 630 Type VII bathrooms, laundries, utility rooms, 12'(3658 mm) Grade W and kitchens. ProRoc® MOISTURE RESISTANT TYPE X 8' (2438 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D Provides the same protection as 9'(2743 mm) Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 10 (3048 mm) Tapered ' C 630 Type VII ProRoc® Moisture Resistant plus a © 12' (3658 mm) Type X Grade W, X specially formulated core for use in fire - resistive designs. aFire Resistant Rated Product. © Moisture Resistant Product. Custom lengths available. Check with Sales Representative. *CertainTeed certifies that the products described herein meet or exceed listed ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications. 3 PRODUCT / DESCRIPTION CORE THICKNESS WIDTH LENGTH EDGE ASTM* FEDERAL* DETAIL STANDARD ® GlasRoc® SHEATHING Weather- resistant gypsum sheathing produced with CertainTeed's proprietary Enhanced Glass Reinforced Gypsum Regular 1/2 "(12.7 m m) Technology. Appropriate substrate in EIF g Systems, one -coat and conventional stucco systems, traditional cladding systems, exterior ceilings, soffit systems and exterior curved applications. GlasRoc® SHEATHING TYPE X Weather- resistant Type X gypsum © sheathing produced with CertainTeed's proprietary Enhanced Glass Reinforced Gypsum Technology. Appropriate substrate in EIF Systems, one -coat and conventional stucco systems, traditional cladding systems, exterior ceilings, soffit systems and exterior curved applications. ©Pro Roc® SHEATHING TREATED CORE A water - repellent gypsum sheathing for application to the outside of building framing members, and serves as the base for the exterior wall finish. Used as attachments to the outside of exterior wall framing as a water - resistant underlayment for various siding materials. 4 8' (2438 mm) ** Square C 1177 (1219 mm) Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) (1219 mm) 8' (2438 mm) ** Square C 1177 8' (2438 mm) Square SS -L -30D Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 2' (610 mm)' 9' (2743 mm) Tongue C 1396 Type II 4' (1219 mm) 10'(3048 mm) and C 79 Grade W 12'(3658 mm) Groove' '2'x 8' Tongue and Groove at Nashville, AR plant only. Pro Roc® SHEATHING 8' (2438 mm) TREATED CORE TYPE X C 1396 SS -L -30D Provides the same base plus a Type X 5/8 "(15.9 m 10' (304m) 4' (1219 mm) 9' ((304 mm) 8 mm) Square C 79 Type II ® specially formulated core for use 12'(3658 mm) Type X Grade W, X in fire - resistive designs. Pro Roc® EXTERIOR SOFFIT BOARD Used for the underside of eaves, 8' (2438 mm) C 1396 _ carport ceilings, canopies and Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 12'(3658 mm) Tapered C 931 other commercial and residential exterior applications with indirect exposure to the weather. ElPro Roc® EXTERIOR SOFFIT BOARD TYPE X C 1396 Provides the same use as Exterior Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 8' (2438 mm) Tapered C 931 — Gypsum Soffit Board plus a 12' (3658 mm) Type X specially formulated core for use in fire - resistive designs. © Fire Resistant Rated Product. © Moisture Resistant Product. Custom lengths available. Check with Sales Representative. *CertainTeed certifies that the products described herein meet or exceed listed ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications. * *Other lengths available. Ask your CertainTeed sales representative. PRODUCT / DESCRIPTION CORE THICKNESS WIDTH LENGTH EDGE DETAIL ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD SPECIALTY PRODUCTS Pro Roc® INTERIOR CEILING A solid set, gypsum core enclosed in ivory - colored face paper and a 8' (2438 mm) SS -L -30D strong liner back paper, for use Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 12' (3658 mm) Tapered C 1396 Type III on interior ceilings perpendicular 14' (4267 mm) C 1395 Grade R to framing spaced up to 24" o.c. Gypsum core is comprised of special sag- resistant additives. ProRoc® VENEER PLASTER BASE 8' (2438 mm) Interior gypsum board with a Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 9' (2743 mm) Square C 1396 SS -L -30D Type VI specially formulated face paper for 10' (3048 mm) Tapered C 588 Grade R use under veneer plaster finishes. 12' (3658 mm) ProRoc® VENEER PLASTER BASE 8' (2438 mm) TYPE X 9((304 mm) Square C 1396 SS -L -30D Provides the same use plus a Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 10' (304 8 mm) Tapered C 588 Type VI specially formulated core for use 12' (3658 mm) Type X Grade X in fire-resistive designs. ProRoc® VENEER PLASTER BASE TYPE C Provides the same use plus a Type C 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 8' (2438 mm) Square C 1396 C 588 SS -L -30D Type VI specially formulated enhanced 12' (3658 mm) Tapered Type X Grade X Type X core for use in fire - resistive designs. Pro Roc® 1/4" FLEX 1/4" Flex is ideal for curved walls, staircases and ceilings as well as 8' (2438 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D column enclosures in low and Regular 1/4 "(6.35 mm) 4'(1219 mm) 12' (3658 mm) Tapered C 36 Type III high -rise residences, sport Grade R facilities, schools, condominiums and office areas. Pro Roc® BACKER BOARD 8' (2438 mm) Used as the first layer in multi -layer Regular 1/2 "(12 . mm) 9' (2743 mm) 4' (1219 mm) Square Sq C 1396 IV V Type IV Type systems or as the base layer i n 10' (3048 mm) C 442 Grade R ceilings for adhesive the application. 12' (3658 mm) Pro Roc® BACKER BOARD 8' (2438 mm) TYPE X 9' (2743 mm) C 1396 SS -L -30D Provides the same base as Regular Backer Board plus it has Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 10' (3048 mm) 4' (1219 mm) 12' (3658 mm) Square C 442 Type IV a specially formulated core for 14' (4267 mm) Type X Grade X use in fire - resistive designs. 16' (4877 mm) QFire Resistant Rated Product. © Moisture Resistant Product. Custom lengths available. Check with Sales Representative. *CertainTeed certifies that the products described herein meet or exceed listed ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications. PRODUCT/ DESCRIPTION CORE THICKNESS L HIGH PERFORMANCE:` GlasRoc® SHEATHING Weather- resistant gypsum sheathing produced with CertainTeed's proprietary Enhanced Glass Reinforced Gypsum Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) Technology. Appropriate substrate in EIF g Systems, one -coat and conventional stucco systems, traditional cladding systems, exterior ceilings, soffit systems and exterior curved applications. ®GlasRoc® SHEATHING TYPE X Weather- resistant Type X gypsum ® sheathing produced with CertainTeed's proprietary Enhanced Glass Reinforced Gypsum Technology. Appropriate substrate in EIF Systems, one -coat and conventional stucco systems, traditional cladding systems, exterior ceilings, soffit systems and exterior curved applications. ProRoc® ABUSE RESISTANT Interior gypsum board specially designed to provide abuse resistance in wall applications. WIDTH LENGTH EDGE ASTM* FEDERAL* DETAIL STANDARD 4 8'(2438 mm) ** Square C 1177 — (1219 mm) — Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) (1219 mm) 8'(2438 mm) ** Square C 1177 — Regular 1/2 "(12.7 mm) 4 (1219 mm) 8'(2438 mm) SS -L -30D 9'(2743 mm) Tapered C 1396 Type III 10' (3048 mm) C 36 Grade R 12'(3658 mm) / ProRoc® ABUSE RESISTANT TYPE X 8'(2438 mm) a Provides the same use as ProRoC C 1396 SS -L -30D (1219 Abuse Resistant plus a specially Type X 5/8 "(15.9 mm) 9 9'(2743 mm) Tapered C 36 Type III formulated Type X core for use in mm) 10' ((304 3048 mm) 12'(3658 mm) Type X Grade X fire - resistive designs. ® ProRoe SHAFTLINER TYPE X Gypsum 5haftwall Systems have replaced traditional masonry for interior vertical enclosures, stairwells, elevator enclosures, mechanical chases and area separation walls. Some inherent advantages of gypsum shaftwall and area separation wall systems are: light weight construction, thinner walls, ease and speed of installation and clean up, and cost effective construction. 2' 8' (2438 mm) Modified C 1396 SS -L -30D Type X 1 " (25.4 mm) (610 mm) 12' (3658 mm) Tapered Type X Grade I X 0 Fire Resistant Rated Product. ® Moisture Resistant Product. *CertainTeed certifies that the products described herein meet or exceed listed ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications. * *Other lengths available. Ask your CertianTeed sales representative. LIGHTWEIGHT ProFin® Ready -Mixed Joint Compounds HEAVYWEIGHT MULTI - PURPOSE LIGHTWEIGHT HEAVYWEIGHT FEDERAL* ASTM* CARTONS CARTONS CARTONS PAILS PAILS STANDARD Ready -mixed joint compounds are proFin® LITE Taping ProFin ®Taping ProFin® Extra ProFin® LITE ProFin® pre -mixed high performance products Multi- Purpose LITE All- Purpose All- Pupose designed for professional applicators, proFin® LITE Finishing ProFin® Finishing ProFin ®ONE ProFin® LITE ProFin® g C 475 SS -J -57013 and have a six month shelf life from g Multi- Purpose Multi- Purpose Multi- Pupose date of manufacture. ProFin® LITE All-Purpose ProFin ®AII- Purpose ProFin® Brand Setting Compounds PRODUCT NAME DRYING TIME ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD Lightweight, low shrinkage, sandable setting powders that offer a choice of ProFin® LITE Sand 5 5 -10 minutes drying times ranging from 5 minutes ProFin® LITE Sand 20 15 -25 minutes to 240 minutes, and have a six month ProFin® LITE Sand 45 37 -52 minutes C 475 SS -J -5708 shelf life from date of manufacture. ProFin® LITE Sand 90 75 -105 minutes Ideal for heavy fills and required for proFin® LITE Sand 210 180 -240 minutes exterior soffit finishing. ProFin® Brand Wall & Ceiling Spray Textures PRODUCT NAME TEXTURE TYPE ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD Suitable for all unaggregated interior spray patterns and equipment, ProFin® Heavy -Tex" Spray Texture (Green Bag) Heavy including splatter, knockdown and ProFin® Multi -Tex " Spray Texture (Red Bag) Medium – – orange peel designs. Twelve month ProFin® Easi -Tex'" Spray Texture (Blue Bag) Light shelf life from date of manufacture. Double Dut ® Hardwall Plasters APPEARANCE y SHELF LIFE DRY WEIGHT DRYING TEMPERATURE ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD Use as the basecoat in two -coat C 11 interior plastering and for both the White to tan 3 months from date 55 lbs/cu ft 60° – 801 C 28 SS- P- 0040213 scratch and brown coats in three- powder of manufacture . . . 16° – 27C C 35 Type II coat work. C 842 Perlited Pre -Mixed Gypsum Plaster APPEARANCE SHELF LIFE DRY WEIGHT DRYING TEMPERATURE ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD Contains expanded perlite aggregate and is 50% lighter than conventional gypsum plaster. It also offers greater C 28 fire resistance and higher thermal White powder 3 months from date 60 ° -80 °F 50 lbs/cu . . ft. ° °C SS- P- 0040213 C and acoustical insulation values. Use of manufacture 16 -27 Type e I as the basecoat in two -coat interior 4 2 C 84 plastering and for both the scratch and brown coats in three -coat work. 1 Not available in all areas. Consult your CertainTeed sales representative for availability in your area. JOINT r"r FINISHING • RNER REINFORC LENGTH X WIDTH LENGTH X WIDTH (METRIC) ASTM* FEDERAL* STANDARD Marco® Spark -Perf® Tape Spark - perforated tape for easy pass- through of joint compound (mud) and elimination of air bubbles. 75' x 2- 1/16" 22.9m x 52.4mm Manufactured from fibered -paper with added tensile 250' x 2- 1/16" 76.23m x 52.4mm C 475 SS -J -57013 strength to help prevent tearing, wrinkling or stretching. 500' x 2- 1/16" 152.4m x 52.4mm Marco® Fiberglass Tape Self adhesive fiberglass tape for easy application, and elimination of blisters and bonding. (For use with 300' x 1 7/8" 92.4m x 47.6mm C 475 SS -J -57013 setting compounds only.) 500' x 1 -7/8" 152.4m x 47.6mm Marco® Metal Flex Corner Tape Flexible tape for inside and outside angles. 100' x 2- 1/16" 30.8m x 52.4mm C 1047 — Foldable to any angle. 25' x 2- 1/16" 7.7m x 52.4mm Marco® Plastic Flex Corner Tape Easy to install, flexibe platic tape for inside 100' x 2 -1/16 30.8m x 52.4mm C 1047 and outside angles. — *CertainTeed certifies that the products described herein meet or exceed listed ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications Product Assurances & Technical Support Test Standards Fire resistance and sound tests are conducted in accordance with ASTM E119 (NFPA 251, ANSI/UL 263, UBC 7 -1, CAN/ULC- S101M) and ASTM E 90, respectively, and no warranty is made other than conformance to the standard under which the assembly was tested. Minor discrepancies may exist in the values of ratings, attributable to changes in materials and standards, as well as differences between testing facilities. Assemblies are listed as "combustible" (wood framing) and "noncombustible" (concrete and/or steel construction). Combustible Assemblies These include all wood stud walls, wood joist or truss ceilings and floors consisting of tongue- and - groove, plywood, or OSB sub - flooring and finish flooring or a poured gypsum floor underlayment over wood structural panel sub - flooring. Floor assembly may be used over the wood joists with ceilings as detailed in GA and UL references. Noncombustible Assemblies These include steel studs, bar joist ceilings with poured concrete floors over metal lath or steel. Also included are steel beams and steel columns. Ceilings for all 1 -hour, 1 12 -hour, and 2 -hour noncombustible floor and ceiling assemblies with 2" or 2 12" concrete floor or metal lath over steel bar joists, unless otherwise specified, may be directly attached or suspended as detailed in GA and UL references. RF Fire Resistance CertainTeed's ProRoc' Type X and Type C and G1asRoc® Type X products are Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for USA and Canada and carries the UL Label for 1 -, 2 -, 3- and 4 -hour Fire Resistance in various designs. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. tests have proven that joint finishing is not required for the rating in certain assemblies using ProRoc' Type X and Type C and GlasRoc' Type X products. For fire resistance ratings, refer to the Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual GA -600, and the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Surface Burning Characteristics ProRoe Gypsum Boards have a Flame Spread rating of 15 and Smoke Developed rating of 0, and GlasRoc Sheathing products have a Flame Spread Rating of 0 and a Smoke Developed Rating of 0, in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL 723, UBC 8 -1, NFPA 255, CAN/ULC- S102M). Sound Characteristics The degree to which assemblies block the passage of sound is measured by Sound Transmission Class (STC) per ASTM E 90 and E 413, which is a single figure rating derived from the sound transmission loss values over a range of sound frequencies. All sound -rated assemblies require caulking at the top and bottom, and other locations where sound leaks may develop. For sound characteristics, refer to the Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual GA -600. Storage Gypsum boards must be stored in an area that protects it from adverse weather conditions, condensation and other forms of moisture and direct sunlight. Boards should be neatly stacked flat with care taken to prevent sagging or damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Storing board lengthwise leaning against the framing is not recommended. Boards should be carried, not dragged, to place of installation to prevent damaging finished edges. More information Consult the Gypsum Association publication "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board," GA -216, for detailed application and finishing procedures. For full details of fire and sound ratings, consult test references listed for system assemblies. ASK ABOUT OUR OTHER CERTAINTEED PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS: EXTERIOR: ROOFING • SIDING • WINDOWS • FENCE • DECKING • RAILING • MILLWORK • FOUNDATIONS • PIPE INTERIOR: INSULATION • WALLS • CEILINGS CertainTeed Corporation Professional: 800 - 233 -8990 P.O. Box 860 Consumer: 800 - 782 -8777 Valley Forge, PA 19482 wwwcertainteed.com CertainTeed Cq Characteristics, properties or performance of materials or systems manufactured by CertainTeed herein described are derived from data obtained under controlled test conditions. CertainTeed makes no warranties, express or implied, as to their characteristics, properties or performance under any variations from such conditions in actual construction. CertainTeed assumes no responsibility for the effects of structural movement. r"' ® CertainTeed and the tag line "Quality made certain. Satisfaction guaranteed." are trademarks of CertainTeed Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of BPB plc or its affiliates and related companies. NOTICE: The information in this document is subject to change without notice. CertainTeed assumes no responsibility for any errors that may inadvertently appear in this document. ©01/07 CertainTeed Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. CTG- 2323/10W01 -2007 BEADEX'Brand paper faced y metal bead io , I 010.ort For the most beautiful, cost - effective, problem -free corners, the logical choice is BEADEX paper faced metal bead and trim. Fast, easy installation means reduced labor costs, while superior product performance eliminates costly job callbacks, saving money and ensuring customer satisfaction. With the tape -on versions, nailing is not required, so installation and corner alignment are easier, and there are no nails to pop when wood framing shrinks. The paper tape covering ensures excellent adhesion of joint compounds, textures and paints for a strong, smooth finish. BEADEX paper faced metal bead and trim provides superior resistance to edge cracking and chipping for a look that stays beautiful despite the stresses of normal building movement and everyday wear and tear. In fact, USG warrants that BEADEX paper faced metal tape -on bead and trim will not edge crack for the lifetime of the structure using recommended application techniques (refer to warranties J1713 (tape -on bead) or J1720 (nail -on bead) for full warranty details). The unique "nose coating" on the paper tape covering resists scuffing and fuzzing from knives and sanding. Nail -on versions of the bead and trim are designed for applications where nailing or other mechanical fastening is desired. They use the same paper faced metal technology to provide excellent bond adhesion qualities for joint compounds, textures and paints. For technical product information, refer to BEADEX paper faced metal bead and trim submittal sheet (J1646). BEADE%® Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Tdm Products Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................... 900 and Offset Outside BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Use for 90° outside corners. Suitable for use on any thickness of wallboard. Corner Bead outside corner, Tape -On Bead Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. (BI W, B1XW, BI Super Wide) BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Designed with a wider 1 " by 1 " profile that's easier to install on all cut edges. Reduced Outside Corner, Tape -On Bead bead height results in less use of joint compound. In most cases, reduces the amount of (MICRO BeADTm) compound needed by one coat. Standard lengths: 8',10'. Dimensions Style A B C ................................................................................................................................... ............................... MICRO BEAD 3/4" \ 15/16" 15/16" 3/4" /A D� BEADEx Paper Faced Metal Designed for 135° corners. Offset bead is designed to give a true offset corner with a Offset outside Comer, Tape -on Bead smaller bead height requiring less compound to finish. Can be used on any thickness of (B1 OS) wallboard. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. Dimensions Style A B C ............................... - B1 OS 5/8" 3/4" 1/2" 5/8" Not /e: OS = Offset BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Use for applications where nailing or other mechanical fastening is required. Has wider Outside Corner, Nail -On Bead flanges for easier nailing and maximum corner coverage. Can be fastened to 112" or 5/8" (ULTRA BEAD TM) drywall with nails, staples, or screws. Does not meetASTM C1047. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. Dimensions She ....................... . A ............................... B .............. .................................................. ............................... ULTRA BEAD 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" <, e i BEADEx® Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim Products 3 Dimensions Style A B C D .................................................................................................................................. B1 W ................................................................................................................................ 3/4" 13/16" 9/16" ............................... 3/4" ............................... B1 W EL ................................................................................................................................... 3/4" 11/16" 11/16" 3/4" ............................... B1 XW 5/8" 15/16" 11/16" 5/8" ................................................................................................................................... B1XW EL ................................................................................................................................... 5/8" 13/16" 13/16" ............................... 5/8" ............................... B1XW NB 5/8" 15/16" 11/16" 5/8" .. .........................13 /16' ..................... 13/ 1. 5... ....................5/8'....... A / D> �(g / \,C, B1 Super Wide* 11/16" 1- 1/16" 1- 1/16" 11/16" Note: XW = Extra Wide; EL = Even Leg; NB = No Bead. V * Does not meet ASTM C1047 BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Designed with a wider 1 " by 1 " profile that's easier to install on all cut edges. Reduced Outside Corner, Tape -On Bead bead height results in less use of joint compound. In most cases, reduces the amount of (MICRO BeADTm) compound needed by one coat. Standard lengths: 8',10'. Dimensions Style A B C ................................................................................................................................... ............................... MICRO BEAD 3/4" \ 15/16" 15/16" 3/4" /A D� BEADEx Paper Faced Metal Designed for 135° corners. Offset bead is designed to give a true offset corner with a Offset outside Comer, Tape -on Bead smaller bead height requiring less compound to finish. Can be used on any thickness of (B1 OS) wallboard. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. Dimensions Style A B C ............................... - B1 OS 5/8" 3/4" 1/2" 5/8" Not /e: OS = Offset BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Use for applications where nailing or other mechanical fastening is required. Has wider Outside Corner, Nail -On Bead flanges for easier nailing and maximum corner coverage. Can be fastened to 112" or 5/8" (ULTRA BEAD TM) drywall with nails, staples, or screws. Does not meetASTM C1047. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. Dimensions She ....................... . A ............................... B .............. .................................................. ............................... ULTRA BEAD 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" <, e i BEADEx® Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim Products 3 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................... L Trims BEADEX Paper Faced Metal Use where wallboard abuts with suspended ceilings, beams, plaster, masonry and concrete "L" Shaped, Tape -On Trim walls, as well as untrimmed door and window jambs. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. (134 Series) Dimensions i Style A B C B4(3/8 ") 3/8" 7/8" 1- 1/16" ................................................................................................................................... ............................... 134 (1/2") 1/2" 15/16" 1- 5/16" .................................................................................................................................. ............................... 134 (5/8 ") 5/8" 13/16" 1- 5/16" ................................................................................................................................... ............................... B4 (1 ") 1 " 15/16" 1 -3/8" ................................................................................................................................... ............................... 134 NB (3/8 ") 3/8" 7/8" 1- 1/16" ................................................................................................................................. . .. ............................... B4 NB (1 /2 ") 1./.2 " ......................... 15/16" 1 5/16" ..................................................................................................................................... 134 NB (5/8 ") 5/8" 13/16" 1 5/16" Note: NB = No Bead LB C� BEADEx Paper Faced Metal Provides a serrated paper strip that protects the adjacent surface of ceiling or wall Premasked "L '- Shaped intersection during finishing and decorating applications. Simply tear away the protective Tape -On Trim (Premasked L) strip after the job is completed, leaving virtually no clean up to the adjacent surface. No bead. Standard lengths: 8',10'. Dimensions Style A B C D Premasked L (1 /2 ") 1/2" 7/8" 1- 5/16" 1 -11 /16" tear off ............................................................................................................................... ............................... Premasked L (5/8 ") 5/8" 3/4" 1 5/16" 1 -11 /16" tear off D (tear otfl �A r C BEADEx® Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim Products 8 Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................... J Trims BeADex Paper Faced Metal Tape -on "J" trim completely surrounds the rough edge of the wallboard, providing a strong "J "- Shaped, Tape -On Trim (139) and clean corner. Tape -on application eliminates frustration with nailing and nail shrink back. Can be used for finishing off bifold closet doors, as well as under all door and window encasements, and to finish rough drywall ends. Does not meet ASTM C1047. Standard lengths: 7', 8',10'. Dimensions Style B C D ................................�.A ................................................................................................... ............................... 139J (1/2") 1/2' 9/16" 5/8" 1 -1 /8" .................................................................................................................................... ............................... 139J (5/8 ") 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 1 -1 /8" �C�_ Reveal Trims BEADEX Paper Faced Metal This modified tape -on "L" trim solves a variety of problems associated with reveal details Reveal, Tape -On Trim (Reveal NB) on soffits, wall areas, ceilings, light boxes and other interior architectural components. Reveal NB features a paper flange on both trim legs. The additional paper flange eliminates the need to caulk the edge of reveal details, providing a cleaner and straighter line. Available only in No Bead. Standard lengths: 8',10'. Dimensions .Style . A C D .......................................................................................................................... ............................... Reveal NB (1/2") 15/16" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" .................................................................................................................................... ............................... Reveal NB (5/8 ") 15/16" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" Note: NB = No Bead B --D--I C-AD� Shadowline Tape -On Reveal Trim Designed to provide a reveal or " Shadowline" where wallboard abuts with a suspended ceiling. Standard lengths: 8',10'. Dimensions Style B C D .................................................................................................................................... ............................... SL (1/2") 1/2" 1/2" 15/16" 1-1/4" .................................................................................................................................... ............................... SL (5/8 ") 5/8" 5/8" 7/8" 15/16" B i �—A—� BEADEX® Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim Products 9 Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................... Tape -On Flexible BEADEx Flex Metal Tape, Can be formed to fit any inside or outside angle. Available in 2-1/16" width that has two 7/16" Outside and Inside Tape -On Flexible Corner wide galvanized, rust - resistant steel strips with a 1/16" gap between the strips. For maximum Comer Bead (Flex rape) strength and coverage, the tape is also available in a 4" width that has two 7/8" wide galvanized steel strips with a 1/16" gap between the strips. Product is suitable for any thickness of wallboard. Does not meet ASTM C1047. Available in 100' rolls. - Dimensions Style A ................................................................................................................................. B C D ............................... Flex Tape (2- 1/16 ") 9/16" .................................................................................................................................. 7/16" 7/16" 9/16" ............................... Flex Tape (4 ") 1 -1/8" 7/8" 7/8" 1 -1/8" variable 45° -180° y \�� B l C B D _A 'a"able 45° -180° BEAADFx B1 Flex Metal Proprietary, style designed specifically to make straight, strong outside corner angles. Corner, Tape -On Outside Flexible Available in 3" width and manufactured with two 3/4" galvanized steel strips laminated to Corner (B1 Beaded Flex) paper tape with a flexible gap between the strips. 131 beaded flex has a unique raised bead (nose) in the flexible gap to provide faster, easier finishing with joint compound. For use on any wallboard thickness. Standard lengths: 8', 9',10'. - Dimensions Style A B C D . 131 BeadedFlex(3') 11/16" 3/4" 3/4" . ............................... 11/16" / variable \ / 45° -180° \ RRRA. / ` / �D!!! �( �B, / \ ,C BEADS& Brand Paper Faced Metal Bead and Tdrn Products 10 usgxom USGAYOU Samples /Literature E -mail samplit @usg.com Samples /Literature Fax 888 874.2348 950.3839 SAFTEY FIRST Follow good safety and industrial hygiene practices during handling and installing all products and systems. Take necessary precautions and wear the appropriate personal protective equipment as needed. Read material safety data sheets and related literature on products before specification and /or installation. Trademarks The following trademarks used herein are owned by United States Gypsum Company: BABY BULL, BEADEx, DANISH, MICRO BEAD, SANTA FE, ULTRA BEAD, USG, USG in stylized letters. Notice We shall not be liable for incidental and consequential damages, directly or indirectly sustained, nor for any loss caused by application of these goods not in accordance with current printed instructions or for other than the intended use. Our liability is expressly limited to replacement of defective goods. Any claim shall be deemed waived unless made in writing to us within thirty (30) days from date it was or reasonably should have been discovered. Note All products described here may not be available in all geographic markets. Consult your local sales office or representative for more information. Manufactured by ssaimv. 11 t 0 UX United States Gypsum Company 201 1, United states Gypsum company 550 West Adams St. Printed in U.S.A. Chicago, IL 60661 GREEN GLUE. noiseproofing compound Product Descriotion Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound is used between two or more sheets of commonly specified building materials such as drywall, plywood, OSB and poured gypsum flooring. One of the two laminated surfaces must be porous. Typical applications are for wall, floor and ceiling systems to significantly reduce unwanted sound transmission. Limitations • Green Glue is used as a constrained layer, not a coating. • Use with at least one porous surface • Green Glue is not a sealant or adhesive • Green Glue is for interior use Product Data Active Content 68 % +/ -5% Working Time 30 minutes Viscosity Light Paste 65,000 cps Color Green Odor Mild, none after drying VOC <2 g/1 Flash Point >300 degrees F (149 C) Application Temp 40 to 90 degrees F (4 to 32 C) Job Name: Contractor: Data and Submittal Performance • Green Glue is a sound damping material commonly used to isolate sound between rooms • Water based, low emitting material with VOC <2 g/1 • Used with common building materials • Easily dispensed with a standard caulking gun • Will not contribute to mold growth • Class A surface burning characteristics • Does not create a vapor retarder Technical Data Flame spread and smoke development - Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound has been tested according to ASTM E 84. Flame Spread = 15 Smoke Density =50 Mold Growth - Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound has been tested according to ASTM D 3273 for mold growth resulting in a rating of 10 for complete resistance. Water Vapor Transmission - Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound has been tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 for water vapor transmission and shown to not form a vapor retarder with a typical value of 3.1 perms. Sound Tests - Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound has been tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 for airborne noise and ASTM E 492 for impact noise. Signature: Date: Green Glue Company 800.233.8990 www.greengluecompany.com NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Tile for wall wainscot applications using thin -set application method; and ceramic accessories. 2. Floor tile, including base tile where indicated. B. Conform to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile, A collection. 2. ANSI A108.4 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or Water - Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 3. ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex - Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. 5. ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. 6. ANSI A118.4 - Latex - Portland Cement Mortar. 7. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. 8. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 9. ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. B. Tile Council of America: 1. TCNA — Tile Council of North America, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Product Data: Submit instructions for using grouts and adhesives. E. Samples: Submit mounted tile and grout on one plywood panels, sized to illustrate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series /A118 Series. Tiling 093000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect adhesives and grouts from freezing or overheating. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Do not install adhesives and grouts in unventilated environment. C. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS — None required PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE COMPONENTS A. Ceramic Tile (CT -W): ANSI A137.1, conforming to the following: 1. Manufacturer: TBD 2. Manufacturer Location: TBD 3. Product: TBD 4. Size: Varies 5. Tile Colors: Colors as selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full color line 6. Top Edge of Wainscot: Bullnosed 7. Base row at floor: NA 8. Internal Corner: Coved 9. External Corner: Bullnosed B. Floor Tile (TL): ANSI A137.1, conforming to the following: 1. Manufacturer: TBD 2. Manufacturer Location: TBD 3. Product: TBD 4. Size: Varies 5. Tile Colors: Color as selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full color line 6. Base: Wood per Section 06 2000. C. Wall Backer Board: Coated glass mat, water - resistant gypsum backer board per Section 09 2116 — Gypsum Board Assemblies. Tiling 093000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mortar /Adhesive Options: 1. Dry set mortar: ANSI A118.1 2. Latex Portland Cement: ANSI A118.4 3. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1 Type I; thin -set bond type. B. Grout Materials: 1. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install tile according to TCNA Handbook Method W245 -09. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align base joints. D. Place tile with joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch. E. Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. 1. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J. Grout tile joints. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. END OF SECTION Tiling 093000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Refer to Section 0135 26 LEED Project Requirements C. Section includes: Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim; acoustic tile. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation. 2. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. 3. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 4. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 5. Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. 3. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 4. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 6. ASTM E580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 7. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association: 1. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. C. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Suspension System: Rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1: 240. B. Suspension system to be provided with additional unistrut framing members to trapeze around mechanical units. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 0135 26 and 0135 29 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. Indicate method of suspension where interference exists. D. Product Data: Submit data on metal grid system components, acoustic units. E. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. F. Samples: Submit two samples each, min. 6 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, perimeter molding. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Date Submitted Date Approved 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to CISCA requirements. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Provide seismic design of suspended ceiling under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Washington. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Section 0110 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing. B. Sequence Work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS— None required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries 2. Celotex 3. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form.. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. ACT -1 - Acoustic Tile: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Armstrong Ultima Open Plan #1944 2. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 4. Composition: Mineral. 5. Light Reflectance: 89 percent. 6. NRC Range: 0.75 7. CAC Range: 35 8. Edge: Beveled Tegular 9. Surface Color: White 10. Features: Anti - microbial, humidity resistance 11. Fire Classification: Class A 12. VOC: None added B. Suspension Grid: 1. Non -fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, heavy duty; exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. 2. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch 4. Grid Finish: White color 5. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, hold down clips, and 2" angle edge moulding required for suspended grid system. Accessories to for compliance with seismic requirements. 6. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized or primed steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Touch -up Paint: Type and color to match acoustic and grid units. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified. B. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceilings which remain or are to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Lay -In Grid Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C635, ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this section. 2. Install system in accordance with ASTM E580. 3. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/360 maximum. 4. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. 5. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 6. Install hanger clips during steel deck erection. Install additional hangers and inserts as required. 7. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 8. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners when weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 10. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 11. Perimeter Molding: a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces into bed of acoustic sealant. b. Use longest practical lengths. C. Miter corners. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 12. Form expansion joints. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.4 LATERAL FORCE BRACING A. Provide bracing per 2006 IBC, for suspended ceiling systems. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.6 SCHEDULES Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plan. Coordinate with installation of solatubes, mechanical and electrical work. END OF SECTION Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Refer to Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Section Includes: 1. Linoleum sheet flooring, with self -coved base or rubber base. 2. Floor sealer and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM F1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. C. Conform to Washington State Barrier Free Requirements, WAC 51 -20. D. ASTM C501 - Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. E. ASTM D2047 - Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish- Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. F. ASTM E648/ NFPA253- Critical Radiant FluxofFloor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. G. ASTM F1303 - Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. H. ASTM F710 - Concrete or other monolithic floors. I. RFCI Standard Slab Moisture Test Method (Calcium Chloride Method). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0130 00 - Submittals. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns and colors available. Provide MSDS demonstrating VOC compliance. D. Samples: Submit one set of samples, illustrating colors and pattern for each floor material specified. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 - Materials & Equipment. B. Materials shall be delivered in good condition to the job site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with original labels. Material shall be stored in a fully enclosed, weathertight area and heated to a minimum of 68 degrees F. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. Resilient Flooring 096500 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. C. Areas shall be clean, fully enclosed, weathertight, and heated to a minimum of 68 degrees F for a minimum of 72 hours, prior to, during and after installation is completed. D. All floors shall be tested for moisture content using a calcium chloride moisture test and shall not exceed the limits of the product being installed. E. All sub - floors shall be rigid, smooth, flat and level, and free of dirt, grease, was, paint, and old adhesive residue. 1.6 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing. PART 2 PRODUCTS — (TO BE CONFIRMED AND FINALIZED BY GRETCHEN STURDEVANT INTERIORS) 2.1 MATERIALS — LINOLEUM A. Sheet Flooring (RF): MARMORETTE with NATURCote by Armstrong. 1. Natural, homogeneous linoleum made of linseed oil, wood flour, rosin binders, dry pigments, mixed and calendered onto a natural jute backing. 2. Thickness: 0.080 inches 3. Sheet Width: 6.5 feet 4. Color: LP066 "Oak Brown" B. Accessories: 1. Heat welding thread: Color to match flooring 2. Adhesive: S -760 (plus heat weld), as recommended by manufacturer (VOC Compliant) 3. Finish Coating: NaturCote 4. Cap tile receiver: Standard vinyl cap tile moulding for installation of coved flooring at ceramic tile wainscot. 5. Rubber Base: As indicated on Finish Legend. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify new and existing floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. B. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. Resilient Flooring 096500 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Remove existing glue. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. D. Conduct calcium chloride moisture tests (one for every 1,000 sf of flooring). Limits must not exceed that of product to be installed. E. Send copies of all moisture tests to Architect's office. F. Moisture Testing: Moisture emissions from concrete subfloors must not exceed 3 Ibs per 1000sf per 24 hours for acrylic adhesive and 5lbs for polyurethane adhesive via the Calcium Chloride Test Method (ASTM F1869). If subfloor moisture exceeds the allowable maximum for installing flooring, consult manufacturer. G. Underlayment and Patching Compounds: Use only gray colored Portland cement based underlayments; patching compounds are used for filling cracks, holes and leveling. White gypsum materials are not acceptable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install full spread /S -760 and heat weld seams. C. Properly acclimate the area to approximately 67 -83 degrees Fahrenheit with a relative humidity of approximately 50 -55 %. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. F. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. G. Install all rolls and cuts in consecutive order. H. Coved Installation: Where flooring is coved up wall surfaces and other abutments (Restrooms), installation shall be in accordance with flooring Installation Guide using the following accessories: 1. At wall cladding: Use vinyl cap tile strip. Submit for approval. 2. Install reducer strip at flooring transitions unless butted to carpet surfaces. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 0170 00 - Contract Closeout. B. Immediately remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean and seal floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls. B. Prohibittraffic on floorfinish for 72 hours after installation and priorto initial maintenance procedures. C. Protect floor covering against damage from rolling loads, sharp objects and other abuse. Resilient Flooring 096500 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE The schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to the Drawings and Interior Finish Schedule for items not specifically scheduled. PRODUCTS AND COLORS TO BE CONFIRMED WITH GRETCHEN STURDEVANT INTERIORS. END OF SECTION Resilient Flooring 096500-4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING & COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. B. Sections 01 81 13 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Section 09 21 16 — Gypsum Board Assemblies; includes primer application for level 5 finishes. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coats: Number of coats specified is minimum number acceptable, if full coverage is not obtained with specified number of coats, apply additional coats necessary to produce required finish. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with governing agency's regulations for paint materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300 — Submittal Procedures. B. Refer to Section 018113 - Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data on each type of paint, including MSDS data certifying compliance with low VOC limits. D. Painting Schedule: Each painting system showing types of surfaces, types of paint, number of coats, manufacturer's name and trade name of material to be used. E. Colors Samples: Apply to 8 inch by 10 inch size panels. Opaque finishes on cardboard, other finishes on same material used in Project showing various stages of application. Submit 3 displays of each color, finish, texture, and type. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Delivery: Deliver in unopened containers fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade and color. B. Storage: Store in unopened containers. Store in designated storage space. Keep storage space neat, clean and accessible. Protect floor from spillage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not paint when air is dust -laden or when weather or temperature conditions are unsuitable. Maintain temperatures within building at minimum 60 degrees Fahrenheit during painting and drying periods. Do not paint exterior surfaces in damp or rainy weather, nor when temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Painting and Coating 099000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Stock: Deliver to Owner at Project Site the following quantities of items in size and color distribution as directed. Store in location directed in unopened containers and in manner recommended by manufacturer. 1. One gallon each type and color of paint used on Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Use one of specified manufacturers. Use same manufacturer's products for each system. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide top of line low VOC products complying with Green Seal Standard GS -11 manufactured by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Miller Paint. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin Williams. 4. Parker Paint. 5. Rodda Paint. 2.02 MILDEW RESISTANCE A. Add 4 ounce per gallon fungicidal agent to paint at factory. Clearly indicate on labels that paint is mildew resistant. Provide in the following locations: Janitor Room, Toilet Rooms. 2.03 COLORS A. Special colors as selected; factory mix match; no color matching permitted at job site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examination: Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation 1. General: Remove scale, dirt, dust, grit, rust, wax, grease, efflorescence, loose material, and other foreign matter detrimental to proper adhesion of paint. 2. Cementitious Surfaces a. General: Repair minor cracks and holes; roughen when necessary to assure good adhesion. b. Alkali Conditions: Test surfaces for presence of alkali. If present, neutralize as follows; after drying remove precipitate by brushing. Painting and Coating 099000 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1) Latex Emulsion Finish: Wash surfaces with 4 percent solution of tetrapotassium pyrophosphate; 5 ounces per gallon of water. 2) Oil Paint Finish: Wash surfaces with zinc sulphate solution, 3 pounds of zinc sulphate per gallon of water. 3. Metal Work a. Shop Painted Metal: Touch -up abraded surfaces prior to painting; use same type of paint as shop coat. Feather edge abraded surfaces prior to touch -up. b. Ferrous Metal: Use suitable solvents, tools, and methods to clean surfaces. C. Galvanized Metal 1) Cleaning: Prepare surfaces so prime coat bonds well and adheres permanently. Wash with mineral spirits, or other acceptable solvents. 2) Rust - Inhibitive Wash: Use compatible chemical solution such as phosphoric metal etch. Thoroughly remove solution with water; allow to dry. d. Non - Ferrous Metal: Prepare, clean, and wash surfaces as specified for galvanized metal. 4. Woodwork a. General: Sandpaper surfaces smooth and dust clean before applying primer. Thoroughly clean knots; apply thin coat of knot sealer over surfaces shown to receive opaque finish. b. Back Priming: Back prime surfaces installed against cementitious surfaces using prime coat specified for exposed face of surface; give particular attention to sealing cross - grained surfaces. C. Puttying 1) General: Fill nail holes, cracks, and other depressions flush with putty after prime coat application. Allow putty to dry; sandpaper smooth before applying body coat. 2) For Opaque Finish: Linseed oil type putty. 3) For Other Finishes: Lacquer type putty tinted to match finish coat. B. Protection 1. General: Protect floors and other adjacent work by drop cloths or other suitable coverings. In areas scheduled for painting, maintain wrappings and factory - applied protection provided by other trades. 2. Hardware and Other Obstructions: Remove or protect items such as hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. Disconnect equipment adjacent to walls by workmen skilled in these trades to permit painting of wall surfaces; replace and reconnect after completion of painting. 3. Fire Precaution: At end of each work day, place in metal containers or remove Painting and Coating 099000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 from premises, solvent soaked cloths, waste, and other materials which constitute fire hazard. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Thoroughly stir paint and keep at uniform consistency during application. Apply paint evenly, free from drops, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks; finished surface uniform in sheen, color, and texture. Apply succeeding coats to unscarred and completely integral base coats; slightly vary color of undercoats to distinguish them from preceding coat. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure proper drying. Sandpaper smooth interior finishes between coats. B. Prime Coat: Do not thin primers in excess of manufacturer's printed directions. Apply within 8 hours after cleaning. C. Body and Finish Coats: Do not thin; apply by brush, roller, or spray. 3.04 EXTERIOR PAINTING A. Metal 1. Ferrous Metal: Except hollow metal work, unless specified in individual Sections. a. Prime Coat: Metal primer; provided under other applicable Sections. b. Body Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel (modified) C. Finish Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel (modified) 2. Galvanized Metal, unless specified in individual Sections. a. Prime Coat: Non - ferrous metal primer b. Body Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel (modified) C. Finish Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel (modified) 3. Non - Ferrous Metal a. Prime Coat b. Body Coat: C. Finish Coat Non - ferrous metal primer Exterior alkyd enamel (modified). Exterior alkyd enamel (modified). 3.05 INTERIOR PAINTING At a minimum, comply with the VOC limit levels indicated in Section 018113 Sustainable Project Requirements. A. Gypsum Wallboard 1. Prime Coat: PVA sealer 2. Body Coat: Low odor /VOC, Latex undercoat. 3. Finish Coat: Low odor /VOC, Latex enamel, eggshell in all areas, unless otherwise noted on paint schedule. 4. Note: Refer to paragraph 2.02.A. Mildew Resistance B. Metal Painting and Coating 099000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Ferrous Metal: Except hollow metal work. a. Prime Coat: Metal primer; provided under other applicable Sections. b. Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 2. Galvanized Metal a. Prime Coat: Non - ferrous metal primer b. Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 3. Hollow Metal Work a. Prime Coat: Metal primer; provided under Section 08 11 14 — Standard Steel Frames. b. Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 4. Non - Ferrous Metal a. Prime Coat: Non - ferrous metal primer. b. Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. C. Woodwork 1. Opaque Finish a. Latex 1) Prime Coat: Enamel undercoat. 2) Body Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 3) Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 2. Transparent Finish a. Filler coat (for open grained wood only) b. One coat stain, unless otherwise noted on Finish Legend. C. Two coats water -based acrylic varnish, satin finish. Similar to: 1) Cloverdale Paint, Water -Borne Liquid Plastic Satin, #59314 or 2) Target Coatings, Target EmTech Series, Polycarbonate Urethane Satin, #EM9300 3) VOC: Less than 101 g/I D. Miscellaneous 1. Exposed Pipe Grids and Other Exposed Stage Rigging a. Prime Coat: Metal pimer; provided under other applicable Sections. b. Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. C. Finish Coat: Flat. 2. Ductwork at Grilles and Diffusers: Plastic enamel; flat black. Apply to visible interior surfaces of ductwork. 3. Exposed Insulated Pipes and Ductwork a. Sealer: 1 coat PVA sealer. Omit sealer where glass fabric jackets are used. b. Body and Finish Coats: As specified for exposed non - insulated pipes, Painting and Coating 099000 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 conduits and ductwork. 4. Exposed Non - Insulated Pipes and Ductwork: Including conduit. a. Cast -Iron Pipe 1) Prime Coat: Aluminum paint. 2) Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. 3) Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. b. Other Pipes, Conduit, and Ductwork 1) Prime Coat: As specified for ferrous and non - ferrous metals as applicable. 2) Body Coat: Enamel undercoat. 3) Finish Coat: Eggshell enamel or semi -gloss enamel. 5. Factory Finished Equipment; except Mechanical Equipment: Refinish surfaces damaged before, during, or after installation as directed; use plastic enamel. 6. Finish Hardware: Specified with USP finish under Section 087000 - Hardware, paint as specified under Paragraph Hollow Metal Work. Color and gloss to match doors and frames as applicable, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Do not paint fire - treated equipment boards in Telephone and Electric Closets. 3.06 EPDXY PAINT A. Prime Coat: Equal to Benjamin Moore M08 /M09 Waterborne Epoxy Primer. B. Body Coat: Equal to Benjamin Moore M36/M38 Polyamide Epoxy Semi -Gloss Coating. C. Finish Coat: Same as Body Coat. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove paint spots, oil, and stains from adjacent surfaces upon completion of Work; leave Work clean. 3.08 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. General: Paint surfaces exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. Where not indicated, paint as directed. B. Surfaces Not to be Painted: Furred spaces; trenches, tunnels, plenums, and shafts for pipes and ducts; elevator hoistways; walls and ceilings in water storage tanks; buried pipe; concealed pipe and ductwork, insulated and non - insulated; concealed conduit; rough hardware; cast -iron items; galvanized steel gratings, covers, and frames; stainless steel, unless specifically shown; factory finished items, and other surfaces specifically shown. C. Paint Schedule: Painting and Coating 099000 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 ID I Location I Item I Manufacturer I Color No. I Color Name I Finish END OF SECTION Painting and Coating 099000 -7 EXTERIOR PAINT EPT -1 Exterior metal TBD TBD TBD Semi - -roof flashing, gutters, Gloss IPT -2 downspouts, fascia, TBD TBD TBD Eggshell soffits EPT -2 Exterior standard steel TBD TBD TBD Flat -metal louvers Gloss EPT -3 Exterior fiber - cement TBD TBD TBD Flat IPT -4 siding panels TBD TBD Clear (stain as Matte EPT -4 Other TBD TBD TBD Flat END OF SECTION Painting and Coating 099000 -7 INTERIOR PAINT IPT -1 GWB Walls & Ceilings TBD TBD TBD Eggshell (Field Color) IPT -2 GWB Walls TBD TBD TBD Eggshell (Accent Color) IPT -3 GWB Walls & Ceilings TBD TBD TBD Semi - (Enamel) Gloss - Restrooms IPT -4 Interior Wood TBD TBD Clear (stain as Matte (Transparent — to needed to match match door finish) wood doors) -wood door frames -wood base - hardwood veneer casework END OF SECTION Painting and Coating 099000 -7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 10 1100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes markerboards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1053 — Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 2. Section 09 2116 — Gypsum Board Assemblies: Backing 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Porcelain Enamel Institute 1. PEI -1002 Manual and Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Writing Surfaces. C. Greenguard Environmental Institute 1. Greenguard Indoor Air Quality Certified 2. Greenguard Children and Schools Indoor Air Quality Certified 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Section 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, and special anchor details. D. Product Data: Submit data on markerboards and trim and accessories. E. Samples and Color Charts: Submit one sample sized illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of tackboard surfacing. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread /smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Flame Resistant Fabric: Passes when tested in accordance with NFPA 701, Test 1 or Test 2. Visual Display Surfaces 101100-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish a 'life of building' warranty, stating that under normal usage and maintenance, and when installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, porcelain enamel steel markerboard writing surfaces are guaranteed for the life of the building. Guarantee covers replacement of defective boards but does not include cost of removal or installation. C. Writing Surface Warranty Period: Ten years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Claridge Products and Equipment 2. Polyvision 3. Newline; Plano, TX 4. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements B. Quality Standard: Claridge Model #516 -6MA, 6' -0 "wide x 4' -0" high (closed) 1. Finish: Maple with natural finish 2. Writing Surface: LCS II white porcelain enamel markerboard 3. Door Interiors: Colored cork, as selected from manufacturer's standard 4. Accessories: a. One white sketch pad b. Four LCS Marker pens and one eraser C. Display rail with natural cork insert d. Spring clip hooks for charts 5. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer, meeting VOC requirements. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Factory assembled markerboards Visual Display Surfaces 101100-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING A. Porcelain Enamel: Glass fibered enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel Institute Type A, white color. B. Tackboard Surface: Natural cork, color as selected by Architect. C. Aluminum Frame, Chalkrail, and Accessories: Mill finish natural aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify internal wall blocking is ready to receive Work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Establish bottom of perimeter frame at heights shown on Interior Elevations. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Markerboards: Butt panels tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Cover chalkboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Preliminary Closeout Review. 3.4 SCHEDULES Conference Room 117: Provide and install one markerboard cabinet in location shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Visual Display Surfaces 101100-3 Lecture Units &Credenzas No. 517 -4CH Lecture Unit Credenza Size Type Wood and Finish 509 -4N 602 -4N 4' Oak natural 509 4M 602 4M 4' Oak medium 509 -6N 602 -6N 6' Oak natural 509 -6M 602 -6M 6' Oak medium 512 4MS 603 4MS 4' Mahogany 512 -6MS 603 -6MS 6' Mahogany 516 4MA 616 4MA 4' Maple 516 -6MA 616 -6MA 6' Maple 517 4CH 617 4CH 4' Cherry 517 -6CH 617 -6CH 6' Cherry 518 4PL 4' Plastic Laminate 518 -6PL 6' Plastic Laminate Conference Room Chalkboards, Markerboards, Tackboards and Combination Units Features: 10 11 00 /CLC BuyLine 3119 Contemporary Style Lecture Units and Credenzas Cabinet Features: • Radius corners (except 518's); square corners optional • White LCS -II low gloss porcelain enamel writing surface • 1691 Quartz Designer Fabric bulletin board inside doors (other fabrics and colors optional) • Concealed hangers for easy and secure installation • Lecture units 3 -3/4" deep; credenzas 16" deep Credenza Features: • Radius Corners • Two Shelves • Recessed Toe Space • Hinged Doors; ball catches; wooden door knobs Accessories: • 1 white sketching pad • 4 LCS markers and 1 eraser • Display Rail with cork insert • Spring clip hooks for charts Options: • Matte White projection screen • Fluorescent Light • LCS inside doors in lieu of bulletin board • Laminate lecture units with square corners • Lock and Keys Note: 4' Credenzas have two doors, 6' Credenzas have three. No. 604 -4WN Credenza with matching No. 508 -4WN Lecture Unit. Both are walnut with natural finish. • 2" Natural or Medium finish oak frame with black accent strip • LCS -II markerboard or porcelain chalkboard writing surface • Markerboards, Chalkboards, and Combination units have marker tray • Tackboards are available with Claridge Cork, Fabricork, Designer Fabric, Hook -Fab and Tan Nucork • Combination units available with any of the above materials • Z -bar hangers furnished Options: • Mahogany, maple or cherry finishes optional • Map rail optional • Custom match finishes Chalkboard/ Size No. 210E Markerboard Tackboard Combination (H - W) 210 213 210E 4'x 4' 210A 213A 21 OF 4'x 6' 2106 2136 210G 4'x 8' 210C 213C 210H 4'x 10' 210D 213D 210K 4'x 12' Wood Finishes Wood finish color samples are reproduced with reasonable accuracy. If match is critical call or write for actual samples. Custom match finishes optional. 4q) Natural Oak • Mahogany 40 Medium Oak O Maple • Espresso • Ebony • Cherry Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. • Phone: 800 - 434 -4610 • Fax: 870 - 743 -1908 11 Specification Information GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK Section Includes: 1. Porcelain enamel chalkboards 2. Porcelain enamel markerboards 3. Tackboards and accessories 4. Marker Walls and Tack Walls 5. Vertical and Horizontal sliding units Related Sections: 1. Directories 2. Display Casework REFERENCED SG4NDARDS A. ASTM -E 84 B. ASTM B221 PRODUCTS 114ANl1Fi4C1llllFRS Visual display boards - chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards - as manufactured by: Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc., Harrison, Arkansas 72602 All visual display boards shall be Series (architect to select from Series 1, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 185) factory laminated and factory framed chalkboards, markerboards or tackboards. Porcelain enamel Markerboards/ Chalkboards: All porcelain enamel markerboards and chalkboards shall be manufactured in accordance with the Porcelain Enamel Institute's specifications. The steel surface is pre - cleaned to ensure complete bond between the steel and the porcelain surface. 1. LCS -II Markerboard and Porcelain Chalkboard: Made from cold - rolled steel, during a 3 -coat process both steel surfaces receive a ground coat of porcelain enamel. Then, a color cover coat of porcelain is applied to one surface of the ground coat and is fusion bonded to the steel substrate at temperature necessary to reduce steel and porcelain stresses. a. Face Sheet: LCS -II or Porcelain Chalkboard EXECUTION PROJECT' CONDITIONS A. Verify before installation that interior moisture and temperature approximate normal occupied conditions. B. Verify that wall surfaces are prepared and ready to receive boards. INSEAUAMON A. Deliver factory built units completely assembled in one piece without joints wherever possible. Where dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable SUB A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of visual display board required. B. Product Data: Provide technical data for materials specified. Include Material Safety Data Sheets, when applicable. C. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's color charts 2. Composition samples of face, core, backing material and trim to illustrate finish, color and texture. OPERATION & MAINIENANCE Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal, and precautions Conform to applicable code for flame /smoke rating in tackboards in accordance with ASTM -E 84. b. Core Material: 7116" Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) c. Backing: Moisture barrier back 2. Laminations: Shall be hot -type neoprene contact adhesive applied to both surfaces automatically. Each substrate to have minimum of 80% covering with 1.5 -2.0 dry mils of adhesive. Panel components shall have uniform pressure applied mechanically over entire area. Laminations shall be made by face sheet manufacturer. 3. Sizes: Standard height is 4 feet. Porcelain markerboards and chalkboards shall be available in single piece lengths up to 16 feet. C. Tackboards: Architect to select from tackboards composed of 1/4' thick self - healing, burlap backed Claridge cork; Fabricork vinyl fabric on cork underlay; Hook -Fab fabric on cork underlay; Designer polyester fabric on cork underlay; or 1/4" Tan Nucork, all on 1/4" hardboard backing. D. Metal Trim and Accessories: Provide Series aluminum extrusions as manufactured by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Trim shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum and shall meet or exceed ASTM B221 Alloy Standards. Finish to be etched and anodized satin finish standard. Color Anodized and Powder Coat Paint finished trim optional. at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the job site. Use H -bar at joints to maintain alignment. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling of units before installation. C. Install level and plumb, keeping perimeter trim straight in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ADIUSI AND CLEAN A. Verify that all required accessories are installed for each unit. B. At completion of work, clean QUAUIYASSURANCE Provide items in this section as manufactured by: Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Harrison, Arkansas 72602 -0910 Phone: 870/743 -2200 Fax: 870/743 -1908 FIELD CONDMONS Field measure prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fit. WARRANTY Submit "Life of the Building" warranty, stating that under normal usage and maintenance, and when installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, Claridge porcelain enamel steel chalkboard and markerboard writing surfaces are guaranteed for the life of the building. Guarantee covers replacement of defective boards but does not include removal or reinstallation cost. Chalktray /Marker Tray: Standard continuous, solid type aluminum Chalk Tray/ Marker Tray with ribbed section and injection molded end closures, or standard continuous hollow tray with injection molded end closures; metal end closures optional. Map Rail: Standard continuous 1" (2" optional) map rail with cork insert and end stops at the top of each chalkboard or markerboard, complete with the following accessories: 1. Map Hooks: Provide 2 map hooks for each 4 feet of map rail. 2. Roller Brackets: Provide per map rail. 3. Flag Holder: Provide per map rail. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Color charts on request. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. FABRICATION A. Shop assembly: Provide factory assembled chalkboard, markerboard, and tackboard units, except where field assembled units are required. 1. LCS -II Porcelain Enamel Steel Markerboards or Porcelain Enamel Steel Chalkboards a. Face Sheet: Porcelain Enamel Steel b. Core: 7116" MDF c. Backing: Moisture barrier back 2. Claridge Cork Tackboards a. Face Sheet: 1/4' cork b. Binder: burlap c. Backing: 1/4" hardboard surfaces and trim in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, leaving all materials ready for use. See www.claridgeproducts.com for complete specifications and CAD library. 12 Copyright 0 2010 Claridge Products and Equipment, Incorporated. Printed in USA. We reserve the right to make changes without notice. NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes interior regulatory signs. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) —ANSI A117.1 -2003 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, international symbol, grade 2 Braille, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. D. Samples: Submit two signs, 8x8 inch in size illustrating type, style, letter font, symbol, Braille, and colors specified; method of attachment. Samples may be used in final installation. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation template and attachment devices. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. C. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. C. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Signage 101400-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1. Quality Standard: INPRO Corporation, Inpro Signscapes Model 5320 ADA Regulatory. 2. ASI Sign Systems, Marina del Rey, CA 3. Kroy Sign Systems, Scottsdale, AZ 4. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 COMPONENTS - INTERIOR SIGNS A. Signage Panel: 1. Vinyl: 0.080 -inch sheet bonded with 0.040 -inch sheet B. Production Style: 1. Unframed 2. International Symbols: Location above letter copy 3. Tactile Raised Letter 4. Grade 2 Braille: Locate below letter copy C. Design: 1. Radiused Corners: 0.525 -inch 2. Font: Kabel (verify with Architect) 3. Copy Placement: Centered horizontally 4. Panel Face Color: to be determined 5. Text and Symbol Color: to be determined 6. D. Accessories: 1. Mounting: Double -sided foam tape adhesive. 2.3 EXTERIOR SIGNS A. Manufacturers: 1. To be determined 2. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 COMPONENTS - EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGN (Address Numbers) A. Exterior Dimensional Letters: 1. 0.50 -inch thick waterjet -cut aluminum 2. Face and edge construction shall be smooth - finished 3. Face and edges shall have satin anodized medium bronze finish (intent is to match aluminum storefront framing) B. Design: 1. Font: to be determined 2. Size: 8 -inch high 3. Mounting: Minimum two studs per letter PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. Signage 101400-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Commencing installation indicates that installer accepts conditions of surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION — INTERIOR SIGNS A. Install signs after doors and surfaces are finished, in locations indicated on Drawings and as scheduled. B. Locate sign on wall surface, level. C. Clean sign and adjacent surfaces following installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION — EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS A. Letters are projection- mounted to building with studs. B. Each letter is individually mounted with a minimum of two studs per letter. C. Sign contractor to ensure a secure hold to withstand tampering and exterior conditions. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Interior ADA Regulatory Signs — New Branch Building: B. Exterior Building Sign 1. Address Numbers: Individual waterjet -cut, aluminum letters, stud - mounted on building front elevation, 10- inches tall, to read as follows: "907" 2. Business Sign: by Others (coordinate with electrical requirements) C. ADA Parking Stall Sign & Electric Car Charging Station Sign: As indicated on the Drawings; post- mounted. D. Monument Sign: By Others END OF SECTION Signage 101400-3 Mounting Height (bottom Type Quantity Dimensions Copy A.F.F.) Color A (international 48" Unisex 2 8" x 8" sym) (centered on TBD Restroom 'RESTROOM' door) (Braille) B Refer to Exterior Hardware As specified As specified As specified As specified Entrance Groups in elsewhere elsewhere elsewhere elsewhere Section 087100 B. Exterior Building Sign 1. Address Numbers: Individual waterjet -cut, aluminum letters, stud - mounted on building front elevation, 10- inches tall, to read as follows: "907" 2. Business Sign: by Others (coordinate with electrical requirements) C. ADA Parking Stall Sign & Electric Car Charging Station Sign: As indicated on the Drawings; post- mounted. D. Monument Sign: By Others END OF SECTION Signage 101400-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 10 2116 PRE - FABRICATED SHOWER STALL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acrylic shower stall enclosure. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1— Safety Standards for the Handicapped 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate physical dimensions for recessed shower units. C. Product Data: Provide shower stall features, color and finish, anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 017000 — Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures for finished surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AQUATIC or LASCO BATHWARE B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 0160 00 — Product Requirements and Substitutions, and Substitution Request Form. 2.2 SHOWER STALL UNIT A. Quality Standard: Aquatic Model No. 6036 -BFSC B. Material: Acrylic C. Features: a. Integral dome. b. Back fixture wall. c. Center drain location. d. Slip resistant, textured bottom D. Color: White 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide and install the following accessories: • L- shaped fold -up seat • Hand -held shower with slide bar • Pressure balancing mixing valve Pre - Fabricated Shower Stall 102116-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 • Soap dish • Dome light • Removable threshold • Glass shower door panels, Model L2271 B. Coordinate installation of the following items specified elsewhere. • Grab bars per Section 10 2800, L- shaped and vertical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings under provisions of Section 0130 00 — Administrative Requirements. B. Verify rough openings are correctly sized and located. C. Verify plumbing rough -in is correctly located. D. Verify solid blocking and backing is in place and correctly located for all shower - related accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install unit plumb and level in wall opening. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Inspect foam insulation at shower stall floor -to -bed. END OF SECTION Pre - Fabricated Shower Stall 102116 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and washroom accessories. B. Grab bars. C. Attachment hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM B456 - Electrode posited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. G. NEMA LD -3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. H. Washington State Regulations for Barrier -Free Facilities, WAC 51 -20. I. ADA - Americans With Disabilities Act. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0130 00 - Submittals. B. Refer to Sections 0135 26 and 0135 29 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each component, illustrating color and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Date Submitted Date Approved Sub-Contractors/Supplier 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 013000 — Administrative Requirements. B. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. Toilet and Bath Accessories 102800-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick B. Bradley C. McKinney D. American Specialties, Inc. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 6000 — Product Requirements, and Substitution Request Form. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366 B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper - proof, security type. F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents. C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form bar with 2 inches clear of wall surface. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.4 KEYING A. Supply two keys for each accessory to Owner. 2.5 FINISHES A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz /sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats baked enamel. D. Chrome /Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish. E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 013000 — Administrative Requirements. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on Toilet and Bath Accessories 102800-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 shop drawings. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation, and that solid blocking has been provided. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ANSI A117.1. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.4 SCHEDULE — Refer to the Toilet Room Plans A. FIXED TOILET ROOM GRAB BARS - TOILET ROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Series Model No. 6806 L- shaped and straight vertical bar, 18 gauge stainless steel tubing, seamless construction with safety grip peened finish, 1 -1/2 inch o.d. grab bars in each toilet room and in each shower stall; lengths and mounting conditions as required for wall construction on which they are mounted in location of shapes and types shown on Drawings. Mounting to be concealed with flange escutcheon, type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. B. MIRRORS - TOILET ROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Series Model No. 290 mirror, frame fabricated of heavy - gauge one -piece roll- formed stainless steel angle; corners heliarc welded and ground smooth to satin finish; %" thick select float glass, triple silver plated with electro- copper plated layer and thermosetting infrared cured paint backing. Install quantity and size as indicated on the Drawings. C. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER — TOILETROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Contura Series Model No. B -4221, surface mounted toilet seat cover dispenser; 18 -8 S, type 304, 22 gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Fabrication to be drawn one - piece, seamless construction, with exposed surfaces of satin finish. Furnish one at each toilet in quantity and location as indicated on the Drawings. D. PAPER TOWEL AND WASTE RECEPTACLE — TOILET ROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Contura Series Model No. B- 43944, recessed paper towel dispenser combination waste receptacle, stainless steel; accommodates 600 c -fold paper towels; waste receptacle capacity of 15 gallons. Furnish one at each toilet room as indicated on the Drawings. E. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER — TOILET ROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Contura Series Model No. B -4288, surface mounted, two roll capacity toilet tissue dispenser. Install one unit at each toilet as indicated on the Drawings. Toilet and Bath Accessories 102800-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 F. ROBE HOOK —SHOWER ROOMS Quality Standard: BOBRICK Model No. B -6717, surface mounted, single robe hook, satin - finish stainless steel. Furnish one at each shower stall. Install at accessible height, adjacent to strike side of shower door. Verify location with Architect. G. MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS — STORAGE (JANITOR) ROOM Quality Standard: BOBRICK Model No. B -239, utility shelf with mop /broom holders and rag hooks, 18- gauge, type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. Provide unit with four hooks and three mop holders. Install one unit in Janitor Room. H. SHOWER STALL DOOR Refer to Section 10 2116 — Pre - Fabricated Shower Stall. SOAP DISPENSER Furnish automatic lavatory- mounted soap dispenser, similar to BOBRICK Model 6- 826.18, battery - powered, with undercounter soap refill bottle. Spout cover assembly is bright polished chrome plated plastic with LED light indicators. Install one unit per lavatory counter in Toilet rooms. END OF SECTION Toilet and Bath Accessories 102800 -4 p ie 1.12 TR_ &1/4" e�mm 1 \ Ir I N. —dal. Rang. 10 n.e a. Om.r 4" )\100 36"" t __-91 MM -� 1270mm —� 39.7/8 "� \- IQ 1005.-- \ 57 -7/8" 147014707 E;r .1 QjFfa b Wall Edge of Flaps b Well HORIZONTAL VERTICAL TWO -WALL WHEELCHAIR TOILET COMPARTMENT B -6806 x 14 18j 24, 30, 36, 42, 48 B -68137 4„ 4" `� IOOrrrn�� 1o4onm 100mm � �� \ / '•�24" 8" 32" \ 104BSrmT �'. 32" 815mm 2695M �! % Illw` \ 127omm Y 27 -7/8" 19.3/4" 39 -7/8" 710mm 600— 1215.-.- 57.7/8" 1015mm 34 -3/4„ / 197Qnm \ Edge .1 Erlp. al\ E d Flange t. Well Fy d . f Wall Fle,rpe b Wall \ Flange b Wall Flange b Well Flaps b w HORIZONTAL TUB BATH HORIZONTAL TWO -WALL BAR TWO -WALL 24 x 36 for Shower Stall TOILET COMPARTMENT BAR 42 x 54 B -68616 B -6861 B -6897 continued... The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Rev. 515/10 Se Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right lo, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. ® 2010 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. MATERIALS: Grab Bar —18-8 S, type- 304,18 -gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel tubing with satin - finish. 1 -1/2" (38mm) outside diameter. Ends are heliarc welded to flanges. Clearance between the grab bar and wall is 1 -1/2" (38mm). Concealed Mounting Flanges —18-8 S, type- 304,1/8" (3mm) thick, stainless steel plate; end flanges 2" x 3 -1/8" (50 x 80mm) with two holes for attachment to wall. Intermediate flanges 2 -5/8" x 3 -1/8" (65 x 80mm) wide x 3-1/8" (80mm) diameter. Snap Flange Covers — 18-8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) drawn stainless steel with satin- finish. 3 -1/4" (85mm) diameter x 1/2" (13mrn) deep. Each cover snaps over mounting flange to conceal mounting screws. STRENGTH: Bobrick grab bars that provide 1 -1/2" (38mm) clearance from wall can support loads in excess of 900 pounds (408kg) if properly installed. Other grab bar configurations can support loads in excess of 250 pounds (113kg) if properly installed, complying with barrier -free accessibility guidelines (including ADAAG in the U.S.A.) for structural strength Warning: Grab bars are no stronger than the anchors or walls to which they are attached and, therefore, must be firmly secured in order to support the loads for which they are intended. INSTALLATION: Provide concealed anchor device or backing as specified or required in accordance with local building codes before wall is finished. Fasten concealed mount- ing flanges to anchor device or backing with two screws in each flange. Snap flange covers over each mounting flange to conceal mounting screws. Concealed anchor devices and mounting screws are not included with Bobrick grab bars and must be specified as an accessory. For Grab Bars with an Intermediate Flange(s), Pull Snap - Flange Covers away from mounting flanges. Place grab bar in desired mounting location. Use intermediate flange as a template to mark location of mounting screws at intermediate flange only. Mark screw locations at the center of the slot in the middle of the double - keyhole shaped mounting holes (2) in the intermediate flange. Remove grab bar from wall. Drive the intermediate flange mounting screws into wall at marked locations. Note: Make sure to leave a space of just over 1/8" (3.17mm) between the underside of the screw head and the wall. install grab bar on the wall by placing the round ends of the intermediate flange double - keyhole shaped mounting holes over the mounting screws (2) are located in the middle of the flange slots. Install the mounting screws into the wall at the end flanges and secure tightly. Tighten the mounting screws at the intermediate flange. Press all snap -flange covers into place to conceal mounting flanges. Note: Recommend use of 1/4" or #14 (M6.3) sheet metal or wood screws to install Intermediate Flange. #12 (M5.5) screws may also be used. Important Notes: 1. Mounting Kits — Bobrick has a selection of mounting screws and fasteners available for different types of installations; one Bobrick mounting kit is required for each flange. Mounting Kit No. Description 252 -30 Consists of (3) #14 x 2Y2" (M6.3 x 64mm) type -304 stainless steel, Phillips round -head, sheet -metal screws, 2521.30 Consists of (3) 1/4 " -20 x 3Y2" (M6.3 -1 x 89mm) type -304 stainless steel, Phillips round -head, machine screws with plated -steel toggle nuts. 2522 -30 Consists of (3) 1/4 " -20 x 2" (M6.3 -1 x 51mm) type -304 stainless steel, Phillips round -head, machine screws with metal expansion shields. 2. Grab Bar Fastener — Bobrick has a grab bar fastening system that secures all Bobrick grab bar series; one Bobrick fastener is required for each flange. Install grab bar without backing in wall requires minimum 5/8" (16mm) thick painted or tiled drywall. WingitTM Fastener No. Description 251 -4 Consists of (3) 10 -32 x 5/16" round -head, Phillips 18/8 stainless steel screws. (1) Winglt grab bar fastener. 3. Optional Anchor Device — Bobrick grab bar anchor device includes stainless steel machine screws to be used for attaching grab bars to anchors. one Bobrick concealed anchor device is required for each flange. Optional Anchor No. Description 2583 Anchor for 3/4" to 1" (19.25mm) panel 1 anchor required for each flange. 2586 Anchor for 1/2" to 1" (1 3mm) panel 1 anchor required for each flange. SPECIFICATION: Grab bar shall be type -304 stainless steel with satin- finish. Grab bar shall have 18 -gauge (1.2mm) wall thickness and 1 -1/2" (38mm) outside diameter. Clearance between the grab bar and wall shall be 1 -1/2" (38mm). Concealed mounting flanges shall be 1/8" (3mm) thick stainless steel plate, 2" x 3.1/8" (50 x 80mm), and equipped with two screw holes for attachment to wall. Flange covets shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm), 3.1/4" (85mm) diameter x 1/2" (13mm) deep, and shall snap over mounting flange to conceal mounting screws and /or Winglt fasteners. Ends of grab bar shall pass through concealed mounting flanges and he heeliarc welded to form one structural unit Grab bar shall comply with barrier-free accessibility guidelines (including ADAAG in the U.S.A.) for structural strength, 1 Grab Bar shall be Model 6 �Ob (insert model number) of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment Limited, United Kingdom. , ne musrmuons ano oescnpuons nerem are appucaute to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet, B -6806 Rev. 5/5/10" onnc +o Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2010 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. GLASS MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL Technical Data ANGLE FRAME SNAP LOCKING DESIGN (Rear View) — `• -3/4" 19mm --_ ° -- - - -_— 2 „ .12 --- a -- - 65mm _ — S MM: S 2- 9/16" — • 65mm 1 I 4" or 5° Typ. I 100 or 125mm S Frame Figure:I Mirror r� \ Side View _ -�' Back PlateMall Hanger STANDARD 8 -290 SERIES MIRRORS MODEL OVERALL SIZE NO. _W H B- 2901830 18' _ 46cm 30" 76cm B- 2901836 18" 46cm 36" 91cm B -290 2430 24" 61 cm 30" 76cm B -290 2436 24" 61 cm 36" 91 cm B -290 2448 24" 61cm 48" 122cm B -290 2460 24" 61 cm 60" 152cm B -290 2472 24" (61 cm) 72" (183cm) B -290 SERIES SCREW LOCKING DESIGN (Rear View) 5/16" mm S I 5 S: Figure: 2 k N Locking Screw l (Phillips -Head) All Other Size Mirrors Designer's Notes: 1. Special -order sizes available on request. 2. Maximum size one -piece angle -frame mirror, 144" x 72" (366 x 183cm); minimum size, 12" x 12" (30 x 30cm). Maximum frame size available, 180" x 72" (457 x 183cm) with two pieces of glass in one -piece frame. Stainless steel I- section with polished finish covers seam where two pieces of glass butt together. 3. All Bobrick framed mirrors are manufactured to overall width and height dimensions. EXAMPLE: A 24" x 36" (61 x 91cm) mirror will be furnished 24" x 36" (61 x 91cm) outside -of -frame to outside -of- frame. 4. To specify special sizes use Series Number followed by width then height in inches. EXAMPLE: B -290 2024, 5. Bobrick framed mirrors are manufactured to a tolerance ± 1/8" (3.2mm). 6. For sufficient space to lift mirror onto wall hanger(s), provide 3.1/4" (85mm) minimum clearance above center line of mounting screw holes. 7. Provide 1" (25mm) minimum clearance at bottom of mirror for engaging locking screws and 1" (25mm) clearance on each side. MATERIALS: Frame —18-8 S, type 304, heavy -gauge stainless steel, 3/411 x 3/411 (19 x 19mm) angle with vertical -grain satin finish. One- piece, roll- formed construction forms continuous integral stiffener on all sides. Bevel design on front of angle holds frame tight- ly against mirror. Corners of mirror frame are heliarc welded, ground and polish smooth. Galvanized steel back is fastened to frame with concealed screws and equipped with integral horizontal hanging brackets near the top and bottom of the mirror for hanging the mirror and to prevent the mirror from pulling away from the wall. Locking devices secure mirror to concealed wall hanger. In Screw Locking Design (see figure 2), concealed Philips -head locking screws securely fasten mirror to wall hanger. Designer's Note: Type 304 stainless steel provides superior corrosion resistance, compared to 400 Series stainless steel, against environmental moisture, hose -down maintenance and strong cleaning solution. continued ... I he illustrations and descriptions herein are applicaue to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Rev, 2/16/11 Re Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2011 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Mirror — No.1 quality, 1/411 (6mm) select float glass (standard glass): selected for silvering, electrolytically copper - plated by the galvanic process, and guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. All edges protected by plastic filler strips; back is protected by full -size, shock - absorbing, water - resistant, nonabrasive, 3/1611 (5mm) thick polyethylene padding. Concealed Wall Hanger — 20 -gauge (0.9mm) galvanized steel. Incorporates lower support member, forming rigid rectangle, which engages lower backplate louvers to keep bottom of mirror against wall. INSTALLATION: Mount wall hanger on wall with screws (not furnished) at points indicated by an S. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide backing to comply with local building codes, then secure wall hanger with screws (not furnished). When providing a concealed backing, allow backing to cover range of mounting hole locations shown on drawing, For other wall surfaces, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with screws (not furnished), or provide 1/811 (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. Hang mirror on wall hanger with all four backplate louvers engaged behind horizontal wall hanger members. To do this, mirror must be centered in front of the wall hanger horizontally, pressed flat against the wall approximately 111 (25mm) above final position and then lowered into final position. Snap Locking Design — Locking devices automatically secure mirror to concealed wall hanger when it is lowered into final position (see figure 3). Locking devices may be unlocked by inserting two flat blade screwdrivers behind each side of mirror near the bottom or under the bottom of the mirror and pulling mirror bottom forward and then up. Screw locking Design — Lock mirror to wall hanger by tightening Phillips -head locking screws that are concealed in the bottom of frame at points indicated by a T (see figure 4). Mirror may be unlocked from wall hanger by loosening locking screws and lifting mirror off of concealed wall hanger. SNAP LOCKING DESIGN SCREW LOCKING DESIGN (Front View) (Front View) Approx. 1" Approx, 1" (25mm) Initial (25mm) Initial - - - - -. —,Position i •---------- - - - - -- I Position I � I Final — Final �.. �H. Position } _;:- Position s T.: i ,I I jl I jj c:::::a c•.:_.: I I I j j S- ... -?.�� glrlt -� os;1 S � I I I T T Figure: 3 Figure: 4 SPECIFICATION: Mirror shall have a one - piece, type 304 stainless steel angle frame, 3/411 x 3/411 (19 x 19mm) with continuous integral stiffener on all sides and beveled front to hold frame tightly against mirror; corners shall be heliarc welded, ground, and polished smooth; all exposed surfaces shall have satin finish with vertical grain. Reflective surfaces shall be guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. All edges shall be protected by plastic filler strips and the back shall be protected by full -size, shock - absorbing, water - resistant, nonabrasive, 3/1611 (5mm) thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel back shall have integral horizontal hanging brackets located at top and bottom for mounting on concealed rectangular wall hanger and to prevent the mirror from pulling away from the wall. Locking devices secure mirror to concealed wall hanger. Mirror shall be removable from wall hanger for reglazing mirror. Framed Mirror shall be Model B -290 Z—� i� (insert width and height) of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. B -290 Rev. 2/16/11 r,1 QM210 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements In designs and dimensions. 0 2011 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. _ • _ ' ConturaSeries® SURFACE- MOUNTED 8 -4221 Technical Data SEAT-COVER DISPENSER Finish Face 1 of Wall 400mm 0mm -- - : -: -:: go 110mm — — LL Typ. E O E t N IS Z 285mm I 7 s o r at N C ` « is I E E �' n 0 N d m R « rLL _ _ — I E E v+ —r 3 — — ►12-3!16 "I�- 90mm . 9/16" I SSmm I cc Ir Typ S MATERIALS: 18-8 S, type -304, 20-gauge (1.0mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Drawn, one- piece, seamless construction. Front of dispenser has same degree of arc as other Bobrick ConturaSeries washroom accessories. Radius on corners and edges complement other ConturaSeries accessories. OPERATION: Dispenser holds single- or half -fold paper toilet -seat covers. Dispenser fills from bottom through concealed opening. Capacity: 250 toilet seat covers. INSTALLATION: Mount unit on wall or partition of toilet compartment with two screws (not furnished) at points indicated by an S. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes and secure with #8 x 1 -1/2" (4.2 x 38mm) sheet-metal screws. For other wall surfaces, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with sheet -metal screws, or provide 1/811 (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. Note: Provide a 511 (125mm) minimum clearance from bottom of dispenser to top of any horizontal projection to provide room for filling dispenser from bottom. SPECIFICATION: Surface- mounted toilet - seat -cover dispenser shall be type -304, 20-gauge (0.9mm) stainless steel with drawn, one - piece, seam- less construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Front of toilet - seat -cover dispenser shall have same degree of arc and match other Bobrick ConturaSeries' accessories in the washroom. Radius on corners and edges of toilet-seat-cover dispenser shall complement other Bobrick ConturaSeries' washroom accessories. Unit shall have a rectangular opening for dispensing toilet seat covers and a concealed opening in bottom for filling. Capacity shall be 250 paper toilet seat covers. Surface - Mounted Seat -Cover Dispenser shall be Model B -4221 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd.., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 4/27/11 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements In designs and dimensions. 0 2011 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ConturaSeries® RECESSED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND WASTE B-43944 Technical Data RECEPTACLE Finish Face of Well - - 3" 75mm 17-7/16"— Typ• 3-15/16" 5-7/16'— 445mm IDOmm 140mm' 11-3/4" TYP' 45mm r 8 6mm S 4- S Typ- r TowelMate Stainless Towel Guide Steel Door Bracket Return i �I i I� 19„ 4 85 mm # Flush O 56-1/4" Lock & Key rZ 1430mm W. E E E TowelMate Removable E Front Panel TowelRod- E Dispenser 54-1/8" 0 1375mm 0 Paper Towel ..... ..... . .. ... .... 0 0 z E w E E E 0 26" .... . ............ 660mm Cc Cc Removable UnerMate Trash Liner Holder Y .... l S IS 2-15116" 80mm /8'. 75mm x__...._.15.5/18" Typ• -3 Typ. 390mm 1MM Recessed Cabinet 2rnm Rough Wall Opening 1611 (405nim) wide 54-3/411 (1390nim) high 411 (INinin) minimum MATERIALS: recessed depth Cabinet -18-8 S, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. All-welded construction, Exposed surfaces have satin-finish. Flange —18-8 S, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin-finish. Drawn, one-piece, seamless construction. Radius on corners and return edges complement corners and edges of door and waste receptacle. Door -18-8 S, type-304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin-finish. Drawn, one-piece, seamless construction, Front of door has same degree of arc as front of waste receptacle and other Bobrick ConturaSeries washroom accessories. Radius on corners and edges of door match side edges of waste receptacle and other ConturaSeries accessories. Secured to cabinet with a full-length stainless steel piano-hinge. Equipped with a stainless steel cable door-swing limiter and flush tumbler lock keyed like other Bobrick washroom accessories. Paper Towel Dispenser —18-8 S, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with satin-finish. Cabinet inside equipped with 900 return towel guide angle to prevent paper towels from falling forward out when door is opened for servicing. Rounded towel tray has hemmed opening to dispense paper towels without tearing. Unit equipped with TowelMate consisting of a 900 return towel guide angle inside cabinet to prevent paper towels from falling forward out when door is opened for servicing and a Nylon Rod across the center of the towel tray to dispense paper towels one at a time. Waste receptacle shall have a formed, 18-gauge (1.2mm), one-piece, seamless, removable front panel with top edge hemmed. Capacity: 600 C•fold or 800 multifold paper towels. TowelMate) Towel Rod Assembly — Consisting of a round Nylon Rod and (2) stainless steel Rod Screws for attachment is field replaceable. Stainless steel Stop Screws (2) lock TowelMate Towel Rod assembly in place. To retrofit TowelMate into existing installed units manufactured prior to April 2010, order TowelMate Accessory Bobrick Part No. 3944-130 continued ... The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 11/19/10 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and Improvements in designs and dimensions. 02010 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Waste Receptacle —18-8 S, type -304, 18 -gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin- finish. Formed, one - piece, seamless construction. Removable front panel has same degree of arc as front of paper towel dispenser door and other Bobrick ConturaSeries washroom accessories. Top edge hemmed for safe handling. Radius on side edges of waste receptacle match corners and edges of door and other ConturaSeries accessories. Secured to cabinet with two keyholes over studs on bottom and two tamper- resistant setscrews on top. Capacity: 15.0 -gal. (56.81). IinerMateT' Trash liner Holder — Unit equipped with LinerMate trash liner holder fabricated with molded plastic trash liner holder sleeve and a 20 -gauge (0.91mm), U- shaped support strap; riveted construction. Liner holder shall have an arc at front and same shape as inside of waste receptacle area. LinerMate facilitates installation and removal of disposable trash liners and retains liner inside waste receptacle. To retrofit LinerMate into existing installed units manufactured prior to December 2009, order LinerMate Accessory Bobrick Part No, 43944 -134 OPERATION: Paper towel dispenser will dispense C -fold or multifold paper towels without adjustment or use of adapters. Cable door -swing limiter prevents damage to washroom accessories and walls. Load paper towels in towel tray, and then pull one sheet of paper towel over the TowelMate towel rod and out to conceal rod and start dispense. Front of waste receptacle panel is removable for cleaning cabinet interior. To insert disposable trash liner, lift LinerMate trash liner holder up and forward and rest over edge of waste receptacle front panel with the bottom notches of LinerMate engaged on top front edge of receptacle. Place disposable trash liner inside LinerMate and fold disposable trash liner over molded sleeve. Tie a knot in the corner of the disposable trash liner, then place LinerMate with disposable trash liner back into receptacle. To empty, gather disposable trash liner from LinerMate liner holder sleeve and lift disposable trash liner up. INSTALLATION: Provide framed rough wall opening 1611 wide x 54 -3/4" high (405 x 1390mm). Minimum recessed depth required to finish face of wall is 411 (100mm). Allow clearance for construction features that may protrude into rough wall opening from opposite wall. Coordinate with mechanical engineer to avoid pipes, vents, and conduits. If unit projects above top of wainscot, provide aluminum channel or other filler to eliminate gap between flange and finish face of wall. Mount unit in wall opening with shims between framing and cabinet at all points indicated by an S, then secure unit with #8 x 1 -1/411 (4.2 x 32mm) screws (not furnished). SPECIFICATION: Recessed paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle shall be type -304 stainless steel with all- welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin- finish. Front of paper towel dispenser door and waste receptacle shall have same degree of arc and match other Bobrick ConturaSeries accessories in the washroom. Radius on corners and edges of flange, door, and waste receptacle shall complement other Bobrick ConturaSeries washroom accessories. Flange shall be drawn, one - piece, seamless construction. Paper towel dispenser door shall be drawn, 18-gauge (1.2mm), one - piece, seamless construction; secured to cabinet with a full - length stainless steel piano-hinge; and equipped with a stainless steel cable door -swing limiter and flush tumbler lock keyed like other Bobrick washroom accessories. Paper towel dispenser shall dispense 600 C -fold or 800 multifold paper towels. Unit equipped with TowelMate consisting of a 900 return towel guide angle inside cabinet to prevent paper towels from falling forward out when door is opened for servicing and a Nylon Rod across the center of the towel tray to dispense paper towels one at a time. Waste receptacle shall have a formed, 18-gauge (1.2mm), one - piece, seamless, removable front panel with top edge hemmed. Unit equipped with LinerMate trash liner holder fabricated with molded plastic trash liner holder sleeve and a 20 -gauge (0.91mm), U- shaped support strap; riveted construction. Liner holder shall have an arc at front and same shape as inside of waste receptacle area. LinerMate facilitates installation and removal of disposable trash liners and retains liner inside waste receptacle. Capacity of waste receptacle shall be 15.0 -gal. (56.8 -L). Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser And Waste Receptacle shall be Model B -43944 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York, Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. B -43944 Rev. 11/19/10 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2010 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ConturaSeries® = • = SURFACE - MOUNTED NNW MULTI -ROLL TOILET 84288 Technical Data TISSUE DISPENSER 7/6" 6. 1/16" Finish Face of wall - 22mm _.. 155mm 5. 15/16" Typ. S 15omm 1 O O 1 Lock I M LL Key 6 S 2 0 8 Ke i50mm I — ( r E r rn -Stainless Steel I rn Door i = o X" E 7 -1/4" c o a E 2eomm 165mm c ;Z c n Typ. 'o 'o m - V d t ' N Toilet Tissue d m Spindles (2) d N d E E E E . :.._ 1- 13/16" �..._ .... -, Pivot Point__ g 45mm � Typ. i 105mm -� MATERIALS: Cabinet -18-8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. All- welded construction. Exposed surfaces have satin finish, Radius on top corners of cabinet match corners and edges of door. Door —18.8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel with 18 -gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel door frame. Exposed surfaces have satin finish. Front of door is drawn, one - piece, seamless construction and has same degree of arc as other Bobrick ConturaSeries washroom accessories. Radius on corners and edges of door match top corners of cabinet and other ConturaSeries accessories. Secured to cabinet with two rivets. Equipped with a flush tumbler lock keyed like other Bobrick washroom accessories. Dispensing Mechanism, Inner Housing and Cam —18.8 S, type - 304,18 -gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel. Spindles (2) — Heavy -duty, one - piece, molded ABS. Theft- resistant. Retained in dispensing mechanism when door is locked. OPERATION: Unit holds two standard -core toilet tissue rolls up to 5-1/411 (133mm) diameter (1800 sheets). Tissue rolls are loaded and locked into dispensing mechanism. Extra roll automatically drops in place when bottom roll is depleted. Depleted rolls can only be removed after unlocking door. INSTALLATION: For partitions with particleboard or other solid core, secure with four #10 x 5/811 (4.8 x 16mm) sheet -metal screws (not furnished) at points indicated by an S, or provide through - bolts, nuts, and washers. For hollow -core metal partitions, provide solid backing into which the sheet -metal screws can be secured. If two units are installed back- to-back, then provide threaded sleeves and machine screws for the full thickness of partition. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with sheet-metal screws. For other wall surfaces, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with sheet -metal screws, or provide 3/1611 (5mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. SPECIFICATION: Surface - mounted multi -roll toilet tissue dispenser shall be type -304 stainless steel with all- welded construction, including dispensing mechanism, inner housing and cam; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Front of toilet tissue dispenser door shall be drawn, one - piece, seamless construction and shall have same degree of arc and match other Bobrick ConturaSeries' accessories in the washroom. Radius on corners and edges of door and cabinet shall complement other Bobrick ConturaSeries" washroom accessories, Door shall be secured to cabinet with two rivets and equipped with a flush tumbler lock keyed like other Bobrick washroom accessories. Unit shall dispense two standard -core toilet tissue rolls up to 5 -1/411 (133mm) diameter (1800 sheets), Extra roll shall automatically drop in place when bottom roll is depleted. Unit shall be equipped with two theft resistant, heavy -duty, one - piece, molded ABS spindles. Surface - Mounted Multi -Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser shall be Model B -4288 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 4/27/11 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2011 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. MATERIALS: 2" 50mm Finish Face —2" of Wall 50mm — .I 1/2" Typ. ,3mm to Flange and Support Arm —18-8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. Concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel mounting bracket. All- welded construction. Secured to wall plate with stainless steel setscrew. Concealed Wall Plate —18-8 S, type-304,16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel. Cap —18-8 S, type -304, 10 -gauge (3.6mm) stainless steel. Welded to support arm. INSTALLATION: To remove concealed wall plate from back of flange and mounting bracket, loosen setscrew. Mount wall plate so prongs are at top; secure with two sheet -metal screws, furnished by manufacturer, at points indicated by an S. Engage mounting bracket onto prongs of wall plate, then secure into position by tightening setscrew at bottom of flange. For partitions with particle -board or other solid core, secure with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide through - bolts, nuts, and washers. For hollow -core metal partitions, provide solid backing into which the furnished sheet -metal screws can be secured. For masonry wall, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide 1/8" (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with sheet -metal screws furnished. SPECIFICATION: Surface - mounted robe hook shall be type -304 stainless steel with (insert one: bright polished, bright polished brass, or satin) finish. Flange shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket that is secured to concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew. Cap shall be 10 gauge (3.6mm), welded to support arm. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner /manager upon request. Surface Mounted Robe Hook shall be Model 7 (insert model number) of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. i ne niustreuons and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 6/06 R/A S/C Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right lo, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 1 -1/4" I 35mm III Typ. III r) =� 1/2" S cLL 13mm Flange and Support Arm —18-8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. Concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel mounting bracket. All- welded construction. Secured to wall plate with stainless steel setscrew. Concealed Wall Plate —18-8 S, type-304,16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel. Cap —18-8 S, type -304, 10 -gauge (3.6mm) stainless steel. Welded to support arm. INSTALLATION: To remove concealed wall plate from back of flange and mounting bracket, loosen setscrew. Mount wall plate so prongs are at top; secure with two sheet -metal screws, furnished by manufacturer, at points indicated by an S. Engage mounting bracket onto prongs of wall plate, then secure into position by tightening setscrew at bottom of flange. For partitions with particle -board or other solid core, secure with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide through - bolts, nuts, and washers. For hollow -core metal partitions, provide solid backing into which the furnished sheet -metal screws can be secured. For masonry wall, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide 1/8" (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with sheet -metal screws furnished. SPECIFICATION: Surface - mounted robe hook shall be type -304 stainless steel with (insert one: bright polished, bright polished brass, or satin) finish. Flange shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket that is secured to concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew. Cap shall be 10 gauge (3.6mm), welded to support arm. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner /manager upon request. Surface Mounted Robe Hook shall be Model 7 (insert model number) of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. i ne niustreuons and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 6/06 R/A S/C Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right lo, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. L C 0) .LM S io E =� S cLL o 0 0.W � E rn m m o - - -- y c `o ° Concealed Wall Plate E `o - E o co ua drz X O Flange and Support Arm —18-8 S, type -304, 22 -gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. Concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel mounting bracket. All- welded construction. Secured to wall plate with stainless steel setscrew. Concealed Wall Plate —18-8 S, type-304,16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel. Cap —18-8 S, type -304, 10 -gauge (3.6mm) stainless steel. Welded to support arm. INSTALLATION: To remove concealed wall plate from back of flange and mounting bracket, loosen setscrew. Mount wall plate so prongs are at top; secure with two sheet -metal screws, furnished by manufacturer, at points indicated by an S. Engage mounting bracket onto prongs of wall plate, then secure into position by tightening setscrew at bottom of flange. For partitions with particle -board or other solid core, secure with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide through - bolts, nuts, and washers. For hollow -core metal partitions, provide solid backing into which the furnished sheet -metal screws can be secured. For masonry wall, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with sheet -metal screws furnished, or provide 1/8" (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with sheet -metal screws furnished. SPECIFICATION: Surface - mounted robe hook shall be type -304 stainless steel with (insert one: bright polished, bright polished brass, or satin) finish. Flange shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket that is secured to concealed, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew. Cap shall be 10 gauge (3.6mm), welded to support arm. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner /manager upon request. Surface Mounted Robe Hook shall be Model 7 (insert model number) of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment limited, United Kingdom. i ne niustreuons and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 6/06 R/A S/C Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right lo, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. BOBRICK Technical Data UTILITY SHELF WITH MOP /BROOM HOLDERS AND RAG HOOKS STANDARD STOCK SIZES B -239 MATERIALS: Mounting Base and Shelf —18-8 S, type-304,18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin finish. All- welded construction. Shelf is 811 (205mm) deep with 3/411 (19mm) return edge on all three sides. Front edge is hemmed for safety. Shelf Support Brackets —18-8 S, type -304, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Welded to mounting base and shelf. Mop /Broom Holders — Spring- loaded rubber cams with anti -slip coating. Plated steel retainers. Hooks —18-8 S, type -304, 12 -gauge (2.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Each hook attached to mounting strip with two rivets. OPERATION: Utility shelf with holders is designed to keep mops and brooms away from wall. Spring - loaded rubber cam holders accommodate handles from 7/811 to 1 -1/411 (22 to 30mm) diameter. Utility shelf above handle area provides clear access to stored materials. INSTALLATION: Secure unit to wall with Phillips -head screws, furnished by manufacturer, at points indicated by an S. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with screws furnished. For other wall surfaces, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with screws furnished, or provide 1/811 (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. SPECIFICATION: Utility shelf with mop /broom holders and rag hooks shall be type -304 stainless steel with all- welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Shelf shall be 18 gauge (1.2mm), 811 (205mm) deep with 3/411 (19mm) return edges, and shall have front edge hemmed for safety. Utility Shelf With Mop /Broom Holders And Rag Hooks shall be Model 239 x. 34 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment Limited, United Kingdom. i ne niustratlons ano oescnptions nerein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 11/09 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements In designs and dimensions. 0 2009 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Length Finish Face of Wall 1' i —Y-- -- Typ, yp. S S Shelf I 2osmm Shelf - - -- S� Bracket 145mm 13° 330mm S T Hook e° somm + + S—L 7- 1BBmm 255mm L Mop Holder Typ. STANDARD STOCK SIZES B -239 MATERIALS: Mounting Base and Shelf —18-8 S, type-304,18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin finish. All- welded construction. Shelf is 811 (205mm) deep with 3/411 (19mm) return edge on all three sides. Front edge is hemmed for safety. Shelf Support Brackets —18-8 S, type -304, 16 -gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Welded to mounting base and shelf. Mop /Broom Holders — Spring- loaded rubber cams with anti -slip coating. Plated steel retainers. Hooks —18-8 S, type -304, 12 -gauge (2.8mm) stainless steel with satin finish. Each hook attached to mounting strip with two rivets. OPERATION: Utility shelf with holders is designed to keep mops and brooms away from wall. Spring - loaded rubber cam holders accommodate handles from 7/811 to 1 -1/411 (22 to 30mm) diameter. Utility shelf above handle area provides clear access to stored materials. INSTALLATION: Secure unit to wall with Phillips -head screws, furnished by manufacturer, at points indicated by an S. For plaster or dry wall construction, provide concealed backing to comply with local building codes, then secure unit with screws furnished. For other wall surfaces, provide fiber plugs or expansion shields for use with screws furnished, or provide 1/811 (3mm) toggle bolts or expansion bolts. SPECIFICATION: Utility shelf with mop /broom holders and rag hooks shall be type -304 stainless steel with all- welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Shelf shall be 18 gauge (1.2mm), 811 (205mm) deep with 3/411 (19mm) return edges, and shall have front edge hemmed for safety. Utility Shelf With Mop /Broom Holders And Rag Hooks shall be Model 239 x. 34 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment Limited, United Kingdom. i ne niustratlons ano oescnptions nerein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 11/09 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements In designs and dimensions. 0 2009 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. MATERIALS: 2„ 5.3/8" somm 135mm 8 F-J — 2 - 6-1/2" 50mm 165mm Maximum Mounting Thickness 13.5/8" 345mm 1 o5ljmm 1n 25.4mm Hole 40mm 0 BDOml Lotion Soap Refill 3.1/4" —► (included in B- 828.18 only) BOmm Dla. a rnm 5.5/8" 140mm 1 Battery Pack (4 Alkaline D Cell Batteries included in B- 826.18 only) Spout Cover Assembly — Bright Polished chrome plated plastic with LED light indicators. Red blinking LED indicates soap level is low, Yellow blinking LED indicates battery life is low. Equipped with integral plastic shank. Motor Assembly — Water resistant, plastic construction, fits onto bottom of shank and top of soap refill. Battery Pack — Water resistant, plastic material, holds 4 Alkaline "D" Cell Batteries. Batteries are included in Model B- 826.18 Starter Kit only. Average battery life is 100 soap refills or 2 years. Soap Refill — OneShot@ Soap Refill. Translucent, shatter - resistant polyethylene bottle. Includes new supply tube and pump mechanism in each refill. Soap refill available in 2741 oz (800m1) and 54-11 oz (1600") capacities. One 27 -11 oz (800") bottle of Lotion Hand Soap with Moisturizers is included in Model B- 826.18 only. OneShoO is a registered trademark of Technical Concepts, LLC. Optional Spacer — Plastic spacer is included for mounting dispenser when sink rim is 3 /a" (19mm) high or greater OPERATION: Place hand under soap spout for approximately 2 seconds. Spout will dispense controlled amount (0.8ml) of Lotion Hand Soap with Moisturizers, Antibacterial Hand Soap or Lotion Hand Soap. 2741 oz (800ml) soap refill provides 1000 hand washes, the 54 fl oz (1600ml) soap refill provides 2000 hand washes. Motor assembly is preset for 2741 oz (800ml) soap refill (if 54-fl oz (1600m1) is used, a switch under the rubber plug next to red reset button must be moved to 2K�. Once a new soap refill is connected, pressing the red reset button automatically resets the low soap indicator LED and primes the new soap refill. continued ... - • ° °• ° °-••- �•� r "�•" o,o a a uyyewuo w yiuuuuoun a5 uk me uake or mis ieennlcal uata Sheet. Revised 5/06 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. INSTALLATION: Unit is designed for installation in 1" (25mm) diameter hole in porcelain - enameled steel, cast iron or vitreous -china lavatories, as well as in countertops adjacent to lavatories. Unit may be mounted in unused faucet hole or through special hole requisitioned when lavatory is ordered from manufacturer (specify punching location). Shank accomodates maximum 2" (50mm) mounting thickness. Clearance required for soap refill bottle and motor housing is 5" (125mm) for the 2741 oz (800ml) soap refill and 5-I/2" (140mm) diameter for 5441 oz (1600ml) soap refill and 11 -5/8" (295mm) minimum depth for height of 27 fl- oz. of soap refill bottle and motor housing and 13 -5/8" (345mm) minimum depth for height of 541 oz. (1600ml) soap refill bottle and motor housing. Place 4 "D" Cell Batteries (included in Model B- 826.18 only) into battery pack. An optional single 6V AC adapter to replace the battery pack is available, order Part No. 826 -20. SPECIFICATION: Automatic Lavatory- Mounted Soap Dispenser shall dispense controlled amount (0.8ml) of Lotion Hand Soap with Moisturizers, Antibacterial Hand Soap or Lotion Hand Soap. Spout cover assembly to be Bright Polished chrome plated plastic. Meets Barrier -Free accessibility standards. Unit shall have blinking LED indicators to show low soap level and low battery life. Shank shall accommodate mounting thicknesses up to 2" (50mm). Translucent, shatter - resistant polyethylene soap refill (800ml soap refill included in model B- 826.18 only) shall have capacities of 27 -fl oz (800ml) or 54-fl oz (1600ml). Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner /manager upon request. Automatic Lavatory- Mounted Soap Dispenser shall be Model B -826 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment Limited, United Itingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 5/06 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and Improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 27-fi oz. 800ml 54 -f1 oz. 1600ml Diameter of Bottle 5" 5 -1/2" and Motor 125mm 140mm Clearance Below 11 -5/8" 13 -5/8" Counter 295mm 345mm SPECIFICATION: Automatic Lavatory- Mounted Soap Dispenser shall dispense controlled amount (0.8ml) of Lotion Hand Soap with Moisturizers, Antibacterial Hand Soap or Lotion Hand Soap. Spout cover assembly to be Bright Polished chrome plated plastic. Meets Barrier -Free accessibility standards. Unit shall have blinking LED indicators to show low soap level and low battery life. Shank shall accommodate mounting thicknesses up to 2" (50mm). Translucent, shatter - resistant polyethylene soap refill (800ml soap refill included in model B- 826.18 only) shall have capacities of 27 -fl oz (800ml) or 54-fl oz (1600ml). Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner /manager upon request. Automatic Lavatory- Mounted Soap Dispenser shall be Model B -826 of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park, New York; Jackson, Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, Scarborough, Ontario; Bobrick Washroom Equipment Pty. Ltd., Australia; and Bobrick Washroom Equipment Limited, United Itingdom. The illustrations and descriptions herein are applicable to production as of the date of this Technical Data Sheet. Revised 5/06 Printed in U.S.A. The manufacturer reserves the right to, and does from time to time, make changes and Improvements in designs and dimensions. 0 2006 by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Non -rated cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI /NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. ANSI /UL 92 - Fire Extinguisher and Booster Hose. C. ANSI /UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers. D. UL 8 - Foam Fire Extinguishers. E. UL 154 - Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers. F. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. G. UL 626 - 2 1/2 Gallon Stored Pressure, Water Type Fire Extinguishers. H. UL 1093 - Halogenated Agent Fire Extinguishers. I. UBC Standard 43 -6 (ASTM E -814) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough -in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, location. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 017000 - Contract Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re- certification requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide units conforming with ANSI /UL 711 ANSI /UL 92. B. Maintain one copy copies of each document on site. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code ANSI /NFPA 10 for requirements for extinguishers. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. Fire Protection Specialties 104400 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. POTTER - ROEMER B. J.L. Industries C. Larson's D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000 — Product Requirements. 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical Type Tank: UL 299 Cast steel tank with pressure gage Fire Class: Class A, B, & C UL listed rating: 2A -10B:C Capacity: 5 lbs. PR Model: #3005 (Potter Roemer) 2.3 CABINETS — Semi - recessed for non - fire -rated applications A. Metal: Heavy gauge cold - rolled steel, primed; 18 gage thick base metal. B. Configuration: Semi - recessed type, sized to accommodate accessories, exterior nominal dimensions of 11 -3/4 inch wide x 20 -3/4 inch high x 5 inch deep. C. Trim Type: Rolled radius frames, returned to wall surface; clear polyester- coated aluminum, satin finish. D. Door: Duo vertical panel with cylinder lock. E. Glazing: 1/8" clear acrylic F. Hardware: Cabinet extinguisher mounting hardware appropriate to cabinet. G. Style: Alta Series H. Model No: 7078- DVL -6 -RR 2.4 FABRICATION D. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. E. Pre -drill for anchors. C. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. D. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing. 2.5 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Steel, enamel to red color. B. Cabinet Exterior Trim: Satin finish, clear, polyester coated. Verify with Architect. C. Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings under provisions of Section 013000 — Administrative Requirements. Fire Protection Specialties 104400 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. C. Verify installation of gypsum wallboard in rough openings at locations of fire -rated walls and cabinets. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 42 inches from finished floor to center line of cabinet lock /lever. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets and on wall brackets. END OF SECTION Fire Protection Specialties 104400 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 10 56 13 METAL SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities Construction, and Division 1. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal shelving, free standing. 1.03 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. Shelving: Heavy duty, metal framed units, with adjustable shelves. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit data on framing, shelves, capacity (weight). C. Manufacturer's Assembly Instructions: Submit installation template and attachment devices. Date Submitted Date Approved Subcontractor /Supplier 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. U -Line B. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01610 - Product Options and Substitutions, and Substitution Request Form. 2.02 SHELVING UNITS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, commercial quality B. Features 1. Style: Open 2. Height: 72" 3. Depth: 18" 4. No. of Shelves: 5 (adjustable) Metal Shelving 105613 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 5. Shelf Capacity: 1000 Ibs /shelf C. Edges finished smooth without burrs. D. Shelves: MDF, thickness appropriate to span, and supported on all edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify correct position and configuration with room dimensions.. 3.02 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION A. Assemble according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify shelving spacing with Owner. 3.03 CLEANING & ADJUSTING A. Section 017000 — Execution and Closeout B. Clean all surfaces. END OF SECTION Metal Shelving 105613 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 1140 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Conform to the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and Division 1. B. Section includes residential -type appliances; and connections to utilities. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 9000 - Joint Protection. 2. Section 06 4100 — Architectural Wood Casework and Countertops 3. Plumbing Fixtures. 4. Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. D. Allowances: Include under provisions of Section 0120 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Allowances. Allowance includes purchase and delivery of kitchen equipment. Installation is included in this section and is part of Contract Sum /Price. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 06 4100 — Architectural Wood Casework and Countertops. C. Product Data: Submit data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, locations, and utility connections and locations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed UL ratings, and are Energy Star compliant. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating data for specified equipment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work as follows: 1. Electrical Wiring and Components: Conform to UL standards. Foodservice Equipment 114000-1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Store products clear of floor in manner to prevent damage. C. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of utilities with requirements of food service equipment. C. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish standard manufacturer's warranties for kitchen appliances. C. Provide Owner with information on service and maintenance contracts available from the manufacturer or distributor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: 1. Whirlpool 2. KitchenAid 3. General Electric 4. Frigidaire 5. Electrolux 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Equipment Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location. C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. Foodservice Equipment 114000-2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 B. Sequence installation and erection to accommodate required utility connections. C. Cut, fit, and patch items of this section required for installation or services for equipment. D. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings. E. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. F. Install sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting components. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions. C. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. C. Wash and clean equipment. D. Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Test equipment prior to demonstration. Demonstrate operation of components scheduled. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work. B. Remove protective coverings from prefinished work. 3.7 SCHEDULE Refer to Drawings for locations and related work. The scheduled items shall be included in the allowance, and shall include the following features: A. Dishwasher: 1. Energy Star Qualified 2. Quiet package 3. NSF Certified sanitary rinse 4. Delay wash 5. Price toward total Allowance: $ B. Cooktop: 1. Two - burners: One 8 -inch and one 6 -inch 2. Electric coil element type 3. Price toward total Allowance: $ C. Microwave Oven /Combination Range Hood 1. Built -in to upper cabinet 2. Exhaust Fan & Light 3. 2.0 cu.ft capacity 4. 1100 watts minimum 5. Price toward total Allowance: $ Foodservice Equipment 114000-3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Refrigerator /Freezer Combination 1. Energy Star rated 2. Automatic Ice maker 3. 21.5 cu ft minimum capacity 4. Price toward total Allowance: $ Installation and final connection: Include in Contract price. Lamps for fixtures in appliances: Include in Contract price. END OF SECTION Foodservice Equipment 114000 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 SECTION 12 2400 WINDOW SHADES 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrically operated sunscreen roller shades. B. Local group and master control system for shade operation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. B. Section 09 2600 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. C. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 701 -99 - Fire Tests for Flame- Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 013300. A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable. B. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. C. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. F. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Window Shades 122400 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 -99 small and large -scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. E. Anti - Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. F. Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified below. Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification, below will be rejected. Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected. G. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes. H. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose. ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Include a mock -up if the project size and /or quality warrant. The following is one example of how a mock -up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of the mock -up, consider all the major different types of work on the project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory - labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire - test - response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. Window Shades 12 24 00 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth (except EcoVeilTM): Manufacturer's standard non - depreciating twenty -five year limited warranty. B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non - depreciating five -year warranty. C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; 42 -03 35th Street, Long Island City, NY 11101. ASD. Tel: (718) 729 -2020. Fax: (718) 729 -2941. Email: info@ mechoshade.com, www.mechoshade.com. B. Substitutions: As approved by Architect and Owner, and in accordance with provisions of Section 016000. 2.2 APPLICATIONS /SCOPE A. Roller Shade Schedule: 1. Shade Type 1: Motorized interior solar roller shades in all exterior windows of rooms and spaces shown on Drawings, and related motor control systems. Operation of shades shall be in groups of three (3) as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 SHADE CLOTH A. Visually Transparent Single- Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil group, single thickness non - raveling 0.030 -inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018 -inch (0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 1. Dense Basket Weave: "1300 series ", 5 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket -weave pattern. 2. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.4 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem - pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF- welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size Window Shades 12 24 00 -3 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. C. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap -on" snap -off' spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and /or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and /or rivets are not acceptable. 2.5 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb -to -jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat - sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width -to- height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll- formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi -width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi -width shadebands. E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width -to- height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands. 2.6 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: Window Shades 12 24 00 -4 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re- mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8 -inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount). Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8 -45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4- 22.5 degrees) on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi- banded shade, subject to manufacturer's design criteria). C. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 2.7 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM A. Shade Motors: 1. Tubular, asynchronous (non- synchronous) motors, with built -in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. 2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly. 2.8 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on the IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor logic control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. 1. Motor Control System: Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers (IQ/MLC). Window Shades 12 24 00 -5 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 b. Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) over - current protection ( +/- 10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and tested as an integrated system. C. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "sub- group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a master 3 button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch combinations from two or more local switches. d. Multiple "sub- groups" from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either the master port or in series from a local switch port. e. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local switches and one master switch. f. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to three user - defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down, regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at these non - defined positions). g. Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window's opening height and uniform mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block. i. Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar items; via a dry contact terminal block. j. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC). Wall Switches: Confirm with Owner and Architect. a. Three - button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no exposed fasteners. b. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 4- conductor modular cable equipped with RJ -11 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. C. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6- conductor modular cable equipped with RJ -12 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16 - Electrical. Window Shades 12 24 00 -6 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. 6. Color as selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. B. Turn -Key Single- Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer /dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer /dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer /dealer: 1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings. 2. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer /dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed. Window Shades 12 24 00 -7 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 20123 -133 3. Roller shade installer /dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer. 4. Roller shade installer /dealer shall provide and run all line voltage (from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above - ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum- rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction. 5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule. C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Window Shades 12 24 00 -8 MechoSystems - Shadecloth ThermoVeile Dense Basket Weave 1300 Series (5% open) This series is composed of a technically advanced material woven in a 2 x 2 basket -weave pattern. Its weave provides a uniform scrim effect at the window wall with an appropriate density for sun control. The 1300 Series' colors match those of the 1500 Series (3% open) and 2100 Series (10% open). Content: 75% PVC (coating), 25% polyester (yarn) Openness factor: approx. 5% Stocked: 63 in. (160cm), 96 in. (244cm), and 126 in. (320cm) wide NFPA 701 -2004: pass Solar optical properties 1300 series Ts Rs As Tv Tu 1301 white 0.15 0.69 0.16 0.11 0.06 1302 beige 0.10 0.48 0.42 0.09 0.06 1304 black/brown 0.06 0.04 0.90 0.07 0.06 1313 grey 0.06 0.28 0.66 0.07 0.06 1316 eggshell 0.12 0.58 0.30 0.10 0.07 1317 straw 0.14 0.49 0.37 0.10 0.07 1319 silver birch 0.11 0.49 0.40 0.10 0.06 1320 shadow grey 0.06 0.09 0.85 0.07 0.05 .4010, SWOWkie FR To request a sample, send an e-mail to samples(o)mechoshade.com • quarter -memo samples, 4 1/4 x 5 1/2 in. (11 x 14cm) • memo samples, 8 1/2 x 11 in. (22 x 28cm) • large samples, 24 x 24 in. (61 x 61 cm) Pagel of 2 http:// www. mechoshade .com/shadecloth/thermoveil.cfin 6/23/2014 MechoSystems - Shadecloth I I Y I I I I I I 1 1 F Cl 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 F I I I I I I..l 1 1 1! 1 I 1 1 1 L 1 Y 1 1 1! 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 L 1 l/ 1_1 l./ 1! 1 i 1 1 i M 1 l 1 1 i 1 1 1.1 1 J l 1 Y I 1 1/ 1 1 1 Y I 1.6 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1.1 1.1 1 1 1.1 1 1 1 1 1 E L l 1 1.1 l.J I I I Y Y 1 1 1 1 1/ I I/ I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1.1 4 1 1 I I I I I I I I J I I I I I L I I I l I i 1 1.1 t 1 Y i i 1 1 i 1 1 1 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/ 1 1 1 I 1 1 4 I I I I I F I! 1 1 / 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 l l 1 1/ F I I I I I t 1 1 1 l I 1 I 1 1 1 1_J 1 1 1 1 I I 1 4 1 1 1 11.1 L I I I I I I I 1 1! 1 1 1 1 1 I/ I I l L 1 I I I I I 1 1 1 I 1 1/ 1 1 1 I 1 J I I I J 1.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1.1 i L I 1 L 1 1 1 l 1 i I 1 1 1 I I J 4 1 1.1 L I I I I 1 1 0! 4 F 1 1 6 1 1 / 1 1 1 6 1 1 1.1 L_/ 1_1 I.I l 1 1.F I l l i i e i 1 1 1 4/ 4.1 L 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 L.1 I i 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 I I Page 2 of 2 http:// www. mechoshade .com /shadecloth/thermoveil.cftn 6/23/2014 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes carpet mat and metal frame. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Sections 018113 — Sustainable Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and relation to direction of travel. D. Product Data: Submit data indicating mat characteristics, component dimensions, recessed frame and details. Include instructions for care and maintenance. E. Samples: Submit two mat samples, minimum 6x6 inch in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, and edging. F. Certification of Recycled Content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flammability: NFPA 101, Class 1. B. Slip Resistance: Coefficient of friction 0.60 or greater, in accordance with ASTM D2047 tested in wet conditions. C. Rolling Load: No deformation with 1000 lb/wheel and minimum of 2500 passes. D. Single Source: Obtain entrance matting and frames from a single source to ensure dimensional compatibility. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR MATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pawling Corporation, Wassaic, NY. 2. Product data included at end of this Section. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 0133 00 — Submittals: Substitutions. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Entrance Mat: Pawling model EM -650 BF "Rol -Dek" bristle filament carpet tread insert and aluminum rail /aluminum hinge, with roll -back capability. B. Tread Inserts: Rigid -Back Nylon "SNC" Carpet: Solution -dyed, 100% nylon, 33.8 oz /sq.yd., carpet fibers fusion bonded to continuous two -ply rigid backing. Carpet fibers incorporate anti - stain, anti - static, and anti - microbial additives. C. Color: As selected by Architect from standard colors. Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 124813 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 D. Framing: manufactured and furnished by entrance grating manufacturer to suit conditions. Installer to use self - leveling screed to ensure smooth, flat recess. Anodized finish as selected by Architect. E. Nosing: Beveled for surface application. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Construct recessed mat frames square, tight joints at corners, rigid. Coat surfaces with protective coating where in contact with cementitious materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify floor substrate and area where mats are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install mat frames to achieve flush plane with adjacent finished floor surfaces. C. Install mats in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finish flooring. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Gap Formed at Recessed Frame from Mat Size: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust floor mats and frames to prevent tripping hazard. 3.5 SCHEDULES Refer to the Finish Floor Plan for locations and dimensions of mats at exterior locations of all entrances. END OF SECTION Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 124813 -2 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 SECTION 32 19 13 SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The scope of the work includes labor, materials, equipment, and performance of all work required for installation of bicycle racks, as suggested by manufacturer's drawings and installation procedures. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Bid Documents of the Contract. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with ADA requirements. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide and install specialty boulders, tree grates, trash receptacles, and bicycle racks as specified and shown on the drawings. B. All work shall conform to recommendations and guidelines of applicable manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Sections 018113 — LEED Project Requirements and LEED Submittal Forms. C. Submit catalog cut sheets for all specified items, including manufacturer's recommended installation details, and detailed shop drawings for all items requiring fabrication. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site furnishings through one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Bicycle Rack: (refer to attached project data sheet at the end of this Section) Palmer Group, Model (Quality Standard): Welle Series, Single Bend, quantity and location as shown on the Drawings; galvanized finish; Palmer Group, San Francisco, CA Website: bikeparking.com Phone: 415 - 333 -6428 B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 0160 00 — Product Requirements: Substitutions 2.02 MATERIALS A. All site furniture shall be fabricated by the manufacturers in accordance with the specifications described for the individual model types or series. B. Steel: Free from surface blemishes and complying with the following: 1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, or electric- resistance - welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135. Site Furnishings 321913 -1 NEW YELM BRANCH OLYMPIA FEDERAL SAVINGS MSGS Project No. 2013 -133 C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion - resistant - coated or non - corrodible materials; commercial quality; concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged. Provide as required for site furnishings' assembly, mounting, and secure attachment. D. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating applied to components after fabrication: 1. Zinc - Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz. /sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent, not less than 0.3 -mil- thick, zinc pigmented coating. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Steel and Iron Components: Zinc - coated. Bare metal steel components are not permitted. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field. C. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; smooth all surfaces, free from burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped. D. After fabrication, all steel shall be cleaned and treated with a five stage iron phosphate process prior to the coating application. 2.04 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install Bicycle Rack per manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Site Furnishings 321913 -2 MAD "' GRADE 1 a ' - A ❑ IN GROUND MOUNT (IG) 318 ANCHOR ROD THRU HOLE (INCLUDED BY MADRAX) SOIL MADRAX DIVISION TRILARY, INC. 1080 UNIEK DRIVE WAUNAKEE, WI 53597 P(800) 448 -7931, P(608) 849 -1080, F(W8) 849 -1081 WWW.MADRAX.COM, E -MAIL: SALES @MADRAX.COM AT BAR 40 PIPE VINYL COATED COILED UPCHARGE CHECK DESIRED MOUNT ❑ 2 EA. 9116" OHOLE TYP, 6 -� LCONCRETE LAG BOLT ❑ SURFACE FLANGE MOUNT (SF) 4 2 EA, 9116" 0 HOLE TYP. 12112" LAG BOLT CONCRETE ❑ SURFACE GUSSET MOUNT (SG) PRODUCT: UX238- LB(C)- IG(SF,SG) SECTION VIEWS UPCHARGE DESCRIPTION: "U" BIKE RACK, 30" LONG WITH LEAN BAR, 2 EA, COILED SECURITY CABLE (UPCHARGE) 2 BIKE, SURFACE OR IN GROUND MOUNT DATE: 8 -5 -02 ENG: TLG NOTES: CONFIDENTIAL DRAWING AND INFORMATION IS NOT TO BE COPIED 1, INSTALL BIKE RACKS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS WITHOUTTHE CONSENT OF TRILARY, INC. 2. CONSULTANT TO SELECT COLOR SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. (FINISH), SEE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 3. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OR CONSULT OWNER. 02007 TRILARY, INC. ALL PROPRIETARY RIGHTS RESERVED. did 3% dT rq JIM& 0 * I- LL 0